Icontrol DC B8

MOTION CONTROL
ENGINEERING
User Guide
iControl with DC Drive
Motion Control Engineering
11380 White Rock Road
Rancho Cordova, CA 95742
voice 916 463 9200

fax 916 463 9201
www.mceinc.com
User Guide,
iControl with DC Drive, Release 3 & 4
ATTENTION!

Manual # 42-02-7223, Rev B8, June 2020

Copyright
Copyright 2020, Motion Control Engineering. All Rights Reserved.
This document may not be reproduced, electronically or mechanically, in whole or in part, without
written permission from Motion Control Engineering.
Trademarks
All trademarks or registered product names appearing in this document are the exclusive property
of the respective owners.
Warning and Disclaimer

Although every effort has been made to make this document as complete and accurate as possible,
Motion Control Engineering and the document authors, publishers, distributors, and
representatives have neither liability nor responsibility for any loss or damage arising from
information contained in this document or from informational errors or omissions. Information
contained in this document shall not be deemed to constitute a commitment to provide service,
equipment, or software by Motion Control Engineering or the document authors, publishers,
distributors, or representatives.
Limited Warranty
Motion Control Engineering (manufacturer) warrants its products for a period of 15 months from
the date of shipment from its factory to be free from defects in workmanship and materials. Any
defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be
deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear. Manufacturer, however, assumes no risk or liability for
results of the use of the products purchased from it, including, but without limiting the generality
of the forgoing: (1) The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits,
systems, assemblies or any other material or equipment (2) Unsuitability of this product for use in
any circuit, assembly or environment. Purchasers’ rights under this warranty shall consist solely of
requiring the manufacturer to repair, or in manufacturer's sole discretion, replace free of charge,
F.O.B. factory, any defective items received at said factory within the said 15 months and
determined by manufacturer to be defective. The giving of or failure to give any advice or
recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon
the manufacturer. This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and
the exclusive liability of the manufacturer, AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS, FOR PURPOSE SOLD,
DESCRIPTION, QUALITY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER. In no event will the
manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in performance of this
warranty.
Products that are not manufactured by MCE (such as drives, CRT's, modems, printers, etc.) are not
covered under the above warranty terms. MCE, however, extends the same warranty terms that
the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product (refer to the warranty
terms for such products in their respective manual).
42-02-7223 B8
End User License Agreement
This End User License Agreement (“Agreement”) grants you the right to use the software contained
in this product (the “Software”) subject to the following restrictions: You may not: (i) copy the
Software, except for archive purposes consistent with your standard archive procedures; (ii) trans-
fer the Software to a third party apart from the entire product; (iii) modify, decompile, disassem-
ble, reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software; (iv) export
the Software or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S. and foreign
export laws and regulations; and (v) use the Software other than in connection with operation of
the product.
“LICENSOR'S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY,
ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH
SUPPLIERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.”
42-02-7223 B8
Important Precautions and Useful Information
This preface contains information that will help you understand and safely maintain MCE
equipment. We strongly recommend you review this preface and read this manual before
installing, adjusting, or maintaining Motion Control Engineering equipment. This preface dis-
cusses:
• Safety and Other Symbol Meanings
• Safety Precautions
• Environmental Considerations
Safety and Other Symbol Meanings
Danger
This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures, instructions, or situations which, if
not done properly, might result in personal injury or substantial equipment damage.
Caution
This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures, instructions, or situations which, if
not done properly, might result in equipment damage.
Note
This manual symbol is used to alert you to instructions or other immediately helpful informa-
tion.
Safety Precautions
Danger
This equipment is designed to comply with ASME A17.1, National Electrical Code, CE, and
CAN/CSA-B44.1/ASME-A17.5 and must be installed by a qualified contractor. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with all
local codes and is installed in a safe manner.
This equipment is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000
rms symmetrical amperes, 600 volts maximum. The three-phase AC power supply to the
Drive Isolation Transformer used with this equipment must originate from a fused discon-
nect switch or circuit breaker sized in conformance to all applicable national, state, and local
electrical codes in order to provide the necessary motor branch circuit protection for the
Drive Unit and motor. Incorrect motor branch circuit protection will void the warranty and
may create a hazardous condition.
Proper grounding is vitally important to safe and successful operation. Bring your ground
wire to the system subplate. You must choose the proper conductor size and minimize the
42-02-7223 B8
resistance to ground by using the shortest possible routing. See National Electrical Code
Article 250 or the applicable local electrical code.
Before applying power to the controller, physically check all the power resistors and other
components located in the resistor cabinet and inside the controller. Components loosened
during shipment may cause damage.
For proper operation of the Drive Unit in your controller, you must make sure that: 1) A
direct solid ground is provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and
motor. Indirect grounds such as the building structure or a water pipe may not provide
proper grounding and could act as an antenna to radiate RFI noise, thus disturbing sensi-
tive equipment in the building. Improper grounding may also render any RFI filter ineffec-
tive. 2) The incoming power to the controller and the outgoing power wires to the motor are
in their respective, separate, grounded conduits.
This equipment may contain voltages as high as 1000 volts. Use extreme caution. Do not
touch any components, resistors, circuit boards, power devices, or electrical connections
without ensuring that high voltage is not present.
Environmental Considerations
• Keep the machine room clean.
• Controllers are generally in NEMA 1 enclosures.
• Do not install the controller in a dusty area.
• Do not install the controller in a carpeted area.
• Keep room temperature between 32 and 104 degrees F (0 to 40 degrees C).
• Prevent condensation on the equipment.
• Do not install the controller in a hazardous location or where excessive amounts of
vapors or chemical fumes may be present.
• Make certain that power line fluctuations are within plus or minus 5% of proper value.
Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinets

If your control or group enclosure is equipped with an air conditioning unit, it is very important
to observe the following precautions. (Failure to do so can result in moisture damage to electri-
cal components.)
• Maintain the integrity of the cabinet by using sealed knockouts and sealing any holes
made during installation.
• Do not run the air conditioning while the cabinet doors are open.
• If you turn the air conditioner off while it is running, wait at least five minutes before
restarting it. Otherwise, the compressor may be damaged.
• Observe the recommended thermostat setting (75 degrees) and follow recommended
maintenance schedules.
• Make certain that the air conditioning drain tube remains clear to avoid water accumula-
tion in the unit.
42-02-7223 B8
42-02-7223 B8
Contents
Section 1. Motion Control Engineering
11380 White Rock Road
Rancho Cordova, CA 95742
voice 916 463 9200

fax 916 463 9201
www.mceinc.com
Section 1. User Guide,

iControl with DC Drive, Release 3 & 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-i
Section 1. Important Precautions and Useful Information

Safety and Other Symbol Meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-iv
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-iv
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-v
Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-v
Section 1. iControl Description

iControl Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Component Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Group Dispatching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
System Interconnect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Section 2. Construction Mode

In This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of Construction Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Machine Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Ethernet and Internet Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Controller Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
42-02-7223 B8 i
Check for Shorts to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Initial Controller Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
DC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Encoder/Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Checking the Hoist Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Wiring the Hoist Motor to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Wiring the iField Motor Field Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Verifying Brake Current Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Wiring the Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Tachometer or Encoder Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Basic Safety String and Associated Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Cartop Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Hoistway Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Temporary CTS Relay Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Access Locks and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Rope Gripper Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Temporary Rope Gripper Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Temporary Cartop Inspection Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Setting Initial Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Connecting the iView PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
iView Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Verifying Initial Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Learning the Safety Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Drive Startup (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Check SCR Drive Voltage and Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
If DRIVE READY Did Not Light: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Drive Offsets Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Automated Drive Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Manual Drive Setup Procedure (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Motor Field Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Check Default Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Motor Field Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Check Calibration Settings (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Manually Adjusting Motor Field Gains — Closed Loop (SCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Brake Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Rollback Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Verify Brake Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Running on Machine Room Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Verifying Car Movement (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
If the Car “Runs Away” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
If the Current Limit LED Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Analog Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
(Digital) Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
ii Manual # 42-02-7223 B8
Current Limit Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Armature Voltage Limit (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Armature Current Limit (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Car Response and Speed Loop Gain (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Speed Loop Gains (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Following Error Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Set the Following Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Tach Failure Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Additional Adjustments and Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Drive Startup (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Drive Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Initial Drive Settings (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
iControl Parameter Settings (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Automated Drive Setup (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Manual Drive Setup Procedure (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Auto Tune Procedure (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Drive Response Adjustments (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Brake Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Rollback Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Verify Brake Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Running on Machine Room Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Verifying Motor Rotation and Control (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Verifying Pattern Command and Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Calibrating Actual Car Speed (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Following Error Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Set the Following Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Additional Adjustments and Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Section 3. Inspection Mode

In This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Landing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Setting the Position Encoder Resolution parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Calibrating the Floor Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Installing iLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
iLink Enclosure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Installing the Hoistway Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Installing the Load Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Installing Brake Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Installing the Earthquake Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Temporary Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Earthquake Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Installing the Serial Hall Call System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
42-02-7223 B8 iii
Installing the Serial COP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Position Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Verifying Cartop Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Verifying Door Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Verifying Safety Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Exit Construction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Running on Machine Room Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Verifying Quadrature Pulse Sequence and Encoder Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Position Encoder Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Quadrature Pulse Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Prepare for Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Counterweight Learn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Counterweight Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Run Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Empty Car Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Section 4. Final Adjustment

In This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Learning the Floor Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Floor Height Learn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Verifying One Floor Run Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Verifying Correction, Run, and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
If the Car Does Not Stop and Correct Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Initiating a One Floor Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If Initiation is not Successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Verifying a One Floor Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Verify Releveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Reaching Contract Speed (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Final Adjustment Before Running at Contract Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Determine the Armature Voltage Limit (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Determine the Armature Current Limit (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Determine Motor Field Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Speed Pick Delay (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Pattern Scaling (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Armature Voltage (System 12 SCR Drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Learning Terminal Slowdown Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Reaching Contract Speed (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Final Adjustment Before Running at Contract Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Speed Pick Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Pattern Scaling (Quattro DC Drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Learning Terminal Slowdown Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Synthetic Speed Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Feed Forward Gain Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
iv Manual # 42-02-7223 B8
Fine Tuning the Speed Regulator (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Shaping the Speed Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Profile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Setting Pattern Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Controlling Initial Start of Car Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Pre-torque Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Balanced Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Empty/Full Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Load Weigher Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Pretorque Adjustments - Balanced Mode Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Pre-torque Adjustments - Empty/Full Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Motor Control Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Oscillation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Drive Control Adjustments (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Brake Parameter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Calibrating the Floor Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Floor offset calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Final Approach and Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Final Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Releveling Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Ride Quality (System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Ride Quality (Quattro DC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Load Weigher Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Load Weigher Selection and Threshold Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Learning Load Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Load Weigher Learn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Pre-Start Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Allow machine to be energized: After doors are locked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Allow machine to be energized: When door position monitor is activated. . . . . . . . . 4-45
Allow machine to be energized: While doors are closing with motor only . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Allow machine to be energized: While doors are closing with motor &
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . partially picked brake 4-47
fully picked brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Verify Tach Error Does Not Trip on Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Armature Overcurrent Overload Protection Adjustment
(System 12 SCR Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Running a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Car/Counterweight Safety Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Electrical Governor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Car/Counterweight Buffer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
42-02-7223 B8 v
Inspection Overspeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Contract Overspeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Leveling Overspeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Ascending Car Overspeed Test - Rope Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
ETSL for Reduced Stroke Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Before Release to Passenger Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Section 5. System Options

About System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
iCentral - Central Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Initial Power Up and Bus Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
iControl Ethernet Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Setting iCentral PC LAN NIC (iView) IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Setting iCentral PC System NIC IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Pinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
iCue User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Write Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
iCue Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Comm-connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Serial Hall Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Hall Call Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Pulling Serial Bus Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Setting Node Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Checking Serial to IP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Serial/Ethernet Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
SC-HCE Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Trouble Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Hall Call Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Flexible I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
SC-ION Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Serial COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Serial COP Board Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Serial COP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Load Weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Weigher Calibration with iControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Section 6. Troubleshooting
About Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
vi Manual # 42-02-7223 B8
Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Safety String Bypass Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
iControl Messages List - Numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
iControl Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
iBox Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
iBox boot-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Updating iBox Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
iBox Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
iBox Configuration > Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
iBox Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
iBox Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
iBox Configuration > Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Replacing Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-78
Circuit Board Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
iControl Circuit Board Quick References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-79
ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Board Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Software Version Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
ICE-CTP-2 Cartop Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
ICE-FM Field Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
ICE-IRB-2 Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Checking TM Triac on ICE-IRB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
ICE-LCB Low Current Brake Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
ICE-MIAC (-24V) Multiple Input Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Output Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
ICE-RG-2 Rope Gripper Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
ICE-SAF Safety Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
ICE-SF-x Serial Fixtures Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
SC-ION: Serial Control I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
System 12 SCR Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
SCR-LGA - SCR Drive Logic Board Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Replacing Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
Replacing SCRs and Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Replacing PC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
42-02-7223 B8 vii
Section 7. iBox Front Panel Controls
About the iBox Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
LCD Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Keypad Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Parameter Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Editing a Controller Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Setting iBox Ethernet Port Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
IP Address Verification/Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
System Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
LED Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
LCD Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
System Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Safety Bypass Jumper and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Section 8. Using iView

About iView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
How iView Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Setting Up an iView PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Installing iView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Setting the iView PC’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
LAN Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Creating a New LAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Connecting to the iBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Editing an Existing LAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Working Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
iView Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
iView Button Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
iView Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Viewing and Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Sending Adjustments to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Saving Default Parameters to a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Save to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Loading Parameters from a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Working Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Accessing Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
iView Windows and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Configuration Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Diagnostic Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Setup Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Additional Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
System View Windows and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
System - Configuration Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
System - Diagnostic Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
viii Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Additional Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Pinning and Unpinning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Resizing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Docking and Undocking Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Printing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Setting System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Editing Dynamic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Updating Controller Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
FTP File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Using the FTP File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Boot parameter recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Bootrom Recovery via OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Section 9. Reference
About this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
iControl DC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Software Testpoint Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
iBox Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
System and LAN Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
MCE Direct-Connect Port (Links one iBox to one Laptop with iView) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Elevator LAN Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Summary by Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
42-02-7223 B8 ix
x Manual # 42-02-7223 B8
iControl Description
iControl Overview
This section provides:
• A general description of the iControl system, page 1-2
• System interconnect diagrams, page 1-4
• Installation Specifications, page 1-7
42-02-7223 B8 1-1
General Description
Figure 1.1 Cabinet Layout (typical)
Resistor cabinet
iBox
System 12 SCR drive

(Note: Quattro DC Drive is
supplied in a separate cabinet)
iPower box
Standard cabinet dimensions:

Height = 62 inches (157.5 cm)
Width = 42 inches (107 cm)
Depth = 16 inches (41 cm)
Measurements are approximate
Component Assemblies
• iControl enclosure containing iBox elevator control, AC or DC drive, and expansion circuit
boards as required for the specific job
• Landing system, per job requirements
• iLand: Rail face encoder wheel, rail mounted floor magnets, roller guided sensors
• iLand slide guide: As above but with slide sensor guides instead of rollers
• iLand NEMA: Vane and sensor system, ambient temperature to 125 degrees F, fully
sealed against dirt and moisture
• LS-EDGE: Perforated steel tape, door zone and terminal magnets
• Cartop-mounted interconnect box
• iControl specific traveler and hoistway cable assemblies, optional
1-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC General Description
• Load weighers (optional)

• Rope Tension (LW-EMCO)
• Isolated Platform (LW-MCEIP)
• Cross Head Deflection (K-Tech International)
Figure 1.2 Single Car Component Assembly Illustrations 1
iDC Controller
iLink cartop box
iLand Compact landing system
Group Dispatching
For multiple car installations requiring centralized dispatching and parking control:
• iCentral: Separate enclosure for complex dispatching requirements, destination based dis-
patching, security system interaction, groups to 15 cars (maximum 8 cars with destination
dispatching)
• Local: Groups to 6 cars with one car providing dispatching for the others. A central inter-
connect box is used for hall call risers and inter-car communications.
• iCentral backup: A second iCentral unit may be used or dispatching may be assumed by
one of the cars in the elevator group.
• Local backup: Dispatching assumed by a different car in the elevator group.
42-02-7223 B8 1-3
System Interconnect Diagrams

It can be helpful to have a general understanding of the way the entire iControl system is inter-
connected.
• System Interconnection: Basic car control and dispatcher interconnections.
• iControl Interconnection: More detail for car controller interconnections.
• Cartop Interconnection: More detail for cartop interconnections.
• Dispatcher Interconnection: More detail for dispatcher interconnections.
Figure 1.3 iControl System Interconnection
DISPATCHER
SYSTEM: Hall calls, Parking, Special operating modes

Hall Calls
LAN: iView,
iMonitor,
iReport CAR CONTROL CAR CONTROL CAR CONTROL
iView
Car Car Car
Calls Calls Calls
Cartop Cartop Cartop
Ethernet
LAN: iView, iMonitor, iReport Connectivity
Other
1-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC System Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 1.4 Car Control Interconnection

iCONTROL
Field Outputs Outputs

Discrete Hall Calls
(if not Serial Hall Call)
Field Inputs Inputs
Fixture Data Serial Fixtures

1
Drive
EQ String Earthquake
Safeties iBox
Limits OBD
Cartop
Motor
Module
Emergency Brake Rope Gripper

Brake
Rear Door Rear Door Module
Serial Hall Calls

Serial
Driver
Serial Bus
Ethernet
LAN Direct Connect (iView)
Other
SYSTEM
Figure 1.5 Cartop Interconnection
iLAND LANDING SYSTEM
iLINK CARTOP BOX Position Encoder
Field Outputs Outputs Sensor Board Landing Zone

Discrete Car Calls Rear (option) magnet
(if not Serial Car Call) Field Inputs Inputs
Sensor Board Landing Zone
Serial links to iControl Front magnet
Cartop Board
Load Weigher (ICE-CTP)
Signal Board
(LS-IPH)
Serial Car Call Serial Link
42-02-7223 B8 1-5
Figure 1.6 Central Dispatcher (iCentral) Interconnection
iMonitor or iReport
DISPATCHER
Monitor
iView
LAN
Switch
Keyboard To Cars
LAN: iView, iMonitor, iReport
SC- iCue connectivity.
General Field Inputs
to Dispatcher ION
SYSTEM
Hall Calls To Cars

SYSTEM: Hall calls, Parking,
Serial
Driver Special operating modes
Serial to
Ethernet
Serial Bus
Ethernet
Other
Figure 1.7 Local/Dispatcher (Comm-connect) Interconnections
iView iMonitor or iReport

Comm-connect Cabinet
LAN
To Cars
SC- (4 connections per car max.).
to Dispatcher ION
SYSTEM
Hall Calls To Cars

Serial
Serial to
Ethernet
Serial Bus
Ethernet
Other
1-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Installation Specifications
Installation Specifications
This section contains specifications pertinent to installing the controller.
Table 1.1
Topic Description 1
Controller dimensions NEMA 1:
(floor mount) Height = 62 inches (157.5 cm)
Width = 42 inches (107 cm)
iCentral cabinet Height = 72 inches (183 cm)
(floor mount) Width = 28 inches (71 cm)
iComm-Connect cabinet Height = 26 inches (66 cm)
(wall mount) Width = 16 inches (41 cm)
Depth = 10.25 inches (26 cm)
Machine room conditions 32 to 104 degrees F (0 to 40 degrees C), non-condensing. No installation on
carpet. No excessive vapors or dust.
Input power +/- 10% of job specification
Ground Direct, solid ground per NEC 250
Mounting Standard controller and iCentral cabinets mount to machine room floor
according to controlling local and national codes. Local dispatching cabinet,
iComm-Connect is wall mounted.
Conduit All connections to/from the controller must be in conduit per controlling local
and national codes. Control/low voltage wiring must be routed in separate
conduit from high voltage wiring. 1.5-inch diameter conduit is recommended
for the encoder cable so that the non-removable end connectors will fit
through.
42-02-7223 B8 1-7
1-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Construction Mode
In This Section
This section provides the information you need to install iControl and get the elevator running
in Construction Mode:
• Machine Room Preparation (see page 2-4).
• Controller Cabinet Installation (see page 2-6).
• Equipment Grounding (see page 2-6).
• Check for Shorts to Ground (see page 2-7).
• AC Voltage Verification and Wiring (see page 2-8).
• Motor and Brake Wiring (see page 2-10).
• Tachometer or Encoder Installation (see page 2-11 or page 2-13)
• Safety String Wiring (see page 2-15).
• Applying Power (see page 2-16).
• LAN Connections (see page 2-17).
• Initial Parameter Settings (see page 2-17).
• Drive Startup (System 12 SCR Drive) (see page 2-23).
• Motor Field Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) (see page 2-29).
• Running on Machine Room Inspection (System 12 SCR Drive) (see page 2-38).
• Drive Startup (Quattro DC Drive) (see page 2-47).
• Running on Machine Room Inspection (Quattro DC Drive) (see page 2-57).
42-02-7223 B8 2-1
Construction Mode
Before You Begin

Review the warnings and information in this section.
Danger
This equipment contains voltages up to 1000V, rotating motor parts, and driven machinery that can
cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel who are familiar with this manual and driven
machinery should attempt to start up or troubleshoot this equipment.
• USE EXTREME CAUTION — Do not touch circuit boards, resistors, or motor electri-
cal connections without ensuring that the unit is properly grounded and no high volt-
age is present. Do not apply AC power before grounding the equipment in accordance
with applicable local codes, the job prints, and instructions contained in this manual.
• BE CERTAIN — that any possible violent motion of the motor shaft and driven
machinery will not cause personal injury or damage. Peak torques of up to ten times
rated motor torque can occur during a control failure.
• HIGH VOLTAGE — may be present on the motor and drive whether or not AC power is
applied, even if the motor is not rotating.
• BEFORE BEGINNING WORK — read these instructions. Become familiar with proce-
dures. Proceed cautiously. These instructions assume adequate electrical trouble-
shooting experience. Follow procedures carefully and, if the elevator does not respond
correctly, obtain necessary assistance.
Overview of Construction Mode

Construction mode operation allows the car to be run on Machine Room Inspection and Cartop
Inspection with a bare minimum of field wiring. For Construction Mode operation, only the fol-
lowing are needed to run the car:
• Motor, brake, and drive
• Velocity encoder/tachometer
• Safety String
• Normal limit switches
• Door locks and door position monitor (if used)
• The Construction Mode option (iView > View > Setup> Safety > Configuration tab) must
be enabled to run the controller in Construction mode.
The cartop wiring interconnect box (iLink) is not required for Construction mode operation.
Instead, temporary wiring may be used to “bypass” the cartop safety string.
2-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC In This Section
Required Connections The following connections are necessary to run the car on Con-
struction Mode:
• Motor, Brake, and Drive
• Velocity Encoder or Tachometer
• SAFH, GOV, ESC, Rope Gripper (if enabled) 2
• SAFC (provide temporary Emergency stop switch between SAFH and SAFC if iLink is not
yet installed)
• UNTD and DNTD (Up and Down Normal Limit Switches)
• GS, DLMS, DLAT, DLAB, DPM (Verify the iView/Safety Configuration screen settings for
these options)
• INCT, ICTU, and ICTD
• Emergency Power Input
Connections not required for Construction Mode operation include:

• Cartop Communication (TX, RX)
• Quadrature signal (DP1, DP2)
• EQ signal
• Terminal Switches (U/DNTx and U/DETS)
• Fire Sensor
• DZ, ULM, DLM
Please refer to “iBox Field Connections” on page 9-7 for definitions of iBox inputs and outputs.
Faults While operating in Construction Mode, faults may be generated due to incomplete
installation. These may be disregarded in this phase and include:
• Invalid Front and/or Rear Doors
• Terminal Sync
• System Sync
• Floor Sync
42-02-7223 B8 2-3
Construction Mode
Machine Room Preparation

When preparing the machine room for elevator controller installation, consider:
• Machine room environment
• Ethernet and internet access
Environmental Considerations
• Ambient temperature should remain within 32° to 104° Fahrenheit (0° to 40° Celsius).
Temperatures outside these guidelines may be tolerated, but will shorten equipment life.
Adequate ventilation is required. Air conditioning may be necessary.
• The air in the machine room should be free of excessive dust, corrosive elements, and
excessive moisture. A NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure can help meet these requirements if
machine room conditions are inadequate.
• Very high levels of radio frequency (RF) radiation from nearby sources should be avoided.
RFI may interfere with controller components, degrading elevator performance. Using
hand-held communication devices close to the controller may also cause interference.
Interference from permanently installed radio transmitting antennas is not common.
• Power line voltage fluctuation should not be greater than ±10%.
• If any areas in the machine room are subject to vibration, they should be avoided or rein-
forced to prevent equipment from being adversely affected.
2-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Machine Room Preparation
Ethernet and Internet Considerations

The iBox supports three Ethernet connections:
• The #3 port is for direct local connection of a laptop or desktop PC for elevator configura-
tion, program uploading, system diagnosis, or parameter adjustment using MCE iView
software. Fixed IP address: 192.168.193.001 2
• For multi-car, centrally dispatched installations, the #2 port provides connection between
iBoxes. The required Ethernet hub is provided by MCE and mounted in the iCentral cabi-
net. See the table below for the factory default.
• The #1 port allows the elevator controller to be connected to Local Area Network. This
allows a PC to be used to administer and monitor multiple elevator controllers using iView
software. See the table below for the factory default address for this port.
Through a net modem, ISDN, DSL or other internet access, this port may provide remote
access to the controller. Elevator parameters are protected from meddling or accidental
change because in order to write data to a controller, permission must be granted in the
machine room. If you are working from the single iView/iCue PC in the iCentral cabinet,
permission is granted automatically.
Table 2.1 System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses
Group IP, Primary System/Serial

Hub Group Car ID Car IP iView PC
& Backup Hall Call Bus 1 - 4
System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

LAN A 192.168.191.201-202 1-20 192.168.191.001-020 192.168.192.101-200*
LAN B 192.168.191.203-204 1-20 192.168.191.021-040
LAN C 192.168.191.205-206 1-20 192.168.191.041-060
LAN D 192.168.191.207-208 1-20 192.168.191.061-080
LAN E 192.168.191.209-210 1-20 192.168.191.081-100
Port #3 = PC (iBox ONLY), NO HUB 192.168.193.001
*192.168.191.101 is typically used for the iView PC.
42-02-7223 B8 2-5
Construction Mode
Controller Cabinet Installation
Note
Review the wiring guidelines in this section before bringing wires into the controller.
Caution
When drilling or cutting access holes or during other machining, do not allow any metal
chips to fall into the electronics. Keep drive or other covers in place while wiring to prevent
damage to components.
1. Mount cabinets securely to the machine room floor.

2. Cut holes to permit bringing wires in as shown in the following illustration.
MCE applies labels inside the cabinet to identify suggested wiring hole locations. The MCE con-
troller cabinet does not require rear access.
• Field wiring should enter the cabinet from the side at the lower left corner or from the bot-
tom directly under the wiring trough. The wires must be routed through the wiring
trough on the left side of the controller cabinet in a way that allows the power
box door to open fully.
• All conductors entering or leaving the controller cabinet must be through conduit. High
voltage, high current conductors, such as power conductors from the fused disconnect or
isolation transformer, must be separated from control wires. It is essential that Tachome-
ter/Velocity Encoder control wires be routed through a separate conduit away from high
current conductors.
• The traveling cable must have at least four twisted shielded pairs to be used for the posi-
tion pulser quadrature signal and the iLink Communication link from the Car Top Proces-
sor board (ICE-CTP) to the iBox Safety Processor board (ICE-SAF). The shielded cable
should be used all the way to the controller. If there are more shielded pairs still available,
route the ULM, DLM and DZ signals from the iLink Car Top Processor board through a
shielded pair (especially if the building has more than eight floors). The shields must be
grounded at both ends by connecting them to a “SHLD” terminal.
Grounding
Grounding must conform to all applicable codes. Proper grounding is essential for system safety
and to reduce noise-induced problems.
• Ground equipment in accordance with NEC Article 250 and/or the local electrical code.
2-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Check for Shorts to Ground
Check for Shorts to Ground

Check for shorts to ground before powering up the system. Power must be OFF at the main
disconnect. If any shorts to ground are discovered, they must be corrected before proceeding.
A short to ground is defined as having a resistance of less than 20 ohms between the 1 bus
(Common) and the terminal being tested.
2
Danger
Be certain that power is OFF at the main disconnect before proceeding.
Caution
Typically, the iLink cartop box has not been installed at this point. If the cartop box has been
installed and connected, it MUST be disconnected before checking for shorts in the controller cab-
inet. This is easily done by simply unplugging all field-wired connectors in the cartop box before
checking for shorts to ground.
1. Using a standard screwdriver, temporarily disengage all fuses at the top of the iPower
box by turning them counterclockwise until they pop up. Don’t place a cap on a fuse
holder without a fuse in it. The cap can get stuck and be hard to remove.
2. Disengage all fuses at the bottom of the iBox (just below the logo).
3. Release the screws that hold the iPower box
closed and open the enclosure. Disengage all
the fuses from the fuse block inside (towards
the top of) the iPower box by lifting them clear
of their sockets at one end.
4. Measure the resistance between the iBox #1
(Common) bus and terminals that have a field
connection (DZ down to SP4 on the left side of
the iBox).
5. Measure the resistance between the #2
(120VAC) bus terminals and the #1 bus.
6. Measure the resistance between the #3 (110VDC) bus terminals and the #1 bus.
7. Check for shorts to ground on motor power terminals L1, L2, and L3.
8. Check for shorts to ground on brake terminals B1 and B2.
9. If no shorts to ground are discovered, re-engage the fuses. Refer to the job prints for fuse
location if necessary.
42-02-7223 B8 2-7
Construction Mode
Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller

1. Consult the job prints. Verify that AC supply is as specified.
Note
Proper motor branch circuit protection in the form of a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker must
be provided for each elevator according to applicable electrical code. Each disconnect or breaker must be
clearly labeled with the elevator number. The electrical contractor must determine the wire size for the
main AC power supply and for the wiring from the disconnect or breaker to the drive isolation trans-
former.
2. If the car is part of a group, the cars in the group must also be wired to provide power to
the group cabinet. If this is the case, refer to the Group Supervisor Field Wiring Print in
the job prints. Group power is provided by the car controllers as shown in drawing -2.
The main AC power supply wiring size must be determined by the electrical contractor.
2a. Check the phase-offset of the individual car ST2-bus lines before connecting them
to the Group cabinet. Use a voltmeter set to AC volts to measure between adjacent
car ST2-bus terminals in the Group cabinet. The meter must read less than
10VAC. If the reading is higher, reverse the power leads going to the car T1 trans-
former at L1 and L2 and measure again.
Caution
All 2 bus power from car to Group cabinets must be in phase. Connecting out-of-phase power
WILL cause damage.
2b. A separate conduit or wiring trough must be provided for the System (car-to-car)
Ethernet network. Wiring is fully detailed in the job prints. These details must be
followed exactly.
2c. If applicable, also wire according to the Group Interconnects to Individual Car
Cabinets print. Be sure to ground all cabinets according to instructions.
2d. Refer to the iCentral (Group Supervisor) Field Wiring Print for Group Controller
field wiring instructions.
3. If an isolation transformer is used, connect AC supply wiring to the transformer, and
transformer outputs to the controller, as shown in the job prints. If required, the prints
will detail auxiliary power connections for the brake iField module.
4. If no isolation transformer is used, connect AC supply wiring to the controller as shown
in the job prints.
2-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller
Initial Controller Power Up

After AC power is connected, temporarily power up the controller and check to see that power
buses inside the controller cabinet are providing proper outputs.
1. On the iBox, verify:
• Inspection switch UP (Inspection mode selected) 2
• Controller Stop Switch DOWN (Stop selected)
• Test switch ON
• All other iBox slide switches DOWN (Off)
These switch settings prevent the elevator from moving when the controller is powered up.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
Note
The controller microprocessor board has battery backup for logic retention. An insulator prevents the
battery from discharging during shipment. Remove the insulator now if has not already been done.
2. Power up the controller. The system will take about 60 seconds to boot.
3. If the controller fails to power up, refer to the job prints and check supply connections
and fuses.
42-02-7223 B8 2-9
Construction Mode
DC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Encoder/Tachometer

This section describes:
• Checking the hoist motor for insulation breakdown or shorts
• Wiring the hoist motor to the controller
• Wiring the iField motor field module
• Verifying brake resistance and wiring the brake
• (Optional) brake pick switch installation and wiring
• Installing the velocity encoder
Checking the Hoist Motor

If this job reuses existing rotating equipment, the equipment must be checked for insulation
breakdown.
1. Disconnect all motor and brake wiring.
2. Perform an insulation test between these wires and the frame of the related equipment
using a Megohm meter to subject the insulation to the same high voltages that would be
present during operation.
3. Minimum insulation resistance of 100k Ohms is required.
4. Correct any insulation problems before proceeding. Insulation problems may indicate a
serious problem in the equipment.
Wiring the Hoist Motor to the Controller

Incoming power to the controller and outgoing power wires to the motor must be in their
respective grounded conduit.
Keep DC motor wires separate from control wires both inside and outside the controller cabi-
net. Encoder or tachometer wiring must use a separate grounded conduit.
1. Refer to job print drawing -D1 for DC drive connections to rotating equipment.
2. Make connections as shown:
• on the System 12 SCR Drive - be certain to follow schematic notes regarding wire size
and specific motor connections.
• on the Quattro DC Drive - follow the instructions in the section titled EMC Compliance
in the appendix of the drive technical manual.
Wiring the iField Motor Field Module

(Quattro DC Drive: Refer to job print drawing -D1 for motor field wiring)
1. Measure the resistance of RM in the iPower box (the enclosure the iBox is mounted to).
Verify that it is set according to the job prints.
2. Connect motor field leads from the motor to MF1 and MF2 terminals below the iBox as
shown in the job prints.
2-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC DC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Encoder/Tachometer
Verifying Brake Current Resistance

High current brake systems use a brake (iField) module.
1. With brake leads disconnected from the controller, measure resistance through the
brake coil.
2. Inside the controller cabinet, locate the screws, one at the top and one at the bottom 2
right corner of the iPower box (the enclosure the iBox is mounted to). Turn the screws
counter-clockwise to their stops and open the enclosure (it is hinged on the left).
3. Refer to job print drawing D2. Toward the right-top of the enclosure, locate the large
ceramic resistor labeled RB.
4. Check the resistance across RB. As an initial working value, RB resistance should be
about three times (3 X) the resistance measured across the brake coil.
Note
During adjustment, the resistance across RB may be further adjusted to achieve smooth brake
setting. Too little resistance causes the brake to remain picked for too long. Refer to your job
prints for instructions.
5. If necessary, adjust RB resistance by loosening and sliding the center-tap up or down.
When the resistance is correct, retighten the center tap.
Wiring the Brake

• Refer to job print drawing D2. Connect brake wires to terminals B1 and B2 located just
below the iPower box.
Brake wires must not be routed in the same conduit with DC motor wires or velocity encoder
wires.
Tachometer or Encoder Installation and Wiring

A tachometer or a velocity encoder may be used.
Table 2.2 Selecting a Tachometer or a Velocity Encoder
Machine Device Shaft Mounting Brake Drum Mounting Sheave Mounting
Geared Tachometer Yes No No
Encoder Yes 1024PPR No No
Gearless Tachometer No Yes Yes
Encoder Yes 12,700PPR Yes 1024PPR Yes 1024PPR
Tachometer
(If you are using a velocity encoder, please see the next topic.) When installing a tachometer, do
not mount it near a magnetic field (for example, the motor field coils). Magnetic fields may
cause the tachometer to report incorrect speeds. Note also that any vibration caused by the
tachometer cannot be corrected inside the drive. The tachometer wheel and the surface on
which it runs must be smooth and the tachometer must be mounted so that it can maintain con-
tact without binding or bouncing.
42-02-7223 B8 2-11
Construction Mode
Alignment of the tachometer coupling is extremely important. Most vibration problems are
caused by the tachometer or the way in which it was mounted. The tachometer mounting must
be rigid and the tachometer wheel must be aligned precisely with the surface it is running on
(i.e., the brake drum or drive sheave).
Caution
In geared applications, do not drive the tachometer from the sheave because gear lash cannot be
compensated by the drive unit.
Tachometer Wiring
Note
The tachometer wiring must use a separate grounded conduit. Inside the controller cabinet, if
control wires must cross power wires, they must cross at right angles to reduce the possibility of
interference.
The cable must be routed into the controller cabinet in a separate conduit. The following illus-
tration shows the wiring at the controller end.
Figure 2.1 Tachometer Wiring
Insulate shield at
tachometer end --
Do not connect the
shield to the tach.
iBox Connection End
1. Connect the cable from the tachometer as shown above.

2. The connection to the controller TS connection must be positive (+) with respect to the
TC connection when the elevator is moving in the up direction.
3. DO NOT connect the cable shield at the tachometer end of the cable. Insulate any part of
the shield exposed at the tachometer end to prevent it from accidentally shorting to
ground. (Connecting the shield at the tachometer end may cause ground loop noise and
affect ride quality.)
2-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC DC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Encoder/Tachometer
Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring

(If you are using a tachometer, please see the preceding topic.) The encoder must be mounted
and wired according to the drawings. When installed, the encoder must be electrically isolated
from the motor or any other ground. (Resistance between the encoder casing and the motor or
other ground should be “infinite.”)
Do not mount the encoder or its wiring close to a magnetic field (the motor or brake coils). Mag-
2
netic fields can induce AC into the encoder signal, producing erratic control at lower speeds.
Note
Encoder wiring must use a separate, grounded conduit. Inside the controller cabinet, if control
wires must cross power wires, they must cross at right angles to reduce the possibility of inter-
ference.
Encoder Isolation The encoder housing must be electrically isolated from the machine
(ground). To check this:
1. Measure the resistance between the encoder case and the frame of the motor. The mea-
sured value must be “infinite” for complete isolation.
Encoder Wiring A shielded cable with an appropriate connector at the encoder end is
provided. The controller end of the cable exposes trimmed and tinned individual conductors.
The encoder cable must be routed into the controller cabinet in a separate conduit. The follow-
ing illustration shows the encoder wiring at the controller end of the cable.
Note
These connections are shown for illustration purposes only. Follow the job print instructions
for your specific encoder connections — they may be different than those shown here. Z+ and Z-
connections are rarely used at the controller-end.
Drain/Shield
Purple
Gray
Green Quadrature
data from
Blue encoder
Black
Power to
White encoder
iBox
42-02-7223 B8 2-13
Construction Mode
1. Connect the cable to the encoder using the cable/connector provided.

2. Route the cable through a separate conduit to the controller cabinet.
3. Connect the controller end of the cable as shown in the job prints.
4. Verify that the encoder shield is soldered to the drain wire (wire without insulation).
Keep the cable shield connection as short as possible — connect it to the nearest shield
terminal.
Caution
The encoder used must be rated up to 15-volts.Do not coil excess Encoder cable near high voltage
components — noise may be induced. If the cable must be shortened, trim it at the controller end. Do
not cut and re-splice in the middle of the cable or shorten at the Encoder end.
2-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Basic Safety String and Associated Wiring
Basic Safety String and Associated Wiring

The elevator must not be run until the safety string is connected. Safety string wiring includes:
• Emergency Stop switch
• Hoistway safety switches
• Cartop safety CTS Relay temporary bypass (for Construction Mode use only)
2
Please refer to “Safety String Bypass Jumper” on page 6-3 for safety bypass related informa-
tion.
Cartop Safety Switches

Depending upon the job, cartop safety switches may include:
• Safety Clamp Switch
• Emergency Exit Contact
• Emergency Stop Switch
• CTS Relay (iLink)
The wiring instructions for these switches are on the job prints.
1. Refer to the job prints.
2. Wire the cartop safety switches as shown.
Note
The Cartop Safety Relay is located in the cartop interconnect box. If the box is not yet installed,
the relay must be temporarily bypassed to get the car operating in construction mode. For now,
using the switches and terminals available to you, wire as much of the string as you are able.
Hoistway Safety Switches

The wiring instructions for these switches are on the job prints.
2. Wire the hoistway safety string switches as shown.
Temporary CTS Relay Bypass

If the iLink cartop interconnect box which contains the Cartop Safety (CTS) Relay is not yet
installed, you must bypass the CTS relay temporarily (for Construction Mode only). (If you are
installing the iLink cartop box now, please refer to the iLink instructions in Section 3.)
2. Connect the safety string in series between the iBox SAFH and SAFC terminals.
3. You must provide an Emergency Stop switch in series between SAFH and SAFC.
Danger
Make sure the Emergency Stop switch is wired in series between SAFH and SAFC to allow emergency
stopping while working on the cartop.
42-02-7223 B8 2-15
Construction Mode
Access Locks and Contacts

2. Connect the switches for front and rear (if present) doors as shown.
Rope Gripper Wiring

An “emergency brake” may be connected between iControl terminals RG1 and RG2 to stop
unexpected car motion. A rope gripper is used to apply braking pressure to the hoist ropes.
After it is triggered, press the iBox Fault Reset button or the Rope Gripper board reset button to
reset the rope gripper.
1. Refer to the job prints (MRW- machine room wiring sheets).
2. Connect the rope gripper to iControl RG1, RG2, RG5, and RG7 terminals as shown.
Temporary Rope Gripper Bypass

If a Rope Gripper will be installed later, you may temporarily bypass the input by installing a
jumper between RG5 and RG7.
Temporary Cartop Inspection Wiring

Four cartop switches control car motion: An DOWN
Inspection Enable switch, a Safe switch, an Up ICTD
switch, and a Down switch.
UP
1. Refer to job print drawing -CW, Cartop ICTU
Inspection Station. INSPECTION
Insp SAFE
2. Connect the (Normally Closed) Cartop
INCT 3 3
Inspection Enable switch between the #3 Norm
bus and the iControl INCT terminal as
shown. (This switch is used to put the car on cartop inspection. INCT is active low.)
3. Connect a Safe push button switch between the #3 bus and the direction push buttons.
4. Connect a Down push button switch between the Safe switch and the iControl ICTD ter-
minal as shown (active high).
5. Connect an Up push button switch between the Safe switch and the iControl ICTU ter-
minal as shown (active high).
Applying Power
1. Set the iBox Inspection switch to the Inspection position.
2. Set the Controller Stop switch to the Stop position.
3. Set the Test switch to On.
4. Turn on power at the main disconnect.
5. Watch the front panel displays of the iBox, the controller will take about 60 seconds to
initialize.
6. Check the iBox Computer, Safety A, and Safety B status LEDs. The LEDs should be
lighted solid green.
2-16 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Setting Initial Operating Parameters
Setting Initial Operating Parameters

Once all Construction mode connections are complete, certain iControl parameters must be set
or verified. These settings must be accomplished using a computer running iView software.
The iBox may be accessed using iView or the iBox keypad. However, both are not allowed to
make changes at the same time. By default, the iBox keypad has control but once an iView user
2
has acquired write privileges (Privilege/Acquire) the keypad is prevented from making changes
until the iView user relinquishes the write privilege.
Connecting the iView PC

If you purchased your iView PC from MCE, iView was installed at the factory. In addition, all of
the network assignments (connections) for your job have been created and stored on the iView
PC. Therefore, once the physical connections (cables) between each iController’s iBox and the
iCentral or Comm-Connect Ethernet Switches have been installed per the job prints, you are set
to go. You can power up the iView PC and launch the iView.NET application.
There are two ways to connect the iBox to a PC:

• Direct Connection: Connect the PC directly to the iBox through the iBox 3=PC port.
• Peripheral LAN Connection: Connect the PC to the LAN hub supporting one or more iBox
controllers (iBox #1 port).
Your job prints provide complete Ethernet instructions for your system.
iView Help
The iView application is documented through on line help. On line help is available from any-
where in the iView application.
42-02-7223 B8 2-17
Construction Mode
Caution
Before connecting the “System” ethernet cable to the iBox:
1. Verify that the Car ID, in the upper right corner of the iBox display, is correct. Press the
iBox “Computer Reset” button and when the display returns, verify that Car ID is still
correct. The Car identifier is set on the iView > Controller > Configuration > General
tab.
2. Verify that no other iBox in this group of controllers has the same Car ID (see Figure
2.10).
3. Check the “Alternate Dispatcher” settings on the iView > System > System Configura-
tion > Building tab. Verify that the “Auto-select Preference Order” settings are identical
on every car in this group of controllers.
Figure 2.2 Check before connecting the “System” ethernet cable to the iBox
Check for correct Car ID. Verify that no two Car IDs in the group are the same.
@003 s 015 FG RO L01 @003 s 015 FG RO L02 @003 s 015 FG RO L03

LOCAL DISPATCHER Passenger Passenger
Ofpm Ofpm Ofpm

2:26:22AM 2:26:22AM 2:26:22AM
10/30/2007 10/30/2007 10/30/2007
Car Mgmt Car Mgmt Car Mgmt
On the iView > System > System Configuration > Building tab, verify that the Alternate
Dispatcher “Auto-select Preference Order” settings are identical for all cars in the group.
Car 01 System Configuration Car 02 System Configuration Car 03 System Configuration
2-18 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Verifying Initial Parameter Settings

Refer to Please refer to “Recommended Starting Parameter Values for Initial Operation” on
page 2-20 for recommended initial settings.
1. Launch iView and connect to the iController.
2. Once connected, select Acquire from the Write privilege menu. This is necessary to 2
allow iView to change parameters on the iController. (Note that, when you initially
request privileges during each connection session, someone in the machine room must
press the “yes” button on the iBox to grant those privileges. This is automatically
granted if the iView is on the same PC in iCentral with the iCue application.)
3. From the View menu, select Layouts and click Configuration.
4. Select the Pattern tab. If the Pattern tab is not displayed, select Pattern from the View >
Configuration menu.
5. On the Pattern > Modes tab, verify the Common, Standard, and Inspection profile set-
tings. Refer to Table 2 - 2.3 on page 2-20. Pattern shape preset can be used to enter pre-
set values for the Standard profile parameters based on the high speed (contract speed)
of the elevator and the selected shape type (Slow, Moderate or Fast). This provides an
excellent starting point.
6. Edit and Send changes to iControl as needed.
7. Select the General tab. If the General tab is not displayed, select General from the View
> Configuration menu.
8. On the General > General tab set the Simplex car selection as appropriate (see Table 2 -
2.3 on page 2-20). DO NOT ENABLE Simplex if the car is part of a group.
10. Select the Drive tab. If the Drive tab is not displayed, select Drive from the View > Con-
figuration menu.
11. On the Drive > General tab, verify the Drive type.
12. On the Drive > Safety tab, verify Following error (default 25%, final adjustment proce-
dure in Section 4 of this guide). Refer to Table 2 - 2.3 on page 2-20 and the iView - Con-
troller View section of this manual (Section 9) for detailed descriptions.
Note
If you change the drive type, you must press Computer Reset on the iBox so that iControl can
“detect” the change on power up.
14. Select the Safety tab. If the Safety tab is not displayed, select Safety from the View >
Configuration menu.
15. On the Safety tab, verify that Construction Mode is checked.
42-02-7223 B8 2-19
Construction Mode
Table 2.3 Recommended Starting Parameter Values for Initial Operation

iView Screen Settings
Pattern > Common tab
Position Encoder 348 if iLand-x-C Compact Landing system. 256 if iLand-x-H or LS-
resolution EDGE. Otherwise, consult manufacturer documentation.
Job Contract Speed 200 fpm 350 fpm 400 fpm 500 fpm 600 + fpm Unit
Pattern scaling 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% %
Door pre-opening dis. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 inches
Leveling speed 005 005 005 005 005 fpm
Releveling speed 008 008 008 008 008 fpm
Leveling distance 1.20 0.72 0.60 0.60 0.60 inches
Releveling distance 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 inches
Dead zone distance 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 inches
Relevel dead zone dis. 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 inches
Pattern > Modes tab — Standard Profile

Initial jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 6.0 ft/s3
Acceleration 2.40 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 ft/s2
High roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
High speed 200 350 400 500 600 ft/min
Low roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
Deceleration 2.20 2.90 3.20 3.30 3.50 ft/s2
Flare jerk 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 ft/s3
Approach deceleration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 ft/s2
Approach jerk 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 ft/s3
Pattern > Modes tab — Inspection Profile

Initial jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 6.0 ft/s3
Acceleration 2.40 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 ft/s2
High roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
High speed 30 30 30 30 30 ft/min
Low roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
Deceleration 2.20 2.90 3.20 3.30 3.50 ft/s2
Flare jerk 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 ft/s3
Approach deceleration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 ft/s2
Approach jerk 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 ft/s3
Low speed 10 10 10 10 10 ft/min
General > General tab
Simplex car Set to Simplex if the car is NOT in a group to enable dispatch and
parking screens (limited group functionality for a single car).
2-20 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 2.3 Recommended Starting Parameter Values for Initial Operation

iView Screen Settings
Drive > General tab
Drive type Factory set. Verify drive type selected is System12 or Quattro.
Speed Reference Tachometer, Encoder, or Internal (per job).
Speed reference scaling 1.000
2
Speed ref resolution Encoder resolution (pulses per revolution) or tachometer voltage
output at 1000 RPM (V/k). Set per job.
Rated motor RPM: Check value is as on motor plate.
Coupling rotational ratio Encoder only. If encoder is motor-shaft mounted, set to 1.0. If
encoder rotates on brake drum or sheave, enter value from compu-
tation: brake drum (or sheave) diameter ÷ encoder wheel diameter
= Coupling rotational ratio.
Rated armature voltage Verify value from motor plate.
Rated armature current Verify value from motor plate.
Electric stop Per job. Default 0.0
Normal rate limited stop Per job. Default 1 ft/s.
Emerg rate limited stop Per job. Default 7 ft/s.
Drive > Safety tab

Following error 25% (factory shipped default)
Drive > Pretorque tab

Pretorque option Per job. On or Off.
Pretorque position comp Per job, if Pretorque Option enabled.
Pretorque gain Per job, if Pretorque Option enabled.
Pretorque balance adj Per job, if Pretorque Option enabled.
Safety > General tab

Pulses Per Foot Display Only
Contract Speed Display Only
Contract Overspeed 107% of Contract Speed
Inspection Overspeed 150 feet per minute
Leveling Overspeed 150 feet per minute
Limit One Margin 8%
Top Access Landing Job specific, check job prints
Top Access Rear Job specific, check job prints
Bottom Access Landing Job specific, check job prints
Bottom Access Rear Job specific, check job prints
No Main String Job specific, check job prints
No Main String Rear Job specific, check job prints
Frnt Door Close Contact Job specific, check job prints
Rear Door Close Cntact Job specific, check job prints
Rear Doors Job specific, check job prints
Freight Door Option 1 Job specific, check job prints
Rope Gripper Check to see if a rope gripper is used
Car Top Exit Check job prints.
Construction Mode Set to ON.
Door Position Monitor Check if used (see job prints)
In Car Panel Inspection Check if used (see job prints)
42-02-7223 B8 2-21
Construction Mode
Learning the Safety Configuration

The controller is set to match the job safety configuration before shipping. By default, Construc-
tion Mode is also enabled before the controller is shipped. You should not have to make
changes to the Safety screen until you exit Construction Mode.
The safety configuration for the job is stored in two locations in iControl (FLASH and EEPROM
on the SAF board). iControl constantly checks current safety information against stored data
and also compares the data in the two stored locations to make certain they continue to match.
If you make a change on the Safety screen, you will need to do a “learn” operation to write the
new data to iControl:
1. From the View menu select Setup and click Safety.
2. On the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab, make necessary changes.
3. Select Acquire from the Write privilege menu (if you have not yet acquired write privi-
leges to the iBox), then click Send to save the changes to iControl.
The controller will generate a safety mismatch fault because the settings you have just sent do
not match its stored information.
4. Verify that the iBox is in Inspection mode (Inspection switch set to INSP). Set the Learn
switch to ON.
5. The Learn section of the Safety > Configuration tab should indicate that the controller
is ready to learn.
6. Click on the Learn button. The controller will take a few seconds to learn the new infor-
mation and will then confirm that the safety configurations again match.
7. Set the iBox Learn switch back to the OFF position.
The message window on the Safety> Configuration tab should report Safety Configura-
tions OK.
While iControl is in Construction Mode, specific safety and operational features are automati-
cally bypassed. These are:
• All cartop signals, including DP1 and DP2 (position encoder pulse streams).
• Normal and Emergency limit switches, NTS and ETS velocity and position logic. Except
Normal Limit Switches DNTD and UNTD.
• Only Machine Room and Cartop Inspection are allowed. Will not allow Hoistway Access or
COP Inspection.
• EQ signals, both seismic and counterweight derailment, are absent.
• Fire sensor signals are absent.
• No cartop comm.
2-22 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Drive Startup (System 12 SCR Drive)
Drive Startup (System 12 SCR Drive)

The following startup instructions pertain to the System 12 SCR Drive. For startup instructions
for the Magnetek Quattro DC drive see “Drive Startup (Quattro DC Drive)” on page 2-47.
Check SCR Drive Voltage and Polarity 2

1. Ensure power is OFF at the main disconnect.
2. Set the iBox Inspection switch to the Inspection position.
3. Set the iBox Controller Stop switch to the Stop position.
4. Set the iBox Test switch to On.
5. Disable the hoist motor by lifting all sets of motor brushes and putting cardboard under
them (or tie them back so that no contact is made).
6. Remove the brake wire from terminal B1 to prevent the brake from picking.
initialize.
9. Check the iBox Computer, Safety A, and Safety B status LEDs. The LEDs should be
10. Check the 3-phase AC voltages at X1, X2, X3, and Y1, Y2, Y3 on the contactors at the bot-
tom of the SCR drive. They should match the voltage for the secondary windings of the
Drive Isolation Transformer as shown on page -D1 of the job prints.
11. Verify that the fan(s) in the resistor cabinet are functional.
12. Look for the Drive Ready indicator on the SCR drive. It should light within 5 seconds
after the iBox initializes. If the DRIVE READY LED did not light, leave the motor dis-
abled and the brake B1 lead disconnected, go to “If DRIVE READY Did Not Light” and
follow the conditional steps below.
13. If the Drive Ready indicator did
light, restore hoist motor brush
contact. Reconnect the brake ter-
UP DIRECTION
minal B1 wire. Please refer to
“Motor Field Calibration (System DOWN DIRECTION
12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-29. DRIVE READY
DRIVE ON
CURRENT LIMIT
If DRIVE READY Did Not Light: LOW LINE - WYE SECONDARY

14. Measure between 1 and 2D on the LOW LINE - DELTA SECONDARY
System 12 drive (should read WYE P.R.
120VAC). DELTA P.R.
15. Check fuse F2D. Replace the fuse 30 P.R.
if necessary. If the Drive Ready CONTACTOR OR HIGH CURRENT FUSE FAILURE
LED does not light, make a note of
any lighted LEDs on the SCR
Drive, and turn power off at the
main disconnect.
42-02-7223 B8 2-23
Construction Mode
16. The controller is fully tested according to the connections shown in the job prints before
being shipped from MCE, however, depending upon lighted LEDs noted in Step 15
above:
• If Delta P.R., Wye P.R., and 300 P.R. were all ON, interchange any two of the three
wires on the primary winding of the Drive Isolation Transformer.
• If Delta P.R. and 300 P.R. were ON, interchange the wires on the SCR Drive between
terminals X1 and X2 or X1 and X3.
• If Wye P.R. and 300 P.R. were ON, interchange the wires on the SCR Drive between
terminals Y1 and Y2 or Y1 and Y3.
• If only the 300 P.R. LED was ON, then move the wires on the SCR Drive from X1 to X2,
X2 to X3, and X3 to X1. It may be necessary to repeat this step if the 300 P.R. LED is
still ON after power up.
17. If the 300 P.R. LED remains on even after the X1, X2, and X3 wires have been moved a
second time, verify Drive Isolation Transformer labeling:
• Interchange any two of the three wires feeding the Drive Isolation Transformer pri-
mary.
• Interchange wires X1 and Y1 on the SCR Drive.
• Power up and check the 300 P.R. LED.
• If the 300 P.R. LED remains ON, power down, then move the wires on the SCR Drive
from X1 to X2, X2 to X3, and X3 to X1. It may be necessary to repeat this step if the 300
P.R. LED is still ON after an additional power up.
• If all P.R. LEDs do not turn OFF at this point, there is a probable defect not related to
transformer hookup.
18. If any of the Low Line red LEDs were on, power down and:
• Remove the SCR Drive cover.
• Check that the 20-pin header (U81) with resistors and jumper plugs is firmly plugged
into the SCR-LGA board (top center) and that the number on the edge of the header
matches the header number on page -SCR of the job prints. Please refer to “Current
Limit Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-39.
19. If, after completing the checks and adjustments listed in Steps 14 through 18, the Drive
Ready LED still does not light, contact MCE Technical Support.
20. If the Drive Ready indicator did light, restore hoist motor brush contact. Reconnect the
brake terminal B1 wire. Please refer to “Motor Field Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)”
on page 2-29.
2-24 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Drive Offsets Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)

The iBox processes drive control voltages digitally. The digital signal is converted to its analog
equivalent for output to the drive (DAC). Analog input control voltages are likewise converted
from analog to digital for use by the iBox (ADC). Both of these conversions should be checked
and any conversion offset corrected using the Output DAC and Input ADC parameters on the
Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab. 2
This section describes both the automated and manual procedures which can be used to cali-
brate the System 12 drive analog circuitry. MCE recommends using the automated procedure
first and then verifying the most critical offsets using the manual procedure.
Automated Drive Setup Procedure

Before adjusting the drive, verify that:
• CONTROLLER STOP switch is in the RUN position
• iBox Safety OK LED is ON
• iBox Door Locked LED is ON
• iBox Fault LED is OFF
1. Display the Drive setup layout (View > Layouts > Drive)
42-02-7223 B8 2-25
Construction Mode
2. Follow the on-screen instructions, “To perform the drive offsets calibration, ...” (cali-
brates Input ADC, Output DAC, Current Sensor, and Current Loop Integral Offset).
3. Once the calibration is Done, the offset values shown on the Setup > Drive tab should
match those shown on the Drive Configuration tab (Configuration > Drive > Calibration
tab).
Manual Drive Setup Procedure (System 12 SCR Drive)

MCE recommends first performing the Automated Drive Setup Procedure previously described
and then verifying the most critical offsets (Output DAC, Current loop integral, Current
sensor and Input ADC - Tachometer) using the manual procedure. However, if the auto-
mated procedure is unsuccessful, the manual procedure must be used. Before adjusting the
drive, verify:
• CONTROLLER STOP switch is in the RUN position
• iBox Safety OK LED is ON
• iBox Door Locked LED is ON
• iBox Fault LED is OFF
• Motor Field has been calibrated (see “Motor Field Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)”
on page 2-29.)
• iView is connected, write privilege has been obtained (Write Privilege > Acquire
selected and “Yes” softkey on iBox pressed in response).
1. Display the Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab.
2-26 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

2. Loosen the four captive screws securing the cover on the System 12 drive. Set the cover
aside.
The SCR-LGA board is visible at the top left of the drive enclosure. (The LEDs visible through
the drive cover are mounted on a small PC board which is, in turn, mounted on the SCR-LGA
board.) Refer to the following illustration for the location of test points referenced in this proce-
dure. 2
Figure 2.3 System 12 Drive SCR-LGA Board Test Points
3. Output DAC: With the multimeter, measure between jumper JP3 and ground. If nec-
essary, adjust Output DAC on the iView screen until you measure as close to 0.0 volts as
possible (less than 1mV). (Remember to increment or decrement the iView setting, then
Send the value so the adjustment will take effect.)
4. Current loop integral: Use a multimeter to measure between jumper JP7 (‘A’ posi-
tion on jumper) and ground. If necessary, adjust Current loop integral on the Drive >
Calibration tab until you measure as close to 0.0 volts as possible (less than 1mV). (You
will need to increment or decrement the iView setting, then Send the value before the
adjustment will take effect.)
5. Current sensor: With the multimeter, measure between test point TP3F and ground.
If necessary, adjust Current sensor on the iView screen until you measure as close to 0.0
volts as possible (less than 1mV). (Remember to increment or decrement the iView set-
ting, then Send the value so the adjustment will take effect.)
6. Zero crossing: Note that the Zero crossing parameter is set to 0.0. This adjustment is
used only if zero crossing must be adjusted for ride quality reasons and the zero crossing
trim pot (R388 on the SCR-LGA board) does not allow sufficient adjustment. See the
following Note.
42-02-7223 B8 2-27
Construction Mode
Note
Note trim pot R376 and test point IZO (near jumper JP2). These components are used to set the
“zero crossing” point if necessary. Trim pot R376 is set and locked at the factory and should not
require adjustment. If, when adjusting the ride quality of the car in later steps, you notice a
sharp bump when transitioning from acceleration to steady speed or from steady speed to
deceleration, you may need to adjust zero crossing.
7. Display the iView Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope) and
obtain Write Privilege.
8. On the Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 = Tachometer Signal.
9. Input ADC - Tachometer: Adjust the Input ADC - Tachometer parameter by enter-
ing and sending small negative or positive values until the Test point 1 value is as close
to 0.0 as possible. The ADC adjustment range is from —0.5 to +0.5.
10. Input ADC - Brake current: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Brake Current
Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Brake current parameter by entering and
sending small negative or positive values until the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as
possible.
11. Input ADC - Brake voltage: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Brake Voltage
Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Brake voltage parameter by entering and
sending small negative or positive values until the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as
possible.
12. Input ADC - Armature current: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Armature
Current Dampened Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Armature current
parameter by entering and sending small negative or positive values until the Test point
1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
13. Input ADC - Armature voltage: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Armature
Voltage Dampened Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Armature voltage
parameter by entering and sending small negative or positive values until the Test point
1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
14. Input ADC - Absolute armature current: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 =
Armature Current Dampened Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Absolute
armature current parameter by entering and sending small negative or positive values
until the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
15. For the next two adjustments, the Armature Current Test must be enabled in order to
shut off the armature current.
16. Input ADC - Motor field current: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Field Cur-
rent Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Motor field current parameter by enter-
to 0.0 as possible.
17. Input ADC - Motor field voltage: Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Field Volt-
age Feedback and then adjust the Input ADC - Motor field voltage parameter by enter-
to 0.0 as possible.
2-28 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Motor Field Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)

This topic includes:
• Check default values
• Calibrating the motor field
• Check calibration results 2
• (If necessary) Manual motor field gain adjustment — closed loop
Check Default Values

From the View menu select Layouts
and click Motor Field. On the Configu-
ration > Motor Field > Control tab,
check the Voltage settings to verify that
they are close to the field survey infor-
mation for the job. If this information is
not available, check the motor name-
plate for manufacturer data. If no infor-
mation is available, contact MCE or
start out with the default settings shown
here:
Motor Field Calibration Procedure
Danger
Do not attempt to move the car during calibration.
1. Display the Motor Field layout (View > Layouts > Motor Field).
2. On the Configuration > Motor Field > Control tab, set Field Operation to Open Loop.
3. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position. Verify that the iBox displays
Machine room insp.
Note
If the iBox does not indicate that you are in Machine Room Inspection even though the Inspec-
tion switch is in the INSP position, another inspection mode (i.e., cartop inspection) is probably
active. Other inspection modes must be OFF before Machine Room Inspection can be activated.
4. Place the iBox Learn switch in the ON position.

5. On the iView Controller screen, select Acquire from the Write privilege menu.
6. Press the “yes” switch on the iBox to grant the write privilege.
42-02-7223 B8 2-29
Construction Mode
7. On the Setup > Motor Field tab, verify that the Ready indicator is lighted. If it is not, set
the Learn switch to OFF for two seconds, then set it back to ON. (The Learn switch has a
fifteen minute timer. When the timer elapses, software generates a time-out fault, then
ignores the switch setting until it is reset.)
8. Click Calibrate. The indicators show progress through the various phases of motor field
calibration. The message window provides feedback and instructions as required. The
Waiting LED will light while waiting for an instruction to be completed.
9. During calibration, the Calibrating LED will be lighted. When the Done indicator lights,
calibration is complete.
10. Set the Learn switch to the OFF position.
Note
If the system detects a field failure fault, press the Fault Reset button on the iBox after the
motor field is calibrated.
The following messages may be displayed while the Motor Field Calibration procedure is being
performed.
Table 2.4 Motor Field Calibration Procedure Messages
Message/Meaning
The controller is not ready for Motor Field Calibration. Please place the elevator on Machine Room Inspection
and place the LEARN switch in the ON position.
The system is waiting for the CONTINUE button to be pushed.
The system is ready to start the calibration process. Push the START button if you wish to start calibrating
the motor field or push the DEFAULT button if you wish to load the default calibration values.
The controller is done with motor field calibration. Please turn the LEARN switch off.
2-30 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Check Calibration Settings (System 12 SCR Drive)

1. On the Configuration > Motor Field > Control tab, note the Field standing voltage set-
ting.
2. Set Field standing voltage to the same value as Field running voltage.
3. Click Send. Watch the Field voltage indicator on the Operational Status tab. It should
rise to the Field Running Voltage setting.
2
4. Measure the motor field voltage on terminals MF1 and MF2 below the iBox. Verify that
the voltage is close to the value entered for Field standing voltage.
5. Immediately return Field standing voltage to its previous value and click Send. The
Field voltage indicator on the Operational Status tab should fall to the correct standing
voltage.
If there is no motor field output voltage, verify the following:

1. Check the R-C network (RM and CM inside the iPower Box) to make certain that the
connections are tight.
2. Verify that AC voltage between terminals FMX1 and FMX2 on the motor iField module
is close to the specified value on page -D2 of the job prints.
3. Check that the DB-25 connector from the iField module to the iBox is properly seated.
4. Verify terminals 1 and 2 on the iField module measure 120VAC.
5. Check fuses FM1 and FM2 inside the iPower Box.
6. On the Configuration > Motor Field > Control tab, set Field Operation to Closed Loop
and click Send.
Caution
The Motor Field > Configuration tab is populated with values learned during motor field calibration.
These values affect motor operation and should not be changed without consulting MCE Technical
Support.
42-02-7223 B8 2-31
Construction Mode
Manually Adjusting Motor Field Gains — Closed Loop (SCR)
Note
These manual adjustments are almost never necessary. They are useful only in instances of
extremely poor motor field response.
If, after calibration and settings checks are complete, there are still performance issues, e.g. the
drive Current Limit LED lights at the beginning and/or end of runs or you feel spotting (hesita-
tion) coming into a floor, the hoist motor response to control inputs may not be rapid enough.
In these instances you may be able to manually adjust motor field gains to compensate.
1. On the Configuration > Motor Field > Control tab, set PID/Field proportional to 1.0 and
PID Field integral to 3.0.
If satisfactory performance is not achieved with the above settings:
2. Select Virtual Oscilloscope from the View menu.
3. Set Test point 1 to Field Integral Gain.
4. Monitor iBox test point STP 1 with an oscilloscope.
5. Observe response while changing Voltage/Field standing voltage from the standing
voltage value to the forcing voltage value and back again.
If oscillation or overshoot is observed:
6. Decrease PID/Field proportional by 0.2 and repeat step 4.
7. If reducing PID/Field proportional had no effect, reduce PID/Field integral by 0.2 and
repeat step 4. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES should Field proportional or Field inte-
gral be below 0.25.
If no oscillation or overshoot is observed:
8. Increase PID/Field proportional by 0.5 and repeat step 4. If there is still no oscillation
or overshoot, continue increasing Field proportional by 0.5 increments and repeating
step 4 until you see oscillation or overshoot. When you see oscillation or overshoot,
reduce Field proportional to 50% of its value (not below 0.25).
9. Next, increase PID/Field integral in 0.5 increments while repeating step 4 until oscilla-
tion or overshoot is observed. (DO NOT set Field integral above 10.0.) When oscillation
or overshoot is visible, reduce Field integral by 10%.
The preceding two steps are designed to achieve the desired response using the lowest Field
proportional and integral values possible.
2-32 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Brake Calibration
This section describes brake calibration for DC systems using the iField Module advanced brak-
ing system. The iField module electronically controls brake voltage output.
Rollback Compensation
In later adjustments, drive and motor settings will be adjusted to control rollback. Since that 2
has not yet been done, we need to control rollback by adjusting Brake Pick Delay and offsetting
Speed pick delay 1 so that the brake remains set until the motor builds sufficient torque.
1. From the Controller > View menu select Layout and click Brake.
2. On the Brake > Control tab, set Pick delay to 0.000 seconds.
3. Set Speed pick delay 1 to 0.100 seconds.
4. Select Acquire from the Write privilege menu. Then press the “yes” button on the iBox
to grant the privilege.
5. Click Send to send the changed values to the controller.
42-02-7223 B8 2-33
Construction Mode
Calibration Procedure
Calibration allows iControl to learn the characteristics of the machine brake.
1. Verify that the iBox Safety OK LED is solidly on.
2. Set the iBox Learn switch to ON.
Machine Room Insp.
Note
CONTROLLER FAULT/FUNCTION
INSPECTION STOP BYPASS
INSP RUN ON
NORM STOP OFF
UP CAPTURE WRITE ENABLE

ON ON
COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK OFF OFF
SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOOR LOCKED

ENABLE TEST LEARN
SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION ON ON
CARTOP RUN IN GROUP OFF OFF
SYS COMM RELEVEL FAULT CAR DOOR HOISTWAY

DOWN BYPASS DOOR BYPASS
BYPASS BYPASS
OFF OFF
4. Display the Brake > Control tab (Con-

figuration > Brake > Control tab).
5. Set Pick voltage and Hold voltage as
shown on your job prints.
6. For now, set Releveling voltage and
Weakening voltage to the same value
as Pick voltage. (This parameter can be
fine tuned during final adjustment.)
2-34 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

7. On the Setup > Brake tab the Ready indicator should be On. The text box will indicate
any steps that need to be performed.
8. With the Ready indicator lighted, click the Calibrate button. As calibration begins,
watch the display on the tab. The display will report calibration progress and will also
display instructions if you need to complete additional steps along the way. The Waiting
LED will light while waiting for an instruction to be completed. If necessary, click Con- 2
tinue to continue calibration after performing an instruction.
9. When iControl is ready to begin learning, the screen will display “The controller is wait-
ing for a direction command in order to proceed. You may command either the Up or
the Down direction.” When it does, press and hold the iBox Enable and Up (or Down)
buttons. (The car will not be moved during this procedure.)
10. The Calibrating LED will light as calibration begins. Continue to hold the Enable and Up
(or Down) buttons pressed. The progress indicators to the left of the display will keep
you informed as calibration progresses.
11. When the Done indicator lights, release the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons. Calibra-
tion is complete.
12. Set the iBox Learn switch to OFF.
The following messages may be displayed during brake calibration.
Table 2.5 Brake Calibration Status Messages
Message/Meaning
The controller is not ready for Brake Calibration. Please place the elevator on Machine Room Inspection and
place the LEARN switch in the ON position.
The system is ready to start the calibration process. Push the CALIBRATE button if you wish to start calibrat-
ing the brake or push the DEFAULT button if you wish to load the default calibration values.
The controller is waiting for a Direction command in order to proceed. You may command either the UP or
the DOWN direction.
The controller is done with brake calibration. Please drop direction and turn the LEARN switch OFF.
42-02-7223 B8 2-35
Construction Mode
Verify Brake Picking

To verify that the brake is picking properly:
1. Verify that the iBox Safety OK LED is solidly on. Display the Pattern > Common tab
(View > Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
2. Set Pattern Scaling to 0% and click Send to send the changed parameter to iControl.
3. Display the Operational Status tab. Note that Brake voltage is charted in the Machine
section of the Operational Status tab.
4. With a digital volt meter set to DC volts,
measure brake output voltage across termi-
nals B1 and B2 (located just below the iBox
panel). (A typical terminal block is shown to
the right. B1 and B2 will be labeled.)
5. Press the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons
to lift the brake. Verify that the voltages on
the volt meter are the same as the com-
manded voltage (Pick voltage / Hold voltage
parameters on the Brake > Voltages tab) and
Brake voltage on the Operational Status tab.
The brake should lift but the car should not move since
Pattern scaling is set to command zero speed.
6. Change the Pick and Hold voltages to one
half the current value of the Pick voltage parameter and save the new values.
7. Press and hold Enable and Up (or Down) and verify brake voltage again. (The brake will
probably not lift since we are outputting only half the Pick voltage.)
8. Change the Pick and Hold voltages back to their job print settings and save them.
9. Change Pattern scaling (Pattern > Common tab) to 100% and send that value to the con-
troller.
2-36 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Running on Machine Room Inspection

Once you are satisfied that the brake is picking properly, you need to verify proper car move-
ment and motor current, troubleshoot if car movement is not as it should be, and calibrate
speed using a handheld tachometer.
Verifying Car Movement (System 12 SCR Drive) 2

1. On the Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling = 100%.
2. Set the iBox Inspection switch to INSP and run the car using the Enable and Up (or
Down) switches.
If the car runs satisfactorily, but in the opposite direction commanded:
1. Display the Configuration > Drive > General tab and change the Rotational direction
parameter in the Speed Reference section.
2. If you have not yet done so, select Acquire under the Write privilege menu and press the
“Yes” softkey on the iBox to grant yourself write permission. In iView, click the Send
button to send the changed value to iControl.
3. Reverse the motor field wires at MF1 and MF2.
4. Run the car using the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons. Verify that it travels in the
direction commanded.
If the Car “Runs Away”

1. If using an encoder, reverse the Rotational direction as described above.
2. If using a tachometer, swap the TS (+) and TC (-) connections as described above.
Feedback from the encoder or tach controls car speed. If the tach is incorrectly connected or the
encoder speed reference set incorrectly, the car is continuously accelerated rather than con-
trolled.
If the Current Limit LED Lights

If the Current Limit LED on the System 12 SCR Drive turns ON:
1. Increase the value of Armature current limit on the Configuration > Drive > Safety tab
slightly (10% increments) to allow more torque output.
If any of the System 12 SCR Drive protective devices trip, the DRIVE READY light will go OFF.
Push the Fault Reset button on the iBox and the READY light will turn ON again after a few sec-
onds (if there is no fault in the System 12 SCR Drive).
42-02-7223 B8 2-37
Construction Mode
Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12 SCR Drive)

Car speed settings on the Configuration > Drive > General tab may be used to make initial
adjustments to car speed if necessary.
Note
If iLand and iLink are already installed, use the landing system speed (Speed/Actual on the
Operational Status tab) as the speed reference for calibration. If not, use a hand-held tachome-
ter.
1. If you are using a hand-held tachometer, hold it against the hoist or governor rope on
the machine. The car must run at the commanded inspection speed. (iView: Configura-
tion > Pattern > Modes tab/Inspection - High speed). If the measured inspection speed
(actual speed) does not match the commanded value, verify the following:
2. Verify that Pattern scaling is set to 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
Analog Tachometer
1. If the job uses an analog tachome-
ter, set the Scaling parameter (Con-
figuration > Drive > General tab >
Speed Reference section) to an ini-
tial value of 1.000.
2. Display the Virtual Oscilloscope
(View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscil-
loscope).
3. Set Test point 1 = Pattern (Com-
mand) and Test point 2 - Speed
Feedback.
4. Run the car and verify that the Pattern (Command) and Speed
Feedback (Test point 1 and 2 traces) are the same amplitude.
TACH ADJ. trimpot
On the iView oscilloscope (or a DVM connected between STP1
and STP2), compare Pattern Command and Speed Feedback
readouts. They must match within 0.050 VDC while the car is TACH
ADJ.
running at steady state speed. If not, adjust the TACH ADJ
MODEM
trimpot (upper right corner of iBox). The iPower Box door can
be opened slightly to improve access to the TACH ADJ. trim-
pot. Turn the pot slowly. This is a 15 turn trimpot, but the
RS 232
adjustment from maximum to minimum on the virtual oscil-

loscope is less than 1/2 turn.
If the trimpot adjustment is insufficient, adjust the Scaling parameter
(Drive > General tab > Speed Reference section) up or down in 0.1 incre-
ments (remember to Send the value to the controller) and again adjust the
TACH ADJ. trimpot.
(Digital) Encoder
1. Adjust the Rotational coupling ratio (Configuration > Drive > General tab) up or down
in 0.1 increments until the car is running at the correct speed.
2-38 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Current Limit Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)

This section describes making current limit adjustments for the
System 12 drive. Drive voltage and current capabilities are tai-
lored to the needs of the job by placing a specific “header” in
socket U81 on the drive SCR-LGA board. The header is labeled.
For example, “HDR2407” in our example. 2
The first two numbers represent armature voltage; the last two
represent the armature current for which the drive is set. Only
the most significant two digits are used to represent values. For example, 24 and 07, indicate
240V and 75A respectively. Loosen the four captive screws holding the System 12 Drive cover in
place and remove the cover.
The large circuit board at the top of the drive is the SCR-LGA board. The header is approxi-
mately at the top, center of the board.
• Check the header label and verify that it looks correct for the hoist motor being used on
this job. (Motor plate armature voltage and armature current labels approximately
“match” the drive header label.)
The drive header label should also match the armature voltage and current specifications shown
in the prints for the job (see Output Ratings on page -D1).
42-02-7223 B8 2-39
Construction Mode
Armature Voltage Limit (System 12 SCR Drive)

• Calculate and set the Armature voltage limit for the job (Configuration > Drive > Safety
tab) using the formula: (Motor Rated Armature Voltage ÷ Displayed Header Voltage) x
100. Set the Armature voltage limit to the calculated value and Send the setting to iCon-
trol. (Example: (350 ÷ 400) x 100 = 87.5, set Armature voltage limit to 87%.)
Armature Current Limit (System 12 SCR Drive)

1. Verify that the Armature current limit setting is near the default setting of 160%.
2. Run the car and observe the System 12 drive Current Limit LED. If the LED lights,
increase Armature current limit in 5% increments until the LED stays off when the car
is run. (Remember you must Send changes to iControl before they take effect.) You
should not have to go above about 180% if the car is counter-balanced correctly.
2-40 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Car Response and Speed Loop Gain (System 12 SCR Drive)

Only if necessary, car response may be stiffened by increasing PID-Standard Integral error
and/or Proportional error on the Configuration > Drive > Control tab. At this point, it is only
necessary to prevent the car from sagging severely. Do not attempt fine tuning yet.
Increasing Standard Integral or Proportional gain provides stiffer response while decreasing 2
them dampens and loosens response. If too little Integral gain (close to 0) is used, the car will
drift when the brake is lifted and control may be sloppy during all aspects of operation, or
severely affected by varying loads. Too much Integral gain and/or Proportional gain will cause
unstable operation, violent oscillation, or overshoot. If some vibration is encountered through-
out the run, increase Speed Control, Armature voltage/Dampening-speed (Configuration >
Drive > Dampening tab) by 0.01 until the oscillation stops (adding Dampening speed voltage
will add lag to the system). Integral gain must be a value greater than 0.0. Otherwise, there may
be a steady-state speed error.
42-02-7223 B8 2-41
Construction Mode
Speed Loop Gains (System 12 SCR Drive)

If there is oscillation while running:
1. On the Configuration > Drive > Control tab, slowly decrease PID-Standard Proportional
error and Integral error until oscillation stops. Verify the Option-Start gain (normal) is
not checked.
In the following steps, adjust the response of the car to reduce empty car rollback while avoid-
ing the oscillations that can occur if too much feedback is adjusted into the system. For these
adjustments, monitor Tachometer and Raw Pattern on the iView Virtual Oscilloscope.
1. The empty car may drift up due to counterweighting even when an attempt is made to
move it down. Increase PID-Standard Proportional error on the Configuration > Drive >
Control tab slowly while watching for severe overshoot or oscillations, such as rapid jig-
gling or slow bobbing. If jiggling begins, decrease PID-Standard Proportional error.
While decreasing it, note a narrowing of the difference between pattern and tach signals.
2. Next, increase PID-Standard Integral error slowly. Now there will be less rollback at
takeoff and the car will reach the desired speed faster. Too much Integral gain will cause
a speed overshoot or a slower bobbing oscillation.
3. If the car snaps away from the floor, increase Speed pick delay 1 on the Brake > Timers
tab. At this point, a little rollback is not critical as later adjustments will compensate for
it.
4. Monitor the actual car motion by viewing Raw Pattern on the Virtual Oscilloscope. Posi-
tive voltage should indicate the up direction and negative voltage the down direction.
While monitoring, adjust the values of PID-Standard Proportional and Integral gains to
achieve best response. For now, leave PID-Standard Differential Error = 0.00.
Error Compensation If oscillation or rollback is still excessive, try adjusting Error

compensation on the Configuration > Drive > Control tab. The default setting for this parame-
ter is 0.250.
1. Adjust Error compensation upward in 0.250 increments, sending the new value to the
controller and running the car each time to see the effect on oscillation or rollback.
The final Error compensation setting should be below 9.0. The goal here is to obtain acceptable
response during Inspection operation of the elevator. Fine tuning for turnover to normal opera-
tion is accomplished in Section 4 of this guide.
2-42 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Following Error Margin

The Following error is used for fault detection purposes only. The Following error parameter
(Configuration > Drive > Safety tab) sets the allowed margin of deviation from commanded
speed, as a percentage. A Tach Error fault is generated when the difference between intended
pattern speed and speed feedback exceeds the Following error margin. Calibrate speed feedback
to match the intended pattern. 2
1. On the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, verify that Standard Profile/High Speed
and Inspection Profile/High Speed parameters are set correctly for this job.
2. Verify that actual car speed on Inspection is equal to the Inspection High speed setting.
Please refer to “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-38.
Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback
1. From the View > Diagnostics menu, select Virtual Oscilloscope, and set Test point 1 =
Pattern (Command) and Test point 2 = Speed Feedback.
2. Run the car on Inspection and verify that the Speed Feedback trace is following the Pat-
tern (Command) trace. (If Standard Profile/High Speed, Inspection Profile/High Speed,
and actual car speed are correct, this will be the case. If not, verify and correct these set-
tings.)
Set the Following Error

• Set the Following error parameter (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab). It is recom-
mended to perform the Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment procedure at this time.
Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment” on page 2-44.
Default setting
Caution
The default setting for the Following error parameter is 25%. For a car that has been prop-
erly adjusted as described above, after performing the Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment, a
Following Error setting of 10% is fairly typical. You may choose to leave the Following error parame-
ter at the default setting or higher, but keep in mind that Following error is a percentage of speed. On
a 500fpm job a 25% Following Error allows a 125fpm contract speed deviation before a fault is gener-
ated.
42-02-7223 B8 2-43
Construction Mode
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment

1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Speed Feedback and Test point 2 to
Tach Error Upper Limit.
2. On Inspection, run the car several times between floors in both directions. Monitor the
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Tach Error Upper Limit traces track but
remain comfortably separated.
3. Set Test point 2 to Tach Error Lower Limit.
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Tach Error Lower Limit traces track but
5. Estimate the smallest percentage of Following error that would allow the Feedback and
Limit traces to remain separated.
6. Increase the calcu-
lated value by 1/2
and set Following
error to this value.
For example, if the
calculated percent-
age is 6%, add that to
1/2 of 6 (3) and set
Following error to 9%. Remember to send the change to iControl.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 4, verifying that Feedback and Limit traces remain separated. If
they do not, recalculate and reset Following error.
Note
A Following error setting of 10% is fairly typical. Keep in mind that the Following error margin
is a percentage of commanded speed. On a 500fpm job a 10% Following error allows a 50fpm
deviation from contract speed before a fault is generated.
2-44 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Tach Failure Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)

1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set the test points:
• Test point 1 = Synthetic Signal
• Test point 2 = Speed Feedback.
2. On Inspection, run the car several times between floors in both directions. Monitor the 2
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Synthetic Signal traces track.
3. If not, adjust Voltage
safety calibration
(Configuration > Drive
> Safety tab) as little as
possible to get Syn-
thetic Signal to track
Speed Feedback. (If
necessary to match the
signals, adjust Current
safety calibration
(Drive > Safety tab) in
small increments. This
will bring the signals
closer together, reduc-
ing one and increasing
the other but with far
less effect than Voltage safety calibration adjustment.)
4. Estimate the smallest percentage value that would allow the Speed Feedback and Syn-
thetic Signal traces to remain separated.
5. Add 15% to 20% to the calculated value and set the Tach failure parameter to this value.
For example, if the calculated percentage is 15%, add 15% to that and set Tach Failure to
30%. Remember to send the change to iControl.
42-02-7223 B8 2-45
Construction Mode
Additional Adjustments and Checks

1. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling to 100%.
2. On the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, set Inspection/High Speed to the desired
value (maximum Inspection speed is 150 fpm). Set the Inspection/Low Speed to 25 fpm.
Note
If the Terminal Switches (UNT5/DNT5) have been installed, and you wish to use the reduced
inspection speed option, you may enable it by checking Reduced inspection speed on the Con-
figuration > Pattern > Modes tab. If not, you may enable Reduced Inspection speed after the
Terminal Switches are installed. (Enabling it now, without switches, would cause the car to run
at 25 fpm.)
3. Stop the car so that the car top can be accessed from the top hall door.
Note
NOTE: Car Top Inspection operation automatically overrides Car Panel Inspection operation.
4. Run the car from the Car Top Inspection station, checking the up and down buttons and
the stop switch.
5. While running the car, check clearances and door locks. When all doors are locked,
remove all jumpers from door lock terminals.
6. Verify directional limit switch and final limit switch operation and position according to
page MRW1 or MRW2 of the job prints. Ideally, when the car is on Inspection operation,
the distance between the two switches should be greater than the distance required to
stop the car after the direction command is removed.
7. Verify that the brake has sufficient tension to hold the car under all conditions likely to
be encountered during the installation phase.
8. You may now proceed to Section 3, Inspection Mode.
2-46 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Drive Startup (Quattro DC Drive)
Drive Startup (Quattro DC Drive)

For Drive Startup instructions for the MCE System 12 SCR Drive see “Drive Startup (System 12
SCR Drive)” on page 2-23.
Each iController is shipped with completed drive parameter sheets and a drive manual. Based
on the field survey information, all drive unit, field-adjustable parameters are set and noted on
2
the parameter sheets. However, it is essential to verify all drive parameter settings
before startup.
Danger
High voltage may be present in the motor circuit, even when the motor is not rotating. Remove AC
power and wait for 5 to 10 minutes before removing the drive cover to allow capacitors to discharge.
Do not touch any component without verifying that high voltage is not present.
Drive Keypad
Become familiar with the drive keypad. Refer to the Magnetek Quattro DC Drive manual to
learn how to navigate the menus and change drive parameters (see Drive Operation and Fea-
ture Overview > Parameters).
Caution
Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running. Incorrect settings can cause erratic
elevator operation. Please refer to the drive parameters sheet provided with the controller or see
“Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference” on page 9-27.
Initial Drive Settings (Quattro DC Drive)

Verify the Quattro DC Drive parameters below before startup. Check the remaining parameters
using the drive documentation or the Parameters Quick Reference shipped with the controller.
If drive documentation is not available, a list of parameters is included in the Reference Section
of this manual.
A1 Drive Menu Parameters
• Contract Car Spd = job specific
• Contract Mtr Spd = job specific
• Encoder Pulses = job specific
• Brake Pick Time = 0.00
A4 MS Pwr Convert Menu Parameters
• Arm Resistance = enter from A6-Save Meas Arm R after auto-tune
• Arm Inductance = enter from A6-Save Meas Arm L after auto-tune
• Motor Field Res = enter from A6-Save Field Res after auto-tune
• Motor Field Tc = enter from A6-Save Field Tc after auto-tune
• Gain selection = Use Saved Par
A5 Line Side Power Converter Menu Parameters

• Input L-L Volts = job specific
42-02-7223 B8 2-47
Construction Mode
A6 Motor Menu Parameters

• Rated Motor Curr = job specific
• Armature Voltage = job specific
• Full Fld Current = job specific
• Weak Fld Current = job specific
• Standby Field = job specific
• Armature IR Drop = enter from A6-Save IR Drop after auto-tune
C1 User Switches Menu Parameters

• Spd Command SRC = Analog Input
• Tach Filter = On
• Pre-Torque Source = Analog Input
• Ramped Stop Sel = Ramp On stop
• Ramp Down En Src = Run Logic
• DSPR Enable = Enable
C2 Logic Inputs Menu Parameters

• Logic Input 6 (TB1-6) = No Function
C3 Logic Outputs Menu Parameters

• Relay Coil 1 (TB2-1/3/5) = No Fault
• Relay Coil 2 (TB2-8/10/12)= Speed Reg Rls
iControl Parameter Settings (Quattro DC Drive)

Verify the following iControl parameter settings using iView:
Drive Configuration (Controller > View > Configuration > General tab)
• Options:
• Drive type = Quattro
• Drive interface = Analog
• System: > Normal rate limited Stop = drive tuning specific - initially set to 2.0
• Speed Reference: > Reference type = Tachometer
Brake Configuration (Controller > View > Configuration > Brake > Control tab)
• Timer:
• Pick Delay = job specific - initially set to 1.500
• Speed pick delay 1 = job specific - initially set to 2.25
• Speed Pick delay 2 = job specific - initially set to 0.750
Pattern Configuration (Controller > View > Configuration > Pattern > Common tab)
• General: > Lag Delay = drive tuning specific - initially set to 0.3
• Leveling: > drive tuning specific - initially set to 2.0
2-48 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Automated Drive Setup (Quattro DC Drive)

Before adjusting the drive, verify:
• the iBox Safety OK LED is ON
• the iBox Door Locked LED is ON
• the iBox Fault LED is OFF 2
1. Display the Drive setup layout (Controller > View > Layouts > Drive)
2. Follow the on-screen instructions, “To perform the drive offsets calibration, ...” (cali-
brates Input ADC and Output DAC offset).
3. Once the calibration is Done, the offset values shown on the Setup > Drive tab should
match those shown on the Drive Configuration tab (Configuration > Drive > Calibration
tab).
42-02-7223 B8 2-49
Construction Mode
Manual Drive Setup Procedure (Quattro DC Drive)

MCE recommends performing the Automated Drive Setup Procedure previously described.
However, if the automated procedure is unsuccessful, the manual procedure may be used. The
2. With zero speed commanded (car idle), observe the D1-Speed Command on the Quattro
Drive operator and verify that the pattern voltage applied to the AC drive unit reads 0.0
volts. If not, adjust Output DAC on the Drive/Calibration screen by entering and send-
ing small negative or positive values until the reading is 0 fpm. The DAC adjustment
range is from —0.25 to +0.25 units.
3. On iView, display the Drive - Offsets (Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab). Also dis-
play the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope) and set Test
point 1 = Tachometer Signal.
4. Adjust the Input ADC - Tachometer
parameter by entering and sending
small negative or positive values until
the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0
as possible (A 20mV). The ADC adjust-
ment range is from —0.5 to +0.5.
5. Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Brake Current Feedback and then adjust the
Input ADC - Brake current parameter by entering and sending small negative or positive
values until the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
Set the Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Brake Voltage Feedback and then adjust the Input
ADC - Brake voltage parameter by entering and sending small negative or positive values until
the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
Auto Tune Procedure (Quattro DC Drive)

The Auto Tune Procedure is described in the Appendix of the Magnetek Quattro DC Drive man-
ual. The procedure allows the drive to calculate the following motor parameters:
- Armature Inductance - Armature Resistance
- Field Resistance - Field Time Constant
- Armature Resistance Voltage Drop at Motor Rated Current
1. Temporarily jumper terminals TB1 to F2 and TB4 to F1 (located in the Quattro Drive
Cabinet on the top). These terminals should also be available on the terminal block at
the bottom of the Controller cabinet (please see prints). This will bypass the PM1 con-
tacts and allow the Quattro DC Drive to pick its ME contactor (motor contactor).
2. Care must be taken not to short the secondary of the transformer that is the source of
power for these terminals.
3. On the A4 MS Pwr Convert Menu, auto-tune the motor with the Auto Tune Motor
parameter. With the parameter selected, press the Enter key twice to begin the process
(please see Auto Tune Procedure in the Appendix of the Quattro Technical Manual).
4. After the auto-tune process is completed, transfer the tuned parameters from the A6
menu to the A4 menu.
5. Remove the temporary jumpers from terminals TB1/F2 and TB4/F1.
2-50 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Drive Response Adjustments (Quattro DC Drive)

Please review the following description of Quattro DC Drive response adjustments:
1. For the initial setup, it is recommended to set Pick delay, Speed pick delay 1, and Speed
pick delay 2 (Configuration > Brake > Timer tab) to a value long enough to allow time
for the drive to respond to a run request. 2
• If the Pick delay is too short, a DRO fault will occur.
• Once the elevator is moving under control in the appropriate direction and at the com-
manded speed, these delays can be adjusted to a more optimum value.
• Set Pick delay to 1.500 seconds.
• Set Speed pick delay to 1 to 1.600 seconds.
• Set Speed pick delay 2 to 0.750 seconds.
2. The amount of lag between the commanded speed and the drive's response can vary
depending on the tuning of the Quattro drive. As a result, as the drive is adjusted, the
Lag delay parameter (View > Configuration > Pattern > Common > General) will need
to change as well.
• If the lag delay is insufficient, the elevator will plow into a landing. The acceleration
and jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be greater than profile values indi-
cate.
• If the lag delay is excessive, the elevator will drag into a landing. The acceleration and
jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be less than profile values indicate. In
addition, a discontinuity in the profile will occur during the transition from accelera-
tion to deceleration when moving between floors where a stabilized speed is not
reached. Under normal operation, this would occur when contract speed is not
reached.
• To adjust the Lag delay, observe “Acceleration (Raw)” on the iView virtual oscilloscope
(View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope). Perform one-floor-runs and observe the
transition through zero (peak acceleration transitioning to peak deceleration as the
elevator reaches a peak speed that is less than contract speed). This transition should
have no vertical discontinuity (too much Lag delay) or horizontal discontinuity (too lit-
tle Lag delay). This transition adjustment is only valid when the elevator is unable to
reach the maximum speed for a particular profile (unable to reach contract speed
under normal operation. A physical oscilloscope may be required to see this transition
properly. Adjust the Lag delay until the horizontal discontinuity is eliminated (see
“Velocity and Acceleration Curves” on page 2-52).
• For initial setup, set the Lag delay parameter to 0.3 seconds (View > Configuration >
Pattern > Common > General).
42-02-7223 B8 2-51
Construction Mode
Figure 2.4 Velocity and Acceleration Curves
Velocity and acceleration: (a) profile at contract speed; (b) insufficient lag compensation
with profile at less than contract speed; (c) excessive lag compensation with profile at less
than contract speed; (d) optimum lag compensation with profile at less than contract speed
3. Depending on the tuning of the Quattro drive, the leveling distance may have to be gen-
erous to allow the elevator's speed to completely transition to the requested leveling
speed.
4. For initial setup, set the Leveling distance parameter to 2.0 inches (View > Configura-
tion > Pattern > Common > Leveling). Once the drive is tuned, this parameter may be
adjusted to a more optimum value.
5. Depending on the tuning of the Quattro drive, the transition from leveling speed to zero
speed may be sluggish.
6. For initial setup, set the Normal rate limited stop parameter to 2.0 ft/s2 or more (View >
Configuration > Drive > General > System). Once the drive is tuned, this parameter may
be adjusted to a more optimum value.
2-52 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Brake Calibration
This section describes brake calibration for DC systems using the iField Module advanced brak-
ing system. The iField module electronically controls brake voltage output.
Rollback Compensation
In later adjustments, drive and motor settings will be adjusted to control rollback. Since that 2
has not yet been done, we need to control rollback by adjusting Brake Pick Delay and offsetting
Speed pick delay 1 so that the brake remains set until the motor builds sufficient torque.
1. From the Controller > View menu select Layout and click Brake.
2. On the Brake > Control tab, verify that Pick delay is set to 1.500 seconds.
3. Verify that Speed pick delay 1 is set to 1.600 seconds.
4. Select Acquire from the Write privilege menu. Then press the “yes” button on the iBox
to grant the privilege.
5. Click Send to send the changed values to the controller.
Note
These initial settings should allow the Brake Calibration procedure to be performed without
generating faults. They will be modified as the car’s performance is fine tuned.
42-02-7223 B8 2-53
Construction Mode
Calibration Procedure
Calibration allows iControl to learn the characteristics of the machine brake.
1. Verify that the iBox Safety OK LED is solidly on.
2. Set the iBox Learn switch to ON.
Machine Room Insp.
Note
INSP RUN ON
NORM STOP OFF

ON ON
COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK OFF OFF
SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOOR LOCKED

ENABLE TEST LEARN
SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION ON ON
CARTOP RUN IN GROUP OFF OFF
SYS COMM RELEVEL FAULT CAR DOOR HOISTWAY

BYPASS BYPASS
OFF OFF
4. Display the Brake > Control tab (Con-

figuration > Brake > Control tab).
5. Set Pick voltage and Hold voltage as
shown on your job prints.
6. For now, set Releveling voltage and
Weakening voltage to the same value
as Pick voltage. (This parameter can be
fine tuned during final adjustment.)
2-54 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

7. On the Setup > Brake tab the Ready indicator should be On. The text box will indicate
any steps that need to be performed.
8. With the Ready indicator lighted, click the Calibrate button. As calibration begins,
watch the display on the tab. The display will report calibration progress and will also
display instructions if you need to complete additional steps along the way. The Waiting
LED will light while waiting for an instruction to be completed. If necessary, click Con- 2
tinue to continue calibration after completing an instruction.
9. When iControl is ready to begin learning, the screen will display “The controller is wait-
ing for a direction command in order to proceed. You may command either the Up or
the Down direction.” When it does, press and hold the iBox Enable and Up (or Down)
buttons. (The car will not be moved during this procedure.)
10. The Calibrating LED will light as calibration begins. Continue to hold the Enable and Up
(or Down) buttons pressed. The progress indicators to the left of the display will keep
you informed as calibration progresses.
11. When the Done indicator lights, release the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons. Calibra-
tion is complete.
12. Set the iBox Learn switch to OFF.
Note
If the motor runs away, see “Verifying Motor Rotation and Control (Quattro DC Drive)” on
page 2-57.
Table 2.6 Brake Calibration Status Messages
The following messages may be displayed during brake calibration

The controller is not ready for Brake Calibration. Please place the elevator on Machine Room Inspection and
place the LEARN switch in the ON position.
The system is ready to start the calibration process. Push the CALIBRATE button if you wish to start calibrat-
ing the brake or push the DEFAULT button if you wish to load the default calibration values.
The controller is waiting for a Direction command in order to proceed. You may command either the UP or
the DOWN direction.
The controller is done with brake calibration. Please drop direction and turn the LEARN switch OFF.
42-02-7223 B8 2-55
Construction Mode
Verify Brake Picking

To verify that the brake is picking properly:
1. Verify that the iBox Safety OK LED is solidly on. Display the Pattern > Common tab
(View > Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
2. Set Pattern Scaling to 0% and click Send to send the changed parameter to iControl.
3. Display the Operational Status tab. Note that Brake voltage is charted in the Machine
section of the Operational Status tab.
4. With a digital volt meter set to DC volts,
measure brake output voltage across termi-
nals B1 and B2 (located just below the iBox
panel). (A typical terminal block is shown to
the right. B1 and B2 will be labeled.)
5. Press the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons
to lift the brake. Verify that the voltages on
the volt meter are the same as the com-
manded voltage (Pick voltage / Hold voltage
parameters on the Brake > Voltages tab) and
Brake voltage on the Operational Status tab.
The brake should lift but the car should not move since
Pattern scaling is set to command zero speed.
6. Change the Pick and Hold voltages to one
half the current value of the Pick voltage parameter and save the new values.
7. Press and hold the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons and verify brake voltage again.
(The brake will probably not lift since we are outputting only half the Pick voltage.)
8. Change the Pick and Hold voltages back to their job print settings and save them.
9. Change Pattern scaling (Pattern > Common tab) to 100% and send that value to the con-
troller.
2-56 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


Once you are satisfied that the brake is picking properly, verify proper car movement and motor
current. Troubleshoot movement if needed. Calibrate speed using a handheld tachometer.
Verifying Motor Rotation and Control (Quattro DC Drive)

1. On the Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling = 100%. 2
2. Set the iBox Inspection switch to INSP and run the car using the Enable and Up (or
Down) switches.
3. Move the elevator on Inspection and verify that the motor is under control and rotating
in the proper direction.
4. If the motor is rotating under control in the proper direction, skip the remaining steps.
5. If the motor runs away in the proper direction, change C1-Encoder Connect direction.
6. If the motor runs away in the opposite direction, change C1-Motor Rotation direction.
7. If the motor runs under control in the opposite direction, change C1-Encoder Connect
direction and C1-Motor Rotation direction.
Verifying Pattern Command and Speed Feedback

1. Verify/set the following iView Drive parameters (View > Configuration > Drive > Gen-
eral tab > Speed Reference section):
• Reference type = Tachometer
• Scaling = 1.000
2. If you change any values, send them to the controller.
3. While running on Inspection, verify that D1-Speed Command is within about 1 fpm of
the requested inspection speed on Configuration > Pattern > Modes. Adjust A1 Spd
Command Mult if the speed is not correct (higher for increased speed).
4. Display the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope).
5. Set Test point 1 = Pattern (Command) and Test point 2 = Speed Feedback.
6. Run the car on Inspection and verify the polarity (Test point 1 and 2 traces are both
moving in the same direction). If they not, change the Speed Reference, Rotational
direction parameter (Forward / Reverse) on the Configuration > Drive > General tab.
7. Run the car and verify that the Pattern (Command) and
Speed Feedback (Test point 1 and 2 traces) are the same TACH ADJ. trimpot
amplitude. On the iView virtual oscilloscope (or a DVM
connected between STP1 and STP2), compare the Pattern TACH
Command and Speed Feedback readouts. They must match ADJ.

MODEM
within 0.050 VDC while the car is running at steady state

speed. If not, adjust the TACH ADJ trimpot (upper right
corner of iBox). The iPower Box door can be opened slightly
RS 232
to improve access to the TACH ADJ trimpot. Turn the pot

slowly. This is a 15 turn trimpot, but the adjustment from
maximum to minimum on the virtual oscilloscope is less
than 1/2 turn.
If the trimpot adjustment is insufficient, adjust Scaling parameter up or
down in o.1 increments (Configuration > Drive > General tab > Speed
Reference section). Remember to Send the value to the controller, and then re-adjust the trimpot.
42-02-7223 B8 2-57
Construction Mode
Calibrating Actual Car Speed (Quattro DC Drive)

If iLand and iLink are already installed, use the landing system speed (Speed/Actual on the
Operational Status tab) as the speed reference for speed calibration. If not, use a hand-held
tachometer to obtain the value.
If you are using a hand-held tachometer, hold it against the hoist or governor rope on the
machine. The car must run at the commanded inspection speed in both directions. If the mea-
sured inspection speed does not match the commanded value, verify the following:
1. Verify the Inspection - High Speed parameter (View > Configuration > Pattern > Modes
tab).
3. Verify drive parameters set earlier. Please refer to “Initial Drive Settings (Quattro DC
Drive)” on page 2-47.
4. Adjust A1-Contract Mtr Spd (higher RPM for increased speed) in small increments to
obtain the correct Inspection speed.
Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback
1. From the View > Diagnostics menu, select Virtual Oscilloscope, and set Test point 1 =
Pattern (Command) and Test point 2 = Speed Feedback.
2. Run the car on Inspection and verify that the Speed Feedback trace is following the Pat-
tern (Command) trace. (If Standard Profile/High Speed, Inspection Profile/High Speed,
and actual car speed are correct, this will be the case. If not, verify and correct these set-
tings.)
2-58 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Following Error Margin

The Following error is used for fault detection purposes only. The Following error parameter
(Configuration > Drive > Safety tab) sets the allowed margin of deviation from commanded
speed, as a percentage. A Tach Error fault is generated when the difference between intended
pattern speed and speed feedback exceeds the Following error margin. Calibrate speed feedback
to match the intended pattern. 2
1. On the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, verify that Standard Profile/High Speed
and Inspection Profile/High Speed parameters are set correctly for this job.
2. Verify that actual car speed on Inspection is equal to the Inspection High speed setting.
Please refer to “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (Quattro DC Drive)” on page 2-58.
Set the Following Error

• Set the Following error parameter (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab). It is recom-
mended to perform the Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment procedure at this time.
Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment” on page 2-60.
Default setting
Caution
The default setting for the Following error parameter is 25%. For a car that has been prop-
erly adjusted, after performing the Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment, a Following Error
setting of 10% is fairly typical. You may choose to leave the Following error parameter at the default
setting or higher, but keep in mind that Following error is a percentage of speed. On a 500fpm job a
25% Following Error allows a 125fpm contract speed deviation before a fault is generated.
42-02-7223 B8 2-59
Construction Mode

1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 = Speed Feedback and Test point 2 =
Tach Error Upper Limit.
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Tach Error Upper Limit traces track but
3. Set Test point 2 = Tach Error Lower Limit.
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Tach Error Lower Limit traces track but
5. Estimate the smallest percentage of Following error that would allow the Feedback and
Limit traces to remain separated.
6. Increase the calcu-
lated value by 1/2
and set Following
error to this value.
For example, if the
calculated percent-
age is 6%, add that to
1/2 of 6 (3) and set
Following error to 9%. Remember to send the change to iControl.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 4, verifying that Feedback and Limit traces remain separated. If
they do not, recalculate and reset Following error.
Note
A Following error setting of 10% is fairly typical. Keep in mind that the Following error margin
is a percentage of commanded speed. On a 500fpm job a 10% Following error allows a 50fpm
deviation from contract speed before a fault is generated.
2-60 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Additional Adjustments and Checks

2. On the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, set Inspection/High Speed to the desired
value (maximum Inspection speed is 150 fpm). Set the Inspection/Low Speed to 25 fpm.
2
Note
If the Terminal Switches (UNT5/DNT5) have been installed, and you wish to use the reduced
inspection speed option, you may enable it by checking Reduced inspection speed on the Con-
figuration > Pattern > Modes tab. If not, you may enable Reduced Inspection speed after the
Terminal Switches are installed. (Enabling it now, without switches, would cause the car to run
at 25 fpm.)
3. Stop the car so that the car top can be accessed from the top hall door.
Note
NOTE: Car Top Inspection operation automatically overrides Car Panel Inspection operation.
4. Run the car from the Car Top Inspection station, checking the up and down buttons and
the stop switch.
5. While running the car, check clearances and door locks. When all doors are locked,
remove all jumpers from door lock terminals.
6. Verify directional limit switch and final limit switch operation and position according to
page MRW1 or MRW2 of the job prints. Ideally, when the car is on Inspection operation,
the distance between the two switches should be greater than the distance required to
stop the car after the direction command is removed.
7. Verify that the brake has sufficient tension to hold the car under all conditions likely to
be encountered during the installation phase.
8. You may now proceed to Section 3, Inspection Mode.
42-02-7223 B8 2-61
Construction Mode
2-62 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Inspection Mode
In This Section
This section provides the information you need to complete field wiring and prepare the eleva-
tor to operate in Inspection Mode:
• Landing System Installation (see page 3-2).
• iLink Interconnect Installation (see page 3-3).
• Hoistway Limit Switches (see page 3-5).
• Load Weigher Installation (see page 3-6).
• Brake Monitoring (see page 3-6).
• Earthquake Sensor (see page 3-7).
• Serial Hall Call (see page 3-7).
• Serial COP (see page 3-7).
• Cartop Voltage Verification (see page 3-8).
• Running on Machine Room Inspection (see page 3-10).
• Preparing for Final Adjustments (see page 3-12).
Caution
Instructions in this section assume you have completed all Construction Mode instructions in the
previous section and that the elevator car is running safely and reliably in Construction Mode. Note
that, in the course of installing the iLink cartop box, YOU MUST UNDO the temporary cartop CTS
bypass used to run the car on Construction Mode with no iLink cartop box installed).
42-02-7223 B8 3-1
Inspection Mode
Landing System
Please see the instruction shipped with the landing system equipment. See the job prints for
wiring instructions. Depending on job requirements, one of the following landing systems will
be used:
• iLand: Wheel encoder system. Instruction 42-IS-0173.
• LS-EDGE: Steel tape encoder system. Instruction 42-IS-0214.
Setting the Position Encoder Resolution parameter

For the iLand Compact landing system, the Position Encoder resolution parameter must be set
to 348 pulses per foot (iView Controller > View > Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
Calibrating the Floor Offsets

See “Calibrating the floor offsets” in Section 4. If this is a new installation, wait until the car has
been fully adjusted so that it stops consistently and accurately at the floors.
3-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Installing iLink
Installing iLink
iLink is the cartop interconnect box used with iControl systems. The illustration below shows a
view of iLink circuitry with the cover removed. Make connections to the interconnect box as
shown in your job prints.
3
42-02-7223 B8 3-3
Inspection Mode
Figure 3.1 iLink Circuitry and Wiring
iLink Enclosure Installation

The iLink enclosure is typically mounted on
the left side (as you face the car) of the cartop,
opposite the iLand system. The enclosure has
several partially-punched knockouts to
accommodate two-inch conduit connections.
Mount the iLink enclosure on or between the
crosshead beams.
Vertical mounting, as shown, is preferred.

Mounting the iLink horizontally is acceptable
only if it is well protected from metal filings or
other debris that might accumulate and
damage electrical components. The
dimensions of the iLink enclosure depend
upon how many input and/or output boards
are required for a particular job.
3-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Installing the Hoistway Limit Switches
Installing the Hoistway Limit Switches

In general (for cam-operated switches):
• Be sure that the cam operating the limit switches keeps the slowdown limit switches open
until the normal direction limit switch is broken.
• Be sure that both the normal and final limit switches are held open for the entire run-by 3
travel of the elevator.
• For faster elevators, the surface of the cam that operates the limit switches must be suffi-
ciently gradual so that the impact of the switch rollers striking the cam is relatively silent.
Note
After Terminal Switches (UNT5/DNT5) are installed, verify Inspection Low Speed (iView/Pattern/
Inspection) is set to 25 fpm and is enabled. UNT and DNT 5 switches are always used in iControl installa-
tions.
42-02-7223 B8 3-5
Inspection Mode
Installing the Load Weigher

Install and adjust the provided load weigher as directed in the instructions accompanying the
load weigher. Information regarding load weigher selection and threshold settings is provided
in Section 4. Please refer to “Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching ” on page 4-38.
Installing Brake Monitoring

Brake monitoring via an independent contact is required by code only for disc brakes. A spare
iBox input (SP2D), or a programmable input (Brake Switch) on an ICE-MIAC board, may be
used for the brake contact. The brake monitoring contact may be provided as part of the brake
assembly. If not, a micro-switch (rated for at least 1/4 Amp, 125VDC) must be provided by the
installer and mounted such that when the brake picks, the switch activates (see note below).
Refer to job prints for electrical connection information.
The brake monitoring contact provides a path between the iBox 110VDC (#3) bus and the SP2D
or Brake Switch input. If the brake fails to pick (or drop) at the proper time, this signal will
cause the controller to generate a Brake Pick Fault (See “Brake Pick Fault, BRAKE PICK
FAULT” on page 6 - 17.) or Brake Drop Fault (See “Brake Drop Fault, BRAKE DROP FAULT” on
page 6 - 16.). The fault message is shown on the iBox LCD display, on the iView Operational Sta-
tus tab and in the iView Event Log.
Note
On the iView > Controller > Configuration

> Brake > Control tab, switch parameters
are provided to specify the polarity of the
SP2D/Brake Switch input (active high or
low). In addition, parameters direct the
system to monitor for a brake pick and/or
brake drop fault. If neither pick or drop
monitoring are checked, the controller will
ignore the SP2D/Brake Switch input.
Danger
When installing the switch, take all necessary precautions not to interfere with normal brake design
or operation.
3-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Installing the Earthquake Sensor
Installing the Earthquake Sensor

An earthquake sensor may be part of your installation. If so, connect the counterweight derail-
ment detector and seismic sensor as shown in your job prints. The EQ board provides a seismic
sensor input (ESS), a spare sensor input (EQSP 1), and a counterweight derailment detector
(CW1/CW2). The ESS input is normally at 120VAC (no earthquake detected). A low (0.0V) at
the ESS input will cause the elevator to go into Earthquake Mode.
3
The counterweight derailment detector operates using a 24VDC “ring and string” circuit which
will be grounded if excessive counterweight motion occurs. iControl also monitors the continu-
ity of the “string” and will trigger a fault if the string breaks. The illustration below shows how
the circuit operates.
Temporary Bypass
If the earthquake devices will be installed later, you may temporarily bypass the ESS input
using a jumper from the ESS input to a #2 Bus (120V AC) connection. Bypass the counterweight
derailment detector by placing a jumper between CW1 and CW2.
Earthquake Reset
Earthquake Operation latches when activated by the seismic sensor or the derailment detector.
Press the reset button on the EQ board in iControl to reset EQ.Installing the
Installing the Serial Hall Call System

For simplex cars the hall call driver is located in the car controller cabinet. For cars operating as
part of a Group, the hall call driver is located in the Group cabinet. Please refer to “Serial Hall
Call” on page 5-17.
1. Refer to job print drawings -Serial Hall Call Details (-SH).
2. Set jumpers and install hall call nodes as shown in the drawings.
3. Serial hall call inputs and outputs are programmed on the iView System > Configuration
Tabs > System I/O > System tab.
4. Troubleshoot serial hall call fixtures using the iView Configuration > Serial I/O > Bus
tab.
Installing the Serial COP System

With the Serial Car Operating Panel system, car call buttons connect directly to a serializing
board located in the car station enclosure. Multiple Serial COP boards daisy-chain together to
accommodate installations with a lot of call buttons. Wiring from the Serial COP board(s) to the
iLink cartop box is just a short length of shielded cable with a telephone-style RJ-11 connector
at each end. The iLink cartop box supports up to four serial control panel connections. Commu-
nication between iLink and the controller is also serial.
Instructions for installing the Serial COP system can be found in Section 5. Please refer to
“Serial COP” on page 5-36.
1. Refer to job print drawings - Cartop Details (-CTx).
2. Serial COP inputs and outputs are programmed on the iView Configuration > I/O Board
> Configuration tab.
42-02-7223 B8 3-7
Inspection Mode
Position Indicators
Connect position indicators as shown in the prints.
Verifying Cartop Voltages

1. Set the iBox Inspection switch to the INSP position.
2. Set the Controller Stop switch to the Stop position.
initialize.
5. Check the Computer, Safety A, Safety B, and Cartop status LEDs. The LEDs should be
6. Refer to the initial pages of the -CT drawings where power connections are primarily
shown. On the cartop, verify all voltages shown are present and within acceptable levels
with respect to ground.
• +5V, +/-15V, +/-26V, +3.3V test points are on the right edge of the ICE-CTP board
• The GND test point is in the middle of the ICE-CTP board
• Verify 2 and 3 bus power with respect to the 1 (common) bus
7. Verify the eight diagnostic LEDs on the iLink CTP board. (On power up or reset, these
LEDs will light sequentially, first in one direction, then the other, after which they will
briefly clear. See the illustration below for normal operating indications.)
Figure 3.2 iLink CTP Board Diagnostic LEDs
LED 1: iBox to cartop input.

Blinks approx. every 40mS.
Remains OFF if input lost.
LED 2: Unintended motion
indication. Normally OFF.
LED 3: Unintended motion
indication. Normally OFF.
LED 4: Cartop to iBox output.
Blinks approx. every 40mS.
Remains OFF if output lost.
LED 5: Blinks every 40mS.
LED 6: ON for Inspection
mode. OFF otherwise.
LED 7: Not used.
LED 8: Not used.
CTP Board Diagnostic LEDs.

Located near D-connection to MIAC and
MOR boards.
8. Install the cover on the iLink cartop interconnect box.

9. Verify that the iBox CARTOP LED is ON indicting that the iLink CTP board is communi-
cating with the iBox. If not, verify that the CARTOP LINK wiring is connected as speci-
fied on the job prints. Additional troubleshooting information is available in Section 6.
Please refer to “iControl Messages List - Numerical” on page 6-4.
3-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Verifying Door Operation
Verifying Door Operation

This section helps you verify that the door lock signal input is working properly.
1. Verify that the door related options required for this job are checked on the iView Safety
screen.
• Top Access Landing 3
• Top Access Rear
• Bottom Access Landing
• Bottom Access Rear
• No Main String
• No Main String Rear
• Front Door Close Contact
• Rear Door Close Contact
• Rear Doors
• Freight Door Option 1
• Door Position Monitor
2. Simulate the opening of the front car gate by removing the wire from the GS terminal on
the iBox.
• The iBox status LED “Doors Locked” will turn Off.
3. Reconnect the GS terminal.
4. Run the elevator up or down at inspection speed. Remove the DLAT (Door Lock Access
Top) input.
• The elevator should immediately stop.
• The Door Locked status LED will turn Off.
5. Reconnect the DLAT input. Repeat Step 4 for the DLAB input.
6. Reconnect the DLAB input. Repeat Step 4 for the DLMS input.
7. Reconnect the DLMS input.
8. Run the elevator at inspection speed. Move the Car Door Bypass switch to BYPASS.
• The elevator should immediately stop since the door lock cannot be bypassed while on
Machine Room Inspection.
9. Move the Car Door Bypass switch back to Off.
Verifying Safety Configuration

Verify that the safety options required for this job are checked on the iView Safety screen. Any
options that are checked, but not operational, will require a jumper to allow the car to operate
on Inspection (inputs must be high).
42-02-7223 B8 3-9
Inspection Mode
Exit Construction Mode

Perform the following checks before exiting construction mode:
1. On the iBox, verify that the green CARTOP LED is lighted indicating that the controller
is communicating with the cartop processor board. If not, check the CARTOP LINK wir-
ing. The terminals must be connected as follows: (iBox TX+ and TX- terminals to CTP
board RX+ and RX- terminals. iBox RX+ and RX- terminals to CTP board TX+ and TX-
terminals.)
2. In iView, display the Operational Status tab. Run the car and monitor the Position - Log-
ical and Position - Cartop values. Verify that the values increase when the car is moving
in the up direction. The value(s) could be negative, in which case they must become less
negative when the car moves in the up direction.
3. As the car moves, monitor the Leveling Sensor indicators on the Operational Status tab.
Verify that the sequence is correct. When the car is traveling in the up direction, the
sequence should be, Front/Rear Up leveling marker, followed by Front/Rear Door zone,
followed by Front/Rear Down leveling marker.
To exit construction mode:

1. From the iView Write privilege menu, select Acquire.
The iBox LCD will display a message requesting write privileges for iView.
2. On the iBox, press the “Yes” (1) softkey to assign write privileges to iView.
3. Open the Safety screen.
4. Click the Construction Mode check box (remove check mark).
5. Click the Send button.
You must then re-learn the Safety Configuration. Please refer to “Learning the Safety Configura-
tion” on page 2-22.

When you are ready to run the elevator on Inspection:
1. Verify the iBox Computer, Safety A, Safety B, and Cartop status LEDs are lighted solidly
green.
2. Move the Inspection switch to the INSP position.
3. Move the Controller Stop switch to the RUN position.
Within 5 seconds, Safety OK and Doors Locked LEDs should be on and the Fault LED should be off.
4. Verify Car Door Bypass and Hall Door Bypass switches are set to the OFF position.
5. Verify that the car is in Machine Room Inspection on the iBox or in iView. If the car is in
another inspection mode (i.e., Cartop Inspection, In-car Inspection, or Hoistway
Access), turn them off. The INCT, INA, and INCP inputs on the left edge of the iBox
should be high (110VDC).
6. Press and hold the Enable button, then press the Up or Down button to run the car. Run
the car away from the terminal landing.
7. On the iBox or on the iView Hoistway screen, verify car speed (Actual Speed). Use the
iBox or iView Actual Speed as the speed reference.
3-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Running on Machine Room Inspection
Verifying Quadrature Pulse Sequence and Encoder Resolution

Position Encoder Resolution
Verify that Position Encoder Resolution (Pattern Configuration/Common tab) is correct. When
the iLand landing system is mounted on the car top with the encoder wheel against the hoistway
rail, Position Encoder Resolution is 256 pulses/ft. 3
Quadrature Pulse Sequence
The quadrature pulse sequence must be verified before the hoistway can be learned.
1. Connect to the controller using iView.
2. Open the Hoistway screen. Display the Faults tab.
3. Move the car up the hoistway. Verify that Actual Position and Cartop Position increase.
4. Move the car down the hoistway. Verify that Actual Position and Cartop Position
decrease.
If the quadrature pulses are reversed, the Position Quadrature Reversed fault will appear in the
Faults display after the elevator moves about two feet. (The Actual position may decrease as the
car moves up and increase as the car moves down.) If indications are not correct:
• Check the DP1+/DP1- and DP2+/DP2- connections to the iBox and iLink (refer to the
job prints).
• If the connections are correct, use a multi-meter to test that the positive- and negative-
going pulses are arriving at the terminals. The streams should pulse between -15 and
+15 volts.
• If the signals are not arriving properly, check the cartop connection between the iLand
landing system and the iLink interconnect box. (Note that the Front Door/Front Mag-
nets cable must be present between the interconnect box and the landing system
regardless of your door/magnet configuration because it provides power to the landing
system.)
5. If iLand to iLink cabling is correct, first test the continuity of the cables, then check the
traveler connection between the iLink and the iBox for correct connections and continu-
ity.
42-02-7223 B8 3-11
Inspection Mode
Prepare for Final Adjustments

This section describes preparation for final adjustment.
Door Operator
The door operator must be working properly before final adjustment.
1. Verify that the door fuses are properly installed.
2. Verify that the iBox Car Door Bypass and Hoistway Door Bypass switches are OFF.
3. Check that all door equipment clutches, rollers, etc. are properly adjusted to correct run-
ning clearances.
4. Check the controller prints to make sure any door operator diode installation instruc-
tions have been followed (especially for G.A.L. door operators).
5. Verify that all hoistway and car doors are closed and locked.
6. Run the car through the hoistway on inspection mode to make sure the hoistway is com-
pletely clear.
Counterweight Learn Procedure

This procedure allows the controller to learn the position in the hoistway at which the car and
counterweight are at the same height. It must be performed if the controller will be using Earth-
quake operation, and it is helpful for counterweight balancing and pre-torque gain adjustment.
1. Move the car until the car and the counterweight are at the same height in the hoistway.
2. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position.
4. Display the Counterweight setup tab (View > Setup > Counterweight).
5. If Not ready is lighted, follow the instructions in the message window until Ready is
lighted.
6. With Ready lighted, click the Learn button.
The controller will learn the car/counterweight position and the Done indicator will light. The
learned Counterweight position is displayed on the Setup > Counterweight tab.
7. Set the iBox Learn switch to OFF and the iBox Inspection switch to NORM.
3-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Prepare for Final Adjustments
Counterweight Balancing
On modernizations, the weight of the car is often changed but compensating adjustments to the
counterweight are sometimes overlooked. This adjustment is important for achieving desired
performance and ride characteristics.
1. Place a balanced load in the car (specified percentage of full load; typically 40%). 3
2. On Inspection, run car to the middle of the hoistway to the position learned by perform-
ing the Counterweight Learn Procedure (see “Counterweight Learn Procedure” on
page 3-12). Verify position using the Actual Position displayed on the Operational Status
tab.
3. Turn controller power OFF.
4. Use a portable supply to inject sufficient DC voltage at controller terminals B1 and B2 to
lift the brake. (Or, manually lift the brake.)
5. Watch the car to see if it drifts. If not, the car and counterweight are balanced.
• If the car drifts up, remove weight from the counterweight or add weight to the car and
repeat the balancing procedure.
• If the car drifts down, add weight to the counterweight or remove weight from the car
and repeat the balancing procedure.
• For a drum machine, follow the manufacturer counterweighting recommendations
and test the drum machine limit switches.
6. When car and counterweight are balanced, record the actual weight in the car for future
reference. Balanced load = _____________lbs. Restore controller power.
Run Testing
1. Verify all landing system magnets are installed according to job prints and instructions.
2. On inspection mode, run the car to the midpoint of the hoistway.
3. Set the iBox Test switch to the ON position.
4. Place the car on Machine Room Inspection, with Cartop Inspection OFF.
At this point, the car should be on Inspection operation and running without oscillation. There
may be substantial rollback when the car first starts.
5. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Pattern (Command).
6. Use a digital voltmeter to check the pattern voltage on iBox test point STP1 with respect
to the Common terminal.
7. Verify Pattern scaling is at 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab) and the
Inspection - High speed parameter is at 10% of contract speed (Configuration > Pattern
> Modes tab). Maximum value for Inspection - High speed is 150fpm. Verify Reduced
inspection speed option is enabled and that Inspection - Low speed is set to 25 fpm.
8. Run the car on Inspection and check the voltage at iBox test point STP1. If 8.0VDC is
equal to contract speed, then the reading at 10% should be 0.8VDC (+/- 5%).
9. Set Inspection - High speed to 50fpm.
10. On Inspection, run car to, or near, the bottom landing. Use test weights to load the car to
125% of full load in preparation for checking the ability of the brake to hold this weight.
Danger
If the brake does not hold, the car may slide into the pit. Use extreme caution.
42-02-7223 B8 3-13
Inspection Mode
11. On Machine Room Inspection, run the car up the hoistway sufficiently to allow a down
direction run.
12. On Machine Room Inspection, run the car down the hoistway. While the car is moving,
set the iBox Controller Stop switch to STOP to force the brake to apply while the car is
moving. If necessary, adjust the brake to hold the load.
13. Remove the weights from the car.
Empty Car Tests

With the car on Machine Room Inspection and with test weights removed (empty car), the fol-
lowing steps allow you to adjust the response of the car to reduce empty car rollback while
avoiding the oscillations that can occur if too much gain is adjusted into the system. For these
tests you may use a storage oscilloscope capable of a 1.0 centimeter per second sweep rate or
you may use the iView Virtual Oscilloscope.
1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Speed Feedback. Adjust the Virtual
Oscilloscope for greater sensitivity and shorter time period. If you are using a storage
oscilloscope, monitor Test point STP1 (lower right side of the iBox) with respect to Com-
mon.
The empty car will probably drift up due to the counterweight, even when an attempt is made to
move it down. Perform the following:
2. Adjust brake Pick delay and Speed pick delay 1 on the iView Configuration > Brake >
Timers tab to coordinate the application of the speed pattern with the picking of the
brake to avoid movement of the car under the brake or rollback of the car.
3. Experiment with improving response. A little rollback at this point is not critical as later
adjustments will compensate for it.
4. Verify that Pattern scaling is 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
5. Using Speed/Actual on the iView Operational Status tab or a hand held tachometer, ver-
ify that the car speed, while operating on Machine Room Inspection, matches the
Inspection/High Speed setting (Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab) and is 10% of the
Standard/High Speed setting. Please refer to “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12
SCR Drive)” on page 2-38 if necessary.
Danger
At this point, the iBox Fault/Function Bypass switch should be in the OFF position. Fix all faults so
that no fault is bypassed before proceeding. If this is not possible, exercise EXTREME CAUTION
while making final adjustments.
3-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Final Adjustment
In This Section
This section describes final adjustments to, and complete final inspection of, the elevator sys-
tem. At this point, all steps in Sections 2 and 3 should have been completed.
• Learning the Floor Heights (see page 4-2).
• Verifying One-Floor Run Operation (see page 4-3).
• Reaching Contract Speed (System 12 SCR Drive) (see page 4-6).
• Reaching Contract Speed (Quattro DC Drive) (see page 4-10)
• Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches (see page 4-12).
• Synthetic Speed Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) (see page 4-14).
• Feed Forward Gain Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive) (see page 4-15).
• Fine Tuning the Speed Regulator (Quattro DC Drive) (see page 4-16).
• Shaping the Speed Profile (see page 4-16).
• Controlling the Start of Car Motion (see page 4-20).
• Calibrating the Floor Offsets (see page 4-30).
• Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop (see page 4-33).
• Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching (see page 4-38).
• Pre-Start Sequence (see page 4-43).
• Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions (see page 4-49).
• Safety Tests (see page 4-52).
• Terminal Switch Faults (see page 4-61).
42-02-7223 B8 4-1
Final Adjustment
Learning the Floor Heights
Note
This procedure must be successfully completed before running the elevator on Test or Normal operation.
Before proceeding, be certain you have verified the landing system quadrature pulse sequence. Please
refer to “Verifying Quadrature Pulse Sequence and Encoder Resolution ” on page 3-11.
Floor Height Learn Procedure

The speed at which the car learns the hoistway is determined by the Inspection /High Speed
parameter (Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab). To learn floor heights, we recommend set-
ting Inspection/High Speed between 50fpm and 125fpm.
1. Place the car on Inspection operation (iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position).
Check the iBox LCD display to verify that it is on Machine Room Insp.
2. On Machine Room Inspection, run the car down until the car is stopped by the normal
limit switch (DNTD). For floor height learning to begin, the ULM signal must be on,
DLM must be off, DNTD must be off, and UNTD must be on.
4. In iView, display the Floor Heights Learn (Floor Heights from the View > Layouts
menu). Click the Learn tab on the Setup > Floor Heights tab.
5. Select Manual or Auto learn type. (On Manual, you run the car through the hoistway
using the iBox Enable and Up/Down buttons. On Auto, iControl will run the car through
the hoistway automatically.)
6. If Not Ready is lighted, perform the instructions shown in the message window.
• The Ready indicator lights when the car is placed in Inspection mode (with the
Learn switch ON and the ULM sensor is ON without DLM).
7. When Ready is lighted, click Learn. The In Progress indicator lights when the Learn
button is clicked.
• If Manual learn type was selected, you are prompted to press and hold the iBox
Enable and Up buttons. The elevator will move up the hoistway at Inspection speed.
• You may click Abort at any time to abort the procedure. If the learn process is
aborted, the last saved complete set of values is retained.
8. The procedure is complete when the up normal limit switch (UNTD) is activated (if
Manual learn type, you are prompted to release the Enable and Up buttons) and Done
is lighted.
4-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Verifying One Floor Run Operation
9. Set the iBox Learn switch to the OFF position.
10. Click the screen refresh button ( ) to update the learned floor height information.
11. On the Hoistway pane, verify that the learned floor heights appear accurate. Also check
the iBox Safety OK status. (Occasionally, the Final Limit Switch may open at the end of
a Learn run.) 4
Verifying One Floor Run Operation
The first step in verifying one-floor run operation is to verify proper correction, run, and stop.
Verifying Correction, Run, and Stop

1. Arrange the elevator for empty car conditions.
2. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling to 50%. This setting
allows the car to run at 50% of the commanded speed.
3. Move the car on Inspection to a location between floors, more than one foot away from a
landing so that no leveling sensors are engaged.
4. Place the car in Test mode (iBox Test switch ON). Set the iBox Fault Bypass switch to
ON.
5. Set the terminal limit switches to their default settings (View > Setup > Terminal
Switches) to allow the car to run.
6. Take the car out of Inspection operation (iBox Inspection switch in the NORM position).
The car will perform a Terminal Synchronization, using the learned position of the sen-
sor to update the current position reported by the position encoder.
Note
If a Limits Switches Checksum Fault is generated when the car is removed from Inspection
operation, it will be necessary to set the terminal switches to default values before proceeding
(View > Setup > Terminal Switches tab). Perform the procedure shown in the Terminal Learn
message window titled “To default terminal switches, please do the following:”.
7. If the car corrects and stops properly, proceed to Initiating a One Floor Run later in this
section.
If the Car Does Not Stop and Correct Properly

• Check the iBox status display. Verify:
• ULM, DLM, and DZ signals are working properly
• Safety OK = ON - safety string is made up.
• Doors Locked= ON - all doors are locked.
• Inspection = OFF - not on Inspection operation.
• Fault = OFF - no faults are active.
42-02-7223 B8 4-3
Final Adjustment
Initiating a One Floor Run

Because we have not yet learned Normal and Emergency Terminal Limit switches, stay away
from the terminals to avoid tripping faults. Remember that Fault Bypasses are on a 15-minute
limit. If you need more time, set Fault Bypass to OFF, then back to ON (within two seconds).
The car should now be at a floor. Avoid running the car close to a terminal landing. To initiate a
one-floor run:
1. Register a car call one floor above or below the current
car position:
• Click the Car Call Registration button .

• Select Car Calls, then Front or Rear panel.
• Click a floor selection button.
If Initiation is not Successful

If the car does not move, check the iBox status display. Verify:
• Safety OK = ON - safety string is made up.
• Doors Locked = ON - all doors are locked.
• Inspection = OFF - the car is not on Inspection operation.
• Faults = OFF - there are no active faults.
Verifying a One Floor Run

During a one-floor run, observe the following:
• When the car starts, note that on the Hoistway display,
the position indicator changes to the next floor just
before reaching the desired floor.
• The car will decelerate to a point 6" (152.4 mm) before
the destination floor where the Level Up or Level Down
sensor will activate the associated indicator. This can be
observed on the Setup > Floor Heights > Learn tab.
• The car will continue until it reaches a point 3" (76.2 mm) before the floor, then the Door
Zone input will activate. The Door Zone Rear input will be active if the floor has rear doors.
• The elevator will continue to level into the floor and stop. The final leveling speed should
be set from 2 to 8 fpm (0.01 to 0.04 m/s). Your actual speed will be a fraction of that since
Pattern scaling is set to 50% at this time.
4-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Verifying One Floor Run Operation
1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope:

• Set Test point 1 to Pattern Command
• Set Test point 2 to Speed Feedback
(8-volts equals contract speed)
2. Run the car between floors to any intermediate landings (avoid activating terminal 4
switches).
3. Observe that the car starts, accelerates, then decelerates into the floor and stops. If the
car overruns a floor, the relevel function will be activated. The Leveling Speed on the
first approach to a floor and the Releveling Speed (if releveling is necessary) are two sep-
arately programmable values. These values are set on the Configuration > Pattern >
Common tab.
Verify Releveling
1. When the car is at a floor, simulate overrunning by temporarily changing the floor
height Offset (Configuration > Floor Heights > Floor Offsets tab) to 0.50” and pressing
the Send button.
2. Observe the releveling operation. (Return Offset to the proper setting and press Send.)
3. Monitor the brake voltage on terminals B1 to B2 (located just below the iBox). Make
sure that a relevel brake voltage exists to avert stalling or excessive current draw by the
DC Drive during a relevel operation. Gearless machines are intended to drag the brake
during a relevel, so a partial pick is appropriate. Note, however, that if the brake did not
drop fully before the relevel, the reduced brake voltage may still hold the brake fully
picked.
Do not spend a lot of time here working on the brake, just be sure the brake does not stall the
motor on a relevel. Final brake adjustment is a later topic in this section. (Please refer to “Brake
Parameter Adjustments” on page 4-27.)
42-02-7223 B8 4-5
Final Adjustment
Reaching Contract Speed (System 12 SCR Drive)

For Quattro DC Drive Reaching Contract Speed see page 4-10.
Note
Be sure to read this entire section before performing the following procedure. The car must be
on Test operation (iBox Test switch to ON) throughout the setup procedure. This prevents the
doors from operating during adjustment.
Final Adjustment Before Running at Contract Speed

The following adjustments must be made in preparation for contract speed operation.
1. Arrange the elevator for no load (empty car) conditions.
2. System 12 Drive only:
• Refer to page -D1 of the job prints under Output Ratings. On the Configuration > Drive
> General tab, set Rated armature voltage equal to the SCR drive maximum output
voltage (header rating).
• Set Rated armature current equal to the SCR drive maximum output current (per
Output Ratings on page -D1 of job prints).
3. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position.
4. Verify motor parameters against the motor name plate.
5. Verify that all drive and initial parameter settings have been programmed. (Refer to Sec-
tion 2 and specifically see “Verifying Initial Parameter Settings” on page 2-19). These
parameters are critical for smooth operation during normal runs.
Determine the Armature Voltage Limit (System 12 SCR Drive)
Armature voltage limit is a percentage of the SCR drive maximum output voltage rating. For
example, if the drive maximum output voltage rating is 300VDC and you wish to limit the volt-
age to 270VDC, set Armature voltage limit (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab) to 90% (270/
300 x 100 = 90%). Factors to consider include:
• If you have a geared installation, read the armature voltage rating from the hoist motor
nameplate and use this figure to calculate the Armature voltage limit setting.
• If you have a gearless installation, you may set the Armature voltage limit to be equal to
the hoist motor name plate voltage rating or up to 10% higher than name plate voltage (as
long as it does not exceed the maximum DC armature voltage rating of the SCR drive on
page -D1 of the job prints). Use this figure to calculate the Armature voltage limit setting.
• In any case, do not set Armature voltage limit any higher than 108% of the numerical value
of the 3-phase AC voltage existing on terminals X1, X2, X3 or Y1, Y2, Y3 on the contactors
at the bottom of the SCR drive. For example, if the 3-phase AC voltage was 270VAC, you
should not set Armature voltage limit any higher than 1.08 x 270 = 291.6VDC = 97%
(291.6/300 x 100 = 97%).
4-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Reaching Contract Speed (System 12 SCR Drive)
Determine the Armature Current Limit (System 12 SCR Drive)

Armature current limit (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab) is a percentage of SCR drive maxi-
mum output current rating and may range up to 276%. To determine the Armature current
limit setting, first find the Maximum Full Load Output Current rating on page -D1 of the job
prints. It is desirable to provide 250% of the full load current rating of the hoist motor during
acceleration or deceleration. (In high performance applications, up to 276% may be desirable.) 4
For example, if the drive maximum full load output current rating is 180 Amps DC and you wish
to limit full load amperage to 140 Amps DC, with a 250% acceleration capability, you must set
Armature current limit to 194% (140/180 x 250 = 194%).
• Make the calculation and set Armature current limit accordingly. (If setting is correct, you
should not see the SCR drive Current Limit indicator LED turn on during normal opera-
tion. It may light during emergency deceleration, especially during testing.)
Note
In some cases, where the voltage limiting mechanism (as determined by Armature voltage
limit) is severely exercised, the Current Limit LED on the SCR drive may light. This may indi-
cate excessive voltage limiting as well as current limiting. Be aware that a low value for Arma-
ture current limit may result in oscillation at high speeds. Once stable operation is achieved, be
sure to increase Armature current limit to at least 200%.
Determine Motor Field Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)

Motor field adjustments may be handled in one of two ways:
• Begin by setting the Field standing voltage (Configuration > Motor Field > Control tab) to
known values and then program Field running voltage to 80% of forcing voltage. In this
case, the SCR drive will weaken the motor field as necessary to keep armature voltage from
exceeding the maximum allowed value. Later, when test weights are available, running
voltage should be adjusted so that, when the car is running at contract speed with a full
load in the up direction, actual armature voltage is equal to rated armature voltage from
the motor name plate. This works well when the motor field has moderate inductance.
• In cases where the motor field is highly inductive and cannot weaken as quickly as neces-
sary, armature voltage limiting circuits in the SCR drive will interfere with the current reg-
ulator, causing the Current Limit LED to light. This must be avoided because it will be
felt in the car. In these instances, you must program a value for high speed motor Field
running voltage (Configuration > Motor Field > Control tab) and program the value for
Field weakening begin and Field weakening end parameters so that significant motor field
weakening occurs before the car reaches maximum armature voltage. Field weakening
begin may be increased as long as there is no armature voltage or speed overshoot. Verify
armature voltage in both up and down directions. Cases where the motor field must
weaken to less than 65% of the forcing voltage are almost certain to require setting Field
running voltage and Field weakening parameters.
At this point, if the motor field is at least moderately warm, you should run the car on inspec-
tion and check to see that the desired Field forcing voltage (Configuration > Motor Field > Con-
trol tab) is the same as that which you measure between terminals MF1 and MF2. It is most
important to get the forcing voltage right using this calibration. It is possible that the measured
standing voltage may be different from the desired standing voltage value. This is OK. Adjust
Field standing voltage to the actual value as measured on terminals MF1 to MF2.
42-02-7223 B8 4-7
Final Adjustment
Speed Pick Delay (System 12 SCR Drive)

To achieve proper starting, without rollback or snapping away from the floor, a variable delay in
the application of the pattern signal is provided. Speed pick delay 1, on the Configuration >
Brake > Control tab, determines the amount of delay from the time the drive processor activates
the Run Enable signal to the time the pattern generator sends out the pattern signal.
1. First adjust (Brake) Pick delay so
the brake just clears the brake
drum as the car is beginning to
accelerate. Do this with an empty
car. The correct setting can be
determined by watching the drive
sheave. Some rollback may be tol-
erated for now, but will be cor-
rected later. If the Drive On Fault
(DRO) appears on the iBox LCD
display when direction is picked,
first increase Pick delay and then
increase Speed pick delay 1 to
coordinate the application of the
pattern signal with the picking of
the brake.
Pattern Scaling (System 12 SCR Drive)

1. Using Pattern scaling on the
Configuration > Pattern >
Common tab, increase con-
tract speed in 10% increments
until the car is running at
80% of contract speed. Moni-
tor performance on the iView
Virtual Oscilloscope. Set:
• Test point 1 to Pattern Command (8V equals contract speed at 100% scaling)
• Test point 2 to Speed Feedback (8V equals contract speed at 100% scaling)
2. Check for severe overshoot by monitoring Speed/Actual
on the Operational Status tab. Excessive overshoot can
trip the governor. If severe overshoot does not occur, con-
tinue to increase car speed in 10% increments by increas-
ing Pattern scaling incrementally up to a maximum of
100%. Verify that car speed is peaking at no more than 3%
over contract speed (10 fpm @ 350 fpm, 15 fpm @ 500
fpm, etc.).
3. If overshoot occurs, reducing Standard/Low roll jerk (Configuration > Pattern > Modes
tab) may help, however, a Safety A (or B) Contract Overspeed Fault will occur if Stan-
dard/Low roll jerk is reduced too much.
4-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Reaching Contract Speed (System 12 SCR Drive)
Armature Voltage (System 12 SCR Drive)

While running the car, observe armature voltage by setting Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 1 to
Armature Voltage Synthetic Feedback.
Note 4
The value show on the Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 1 and output to iBox test point STP1 is
scaled. A value of 8 volts is equal to the System 12 SCR Drive header voltage value shown on
page D1 of the job prints. To calculate the actual value of the reading on the Virtual Oscilloscope
Test point 1 and iBox test point STP1, use the formula: Header value I 8 x Test point 1 value, e.g.
if the header value is 240 volts, a reading of 6 volts on Test point 1 indicates an actual value of
180 volts (240 I 8 x 6 = 180).
As you approach contract speed, see that hoist motor armature voltage does not severely over-
shoot the desired value of the Armature voltage limit parameter (Configuration > Drive > Safety
tab). Any lighting of the Current Limit LED on the SCR drive at low speeds indicates current
limiting and may indicate voltage limiting if the Current Limit LED lights as you approach high
speeds. Also be sure armature voltage is reaching the desired value as you approach contract
speed. If it is too low (full load up/empty car down), the Field running voltage (Configuration >
Motor Field > Control tab) is too low.
Learning Terminal Slowdown Switches

Once the car is running at or near contract speed, you must learn the terminal slowdown
switches in order to safely run the car to the terminal landings (required before performing
drive fine tuning).
Please proceed to “Learning Normal and Emergency Terminal Limit Switches” on

page 4-12.)
Caution
Before learning the terminal switches, you can trip on terminal position and/or velocity faults when
the terminal switches (UNT1, DNT1, etc.) are activated. Avoid activating the terminal switches until
they have been learned.
42-02-7223 B8 4-9
Final Adjustment
Reaching Contract Speed (Quattro DC Drive)

For System 12 SCR Drive Reaching Contract Speed see page 4-6.
Note
Be sure to read this entire section before performing the following procedure. The car must be
on Test operation (iBox Test switch to ON) throughout the setup procedure. This prevents the
doors from operating during adjustment.
Final Adjustment Before Running at Contract Speed

The following adjustments must be made in preparation for contract speed operation.
Speed Pick Delay

To achieve proper starting, without rollback or snapping away from the floor, a variable delay in
the application of the pattern signal is provided. Speed pick delay 1, on the Configuration >
Brake > Control tab, determines the amount of delay from the time the drive processor activates
the Run Enable signal to the time the pattern generator sends out the pattern signal.
1. The brake should just clear the brake
drum as the car is beginning to accelerate.
The recommended initial setting for
(Brake) Pick delay = 0.400 and for Speed
Pick Delay 1 = 0.500. The correct settings
can be determined by watching the drive
sheave. Some rollback may be tolerated
for now, but will be corrected later.
2. If the Drive On Fault (DRO) appears on
the iBox LCD display when direction is
picked, first increase Pick delay and then
increase Speed pick delay 1 to coordinate
the application of the pattern signal with
the picking of the brake.
Timer Diagram
Doors Locked High Pattern
Pattern
Door Open Motor Brake Applied
Limit High Contactor/ Contactor Smooth Pick
Drive Enable
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Voltage Hold Voltage
Weakening Voltage
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time Hold Delay
Speed Pick Delay 1 Timer
4-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Reaching Contract Speed (Quattro DC Drive)
Pattern Scaling (Quattro DC Drive)

1. Using Pattern scaling on the
Configuration > Pattern >
Common tab, increase con-
tract speed in 10% increments
until the car is running at 4
80% of contract speed. Moni-
tor performance on the iView
Virtual Oscilloscope. Set:
• Test point 1 to Pattern Command (8V equals contract speed at 100% scaling)
• Test point 2 to Speed Feedback (8V equals contract speed at 100% scaling)
2. Check for severe overshoot by monitoring Speed/Actual
on the Operational Status tab. Excessive overshoot can
trip the governor. If severe overshoot does not occur, con-
tinue to increase car speed in 10% increments by increas-
ing Pattern scaling incrementally up to a maximum of
100%. Verify that car speed is peaking at no more than 3%
over contract speed (10 fpm @ 350 fpm, 15 fpm @ 500
fpm, etc.).
3. If overshoot occurs, reducing Standard/Low roll jerk (Configuration > Pattern > Modes
tab) may help, however, a Safety A (or B) Contract Overspeed Fault will occur if Stan-
dard/Low roll jerk is reduced too much.
4. Verify car speed by monitoring Speed/Actual on the Operational Status tab, or use a
hand-held tachometer. If car speed is still not correct, verify the following:
• Pattern scaling is 100%.
• If the car is running faster than contract speed parameter, decrease the value of the A1
- Contract Metre Sped parameter.
• If the car is running slower than contract speed parameter increase the value of the A1
- Contract Mtr Spd parameter.
Learning Terminal Slowdown Switches

Once the car is running at or near contract speed, you must learn the terminal landings in order
to safely run the car to the terminal landings (required before performing drive fine tuning).
Please proceed to “Learning Normal and Emergency Terminal Limit Switches” on

page 4-12.
Caution
Before learning the terminal switches, you can trip on terminal position and/or velocity faults when
the terminal switches (UNT1, DNT1, etc.) are activated. Avoid activating the terminal switches until
they have been learned.
42-02-7223 B8 4-11
Final Adjustment
Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches

The Normal Terminal Slowdown Limit (NTS) and Emergency Terminal Limit (ETS) switch
Learn operation records car speed and position at the time each terminal switch is activated on
a normal approach to either terminal landing. This Learn operation should be performed again
after all parameters have been fully adjusted.
Note
The Terminal Switches Learn procedure must be repeated whenever Pattern profile parameters
are modified, since the speed at which the car passes these switches will be different.
To Learn the speeds and positions associated with each NTS and ETS switch:
1. Place the iBox Test switch in the ON position.
2. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position.
3. In iView, display the Terminal Switches layout (View > Layout > Terminal Switches)
4-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit
4. Refer to the job prints to determine which Normal Terminal Limit switches (UNTn and
DNTn) are required for this installation and where they should be positioned in the
hoistway. Verify that the Learned position on the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Sta-
tus tab corresponds to the job prints. If not, refer to the Setup > Terminal Switches tab
and perform the procedure titled “To default terminal switches, please do the follow-
ing:”. 4
5. Move the car to the bottom landing (on Inspection).
6. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the NORM position to allow the car to synchronize to
a floor.
8. If the Not Ready indicator is lighted (Setup > Terminal Switches tab), perform any
instructions shown in the message window.
9. When the Ready indicator is lighted, click Learn. The In Progress indicator will light.
10. You may click Abort at any time to abort the procedure. If the learn process is aborted,
the last saved complete set of values is retained.
11. Place a call to the top terminal landing using the Call Registration panel.
12. When the car stops at the top landing, place a call to the bottom terminal landing.
13. When the procedure is complete, the Done indicator lights and you are prompted to
return the Learn switch to the OFF position. The new NT and ETS switch speeds and
positions are automatically saved to the controller.
14. The learned NT and ETS values are displayed on the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches
Status tab. Verify that all of the switches required for this job have reasonable values dis-
played. If only UNT1 and DNT1 switches are used in addition to UNT5 and DNT5
(always present), the UNT1 and DNT1 values must be 95% of contract speed or less. If
more NT switches are used, UNT1 and DNT1 may have learned speeds equal to contract
speed, but all other NT switches must have learned speeds 95% of contract speed or less.
If some limit switches have learn speeds in excess of their maximum, those switches must be
moved closer to the terminal landings. Alternately, if reduced performance can be tolerated, the
Standard/Deceleration parameter can be reduced.
15. Make several full hatch runs. After each run, on the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches
Status tab, verify that there is a comfortable margin between the last pass speeds and
the Over speed 1 tripping thresholds for the terminal switches used on this job. Also ver-
ify that there is a comfortable margin between the last pass positions and the Upper and
Lower limit position thresholds.
Danger
This procedure must be successfully performed before any passengers are allowed to use the elevator.
42-02-7223 B8 4-13
Final Adjustment
Synthetic Speed Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)

Calibration determines the value for the Voltage safety calibration and Current safety calibra-
tion parameters (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab). These in turn determine synthetic speed.
Calibration requires the elevator to move in both directions and to reach at least 50% of con-
tract speed in each. Actually reaching contract speed yields the best results. Additionally, move-
ment to both terminal landings will yield the best results.
Results can be verified using the Virtual Oscilloscope by observing the synthetic speed signal
(Synthetic Signal) on one test point in comparison to the speed feedback signal (Speed Feed-
back) on the other test point. When calibrated, shape and amplitude of the signals should be
similar.
The Setup > Synthetic Speed tab displays the outputs that represent calibration results (Gains -
Voltage and Current). If these parameters were saved, Voltage safety calibration and Current
safety calibration parameters (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab) should be equal to these out-
put values.
1. Move the car to the top or bottom terminal landing.
2. Place the iBox TEST and LEARN switches in the ON position.
3. In iView, display the Setup > Synthetic Speed tab (View > Setup > Synthetic Speed).
4. Follow the instructions in the message window on the Setup - Synthetic Speed tab.
Note
A manual version of this calibration process is described in Section 2. Please refer to “Tach Fail-
ure Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-45.
4-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Feed Forward Gain Calibration (System 12 SCR
Feed Forward Gain Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)

This calibration determines the baseline value for error compensation. Baseline value deter-
mines the minimum value for the Error compensation parameter (Configuration > Drive >
Control tab).
The process requires the elevator to move in both directions and to reach at least 50% of con- 4
tract speed in each. Reaching contract speed will yield the best result. There is no restriction on
destination landings for calibration runs, but running to terminal landings is best.
Depending on the adjustments made, the characteristics of the hoist-motor, and the character-
istics of the installation, optimum error compensation value is generally between 100% and
150% of the calibration value. There should be no reason for a value below the calibration value.
Calibration results can be verified using the Virtual Oscilloscope by observing the acceleration
feed forward command signal (Acceleration (Command)) on one test point and the composite
armature command signal (Armature Composite Control) on the other. When calibrated, the
shape and amplitude of these signals should be similar. The only discrepancy between the two
signals may be a DC offset if pre-torque is not used.
The Setup > Feed Forward Gain tab displays an output that represents the result of the calibra-
tion process (Gain). If this parameter was saved, the Error compensation parameter (Configu-
ration > Drive > Control tab) should equal this output value.
1. Move the car to the top or bottom terminal landing.
2. Place the iBox TEST and LEARN switches in the ON position.
3. Display the Setup > Feed Forward Gain tab (View > Setup > Feed Forward Gain.
4. Follow the instructions in the message widow on the Setup - Synthetic Speed tab.
42-02-7223 B8 4-15
Final Adjustment
Fine Tuning the Speed Regulator (Quattro DC Drive)

In order to properly tune the speed regulator of the Quattro drive, a valid inertia value must be
determined.
1. With a balanced load in the elevator, bring the elevator to the top landing.
2. In order to obtain a valid inertia value, disable motor field weakening by setting A6-
Weak Fld Current to the same value as A6-Full Fld Current.
3. Run the elevator at full contract speed from the top landing to the bottom landing and
then back up to the top landing. Observe D1-Est Inertia for both the down and up direc-
tions. Average the two values and enter the result for A1-Inertia. Please refer to Inertia
Calculation in the Appendix of the Magnetek Quattro DC Elevator Drive Technical Man-
ual.
4. With the system inertia properly adjusted, final tuning of the speed regulator can be per-
formed.
Note
The A1-Response parameter is one parameter that can be used to adjust the speed regulator
(please refer to the Magnetek Quattro DC Drive Technical Manual for tuning/adjustment pro-
cedures).
Shaping the Speed Profile

The pattern graph below charts the profile of car movement between any two landings and calls
out the parameters that define profile shape. The value of the pattern parameters is very impor-
tant in determining the quality of the ride and the overall performance of the elevator. The most
critical parameters are Deceleration, Flare jerk, Approach deceleration, Approach jerk and Lev-
eling speed since they define final stop and therefore greatly affect floor to floor travel time.
Figure 4.1 Pattern Graph
Velocity Pattern
High Velocity
Low Roll Jerk Low Roll Jerk

Acceleration
Deceleration
Deceleration
High Roll Flare Jerk Flare Jerk
Jerk Approach Jerk Approach Jerk
Leveling Leveling
Initial Approach Velocity Approach Velocity
Jerk Deceleration Deceleration
Leveling Leveling
Time Distance Distance
4-16 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Shaping the Speed Profile
Profile Parameters
• Initial jerk - defines the transition from zero speed to full acceleration. As Initial jerk
increases, the profile transitions more quickly from starting to maximum acceleration.
Values typically range from 4.0 to 8.0 ft/s3 (1.219 to 2.438 m/s3) with higher values result-
ing in a sharper start.
• Acceleration - determines the maximum acceleration for the profile. Determines the
4
maximum current delivered by the SCR Drive during acceleration. The maximum value is
typically 4.0 ft/s2 (1.219 m/s2) and the minimum is usually not less than 2.5 ft/s2 (0.762
m/s2). Values higher than 4.0 ft/s2 (1.219 m/s2) are possible but do not yield significant
improvements in performance.
• High roll jerk - is used on short runs where the car is not able to reach High speed before
deceleration must begin. High roll jerk determines how quickly the profile transitions
from maximum to zero acceleration and zero to maximum deceleration. As High roll jerk
increases, the profile transitions more quickly. Lower values provide greater comfort but
are harder to fit into the shortest one-floor-runs. We recommend that you identify the
shortest full height floor and use it when testing parameter values. Typical values range
from a minimum of 4.0 ft/s3 to a maximum of 8.0 ft/s3.
• Low roll jerk - is used on runs where the car is able to reach High speed before decelera-
tion must begin. Low roll jerk determines how quickly the profile transitions from maxi-
mum to zero acceleration (High speed) and zero to maximum deceleration. As Low roll
jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly. Lower values provide greater comfort.
Typical values range from a minimum of 4.0 ft/s3 to a maximum of 8.0 ft/s3.
• High speed - determines the maximum speed for this profile. For the Standard profile
this is usually contract speed (ft/min).
• Deceleration - determines the maximum deceleration for this profile. The maximum
value is typically 4.0 ft/s2 and the minimum is usually not less than 2.0 ft/s2 with more
common values ranging from 2.75 ft/s2 to 3.75 ft/s2 (0.838 to 1.143 m/s2). The value of
Deceleration is usually slightly less than the value of Acceleration (by 0.25 to 0.5).
• Flare jerk - defines the transition from maximum deceleration to near zero speed or to
Approach deceleration. As Flare jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly from
maximum deceleration to Approach deceleration. Reduction of this parameter is often
used to reduce the tendency to spot or stall near the end of deceleration, and/or to reduce
any tendency for the deceleration rate, as experienced in the car, to bunch up (increase as
the car approaches the floor). The limiting factor in reducing the value of Flare jerk is
inability to fit the profile into the shortest normal one-floor-run.
• Approach deceleration - determines the deceleration rate for the transition from Flare
jerk to Approach jerk.
• Approach jerk - defines the transition from approach deceleration to Leveling speed. As
Approach jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly from Approach deceleration
to Leveling speed.
• Leveling speed - determines the speed at which the elevator will level into the floor.
• Leveling distance - determines the stabilized distance the elevator will travel before
arriving at the destination floor.
42-02-7223 B8 4-17
Final Adjustment
Profiles
There are eight programmable profiles addressed on the Pattern Screen:
• Standard - used under normal operating conditions. Unless otherwise specified, sug-
gested profile parameter adjustments are assumed to refer to Standard profile parameters.
• Earthquake - used if an earthquake is detected by the elevator system during normal
operation (EQI input activated). If you have earthquake operation, you will verify proper
operation during testing.
• Emergency power - used when the Emergency power input (EPI) is activated, indicat-
ing a loss of commercial power and that the car is running on generator power.
• Emergency slowdown - used when the system requires faster than normal decelera-
tion. It is used in response to situations such as the normal terminal stopping device being
activated or loss of the quadrature signal (positioning signal). Note that the Emergency
rate limited stop parameter (Configuration > Drive > General tab) will limit how fast this
profile can slow the car down. Increasing this parameter will allow higher deceleration
rates to be used for the Emergency Slowdown Profile.
• Correction - used when the system is not confident of the car position in the hoistway.
The car proceeds to a known position using the Correction profile parameters in order to
synchronize its position information.
• Inspection - used when the system is placed on Inspection/Access operation. The
Inspection profile is also used when the system is learning the building floor heights.
• Alternate 1 - used when the Alternate Speed Profile One input (ASP1) is activated.
• Alternate 2 - used when the Alternate Speed Profile Two input (ASP2) is activated.
Setting Pattern Parameters

By viewing the commanded pattern and car speed feedback on the iView Virtual Oscilloscope as
the car is running, any discontinuity in the idealized speed profile can be observed.
• On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope:
• Set Test point 1 = Pattern (Command)
• Set Test point 2 = Speed Feedback
Note
Unless otherwise specified, suggested parameter adjustments are assumed to be referring to

Standard profile parameters.
• Initial Values for Pattern Parameters - Pattern shape preset can be used to enter
preset values for the Standard profile parameters based on the high speed (contract speed)
of the elevator and the selected shape type (Slow, Moderate or Fast). This provides an
excellent starting point.
• Contract Speed Overshoot and Current Limiting -To prevent contract speed over-
shoot and/or current limiting from the drive, the Acceleration and Low roll jerk parame-
ters can be reduced. The Low roll jerk rate has a slightly greater effect on overshoot at high
speed than does Acceleration. The Acceleration parameter has the most effect on current
limiting. Observe actual car response on iBox test point STP2 and GND (with the Test
point 2 parameter set to Speed Feedback) to verify that there is no overshoot.
4-18 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Shaping the Speed Profile
• Slope of Acceleration / Deceleration - Ideally, the slope of acceleration in volts per

second should be equal to or slightly greater than the slope of deceleration as viewed on an
oscilloscope connected to iBox test point STP1 and COM (Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 1
set to Speed Feedback Filtered). In a system where tracking accuracy is very good, Acceler-
ation can be equal to Deceleration. If tracking is less accurate, set Acceleration greater
than Deceleration to get the same effective rate of deceleration as acceleration. 4
• Final Approach to the Floor -
Final approach to the floor can be
customized in many ways. If track-
ing accuracy is very good, set as fol-
lows on the iView Pattern >
Common tab:
• Leveling speed = Your desired
leveling speed. A typical number
is from 2 to 4.
• Leveling distance = your choice. A typical setting is from 0.12 to 0.25.
If tracking is not perfect, you can begin to introduce values in Leveling speed and distance that
allow you to mold the shape of the last few inches of approach.
• Excessive Motor Noise - If there is excessive motor noise or if acceleration or decelera-
tion feels rough, reduce Acceleration and/or Deceleration to provide the desired results.
• Bunching up of Deceleration Rate - If you observe “bunching up” of deceleration
(decel rate increase in the last few feet of approach), it is generally due to poor tracking:
1. You must improve accuracy or lower the value of the Flare jerk and/or Approach jerk
parameters. Remember that there are very real limits to how low you can set these
parameters (1.75 ft/s3 is often as low as you can go).
2. Verify Lag Delay is correct. Depending on drive tuning, lag between commanded speed
and drive response can vary. As the drive is adjusted, the Lag delay parameter on the
Controller > View > Configuration > Pattern > Common tab will need to change as well.
• If lag delay is insufficient, the elevator will plow into a landing. The acceleration and
jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be greater than profile values indicate.
• If lag delay is excessive, the elevator will drag into a landing. Acceleration and jerk rate
during deceleration will be less than profile values indicate. In addition, a discontinu-
ity in the profile will occur during the transition from acceleration to deceleration for
movement between floors where a stabilized speed is not reached. Under normal oper-
ation, this would occur when contract speed is not achieved.
• To adjust Lag delay, observe “Acceleration (Raw)” on the virtual oscilloscope. Perform
one-floor-run movement and observe the transition through zero (peak acceleration
transitioning to peak deceleration as the elevator reaches its peak speed that is less
than contract speed). This transition should have no vertical (too much Lag delay) or
horizontal (too little Lag delay) discontinuity. This transition adjustment is only valid
when the elevator is unable to reach the maximum speed for a particular profile
(unable to reach contract speed under normal operation). A physical oscilloscope may
be required to see this transition properly. Adjust the Lag delay until the vertical dis-
continuity is eliminated.
• For initial setup, set the Lag delay parameter to 0.3 seconds on the Configuration >
Pattern > Common tab.
42-02-7223 B8 4-19
Final Adjustment
Controlling Initial Start of Car Motion

Some gearless machines may exhibit rollback at the start of car motion.. Rollback control
adjustments include:
• Pre-torque implementation for systems with analog load weighers
• Adjusting motor control parameters specific to start of motion
• Performing a thorough brake adjustment (iField Brake Module only)
Pre-torque Adjustments
For installations using an analog load weigher, load information can be used to “pre-torque”
the hoist motor to accommodate load changes at a floor and prevent sagging or rollback.
Two pre-torque methods are provided: Balanced Load and Empty/Full Load. The Balanced
Load method is backwards compatible with the method used in previous releases of iControl
software. Balanced mode parameters are found on the left and Empty/Full Load parameters are
on the right side of the iView (Controller > Drive > Pre-Torque) screen shown below.
Note
Performing safety and buffer tests described later in this section will probably require that you
repeat the pre-torque adjustment described here.
4-20 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Controlling Initial Start of Car Motion
Balanced Load Method

This method requires gain and position compensation adjustment when balanced load is placed
in the car. Furthermore, verification is required when the car is empty and fully loaded at each
serviceable landing.
Since the adjustments for this method occur only at the top and bottom terminal floor, unusual
pre-toque requirements at other landings are not accommodated (i.e. warped rails).
4
Note
This method must be used when no load weigher is available and the No pretorque option or
Synthetic pretorque option is used.
Empty/Full Load Method

This method collects pre-torque information during a learn process with a car that is empty and
fully loaded. No pre-torque adjustments are required. This method allows the collection of pre-
torque information for up to 35 floors and requires pre-torque information for at least the top
and bottom terminal floor. As a result, with pretorque information collected only for the top
and bottom terminal floor, this method mimics the Balanced Load method.
Let us assume a building with 4 floors. A fully configured table would contain 4 entries:
• Row 4 would correlate to floor 4.
A minimally configured table, on the other hand, would only contain 2 entries:
Needless to say, the number of table entries can vary from 2 to the number of floors (as long as
the number of floors is 35 or less) in the building. The following examples offer some possibili-
ties between a minimally and fully configured table:
• A 6 story building with a 4 entry table - floor 1, floor 3, floor 4, and floor 6.
• A 17 story building with a 5 entry table - floor 1, floor 5, floor 9, floor 13, and floor 17.
Since pretorque information is available for up to 35 landings, unusual pretoque requirements
at landings are accommodated (i.e. warped rails).
Note
This method can only be used when a load weigher is available. It is also only available for Sys-
tem 12 drives.
Load Weigher Sensor Adjustment

Review the installation and adjustment instructions for the load weigher and verify that all
steps have been completed, including:
42-02-7223 B8 4-21
Final Adjustment
• Rope Tension Sensing Load Weigher - perform the procedures described in the EMCO
Load Weigher instruction.
• Crosshead Deflection Load Weigher - perform the procedures described in the “Adjust-
ments” section of the K-Weigh Instruction Manual.
• Isolated Platform Load Weigher - perform the adjustment procedures described in the
MCE Load Weigher instruction.
Next, verify that the iBox is receiving the load weigher signals properly.
1. On Independent service, move the car
to the landing at which the test
weights are stored.
2. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope
screen, select Load Weigher (Raw) on
Test point 1.
3. With the car empty, verify that the
Test point 1 reading is at least 0.5 but
not greater than 1.5.
4. Place a full load in the car. Verify that
the Test point 1 value is now between
5.5 and 8.0. If necessary, adjust trim-
pot LW ADJ on the CTP (cartop)
board in the iLink enclosure to achieve
the correct reading.
Pretorque Adjustments - Balanced Mode Method

1. Place a balanced load in the car (the balanced load weight recorded when performing
the Counterweight Balancing procedure). Please refer to “Counterweight Balancing” on
page 3-13.
2. With the car in Test mode (iBox TEST switch ON) move the car to the top floor. All other
inspectin modes must be inactive (i.e. cartop, in-car, access, etc.)
3. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, enable the Pretorque option and send
the new selection to iControl.
4. On the Virtual Oscilloscope, select Load Weigher Balanced on Test point 1. If necessary,
adjust the windows so that you can see the oscilloscope and the Pre-Torque parameters
at the same time.
5. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, adjust the Pretorque balance adjust-
ment parameter until the digital readout for Test point 1, Load Weigher Balanced, is
equal to or as close to zero (0.0) as possible.
6. If Error compensation, on the Configuration > Drive > Control tab, was increased to
compensate for rollback, you may lower the value now.
4-22 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

7. Verify that Pretorque position compensation, on the Drive > Pre-torque tab is set to 0.0.
If necessary, set it to 0.0 and Send it to the controller.
8. Verify that Pretorque gain, on the Drive > Pre-torque tab, is 0.0. If necessary, set it to
0.0 and Send it to the controller.
9. On the Configuration > Brake > Control tab, increase the value of Speed Pick Delay 1 to
2.0 seconds so that any rollback is easily detected.Remove the weights from the car and
4
move the car to one floor below the top landing.
10. Make a one-floor-run down. Check for rollback by either watching the motor or by mon-
itoring the Speed Feedback signal on the Virtual Oscilloscope.
11. If rollback is detected, adjust the Pretorque gain parameter on the Drive > Pre-Torque
tab, and again make a one-floor run down from one floor below the top landing. Repeat
until rollback is no longer noticeable. Then verify that there is no rollback on a one-floor
run going up from one floor below the top landing.
12. For a Quattro DC Drive, if increasing the Pretorque gain causes more rollback, change
the A1-Ext Torque Mult parameter from 1.0 to -1.0 (flip the polarity).
13. Run the car to the bottom landing. Make one-floor runs up and then down, checking for
rollback.
14. If rollback is detected, decrease the value (less positive or more negative) of Pretorque
position compensation, on the Drive > Pre-Torque tab. Repeat until no rollback is
detected on one-floor runs up or down in the lower hoistway. If pull-though is detected,
increase the value (more positive or less negative). Pretorque position compensation has
a range of -5.00o to +5.000.
15. With the car empty, check throughout the hoistway and verify that rollback is not
detected.
16. Place full load weights in the car and check for rollback throughout the hoistway. Verify
that rollback is not detected. Adjust Pretorque gain, on the Drive Pre-Torque tab, if nec-
essary.
17. Again remove all weights from the car. Check for rollback throughout the hoistway and
verify that no rollback is detected. If some rollback has been introduced by adjusting the
Pretorque gain for a full load, optimize the setting for an empty car, since this is the
most frequent condition.
18. Reduce Speed Pick Delay 1, on the Configuration > Brake > Control tab, to the mini-
mum value which still allows the brake to lift fully before motion starts. You should not
feel the car pulling out from under the brake. The brake should lift fully before motion
starts, but avoid unnecessary delay in starting movement.
Note
If this car will be using the load weigher for dispatching functions, e.g. Light load anti-nuisance,
etc., you may want to set the parameters and learn the load values at this time. Please refer to
“Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching ” on page 4-38.
Pre-torque Adjustments - Empty/Full Load Method

1. Place the car in Test mode (iBox INSPECT switch set to NORM and TEST switch set to
ON). All other inspection modes must be inactive (i.e. cartop, in-car, access, etc.).
42-02-7223 B8 4-23
Final Adjustment
2. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, select "Balanced Load" as the Pretorque
Method and select "No Pretorque" as the Pretorque Option. Send the new selections to
the controller. The "Empty/Full Load" option should not be selected for the Pretorque
Method when the pretorque table is being configured.
3. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, select Acquire Location Data. Send the
new selection to the controller.
4. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, set the Locations parameter to the
number of floors that the elevator services or the number of floors that will provide pre-
torque information. Send the new selection to the controller. The first row in the pre-
torque table must correlate with the bottom terminal floor and the last row (highest
numbered row) must correlate with the top terminal floor.
5. Move the car in Test mode to a floor where weights can be removed from inside the car.
6. Remove all weights from inside the car.
7. Move the car to the bottom terminal floor.
8. Place the car in Machine Room Inspection mode (iBox INSPECTION switch set to
INSP). All other inspection modes must be inactive (i.e. cartop, in-car, access, etc.).
9. Select the row in the table that correlates to the building floor where the elevator is
located.
10. Move the car in the up direction (iBox UP and ENABLE switches pressed) until the
motor stops rotating and holds the cab steady.
11. Release up direction.
12. Press the Fill Empty button to fill the position, load, and current values for the empty
scenario. Send the information to the controller.
13. Place the car in Test mode.
14. Run the car to the next floor above that will be used to gather pretorque information.
15. Repeat steps 8 through 14 until the top floor is configured.
16. Move the car in Test mode to a floor where weights can be loaded inside the car.
17. Place a full load of weights inside the car.
18. Move the car to the bottom terminal floor.
19. Place the car in Machine Room Inspection mode.
20. Select the row in the table that correlates to the building floor where the elevator is
located.
21. Move the car in the up direction until the motor stops rotating and holds the cab steady.
22. Release up direction.
23. Press the Fill Full button to fill the position, load, and current values for the full sce-
nario. Send the information to the controller.
24. Place the car in Test mode.
25. Run the car to the next floor above that will be used to gather pretorque information.
26. Repeat steps 19 through 25 until the top floor is configured.
27. Move the car in Test mode to a floor where weights can be removed from inside the car.
28. Remove all weights from inside the car.
29. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, deselect Acquire Location Data. Send
the new selection to the controller.
4-24 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

30. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, select "Empty/Full Load" as the Pre-
torque Method. Send the new selection to the controller.
31. The pretorque table is now fully configured and available.
32. Check for rollback throughout the hoistway and verify that no rollback is detected.
33. Reduce Speed Pick Delay 1, on the Configuration > Brake > Control tab, to the minimum 4
value which still allows the brake to lift fully before motion starts. You should not feel
the car pulling out from under the brake. The brake should lift fully before motion
starts, but avoid unnecessary delay in starting movement.
Note
If this car will be using the load weigher for dispatching functions, e.g. Light load anti-nuisance,
etc., you may want to set the parameters and learn the load values at this time. Please refer to
“Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching ” on page 4-38.
42-02-7223 B8 4-25
Final Adjustment
Motor Control Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)

If rollback is a problem and the installation does not use an analog load weigher (allowing Pre-
torque rollback compensation), adjusting Drive > Control tab parameters as described below
will help. The following illustration shows how normal gains are changed by Start gain (normal)
adjustments.
Figure 4.2 Initial Gain Adjustment Effects
Gains 5
Initial
Normal
10
Pattern
Speed Pick Delay
0
Time
1. On the Drive > Control tab, enable Options /
Start gain (normal).
2. Set PID-Start (normal) / Proportional to twice
the value of PID-Standard / Proportional.
3. Set PID-Start (normal) /Integral to twice the
value of PID-Standard / Integral.
4. Set PID-Start (normal) /Differential to twice
the value of PID-Standard / Differential.
5. Set PID-Start (normal) / Transition Time to 1.0 seconds.
6. Make a one floor run and look for rollback or oscillation at the start of motion.
Rollback
7. If you see rollback, but no oscillation, increase PID-Start (normal) / Proportional, Inte-
gral, and Differential by 25% each.
8. Make a one floor run and again look for rollback or oscillation. If rollback is still a prob-
lem, again increase PID-Start (normal) / Proportional, Integral, and Differential set-
tings by 25% each.
9. Continue testing and adjusting gains as necessary until rollback is controlled but before
oscillation from too much Start (normal) gain becomes a problem.
Oscillation
10. Refer to steps 7, 8, and 9, except begin by reducing Start (normal) / Proportional, Inte-
gral, and Differential by 25%.
11. If oscillation persists, try reducing only the Start (normal) / Differential gain setting.
12. You may also try keeping Proportional and Differential gain as high as possible but
reduce Transition Time in 0.1 second increments until oscillation is diminished but roll-
back remains under control.
4-26 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Drive Control Adjustments (Quattro DC Drive)

Please refer to the Magnetek Quattro DC Drive Technical Manual for tuning and adjustment
procedures.
Brake Parameter Adjustments 4

The iField braking module allows you to make some very refined brake adjustments for smooth
picking to control rollback.
• First, find the level of brake excitation that results in a very gradual but complete picking
of the brake:
1. Place the car on Inspection (iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position). Set Pattern
scaling (Pattern > Common tab) to 10% to provide an inspection speed of about 5 to 10
fpm.
Figure 4.3 Brake timing diagram for smooth picking
Voltage (volts)
T1 = Weakening Delay
T2 = Repick Time
Vp T3 = Hold Delay
Vp = Brake Pick Voltage

Vh Vh = Brake Hold Voltage
Vw = Brake Weakening Voltage
Vw
Time (seconds)
T1 T2 T3
2. Display the Configuration > Brake > Control tab and record the original parameters
before making any changes. Verify the following settings:
• Weakening delay = 0.00
• Repick time = 0.00
3. Set the Pick voltage and the Hold voltage to ½ of the original value of Pick voltage.
4. Slowly increase both Pick and Hold voltages until the brake picks completely. The idea is
to increase or decrease both Pick voltage and Hold voltage identically until the brake
just barely picks all the way. Then, add 5 or 10 volts and verify that the brake still has a
very slow, smooth picking motion (taking 1 to 1.5 seconds to pick). The goal is to find a
brake voltage that allows the brake to transition slowly through the pressure-releasing
part of the movement.
5. Set the Weakening voltage to the same value as Pick Voltage and Hold Voltage. For
geared applications, if the brake holding voltage is not specified, set Weakening voltage
and Hold voltage = Pick voltage.
42-02-7223 B8 4-27
Final Adjustment
6. Apply a maximum value of brake voltage, very briefly, at the start of movement. This
gets the brake quickly to the point in the lifting process where a substantial amount of
tension is released. This is done as follows:
• Set Pick voltage back to the original value to allow a high initial value of brake voltage.
• Set Repick time to 1.00 second to allow a slow transition through the pressure-releas-
ing part of movement, after which the brake voltage briefly returns to a high value to
ensure that the brake fully picks. (See the following note.)
• Increase the value of Weakening delay in 0.05 second increments until you see the
brake move more quickly in the first part of its movement so it can reach the stage
where the pressure is starting to be released. Typical values are between 0.10 to 0.45
seconds. The final result will often look as if the brake is lifting at a fairly constant rate,
even though the initial voltage is high. This overcomes the natural tendency for a gear-
less brake to start lifting slowly and then faster the further it lifts.
Note
Full brake Pick voltage is automatically applied for about a second at the end of the brake
Weakening delay, just after the brake has cleared the braking surface, thereby guaranteeing full
lifting after a smooth transition through the zone of pressure release. After the brief return to
full brake voltage, the brake voltage will automatically drop to the Hold voltage, but must not
allow the brake to sag back onto the braking surface.
• Verify the manufacturers recommended value for brake holding voltage and set Hold
voltage to that value. If this information is not available, experiment with Hold voltage
to determine the voltage necessary to hold the brake up, and then add a little extra
margin.
7. At this point, a storage oscilloscope is suggested to get the best results from adjustment.
Connect the scope to iBox test points STP2 and GND (with the iView Virtual Oscillo-
scope Test point 2 parameter set to Speed Feedback) to view car speed response.
8. Set the horizontal sweep to about 0.5 to 0.2 second per division and increase vertical
gain until you see a microscopic view of the breakaway at the start of movement. A
rough start is characterized by jaggedness at the beginning of the curve; a smooth start
by a smooth transition from the horizontal line to the acceleration curve. Using this
method, you can touch up parameters such as Speed pick delay 1 in the next step.
10. Coordinate the start of the car with brake operation by increasing Speed pick delay 1
(Configuration > Brake > Control tab) until you begin to see rollback at the start of an
empty car DOWN run at the top floor. Then, decrease Speed pick delay 1 until rollback
just disappears.
It may be helpful to reduce the Initial jerk parameter to 5.00 or 4.00 to help provide a smooth
start. Remember that any change in the brake parameters, Initial jerk, or any of the gain
parameters relating to the speed loop will probably affect the coordination of the starts. There-
fore, you must readjust Speed pick delay 1 after any such changes.
4-28 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Figure 4.4 Effect of Speed pick delay on the start of car motion
Volts
Speed Pick Delay just right
4
Not enough
Speed Pick Delay
Time
Too much Speed Pick Delay
Brake Lifts
Become familiar with the correlation between what is seen on the scope and what is felt in the
car at the start of motion. Use the scope to adjust brake parameters to provide smooth starts. If
the car has sleeve bearings, be sure to evaluate starts without letting too much time pass
between runs to get accurate rollback information. Once you see the effect of the various param-
eter adjustments on car operation, you will see how important it is to have the brake properly
adjusted.
The value of Repick time (Configuration > Brake > Control tab) can be reduced but doing so will
reduce the time that the brake spends accomplishing a slow lift with Weakening voltage
applied. This will eventually cause the brake to start lifting rapidly. Typically, Repick delay
should not be less than 0.50 seconds.
42-02-7223 B8 4-29
Final Adjustment
Calibrating the Floor Offsets

iControl provides an easy and precise method of setting the parameters required to stop the car
accurately at every floor. Stopping “spot on” at every floor requires three things:
1. The control system must know the exact position of the car in the hoistway and the exact
position of each landing target (magnet). Without requiring any user adjustment, the
extremely accurate iLand landing system allows iControl to know the car’s position in
the hoistway to within 1/20 inch. And the Floor Height Learn procedure, see “Learning
the Floor Heights” on page 4-2, allows iControl to know the exact position of the landing
target to the same accuracy.
2. The control system must know the exact position in the hoistway of each landing sill.
Calibrating the floor offsets allows iControl to know this position to an accuracy limited
only by the accuracy of your measurement.
3. The car must be adjusted to stop smoothly and consistently, given the limitations of con-
trolling the machine and brake and the inevitable trade off between stopping accuracy
and ride quality. These adjustments will be performed after the floor offsets are cali-
brated. Please refer to “Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop” on page 4-33.
Floor offset calibration procedure

This procedure requires IMP software version 002.001.001 or greater and iView software ver-
sion 003.000.001 or greater.
Floor offset calibration can be performed by one or two persons. You will move the car to each
floor that you want to calibrate, and the distance between the car sill and landing sill must be
measured. You can use the form provided to record your measurements (See “Floor Offset Cali-
bration Record” on page 4-32). You need not perform the calibration for all floors each time the
procedure is performed.
The measured values, in decimal inches, will be entered into iView on the Setup > Floor Heights
> Floor Offsets tab). You can make the measurement using a fractional inch square and then
use the conversion table provided to determine the decimal value. But the better way is to use a
machinist square which is marked in decimal inches.
Once the floor offsets have been entered, iControl is able to calculate the exact location of each
hoistway landing sill using the known exact position of the car, known exact position of the tar-
get magnet and the measured distance from the car sill to the hoistway sill. Then, once the car is
adjusted to stop smoothly and consistently, iControl can stop the car “spot on” at every landing.
4-30 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

To calibrate the floor offsets:

1. Display the Floor Offsets Setup tab by selecting Floor Heights from the View > Layouts
menu and then clicking the Setup > Floor Offsets tab.
2. Move the car to the desired starting landing (e.g. top or bottom terminal landing). The
Ready indicator should light. Follow the instructions provided in the text box.
3. Verify that the machine room INSPECTION switch is in the NORM position. It is recom-
mended to place the car on Independent service while performing this calibration.
4. Click Calibrate to begin making offset measurements. The In progress indicator lights.
5. Run the car to each floor where you want to calibrate the floor offset and perform step
#6. It is not necessary to calibrate all floors each time this procedure is performed.
6. Upon arrival at each floor, wait about 10 seconds to allow the car to settle and for iCon-
trol to acquire the car’s exact position (Acquired light turns on). Measure and record the
distance the car sill is above or below the hoistway landing sill, and record the direction
(car sill above or below). If the sills are not parallel, record the average measurement.
7. Return to the starting floor and measure its offset last. The Done indicator lights indi-
cating that the measurement portion of the offset calibration procedure is completed.
8. Enter the measured value (decimal inches) in the Measured in column (Offsets table on
the Setup> Floor Heights > Floor Offsets tab). If the car sill was above the landing sill,
enter a plus (+) value. If the car sill was below the landing sill, enter a minus (-) value.
9. Click Send to send the new offset values to the iController.
42-02-7223 B8 4-31
Final Adjustment
Table 4.1 Floor Offset Calibration Record
Car Above/ Fractional Decimal Car Above/ Fractional Decimal

Floor Floor
below landing inch inch below landing inch inch
30 60
29 59
28 58
27 57
26 56
25 55
24 54
23 53
22 52
21 51
20 50
19 49
18 48
17 47
16 46
15 45
14 44
13 43
12 42
11 41
10 40
9 39
8 38
7 37
6 36
5 35
4 34
3 33
2 32
1 31
Table 4.2 Fractional inch to decimal inch conversion
Fractional in. Decimal in. Fractional in. Decimal in.

1/32 .031 9/32 .281
1/16 .063 5/16 .313
3/32 .094 11/32 .344
1/8 .125 3/8 .375
5/32 .156 13/32 .406
3/16 .188 7/16 .438
7/32 .219 15/32 .469
1/4 .250 1/2 .500
4-32 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop
Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop

This section describes adjusting leveling into the floor and bringing the car to a final stop.
Final Approach and Leveling

Observe elevator operation by watching the hoist motor and observing car response on iBox test 4
point STP1 to GND (with the Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 1 parameter = Speed Feedback).
• If tracking accuracy is very good, increase Leveling speed and decrease Leveling distance
to reduce floor-to-floor time. You can also increase the value of Approach jerk, Decelera-
tion, and Flare jerk.
• If tracking is not perfect, begin to reduce Deceleration, Approach jerk, and Flare jerk
parameters to mold the shape of the last few inches of approach. Some experimentation
will be necessary in order to see the effect of changing parameter values. A digital storage
oscilloscope is essential.
• The goal is for the speed pattern shape to flare out and blend the deceleration into the lev-
eling speed. It is possible to modify the pattern to obtain a lot of stabilized leveling or to
decelerate the elevator all the way into the floor to obtain the best brake-to-brake times. It
is here that most of the performance and perceived ride quality is determined. Try the full
load range to be sure stops are consistent.
Final Stop
There are many items to consider for a smooth and accurate stop. Each contributes to the final
result:
• Brake drop delay - First adjust Brake drop delay on the Configuration > Brake > Con-
trol tab to provide too much delay in dropping the brake so you can clearly see the com-
plete electrical stopping characteristics of the hoist motor. Keep these characteristics in
mind as adjustments are made. It may be necessary to change Brake drop delay more than
once to clearly see the results. It is most important to never drop the brake on a moving
motor.
• Normal rate limited stop - Adjusting Normal rate limited stop (Configuration > Drive
> General tab) will also determine how harshly the stop is felt (higher values yield harsher
stops). Lower values may require a larger dead zone. To prevent the car from pulling
through under the brake, do NOT set this parameter to 0.0.
• Voltage decay time - Adjusting Voltage decay time (Configuration > Brake > Voltages
tab) determines how softly the brake drops (higher values yield softer drop). If Voltage
decay time is set too high, there will be loss of control during the time between the drive
“disconnecting” and the brake setting firmly.
• Leveling Speed - If this speed is too high, a quick transition to zero speed will occur. This
results in a bump at the stop or possible overshoot at the floor resulting in a releveling
operation. If the leveling speed is too slow, the car will stop very close to the edge of the
dead zone, which will cause the system to relevel frequently. Reasonable values of Leveling
speed (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab) range from 3 to 6 fpm. Before setting the
Dead zone distance, the selection of Leveling speed must be completed so that you are sat-
isfied with the complete final approach to the floor. If overshoot occurs frequently, adjust
Dead zone distance.
42-02-7223 B8 4-33
Final Adjustment
• Dead zone - The purpose of the dead zone is to ensure that the elevator stops at the same
point whether approaching a particular floor from above or below. The dead zone is a soft-
ware-defined area at a floor, typically 0.25 inches (6 mm) to 0.75 inches (18 mm) in
height. Ideally, the elevator stops in the center of the dead zone.
Because of the mass of the elevator system, it will not stop as soon as it is commanded to
stop. It will slide slightly before stopping. The Dead zone distance should be adjusted so
that the elevator stops consistently at the same position relative to the floor level from
both directions. Dead zone adjustment need only be adjusted for one floor. All other floors
will react in the same way.
Note
Dead zone distance should be adjusted before fine tuning floor height offset.
1. Choose a floor in the middle of the hoistway that allows the car to reach Contract Speed
when approaching from either direction.
2. Start with the default Dead zone distance (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
3. Put the car on Test Operation. Verify that the iBox Inspection switch is in the NORM
position. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position.
4. Run the car to the chosen floor from the top and make sure the car achieves Contract
Speed. Note the position of the car when it stops at the floor (i.e., 1/4” above the floor or
1/8” below the floor, etc.).
5. Run the car to the chosen floor from the bottom and make sure the car achieves Con-
tract Speed. Note the position of the car when it stops at the floor.
6. If the car consistently stops at the same position, (for example, 1/8” above the floor
approaching from above or below), then Dead zone distance is properly adjusted. (Floor
Offset can be adjusted later so that the car stops perfectly level with the floor.)
7. If the car overshoots and relevels, the Dead zone distance is too tight. Increase Dead
zone distance and repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. Otherwise, the Dead zone distance is too wide. Decrease Dead zone distance until the
car stops consistently at the same position relative to the floor, repeating steps 4 and 5.
4-34 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

• Brake Coordination for Smooth Stops - Proper operation and setting of the brake is
very important to achieve a smooth stop:
1. Before starting, the brake must be operating properly. Geared machine brakes are usu-
ally very simple, however, the brake on a gearless machine requires detailed adjustment
to obtain proper operation. For now, be sure to adjust brake tension to hold 125% of a
rated load (or the value required by your local code authorities). To establish a holding 4
voltage for a brake in a geared installation, refer to the manufacturers recommended
value. If this information is not available, experiment with the Hold Voltage (Brake Con-
figuration/Voltage tab) to find the voltage necessary to hold the brake and then add a lit-
tle extra margin.
2. If you have already adjusted the brake to the correct mechanical clearances and the
brake is still clunking down too hard when the car stops, increase Voltage Decay Time
(Configuration > Brake > Control tab (iField module, high current braking only). For
low current brakes, decrease the RB resistance inside the iPower Box.
3. Next, adjust Drop Delay (Configuration > Brake > Control tab) so that the brake drops
the instant hoist motor motion stops. The primary means of coordinating brake drop
with motion stop is adjusting Brake Drop Delay. The initial setting should be 0.00 sec-
onds. Increase Drop Delay in increments of 0.10 second until the motor is clearly at zero
speed when the brake drops. The goal is to avoid dropping the brake on a moving motor,
but also to avoid holding the brake up longer than necessary.
4. Adjust Voltage Decay Time to determine how softly the brake drops (higher values yield
softer drop). If Voltage Decay Time is set too high, there will be loss of control during the
time between the drive “disconnecting” and the brake setting firmly.
Figure 4.5 Effect of Brake Drop Delay on Stopping
Speed Feedback
Drop Delay just right
Not enough Drop Delay Too much Drop Delay

Time
42-02-7223 B8 4-35
Final Adjustment
Releveling Operation
• Relevel dead zone distance — The Relevel dead zone distance is similar to Dead zone
distance except that the Relevel dead zone distance applies only while the car is releveling.
During releveling, the brake is partially set and the speed is very slow (usually 4 to 8 feet
per minute). Therefore, the car does not slide as much. As a result, Relevel dead zone dis-
tance should be tighter than Dead zone distance. Relevel dead zone adjustment need only
be adjusted for one floor. All other floors will react in the same way. Brake Relevel voltage
(Configuration > Brake > Voltages tab) should be adjusted properly before adjusting the
Relevel dead zone distance. In general, Relevel dead zone must be less than Relevel dis-
tance.
1. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position. Verify that the iBox Inspection
switch is in the NORM position.
2. Move the car to a floor away from the terminal landing to allow releveling to the floor
from both directions.
3. Put the car on Machine Room Inspection.
4. On Machine Room Inspection, move the car up about 3 inches above the floor. Turn off
Machine Room Inspection to allow the car to relevel down to the floor. Note the position
of the car when it stops at the floor (i.e., 1/4 inch above the floor or 1/8 inch below the
floor, etc.).
5. On Machine Room Inspection, move the car down about 3 inches below the floor. Turn
off Machine Room Inspection to allow the car to relevel up to the floor. Note the position
of the car when it stops at the floor (i.e., 1/4 inch above the floor or 1/8 inch below the
floor, etc.).
6. If the car consistently stops at the same position, (for example, 1/8 inch above the floor
approaching from above or below), then Relevel dead zone distance is properly
adjusted. (Floor Offset can be adjusted later so that the car stops perfectly level with the
floor.)
7. If the car overshoots the floor during releveling, the Relevel dead zone distance is too
tight. Increase Relevel dead zone distance and repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. Otherwise, the Relevel dead zone distance is too wide. Decrease Relevel dead zone dis-
tance until the car stops consistently at the same position relative to the floor, repeating
steps 4 and 5.
• Rope stretch releveling — On high-rise applications, when the car is very low in the
building with hundreds of feet of cable between the machine and the elevator, substantial
movement can occur when elevator load changes, thereby causing releveling. To make the
system more tolerant of this movement, the Relevel distance parameter adjusts the
amount by which the elevator must be away from the floor before the releveling operation
is engaged. The range of adjustment is from 0.00 to 1.00 inch, with a typical value being
0.72 inches.
4-36 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Ride Quality (System 12 SCR Drive)

If you are experiencing a ride sensation that is not exactly oscillation, but might be described as
a rough texture, it might be due to:
• The encoder, attached to the motor shaft, may not be mounted securely, which may cause
bouncing or a slight variation in the speed feedback signal once every revolution. On a 4
geared machine, the coupling used between the tach or encoder and the motor can also be
a source of vibration. In both cases, the problem is observed by looking at the AC-coupled
encoder speed signal on iBox test point STP2 (with the Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 2
set to Speed Feedback). You may see the vibration frequency increase and decrease with
car speed. This is absolute proof of a mechanical problem with the speed transducer. Elec-
trically induced oscillations will be characterized by a frequency of oscillation that is con-
stant (does not change significantly with speed).
• If the above steps do not resolve the vibration, the motor may not have been trimmed to
the machine properly. Use a dial indicator to check alignment of motor and machine.
Ride Quality (Quattro DC Drive)

If you are experiencing a ride sensation that is not exactly oscillation, but might be described as
a rough texture, it might be due to:
• The speed control loop gains may not be adjusted properly. Please refer to the Magnetek
Quattro DC Drive Technical Manual for adjustment procedures.
• The encoder, attached to the motor shaft, may not be mounted securely, which may cause
bouncing or a slight variation in the speed feedback signal once every revolution. On a
geared machine, the coupling used between the tach or encoder and the motor can also be
a source of vibration. In both cases, the problem is observed by looking at the AC-coupled
encoder speed signal on iBox test point STP2 (with the Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 2
set to Speed Feedback). You may see the vibration frequency increase and decrease with
car speed. This is absolute proof of a mechanical problem with the speed transducer. Elec-
trically induced oscillations will be characterized by a frequency of oscillation that is con-
stant (does not change significantly with speed).
• If the above steps do not resolve the vibration, the motor may not have been trimmed to
the machine properly. Use a dial indicator to check alignment of motor and machine.
42-02-7223 B8 4-37
Final Adjustment
Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching

Analog load weighers (rope tension, isolated platform or crosshead deflection) provide a signal
(analog voltage) corresponding to the measured load. The signal is conditioned, sampled and
digitized by the control system. The resulting value is used to calculate the actual load inside the
elevator, which is used for logical operations including:
• Overloaded car detection
• Heavy load (hall call bypass)
• Light load anti-nuisance
• Empty load detection
Each threshold is user-programmable (Load Weigher Configuration screen) to determine the
load level at which each operation should be initiated.
The car is weighed only when stopped at a landing with doors open. (This is the only time to
anticipate a change in load.) Additionally, if the car were weighed when running, acceleration
and deceleration would be interpreted as weight change.
Rope Tension Load Weigher - Load cells sense the tension of the wire ropes. The load
weigher provides a calibrated analog signal that accurately tracks the loading of the car. Due to
the dynamics of the elevator system, the load represented by the traveling cable and compensa-
tion cables will vary with the position of the car in the hoistway. iControl must learn the empty
and full car load value at each floor. The load in the car can then be determined by reading the
value at a given floor and subtracting the learned empty value for that floor.
Crosshead Deflection Load Weigher - The signal generated by the load sensor represents
the perceived load at the crosshead, which includes the weight of the car, the load inside the
car, the traveling cable, and any compensation cables that might be attached to the car. Due to
the dynamics of the elevator system, the load represented by the traveling cable and compensa-
tion cables will vary with the position of the car in the hoistway. iControl must learn the empty
and full car load value at each floor. The load in the car can then be determined by reading the
value at a given floor and subtracting the learned empty value for that floor.
Isolated Platform Load Weigher - The isolated platform load weigher measures only the
weight within the car. The value is not affected by hoistway position so empty and full values
can be learned without moving the car from floor to floor.
Load Thresholds The load thresholds used in logical operations are:

• Over load threshold (% of full load): Used to define the load at which it is unsafe to
move the elevator (iView Configuration > Load Weigher tab). If this threshold is exceeded,
the car will remain at the floor with doors open. Typically some type of visual and/or audi-
ble indicator is used to alert passengers that the car is overloaded. (This operation is over-
ridden during Fire Service operation.)
• Heavy load threshold (% of full load): Used to define the load value at which hall
calls will be bypassed or reassigned (iView Configuration > Load Weigher tab).
• Light load threshold (% of full load): Used to define the load at which a limited num-
ber of car calls may be registered. If the programmed number of car calls is exceeded, all
car calls will be canceled.
4-38 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching
Example: Light Load Threshold=20%. If the measured load in the car is less than 20%, the con-
troller will only allow a certain number of car calls to be registered (number of calls is set on the
iView Configuration > Car Operation > Passenger tab/Anti-Nuisance controls shown below). If
the allowed car value is set to three, only three calls may be registered if the load is less than
20%. If a fourth call is entered, all car calls will be canceled.
4
• Empty load threshold (% of full load): Used to determine when the car is empty. If
the load falls below the threshold the car is considered to be empty. This can be used for
CFSS (Commandeer for Special Services) calls where it is desired that the commandeered
car be empty.
Note
Setting a threshold value to 00% will disable the corresponding function (anti-nuisance, hall
call bypass or overload). Example: setting the Heavy Load Threshold to 00% will disable the
hall call bypass function.
Load weighing logical functions such as Anti-Nuisance, Heavy Load, and Overload will be inac-
tive until both the full and empty load values have been learned and saved.
42-02-7223 B8 4-39
Final Adjustment
Load Weigher Configuration

Once the load weigher is installed, you need to “tell” iControl what kind of load weigher you are
using, set up some basic load threshold values, and learn the load values. You do this using
iView.
Load Weigher Selection and Threshold Settings

1. Connect to iControl using the iView application.
2. Go to the Configuration > Load
Weigher tab.
Device configuration
3. Select the load weigher device type:
• No load weigher: Select if no load
weigher is used.
• Discrete contact closure: Select if a
discrete contact closure weigher is
used
• Analog Signal: Select if an analog
signal load weigher is used (rope
tension, isolated platform or cross-
head deflection load weigher).
Analog device configuration

4. Sensing type: Select the analog device
sensing type:
• Cross head deflect6ion or rope ten-
sion sensing.
• Isolated platform displacement sensing.
Setting the load thresholds

5. Load thresholds are preset by MCE based on the job specification. However, thresholds
are user-adjustable and may be changed at any time. All threshold values are expressed
as a percentage of full load. To adjust these thresholds:
• Over load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight above
which the controller should consider the car to be in an over load condition. Typically
110% to 115% of the elevators full load capacity. A setting of 00% = OFF. See “Load
Thresholds” on page 4-38.
• Heavy load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight above
which the controller should consider the car to be in a heavy load condition. Typically
80% to 90% of full load. A setting of 00% = OFF. See “Load Thresholds” on page 4-38.
4-40 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Load Weigher Configuration
• Light load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight below
which the controller should consider the car to be in a light load condition. Typically
set below 20% of full load. A setting of 00% = OFF. See “Load Thresholds” on page 4-
38.
• Empty load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight below
which the controller should consider the car to be empty. See “Load Thresholds” on 4
page 4-38.
6. When ready, press the SEND button to send the changed values to the controller.
Learning Load Values

Learning the empty and fully loaded car values is a semi-automated process requiring that the
appropriate load be present in the car before beginning each stage. It is best to have two people
available, one in the machine room at the elevator controller or iView PC and one at a floor to
handle test weights and ensure there are no passengers in the elevator.
The test weights must be equal to full load value. The learn process must be performed twice,
once for empty car load and once for full car load. In order to learn load weigher values, the ele-
vator must be in normal Passenger operation. The car will not be moved from the starting floor
if the load weigher is an “isolated platform displacement sensing” type. However, if the load
weigher is the “rope tensions sensing” or “cross-head deflection sensing” type, the car must
travel the hoistway, stopping to learn the load values at each floor.
Caution
The load weigher sensor must be calibrated prior learning the load values. Please refer to “Load
Weigher Sensor Adjustment” on page 4-21. If you are preparing to do safety testing, including gover-
nor and buffer tests, you might want to do them first and then adjust the load weigher sensor and
learn the load values, because re-calibrating the load weigher is recommended following buffer tests.
42-02-7223 B8 4-41
Final Adjustment
Load Weigher Learn Procedure

1. Display the Load Weigher layout (View > Layouts > Load Weigher).
2. Enter the Start floor (floor at which the test weights are located) on the Setup > Load
weigher tab.
3. Acquire “Write privilege” (Write privilege > Acquire) and place the iBox Learn switch in
the ON position.
4. With the car operating in normal Passenger operation, follow the step-by-step instruc-
tions that appear on the Setup > Load weigher tab.
Abort Calibration If necessary, click Abort to immediately stop the learning process.
(For example, you started a Full Load learn and realized the test weights were not in the eleva-
tor.) The car will return to the start floor where you may restart the learn procedure.
Clear Learned Values Lighted Empty and Full Learned indicators mean that the pro-
cesses have been successfully run and values stored. Clicking the Clear button will immediately
erase the stored values. You must then repeat the learning process to learn and store new val-
ues.
4-42 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Pre-Start Sequence
Pre-Start Sequence
If the car is properly adjusted and running well, but the floor to floor times are not as quick as
you would like, the Pre-Start Sequence parameters (Configuration > Drive > General tab) can
be used to allow the brake and/or motor to be energized while the doors are closing, thereby
allowing the elevator to leave the floor as soon after the doors are locked as possible.
4
The Pre-Start Sequence options
include:
“Allow machine to be energized”

• After doors are locked
• After door position monitor is
activated
• While doors are closing:
• with motor only
• with motor and partially
picked brake
• with motor and fully picked
brake
Regardless of the option chosen, the elevator is not allowed to move before the doors are locked
and the Speed pick delay 1 timer has elapsed.
The parameters that affect the Pre-Start Sequence options are found on the Configuration >
Brake > Control tab
The following pages include descriptions of each Pre-Start Sequence option and diagrams
showing the parameters that affect each option and the resulting sequence of operation.
Caution
Do not use Pre-Start Sequence options until drive control parameters have been
adjusted for no rollback and good control at zero speed.
42-02-7223 B8 4-43
Final Adjustment
Allow machine to be energized: After doors are locked

This is the default Pre-Start Sequence option. It specifies that the doors must be locked before
energizing the motor and brake. The diagram below shows the parameters that affect this
option and the resulting sequence of operation.
No Prestart Sequence with or without Smooth Pick
Doors Locked High

Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Brake Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Applied Pattern
Smooth Pick
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Weakening Voltage
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
For a detailed description of the brake parameters associated with “smooth picking” and
instructions for adjusting them, see “Brake Parameter Adjustments” on page 4-27.
4-44 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Allow machine to be energized: When door position monitor is activated

This Pre-Start Sequence option is much the same as the “After doors are locked” option except
that Door Position Monitor status is used to determine when the machine may be energized
rather than the Doors Locked sensors. The following diagram shows the parameters that affect
this option and the resulting sequence of operation.
4
Allow machine to be energized after door position monitor is activated
Door Position
Monitor High Doors Locked
Motor High
Door Open Contactor/ Brake Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Applied Pattern
Smooth Pick
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Weakening Voltage
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
42-02-7223 B8 4-45
Final Adjustment
Allow machine to be energized: While doors are closing with motor only
This Pre-Start Sequence option allows the motor to be energized while the doors are closing so
that when the doors are locked, the brake picking sequence can be started immediately. The
diagram below shows the parameters that affect this option and the resulting sequence of oper-
ation.
Prestart Sequence with Motor and No (Brake) Pick
Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Doors Brake Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Locked High Contactor Applied Pattern
Smooth Pick
Brake Pick Voltage
80%
of Pick Volgage Hold Voltage
Weakening
Voltage
Prestart
Sequence
Delay Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
For a DC control, Pick Delay can be set to zero so long as the Pre-Start Sequence Delay is
adjusted so that the motor is energized and able to hold the car at zero speed when the doors
become locked.
For an AC control, some Pick delay may be required because it takes time for the drive to mag-
netize the motor once the contactor is picked and the drive enabled. A “Drive Ready On Fault” is
generated if Pick delay is too short.
4-46 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

partially picked brake
This Pre-Start Sequence option allows the motor to be fully energized and the brake to be par-
tially energized while the doors are closing, so that when the doors become locked, the car can
begin moving as soon as the brake is fully picked. The diagram below shows the parameters that
affect this option and the resulting sequence of operation. 4
Prestart Sequence with Motor and Partially Picked Brake
Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Brake Doors Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Locked High Applied Pattern
Brake Pick Voltage

80% of
Pick Voltage Hold Voltage
Partial Pick
Voltage
Prestart Sequence
Delay
Pick Delay Hold Delay
Speed Pick Delay 1
Speed Pick
Delay 2
42-02-7223 B8 4-47
Final Adjustment
fully picked brake
This Pre-Start Sequence option allows the motor and brake to be fully energize while the doors
are closing, so that the car can begin moving when the doors become locked and the Speed pick
delay 1 timer expires. The diagram below shows the parameters that affect this option and the
resulting sequence of operation.
Prestart Sequence with Motor and Fully Picked Brake
Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Brake
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Doors Locked High Pattern
Smooth Pick
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick Hold Voltage
Voltage
Weakening
Voltage
Pattern
Applied
Prestart Sequence
Delay
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
4-48 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions
Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions

Before performing the following adjustments and tests please do the following:
1. Verify that the car performs the releveling operation properly. Please refer to “Verify
Releveling” on page 4-5 and see “Releveling Operation ” on page 4-36.
2. Perform the Normal and Emergency Terminal Limit Switches learn procedure. This is 4
necessary if any pattern parameters have been changed since the last time the learn pro-
cedure was performed. Please refer to “Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit
Switches” on page 4-12.

This test compares the pattern signal with the velocity feedback signal and sets the point at
which the Tach Error fault trips as a result of excessive error between the Actual and intended
car speed.
1. Verify that the TACH ADJ. trimpot has been properly adjusted:
• For System 12 SCR Drive, see “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12 SCR Drive)” on
page 2-38.
• For Quattro DC Drive, see “Verifying Pattern Command and Speed Feedback” on
page 2-57.
2. Arrange the car for full load condition.
3. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position.
4. On the Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Speed Feedback and Test point 2 to Tach
Error Upper Limit. (Tach Error Upper Limit determines the upper threshold below
which velocity feedback is allowed to deviate from the pattern.)
5. Start with Following error set to 1.0% (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab).
6. Set the iBox Fault/Function Bypass switch to the ON position. (Note that fault bypass is
automatically disabled after a fifteen minute timer expires.)
7. On the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab, click Tach error (bypasses Tach Error fault).
8. Run the car up and down the hoistway. If the Speed Feedback trace on the Virtual Oscil-
loscope crosses the Tach Error Upper Limit trace, a Tach Error fault will normally be
generated (we have it bypassed).
9. If the two traces on the oscilloscope cross, increase Following error in 5% increments,
running the car with each change, until the two traces no longer cross.
10. When the two traces no longer cross, add 5% to the Following error setting as a margin.
11. Set Test point 2 to Tach Error Lower Limit. This is the lower threshold below which
velocity feedback is allowed to deviate from the pattern.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 9 for Tach Error Lower Limit.
Tach Error Upper Lmt

Speed Feedback
42-02-7223 B8 4-49
Final Adjustment
Verify Tach Error Does Not Trip on Emergency Stop

1. Set the iBox Fault/Function Bypass switch to the OFF position.
2. Make sure the Tach Error fault is no longer bypassed (Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab).
3. With a full load in the car, run the car up and down the hoistway to verify that the Tach
Error fault is not generated.
4. Enter a car call several floors below the car (so it can reach contract speed).
5. While the car is running at contract speed (Operational Status / Speed - Actual), discon-
nect the GS terminal from the iBox.
6. The car should trip a Door Lock Fault and make an Emergency Stop.
7. Observe that a Tach Error fault is not generated.
Armature Overcurrent Overload Protection Adjustment

(System 12 SCR Drive)
Armature overcurrent overload protection is intended to protect the motor and acts in a man-
ner similar to a thermal overload. However, instead of using the actual heat generated by exces-
sive armature current, the SCR Loop Over Current fault is generated based on a calculation
using measured armature current and time. The Rated loop over-current parameter on the
Configuration > Drive > Safety tab is used to set the threshold current used in the calculation.
The Loop over-current fault time parameter sets the time used in the calculation. The calcula-
tion used to generate the SCR Loop Over Current fault is:
measured Loop
Rated loop Rated loop SCR Loop
armature elapsed over-current
over-current over-current Over Current
current time fault time
parameter parameter Fault
(averaged) parameter
Another way of stating this is that the SCR

Loop Over Current Fault is generated when Armature Current
the measured current has been twice the
threshold current for more than the allowed
Rated loop Loop Over
fault time. The armature current is not con- over-current Current Fault
stant, so the calculation uses the averaged times 2
armature current in excess of the threshold
current times elapsed time. As with a ther-
mal overload, the greater the amount by
which the measured current exceeds the
threshold current, the shorter the time Rated loop Time
over-current
required to cause the SCR Loop Over Cur- Loop over-current fault time
rent Fault, as shown in the diagram.
4-50 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions
Adjustment Procedure Use the following procedure to adjust the parameters on the
Configuration > Drive > Safety tab used to generate the SCR Loop Over Current Fault.
Rated loop over-current

1. With a full load in the car, run the car up. On the Operational Status tab, observe Arma-
ture current while the car is traveling at steady speed (not accelerating or decelerating). 4
Note
Full load up is preferable, but if not possible, run empty car down.
2. Set Rated loop over-current (Drive > Safety tab) 5 to 10 amps greater than the observed
steady speed Armature current.
Loop over-current fault time
1. On the Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 = Over Current Power and Test point 2 =
Over Current Power Threshold.
2. Set Loop over-current fault time (Drive > Safety tab) = 30 seconds.
3. With a full load in the car, run the car up (see Note above). It is best to make runs that
just reach Contract speed momentarily before decelerating and stopping. Observe the
oscilloscope. The objective is to adjust the Loop over-current fault time parameter until
the maximum Over Current Power is 50% to 75% of the Over Current Power Threshold.
4. Adjust the Loop over-current fault time parameter and repeat step 3. Decreasing the
Loop over-current fault time decreases the Over Current Power Threshold and vice
versa.
5. As a final test, make a full hatch run up and down.
42-02-7223 B8 4-51
Final Adjustment
Safety Tests
iControl provides highly automated safety testing. Before running any tests, the car must be
properly balanced and adjusted. From the iView Safety Tests screen (View > Safety Tests), the
following tests may be run:
• Car/Counterweight Safety Test, page 4-54
• Electrical Governor Test, page 4-54
• Car/Counterweight Buffer Test, page 4-55
• Inspection Overspeed Test, page 4-55
• Contract Overspeed Test, page 4-56
• Leveling Overspeed Test, page 4-56
• Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion, page 4-56
• Ascending Car Overspeed Test, page 4-58
• Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests - Level 1, page 4-59
• Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests - Level 2, page 4-60
• Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Test, page 4-60
• Normal & Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests, page 4-60
4-52 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Safety Tests
Running a Test
1. Place the iBox in Test mode.
2. Select the desired test on the Safety Tests screen.
3. Set the speed which the car must attain to trigger the condition being tested. (All tests
except Emergency Brake Test/Unintended Motion require a speed input.)
4. Click the Select button. (Sends data to the controller and sets test conditions, including
4
operating mode and active fault bypasses. Updates instructional display for specific
test.)
5. Visually check on-screen operating mode and fault bypass status displays.
6. Perform instructions displayed in test screen text box.
7. Click the Arm Test button.
8. Place a car call as required to run the car up or down the hoistway (Call Registration
panel).
9. Check Operational Status tab and Event Log (Diagnostics > Event Log) for fault verifica-
tion.
10. Use the iBox Stop switch to stop the test and bring the elevator to an emergency stop if
necessary.
Note
When running a test, you are allowed only one “motion cycle” of the car. If the test is not satis-
factory, you will have to re-select that test to begin again. Remember that fault bypasses set for
the test will time-out after 15 minutes. If you are delayed in completing a test, you may have to
cycle the Fault Bypass switch to reset the fault bypasses.
Results Faults triggered by the tests are reported on the Operational Status tab and the
Event Log. Non-latching (self-clearing) faults will only appear on the Operational Status tab for
a few moments. Check the Event Log if the triggered faults have already disappeared from the
Operational Status tab.
The following test descriptions provide information specific to each test.
Danger
Be prepared to stop a runaway car if necessary, using the iBox Stop switch. During testing, normal
system safeties are disabled. Exercise extreme caution. Be prepared to take control and stop the ele-
vator if necessary. Only QUALIFIED PERSONNEL, with adequate experience and knowledge of ele-
vator equipment should attempt elevator adjustment and testing.
42-02-7223 B8 4-53
Final Adjustment
Car/Counterweight Safety Test

This is a two-part test. Car safety testing verifies operation of the car safeties. The objective of
the test is to set the safeties, causing the hoist motor to break traction. The over-speed must be
sufficient in magnitude to cause the governor to trip mechanically and to set the car safeties.
The electrical governor switch must not prevent the cars continued acceleration to the mechan-
ical trip speed and the safety-operated switch (plank switch) must not open the safety string.
1. Place a full load in the car.
2. Position the car some distance away from the bottom landing (about 10-feet per 100-
feet-per-minute of contract speed).
3. On the iView > View > Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab/Standard profile, verify
that Deceleration and Approach deceleration are set no higher than 2ft/s2 to avoid trip-
ping the drive.
4. On the Quattro DC Drive (if applicable), set A1-Overspeed Mult = 125% and set U4-
Overspeed Test = Enable.
5. On the iView > View > Safety Test tab, set Speed, in fpm, to 125% of contract speed.
6. On the iView > View > Safety Test tab, select the Car/Counterweight Safety Test. Com-
plete on-screen instructions.
7. Place a car call distant enough to allow the car to reach the necessary speed.
Caution: If necessary, you may end the test and bring the car to an emergency stop
using the iBox Stop switch.
8. After the test has been completed and the car has stopped, check the hoistway ropes to
make sure they are still in their proper grooves before attempting to move the car.
9. Use whatever method is required to reset the safeties. For flexible quick-clamp safeties,
move the car on Inspection (UP and ENABLE buttons) to release the safety and restore
the safety string.
Counterweight Safety Test - The counterweight safety test verifies operation of the counter-
weight safeties. For this test, position the empty car near the bottom landing and arrange to
over-speed in the up direction. The test is comparable to the car safety test but performed in the
opposite direction. If the counterweight has a governor, remember to jumper it out. Remember
to remove jumpers when tests are complete.
Electrical Governor Test

This test verifies that the calibration of the electrical governor switch is appropriate (typically
about 110% of contract speed) and that the car will execute an emergency stop once the electri-
cal governor switch is activated. When the car trips the electrical governor switch in the down
direction, it will execute an emergency stop.
1. Bring the car to the middle of the hoistway.
2. Check your mechanical governor nameplate for its tripping speed. Check the Contract
Overspeed setting on the iView > Setup > Safety tab. On the iView > Safety Tests tab, set
Speed, in fpm, sufficient to trigger the Contract Overspeed but not high enough to trip
the mechanical governor.
3. On the Quattro DC Drive (if applicable), set A1-Overspeed Mult (percent) = the same
percentage of overspeed as the test Speed and set U4-Overspeed Test = Enable.
4. Select the Electrical Governor test (Safety Test tab). Complete on-screen instructions.
5. Place a car call distant enough to allow the car to reach the necessary speed.
4-54 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Car/Counterweight Buffer Test

This is a two-part test. The car buffer test verifies that the car striking the buffer will cause the
hoist motor to break traction and that the car buffer will automatically return to its fully-
extended state after having been fully compressed. The car is arranged to run into the terminal
landing without initiating any form of slowdown. Neither the final limit switch nor the buffer
switch must stop the car. 4
1. Be certain that the pit is prepared, buffers ready, etc.
2. Place a full load in the car.
3. Position the car in the hoistway high enough to reach contract speed before reaching the
bottom landing.
4. Place a jumper between the #3 bus and the SAFH terminal on the iBox to bypass the
safety string.
5. Select the Car/Counterweight Buffer test (View > Safety Tests). Follow instructions.
6. Set test Speed to contract speed.
Caution
If reduced stroke buffers are in use, set the test “Speed” less than or equal to the rated
buffer speed.
7. Use the Inspection switches to run the car. If necessary, you may end the test and bring
the car to an emergency stop using the iBox Stop switch.The car must strike the buffer,
compress it fully, and cause the hoist motor to break traction.
8. For 2010 code compliance, continue to press ENABLE + UP or DOWN and verify that
within 15 to 20 seconds a “Loss of Position or Speed Indicator” fault is generated and
power is removed from the motor and brake. Verify that the fault is maintained over a
power cycle and is reset only by pressing FAULT RESET on the iBox.
9. Check the hoistway ropes to make sure they are still in their proper grooves before
attempting to move the car.
10. Lift the car off the buffer at inspection speed. (Normally accomplished after the inspec-
tor enters the pit to observe.) The buffer must return to full extension.
Counterweight Buffer Test - The counterweight buffer test verifies that the counterweight
striking the buffer will cause the hoist motor to break traction and that the counterweight buffer
will automatically return to its fully-extended state after having been fully compressed. The
empty car is positioned near the bottom landing and arranged to reach contract speed in the up
direction. The test is comparable to the car buffer test but performed in the opposite direction.
If the counterweight has a governor, remember to jumper it out. Remember to remove jumpers
when tests are complete.
Inspection Overspeed Test
This test verifies that moving the elevator on Inspection Operation at a speed greater than 150
fpm will result in an emergency stop.
1. Place the car on machine room inspection.
2. Verify that Inspection Overspeed (Controller > View > Setup > Safety > Configuration
tab) is set to 150 fpm.
3. Position the car in the middle of the hoistway.
4. On the View > Safety Tests screen, set test Speed to 200 fpm.
5. Select the Inspection Overspeed test. Follow on-screen instructions.
42-02-7223 B8 4-55
Final Adjustment
6. Use the inspection switches to move the car when ready.

When the car exceeds 150 fpm, the overspeed condition must stop it.
Contract Overspeed Test

This test verifies that moving the elevator at a speed greater than the programmed contract
overspeed will result in an emergency stop.
1. Position the car in the middle of the hoistway.
2. On the iView > Safety Tests tab, set Speed to exceed the programmed contract over-
speed value, but not high enough to cause the electrical or mechanical governor to acti-
vate. (You may have to physically bypass the electrical Governor switch.)
3. On the Quattro DC Drive (if applicable), set A1-Overspeed Mult (percent) = the same
percentage of overspeed as the test Speed and set U4-Overspeed Test = Enable.
4. Select the Contract Overspeed test. Follow on-screen instructions.
When the car exceeds the programmed contract overspeed value, the car must perform an
emergency stop.
Leveling Overspeed Test

This test verifies that the leveling zone does not exceed the maximum allowable distance and
that the leveling speed does not exceed 150 ft/min (0.75 m/s). (NOTE: Be sure to make note of
the original parameter values so they can be restored after the test):
1. On the Configuration > Drive > General tab, set Emergency rate limited stop = 25 ft/s2.
2. On the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab, set Leveling overspeed = 7 fpm and click
Send. Then perform the Learn operation.
3. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Leveling distance = 4 in, set Level-
ing speed = 9 fpm, and click Send.
4. Place a call to any landing. Verify that when the car enters the leveling zone, the system
detects a Safety A (or B) Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault and performs an emer-
gency stop. Following the emergency stop the car should level into the floor, if neces-
sary. (NOTE: If the car is unable to relevel into the floor and the fault is generated 5
times, the fault will become persistent and the iBox Fault Reset button must be pressed
to reset the fault. It may be necessary to restore the parameters that were changed in
steps 1 through 3 in order for the car to relevel to the floor.)
5. Restore the parameters that were changed in steps 1 through 3 to their original values.
Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion
Danger
The Emergency Brake test allows the car to leave the floor with doors open. Station personnel or use
a positive means to make certain there is NO ONE in the car.
This test verifies that moving the car away from a landing with both the car and hoistway doors
open (termed “Unintended Motion”) will cause the Emergency Brake (e.g., Rope Gripper) to be
deployed and that such deployment will stop the elevator. No test Speed input is required for
this test.
4-56 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

1. Select the Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion.

2. Follow on-screen instructions.
42-02-7223 B8 4-57
Final Adjustment
Ascending Car Overspeed Test - Rope Brake

This test is to be used for installations using a rope brake for the emergency brake. It verifies
that the emergency brake (rope brake) will stop an empty car that is over-speeding in the up
direction.
1. Move the empty car to the bottom of the hoistway.
2. Check the mechanical governor nameplate for its tripping speed. Check the Contract
Overspeed setting (Controller > View > Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
3. On the iView Safety Tests tab, select the Electrical Governor Test (View > Safety Tests >
Test Name parameter).
4. Enter a Speed sufficient to trigger the Contract Overspeed but not high enough to trip
the mechanical governor.
5. Magnetek Quattro DC only: Calculate the percentage of Contract speed represented by
the test Speed and set up the drive for an overspeed test as in step 4 of the Car/Counter-
weight Safety Test.
6. Follow on-screen instructions “ELECTRICAL GOVERNOR TEST SETUP” and “To per-
form and Electrical Governor test-”.
7. Once the test is “Armed”, place a car call distant enough to allow the car to reach the
necessary speed.
8. When the electrical governor is activated the rope brake will be deployed. Power is
removed from the driving machine and brake.
9. Place the car on Inspection and press the iBox “Fault Reset” button to reset the fault.
4-58 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests

Per switch, this test verifies that either an emergency slowdown or emergency stop will be initi-
ated if an elevator encounters an NTS switch and is moving at a speed greater than the pro-
grammed overspeed value for that switch. The car is arranged to run toward the target NTS
switch without initiating any form of slowdown. When the car activates the NTS switch, it will
execute either an emergency slowdown or an emergency stop, depending upon the overspeed 4
margin detected. The car will then finish the run to a landing at leveling or correction speed.
1. It is imperative that deceleration and jerk rates for the Emergency slowdown profile be
set to greater values than Standard profile deceleration and jerk rates so that initiation
of an emergency slowdown will stop the elevator quickly and safely. Check the Standard
and Emergency slowdown profiles to see that this is the case. For a typical, 500 fpm car,
Standard jerk and deceleration settings might be 4.0 and 3.0 respectively; for the Emer-
gency slowdown profile, jerk and deceleration might be 15.0 and 6.0 respectively. Adjust
the Emergency slowdown profile parameters as necessary to ensure a rapid, aggressive
stop sufficient to avoid running the car into the buffer.
2. Go to the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab/Emergency slowdown profile and verify
that Deceleration is set correctly. It is generally set to 5.0, and must be greater than the
Standard profile - Deceleration parameter.
3. Go to the Configuration > Drive > General tab and verify that Emergency rate limited
stop is set correctly. It is generally set to 7.0, and must be greater than the Emergency
slowdown profile - Deceleration parameter.
4. Position the empty car far enough away from the target NTS switch to allow a speed to
be reached that exceeds the learned overspeed value for that switch for the Overspeed
Level 1 or Level 2 (whichever is being tested).
5. Go to the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab. Note the Overspeed 1 and 2
speeds learned for the terminal switch to be tested.
6. On the Safety Test window, select Normal Terminal Switch ‘n’ Overspeed Test - Level ‘n’
for the switch and level to be tested.
7. Set the test Speed to the Overspeed 1 (Level 1) or Overspeed 2 (Level 2) speed, plus 10
fpm, for the switch/test. Caution! If the speed is set below the overspeed threshold, no
slowdown will be initiated and the elevator/counterweight will strike the buffer.
8. Follow on-screen instructions and perform the test. The car should perform either an
emergency slowdown or emergency stop. For additional information see “Terminal
Switch Overspeed and Position Faults” on page 4-61.
9. On the Operational Status tab, verify that the appropriate fault is shown in the Faults
window.
10. Continue testing remaining normal terminal switches by repeating steps 4 through 9.
42-02-7223 B8 4-59
Final Adjustment
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests

Per switch, this test verifies that an emergency stop will be initiated if:
• an elevator moving at a speed greater than 95% of programmed contract speed encounters
the ETS switch in the direction of travel (DETS moving down; UETS moving up)
• an elevator using reduced stroke buffers is moving at a speed greater than the Overspeed 2
speed (95% of rated buffer speed) at the ETSL switch in the direction of travel.
Move the empty car far enough away from the terminal to achieve test speed by the time it
reaches the ETS/ETSL switch. While testing, the car will run toward the terminal without initi-
ating any form of slowdown. When the car activates the ETS/ETSL switch, it will execute an
emergency stop. The car will then finish the run to a landing at leveling or correction speed.
1. Go to the Configuration > Drive > General tab and verify that Emergency rate limited
stop is set correctly. It is generally set to 7.0, and must be greater than the Emergency
slowdown profile - Deceleration parameter.
2. Position the empty car far enough away from the target ETS/ETSL switch to allow a
speed to be reached that exceeds the Over Speed 2 value for that switch.
3. Go to the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab. Note the Overspeed 2 value for
the emergency terminal switch to be tested.
4. Select Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Test on the Safety screen.
5. Set the test Speed to the overspeed speed for the switch plus 10 fpm.
Danger
If the speed is set below the overspeed threshold, no slowdown will be initiated and the elevator/
counterweight will strike the buffer.
6. Follow on-screen instructions and perform the test. For additional information see “Ter-
minal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults” on page 4-61.
window.
8. Continue testing remaining emergency terminal switch by repeating steps 1 through 7.
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests

1. On the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab, for the switch you wish to test, set the
position margin to a negative value (place a minus sign in front of the value).
2. If you are testing an up terminal switch, run the car past the switch in the up direction at
contract speed (if possible). If you are testing a down terminal switch, run the car past
the switch in the down direction at contract speed (if possible). The car should stop
using the Emergency slowdown profile parameters.
window.
4. On the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab, set the position margin for the tested
switch back to the original positive value
5. Continue testing the remaining switches using steps 1 through 4.
4-60 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults

The Overspeed Level 1, Level 2 and Position margins are calculated based on the speed and
position values learned during the terminal learn procedure (see “Learning Normal & Emer-
gency Terminal Limit Switches” on page 4-12)
Overspeed level 1 - During passenger (NORM) operation, if car speed exceeds the Overspeed 4
Level 1 threshold at the time a Normal Terminal switch is activated, an Up (or Down) Normal
Terminal Switch (1-5) Level 1 Speed Fault is detected and an immediate slowdown is initiated
using Emergency slowdown profile parameters. For each Normal Terminal switch, the Over-
speed Level 1 threshold is calculated by increasing the learned speed by a percentage of the
learned speed, e.g. learned speed plus 10% of learned speed. The percentage used in the calcula-
tion is determined by the Overspeed 1 margin parameter. You may adjust the Overspeed Level 1
threshold by changing the Overspeed 1 margin parameter (Configuration > Terminal Switches
tab). The default setting is 8%. Normally, you should not have to adjust this setting.
Note: Sometimes short runs to a terminal, especially one-floor runs, will exceed tightly set over-
speed margins. After you learn terminal switches, it is a good practice to try a few short runs to
each terminal and check the Last pass speeds against the Learned speeds for each switch (Diag-
nostics > Terminal Switches Status tab). If necessary, you can then adjust the Overspeed 1 mar-
gin to accommodate (possibly) higher short run switch speeds. (Overspeed level 1 faults cause
an emergency slowdown into the terminal landing but the fault is automatically cleared so it is
possible to miss the fact that this is occurring.)
Overspeed level 2 - During passenger (NORM) operation, if car speed exceeds the Overspeed
Level 2 threshold at the time a Normal Terminal switch is activated, an Up (or Down) Normal
Terminal Switch (1-5) Level 2 Speed Fault is detected and an emergency stop is initiated (motor
and brake contactors immediately dropped). The Overspeed Level 2 threshold is calculated as
105% of the Overspeed Level 1 threshold.
Position - During passenger (NORM) operation, if car position varies from the learned posi-
tion by more than the Position Margin at the time a Normal Terminal or Emergency Terminal
switch is activated, an Up (or Down) Normal Terminal Switch (1-5) Position Fault or an Up (or
Down) Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault is detected and an immediate slowdown is
initiated using the Emergency slowdown profile parameters. The Position Margin for each Nor-
mal Terminal or Emergency Terminal switch is displayed and may be adjusted on the Configu-
ration > Terminal Switches tab. The default value is 2.0 feet.
ETSL for Reduced Stroke Buffers

Custom SPA software is used to hard code the ETS tripping speed to 95% of rated buffer speed.
The ETS switches are repurposed for ETSL. To verify the tripping speed, select View > Diagnos-
tics > Terminal Switches. The ETSL tripping speed is the “Over speed 2” listed for DETS and
UETS. Test this using the Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests on page 4-60.
Caution
Emergency Terminal (switches) Overspeed is hard-coded at 95% of Contract Speed (or Rated Buffer
Speed for reduced stroke buffers). Be certain that the car is traveling well below this speed when an
Emergency Terminal switch is opened to avoid an emergency stop. In some instances, it may be nec-
essary to re-position an Emergency Terminal switch to achieve this. This value is NOT affected by
the Overspeed 1 margin setting.
42-02-7223 B8 4-61
Final Adjustment
The following illustration shows the car reaction to overspeed conditions at Normal and Emer-
gency Terminal switches in the down direction.
Figure 4.6 Normal and Emergency Terminal Overspeed Reaction
95% of contract speed

Contract speed
Overspeed 1
Overspeed 2
Hoistway
Normal Terminal Switch

Car trips Terminal Switch
Car
Emergency Terminal Switch
Car trips Emergency Switch
Level/Overspeed 2 Emergency Stop

Over 95% of Contract Speed E Stop
Level/Overspeed 1 Emergency Slowdown
Normal Stop
Normal Deceleration Parameter
Matching Learned Speeds
Speed
Speed Definitions
95% of Contract Speed: Hard-coded value for Emergency Terminal Switch
Level 1 Overspeed threshold: Learned speed value at switch plus the Limit
One Margin (set on the iView Safety Screen)
Level 2 Overspeed threshold: 105% of Level 1 Overspeed.
4-62 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Before Release to Passenger Operation
Before Release to Passenger Operation
Danger
Before the elevator can be turned over to normal passenger use, it is important that no safety func- 4
tion or circuit remains bypassed. Items to check include, but are not limited to:
• All safety switches set to the OFF position
• No jumper between SB and 3 (iBox)
• No jumper between SAFH and 3 (iBox)
• Learn and Fault/Function switches set to OFF (iBox)
• No jumper between Gov and 3 (iBox)
• Pattern Scaling set to 100% (Pattern screen/Common tab)
Note
If this is a local car (part of a group), the “Car identifier” parameter, on the Configuration >
General > General tab, must be set so that the Group controller can identify the car to which it is
communicating. Initially the Car identifier is defaulted to 1. The Car Identifier range is from 1 to
15. The Car identifier for each car in a Group must be unique (no duplicates).
42-02-7223 B8 4-63
Final Adjustment
4-64 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

System Options
About System Options

This section contains supporting information for optional iControl system components:
• iCentral - Central Dispatcher: Description, installation and setup instructions for the
Central Dispatcher (see page 5-2).
• Comm-Connect Cabinet - Local Dispatcher: Description of the cabinet used for the
Local Dispatcher system interconnections (see page 5-15).
• Serial Hall Call: Description, installation and troubleshooting instructions for the Serial
Hall Call system (see page 5-17).
• Flexible I/O: Description of the SC-ION Serial Input/Output board (see page 5-22).
• Serial COP (Car Operating Panel): Description and installation instructions for the
Serial COP system and boards (see page 5-36).
• Load Weighers, page 5-39
42-02-7223 B8 5-1
System Options
iCentral - Central Dispatcher

iCentral coordinates dispatching, parking, special operating modes, emergency power
response, security, and interaction with existing (legacy) controls. The Windows PC in iCentral
has two Network Interface Cards (NIC); one for iCue elevator dispatching software, the other
for iView configuration software — both software applications are installed on this one PC. You
configure and interact with iCue through the iView graphical user interface.
If you also have an iView PC separate from the iCentral PC, you must request and be granted
write privilege before you can make configuration changes. From the iView installation in the
single iView/iCue PC, write privilege is granted automatically.
Cabinet Installation
Installation of the iCentral cabinet is similar to the installation of an iController cabinet. Please
refer to “Machine Room Preparation” on page 2-4.
Check for shorts to ground before powering up the system. Power must be OFF at the main
disconnect(s). A short to ground is defined as having a resistance of less than 20 ohms
between the #1 (Common) bus and the terminal being tested. Shorts to ground must be cor-
rected before proceeding.
Danger
Be certain that power is OFF at the main disconnect(s) before proceeding.
1. Using a standard screwdriver, temporarily disengage all twist-socketed fuses by turning
them counterclockwise until they pop up.
2. Measure the resistance between the #2 (120VAC) bus terminals and the #1 bus.
3. If no shorts to ground are discovered, re-engage the fuses.
The AC wiring instructions in this section describe connecting power wiring between the iCon-
trol elevator cabinets and the iCue cabinet. The majority of technical information is contained
in the MCE job prints package and referenced here as necessary. AC voltage verification and
wiring instructions include:
• Verifying main line power
• Wiring iCue
• Initial power up and test for bus voltage presence
1. Consult the job prints. Verify that AC supply is as specified.

2. Refer to the Group Supervisor Field Wiring Print in the job prints and to the following
illustration. iCentral power is provided by the car controllers as shown in drawing -2.
The main AC power supply wiring size must be determined by the electrical contractor.
2a. Check the phase-offset of the individual car ST2-bus lines before connecting them
to the Group cabinet. Use a voltmeter set to AC volts to measure between adjacent
car 2-bus terminals in the Group cabinet. The meter must read less than 10VAC. If
the reading is higher, reverse the power leads going to the car T1 transformer at L1
and L2 and measure again.
5-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iCentral - Central Dispatcher
Caution
All 2 bus power from cars to the iCue cabinet must be in phase. Connecting out-of-phase
power WILL cause damage.
2b. A separate conduit or trough must be provided for the System (group-to-car)
5
Ethernet network. Wiring details in the job prints must be followed exactly.
2c. If applicable, also wire according to the Group Interconnects to Individual Car
Cabinets print. Be sure to ground all cabinets according to instructions.
2d. Refer to the Group Supervisor Field Wiring Print for iCentral field wiring instruc-
tions.
Figure 5.1 Elevator Controller to iCue Cabinet Wiring
iController 1 iController 2 iController 3 iController 4

MF1
MF2
MF1
MF2
MF1
MF2
MF1
MF2
L1P
L2P
L3P
L1P
L2P
L3P
L1P
L2P
L3P
L1P
L2P
L3P
B1
B2
B1
B2
B1
B2
B1
B2
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1 ST2 1 ST2 1 ST2 1 ST2
1
MF1
MF2
L1P
L2P
L3P
B1
B2
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
ST2A, ST2B, ST2C, ST2D, etc. iCue
Initial Power Up and Bus Verification

After AC power is connected, you are ready to temporarily power up and check that power buses
inside the cabinet are providing their proper outputs.
Caution
This procedure assumes that no field wiring has yet been connected. If field wiring has been con-
nected, it must be disconnected before beginning this procedure. Before applying power, physically
check all components in the cabinet. Components loosened during shipment may cause damage.
1. Power up the elevator controllers.

2. Power up the group controller.
3. If a controller fails to power up, refer to the job prints and check supply connections and
fuses.
4. Measure from each iCue ST2 bus terminal to a Common (#1) terminal. Verify 120VAC.
5. If any bus voltage is missing, check the associated fuse. The fuses are labeled with the
bus numbers and are located at the top of the cabinet.
6. Power the controllers down (in preparation to continue wiring equipment).
42-02-7223 B8 5-3
System Options
iControl Ethernet Overview

iControl uses two distinct Ethernet networks:
• The System switch connects the iCentral SYSTEM NIC to other MCE equipment like the
elevator controllers, Serial Hall Call systems, and input/output expansion boards (SC-ION
boards). iCue controls dispatching through this network.
• The LAN switch connects the iCentral LAN NIC used by iView to configure both iCentral
and iControls. Through the LAN hub/switch, the elevator group may also be connected to
an external network or building LAN.
Figure 5.2 iCentral Ethernet Connections
,OCAL I6IEW
3# )/. &IELD )NPUT/UTPUT #ONNECTION $ATA CONVERSION TOFROM SERIAL PROTOCOL
)NPUTS
,!. 2EMOTE I6IEW

3YSTEM (UB 0ERIPHERAL Internet 2EMOTE I-ONITOR
(UB
XXX
XXX
XXX
3ERIAL TO 4#0)0

I#UE
/UTPUTS
3ERIAL
$RIVER
XXX
XXX
I"OX #AR

3ERIAL "US
XXX
I"OX #AR
XXX
3ERIAL (ALL #ALLS

5-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iControl Ethernet Overview
Setting iCentral PC LAN NIC (iView) IP Address
Note
When you open your iCue PC Network Connections, you will see two local area connections. The LAN
Ethernet controls the iCue LAN connection (iView); the System Ethernet controls the iCue System 5
connection to iBoxes, Serial Hall Calls, and I/O boards and SHOULD NOT BE CHANGED WITH-
OUT CONSULTING MCE.
If you received your iCentral PC from MCE, the NIC addresses for LAN and SYSTEM connec-
tions are already set as shown in the job prints. You DO NOT need to set them.
If you are replacing the LAN NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC provided by MCE, follow
the instruction included with the NIC.
If you are replacing the LAN NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC not provided by MCE, use
the instructions below. These instructions assume you have not changed the factory-default set-
tings for the LAN ports. When setting IP Addresses on a PC, do not enter leading zeros (i.e.,
.020 is entered as .20).
The following example is for the Windows 10 operating system.
1. Start the PC.
2. From the Start menu, double click
Control Panel. When the control panel
opens, select View by: Small Icons
(upper right corner).
3. Double click Network and Sharing

Center to open the Network and Shar-
ing Center dialog. Click Change
Adapter Settings to open the Network
Connections dialog.
4. You will see two connections; one for the System Ethernet and one for the LAN Ether-
net.
5. Double-click the LAN Ethernet Connection icon to open the Local Area Connection Sta-
tus dialog.
42-02-7223 B8 5-5
System Options
6. Click Properties to open the Local

Area Connection Properties dialog.
7. In the Local Area Connection

Properties dialog, select Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
8. Click Properties to open the

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties dialog
5-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

9. Set the IP Address to 192.168.191.201.

10. Set the Subnet Mask
to 255.255.255.0.
11. Leave the Default
gateway blank.
12. Click OK and follow
5
any instructions to
save the changes you
made.
42-02-7223 B8 5-7
System Options
Setting iCentral PC System NIC IP Address
Note
When you open your iCue PC Network Connections, you will see two local area connections. The LAN
Ethernet controls the iCue LAN connection (iView); the System Ethernet controls the iCue System
connection to iBoxes, Serial Hall Calls, and I/O boards and SHOULD NOT BE CHANGED WITH-
OUT CONSULTING MCE.
If you received your iCentral PC from MCE, the NIC addresses for LAN and SYSTEM connec-
tions are already set as shown in the job prints. You DO NOT need to set them.
If you are replacing the SYSTEM NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC provided by MCE, fol-
low the instruction included with the NIC.
If you are replacing the SYSTEM NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC not provided by MCE,
use the instructions below. These instructions assume you have not changed the factory-default
settings for the network ports. When setting IP Addresses on a PC, do not enter leading zeros
(i.e., .020 is entered as .20).
The following example is for the Windows 10 operating system.
1. Start the PC.
2. From the Start menu, click Control
Panel. When the control panel opens,
select View by: Small Icons (upper
right corner).
3. Double click Network and Sharing

Center to open the Network and Shar-
ing Center dialog. Click Change
Adapter Settings to open the Network
Connections dialog.
4. You will see two connections; one for the System Ethernet and one for the LAN Ether-
net.
5. Double-click the SYSTEM Ethernet Connection icon to open the Local Area Connection
Status dialog.
5-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


Area Connection Properties dialog.

Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties dialog
42-02-7223 B8 5-9
System Options
9. Set the IP Address to 192.168.192.001.

to 255.255.255.0.
11. Leave the Default
gateway blank.
any instructions to
made.
5-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Pinging
If you suspect that one or more of the devices is still not communicating, you can “ping” them
from the iView PC. Pinging just lets you send a message manually that just asks for a reply if the
other device can “hear” you.
To ping:
1. Select Start/All Programs/Windows System/Command Prompt from the Windows Start
menu (window pane icon at the bottom left).
2. Type in ping and the IP address of the device you want to check. For example:
ping 192.168.191.201
3. If the device is visible and responding, you will see four messages saying “Reply from...”
4. If not, the IP address for the PC or for the device may not be correctly set.
42-02-7223 B8 5-11
System Options
iCue User Interface

The iCue GUI provides an overview of group operation and status.
• Group Info
• Group ID: The Group ID (1) cannot be changed. All other IDs are reserved for future
use. If you need advanced System addressing information please contact MCE.
5-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

• Mode of Operation: The current group operating mode is displayed here:

• Automatic: The group assigns operating modes automatically depending upon build-
ing traffic conditions.
• Balanced: The group is operating in balanced mode, favoring neither up, down, nor
lobby traffic.
• Lobby Peak: The group is operating in lobby peak mode, favoring traffic from the
5
building lobby or lobbies.
• Demand Up Peak: The group is optimizing car assignment to favor up direction traffic.
• Demand Down Peak: The group is optimizing car assignment to favor down direction
traffic.
• Network Info (LAN and System): The LAN is the ethernet network used by iView, iMoni-
tor, and iReport to communicate with groups and cars. The System is the ethernet network
used by the group and individual car controls to communicate with one another.
• IP Address: The TCP/IP address of the group on this network
• Subnet Mask: The subnet mask limits the number of valid addresses in the group. For
iControl, this should always be 255.255.255.0
• Gateway LAN: 192.168.191.254
• Gateway System: 000.000.000.000 (o.o.o.o)
• Connection Status: Displays the active car connections.
• Bus Status: For each serial I/O bus (1, 2, 3, 4), displays operational status:
• Connected: Lights green if the bus is connected.
• Bus Voltage: Lights green if the bus voltage levels are adequate.
• Driver VDC: Lights green if the DC voltage provided by the driver is adequate.
• Node Control: The driver polls the nodes (addresses) of connected devices (hall calls,
other I/Os). This LED lights green when all nodes are responding correctly.
• Bus Enabled: Lights green when there is activity on the bus.
• High Current: Lights red if current demand is excessive. Occasional flashing is normal.
Near continuous flashing or steady on state means that the serial driver is unable to
provide enough current to meet demand. Continued high demand can damage the bus
driver. Contact MCE Technical Support.
• Emergency Power:
• Generator 1: Commercial power has been interrupted. Generator 1 is functioning.
• Generator 2: Commercial power has been interrupted. Generator 2 is functioning.
• Write privilege timeout: Allows you to set the amount of time for which write privilege is
granted. The default is 15 minutes. A value of zero = no time out.
Write Permission
When some one working in iView wants to change an iCue setting, they have to request permis-
sion by selecting Acquire from the Write Privileges menu. When they do, a pop-up dialog will
appear on the iCue screen in which you can approve or deny the request. This prevents remote
iView connections from making changes without the permission of machine room personnel.
Permission is granted automatically if you are working from the iView/iCue PC in the iCentral
dispatcher.
42-02-7223 B8 5-13
System Options
iCue Watchdog
When iCue is running, there is a utility called iCue Watchdog running in the background. The
watchdog monitors iCue and makes certain that it continues to run as it should.
The watchdog is a Windows Service, which means that it will not show up on the task bar or
icon tray. It runs under the name iCueWatchdogService.exe. Some attributes of the watchdog
include:
• The watchdog's purpose is to make sure iCue is running. If iCue is closed through the task
manager, crashes, or locks up, the watchdog will restart it.
• The watchdog will also monitor the iCue GUI. It will restart the GUI if it crashes for some
reason. This should have no effect on iCue or system dispatching.
• The watchdog should always be running whether iCue is running or not. It gets started in a
batch file that is put into the startup directory.
• If you close the iCue GUI (by right-clicking it in the icon bar and selecting exit) the watch-
dog assumes that is done intentionally and will not restart icue.
• Starting the iCue GUI after it has been closed will trigger the watchdog to start monitoring
the applications again.
• The watchdog has a config file for setting the directory paths of iCue and iCue GUI and
timers (in msec) that it uses to monitor the applications.
Caution
Watchdog information is provided to help you understand how iCue works. Never attempt to modify
Watchdog configuration. Incorrect settings can corrupt the functionality of the iCue group control
software.
5-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Comm-connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher
Comm-connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher

The Comm-connect cabinet is used to house the system communication components when the
Local/Dispatcher option is used. This cabinet houses the Serial Hall Call Driver(s), Ethernet
Switches, SC-ION Serial Control I/O Node board and AC power connections.
Figure 5.3 Typical Comm-connect Cabinet 5
Fuses
SC-ION Serial Control

I/O Node Board
Ethernet Switches
SC-HCE-ME Serial to
Ethernet Adapter
SC-HCDA Serial Hall Call

Driver Assembly
42-02-7223 B8 5-15
System Options
Figure 5.4 Comm-Connect Interconnection
iView iMonitor or iReport

Comm-connect Cabinet
LAN
To Cars
SC- (4 connections per car max.).
to Dispatcher ION
SYSTEM
Hall Calls To Cars

Serial
Serial to
Ethernet
Serial Bus
Ethernet
Other
For systems that use the Local/Dispatcher option, the Comm-Connect Cabinet is where the
serial and Ethernet communication equipment is housed and where the connections are made.
• Ethernet Switches: The Ethernet switches are the main connection / distribution point for
the Local Area Network (LAN) and System Ethernet networks.
• SC-HC-ME Serial to Ethernet Adapter: This component converts the serial signals from
the SC-HCDA Serial Hall Call Driver Assembly to the Ethernet protocol for transmission
on the System Ethernet network.
• SC-HCDA Serial Hall Call Driver Assembly: This assembly provides power and communi-
cation to the Serial Hall Call Node boards located in each hall fixture box. Power and com-
munication is transmitted on the two wire Serial Bus. Two SC-HCDA assemblies may be
housed in the Comm-connect cabinet. For more information about the Serial Hall Call
option see “Serial Hall Call” on page 5-17.
• SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board: This board is used for serial communication of signals
other than hall call signal (see “Checking Serial to IP Connections” on page 5-22).
5-16 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Serial Hall Call
Serial Hall Call

Serial I/O allows hall call buttons/indicators to be connected to iControl using a single 2-wire
bus per riser. The serial bus uses a +/- 15-volt square wave, sampled for both amplitude and
duty cycle, for communication between devices. The positive-going signal actually reaches +40-
volts and is regulated to +24-volts to drive hall call lamps or other loads.
5
A “bus driver” is required for each riser (up to 4 risers) to provide the capacity to carry the load
of multiple, simultaneously lighted lamps. A single controller can have up to four drivers/serial
buses with each bus addressing as many as 980 devices. The photograph below shows a serial
hall call bus driver installed in an iCentral Controller cabinet.
Figure 5.5 Serial Hall Call Bus Driver
Serial to TCP/IP conversion

for connection to System
switch. The board in your
system may be physically
different than this example.
Serial Bus connection
117 VAC power to driver
Serial output
from driver
42-02-7223 B8 5-17
System Options
Figure 5.6 Typical iCentral Serial Hall Call Connections
Figure 5.7 Typical Serial Hall Call Connections for a Simplex or Swing Car
iController
I"OX
V'.$
Open power box
3ERIAL (ALL
#ALL 0ORT
7IRING 6ENT
3# (#$! )3/
(ALL #ALL $RIVER
2IBBON CABLE TO )SOLATION "OARD
3# (#$! )3/ BOARD
CONNECTS HERE 3# (#$!
3# (#$! 3ERIAL (ALL #ALL $RIVER !SSEMBLY
USUALLY MOUNTED INSIDE THE I0OWER
"OX ON 3IMPLEX AND 3WING #ARS 3ERIAL (ALL #ALL "US
(ALL #ALL &IXTURES 3# (#. 3ERIAL (ALL #ALL .ODE "OARDS
5-18 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Hall Call Installation

Installing a serial hall call system includes:
• Pulling the serial bus wiring
• Setting the node board addresses
• Installing the hall call enclosures (refer to the job prints) 5
Pulling Serial Bus Wiring
The serial bus is the physical, twisted pair of 14 AWG or 16AWG wires along which all the hall
calls are connected. Install the serial bus wiring in accordance with applicable codes. The best
practice is to initiate each separate vertical bus wire run from the controller location. If neces-
sary, multiple serial bus runs can be “paralleled” at a driver to make them a single serial bus.
Refer to the drawing “Serial Hall Call Suggested Wiring Methods” in the job prints for specific
instructions for each job. The illustration below shows a single serial bus connected to serve two
vertical runs of hall call boxes.
Figure 5.8 Single Bus, Two Vertical Runs of Hall Call Boxes
42-02-7223 B8 5-19
System Options
Setting Node Board Addresses

Each hall call enclosure contains a “node” board. The node board provides two outputs to power
hall call lamps or LEDs, two inputs for the hall call buttons, and jumpers to set floor ID and hall
call “type.”
In a typical installation, a node (HCNT) board is mounted in each hall call receptacle. The blue
and orange wires of the serial bus connect to one end of the board, the hall call buttons and
lamps or LEDs connect to the other end (as shown in the job prints depending upon lamp or
LED connection). During installation, it is easiest to set jumpers on each node board so that it is
uniquely identified for floor ID and call type before you mount the board in the enclosure.
Node board jumper examples are illustrated below.
FLOOR ADDRESS X10 FLOOR ADDRESS X1

A JP4 B 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DN
UP
Unused
Floor/PI Address,
10's place Floor/PI Address, Subaddress,
1's place Hall Call Type
Floor number or first digits of serial address* Call type or last digit
of serial address*
* This example sets the Down (DN) input/output to address 124 and the UP address to 126.
The first two digits represent the floor number, in this example, 12.
• Floor Number/Address Jumpers

• Jumpers 2 and 3 set the Floor number (or the first two digits of the serial address) for
the node board.
FLOOR ADDRESS X10 FLOOR ADDRESS X1

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
JP3 JP2
• Jumper 3 sets the first digit for the floor (or serial address).
• Jumper 2 sets the second digit for the floor (or serial address).
• The example shown above would set the Floor number to 12.
• Because building floors are not consistently numbered and because a riser may not
serve all floors in a building, MCE creates a table of values for these jumpers according
to the building survey for the job. Refer to your job prints for precise information
about setting these jumpers for your installation.
5-20 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

• Call Type Jumper

• Jumper JP1 sets the call type for the two switch/lamp combinations serviced by the
node board (or the individual jumpers can be thought of as setting the last digits of the
boards two unique serial addresses). You set one jumper for each of the boards two I/
Os. The most common setting for JP1 jumpers, Down Front and Up Front hall calls, is
shown in the following illustration. The table after the illustration lists all call types. 5
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DN
UP
JP1
Table 5.1 Floor Sub-Addresses (Call Type) Jumper Settings
Sub-Address Default Definition Sub-Address Default Definition

0 Front Auxiliary Down Call 5 Standard Rear Down Call
1 Rear Auxiliary Down Call 6 Standard Front Up Call (shown)
2 Front Auxiliary Up Call 7 Standard Rear Up Call
3 Rear Auxiliary Up Call 8 Commandeer Front Call
4 Standard Front Down Call (shown) 9 Commandeer Rear Call
Note
Only the Sub-address jumper, JP1, can have more than one jumper inserted. (It can have a maximum of
two — one to complete the DN address, the other to complete the UP address.) All other node board
jumpers can have ONLY ONE jumper inserted. If more than one jumper is inserted in JP2 or JP3, the
system will not work.
Wiring the Nodes Each serial bus consists of a twisted pair of wires, one orange and
one blue. Each “node” on the bus (i.e., a hall call button/lantern pair), has a connection to the
orange wire and a connection to the blue wire in addition to button and indicator lamp connec-
tions. See the job prints and instructions accompanying the hall call kits for details.
42-02-7223 B8 5-21
System Options
Checking Serial to IP Connections

Each Serial Hall Call bus originates from a Serial Hall Call Driver. Each Serial Hall Call Driver
communicates with iCue through the System Ethernet switch.
Figure 5.9 Serial to TCP/IP Connection

Ethernet port for connection
to System hub/switch
Serial-to-Ethernet converter
(physically different model
may be used)
Serial communication to
serial-to-Ethernet converter
(In some applications, the
serial-to-Ethernet converter
is plugged directly into the
serial hall call driver and no
ribbon cable is used.)
1. Verify an orange Ethernet cable from the Serial-to-Ethernet converter to the System
hub/switch.
The Serial-to-Ethernet converters each have their own IP address. The IP address is preset at
the factory and should not need to be changed.
Caution
Always power down the serial hall call driver and wait at least one minute before installing, replacing,
disconnecting, or connecting an SC-HCE serial to Ethernet board to avoid potential damage from a
high voltage spike.
5-22 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Troubleshooting
This section describes some basic troubleshooting techniques for the serial/Ethernet transla-
tion units and the Serial Hall Call Driver Assembly (SC-HCDA).
Serial/Ethernet Translation
The serial I/O protocol used for MCE serial hall call and serial I/O board connections is trans- 5
lated to and from Ethernet bus protocol for system level communication over the iControl Sys-
tem network by the SC-HCE board. (System hub/switch in iCentral dispatcher. Orange TCP/IP
cables.)
SC-HCE Assemblies
The SC-HCE-2 is the newest release assembly. Older systems may use the SC-HCE-ME board
(not pictured). The SC-HCE-2 assembly is shown in the illustration below.
After making changes to SC-HCE-2 board configuration, reset the iCue PC so that it can rebuild
internal communication tables.
Figure 5.10 SC-HCE-2 Serial/Ethernet Translation Assembly
42-02-7223 B8 5-23
System Options
Mechanical Configuration
• Ethernet Port: Standard Ethernet port. Used to connect this assembly to the System
Ethernet hub/switch using an orange Ethernet cable.
Figure 5.11 Ethernet Ports
Link status
Network activity
Table 5.2 Ethernet Port LEDs
LED Color Description

Link Status/Integrity yellow Network link is operational: On continuously indicates that an Ether-
net connection is made.
Network Activity/Diagnostic orange Network Activity: Blinks when network traffic detected.
Table 5.3 SC-HCE-2 Indicators
Indicator Description
Bus Error ON = Communication problem. Blinking Rapidly = Bootloader running.
DS3 ON = Isolated CAN power supply OK
Link Status Yellow indicator, ON = Network link is operational. (located on the ethernet connector)
Network Activity Orange indicator, Blinks = Network traffic detected. (located on the ethernet connector)
ON ON = Board processor operating. Blinking Rapidly = another board at same address.
When board is first powered up or reset, this LED blinks the first digit, second digit, and
third digit of the software version number with a very short blink between each group for
separation.
V OK ON = Power to the board OK.
Table 5.4 SC-HCE-ME Indicators
LED Color Description

Bus Error ON = Communication problem. Blinking Rapidly = Bootloader running.
Link Status/Integrity yellow Network link is operational: On continuously indicates that an Ethernet
connection is made or an access point is engaged.
Network Activity/Diagnostic green Network Activity: On when network traffic detected; off when no traffic
detected.
Diagnostic: Flashes three times in even duration during power up or
reset, indicating successful startup.
FHCE OK ON = Power to the board OK.
5-24 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 5.5 SC-HCE-2 DIP Switch SW1
Switch Run State Function

1 OFF Not used.
2 OFF When ON, enables in-circuit programming through serial port. 5
3 OFF When ON, enables in-circuit programming through serial port.
4 OFF When ON, runs the ethernet bootloader instead of main application (on board startup).
5 Sets high bit of board ID. See following table.
6 Sets low bit of board ID. See following table.
Table 5.6 SCE-HCE-2 Board ID, Switches 5 and 6 of SW1
5 6 Riser ID Board TCP/IP Address
0 0 0 192.168.192.211
0 1 1 192.168.192.212
1 0 2 192.168.192.213
1 1 3 192.168.192.214
Table 5.7 SC-HCE-ME Board Switch Schedule
JP3 JP2 JP1 Result

Off Off Off 115.2 kHz serial port baud rate (default setting)
Off Off On 460.8 kHz serial port baud rate
Off On Off 230.4 kHz serial port baud rate
Off On On 921.6 kHz serial port baud rate
For board programming
On Off Off Board may be programmed
Table 5.8 SC-HCE-ME Board Switch Schedule for FPGA software V6.5.0 1DB38F
Jumper Position Description

Off 115.2 kHz baud rate (default setting)
JP1
On 230.4 kHz baud rate
Off Over clocking enabled (default setting)
JP2
On Over clocking disabled
Off Self resetting of (Digi) data converter enabled (default setting)
JP3
On Self resetting of (Digi) data converter disabled
Caution
Always power down the serial hall call driver and wait one minute before installing, replacing, dis-
connecting, or connecting an SC-HCE to avoid damaging the board.
42-02-7223 B8 5-25
System Options
Trouble Indications
• Hall Call buttons do not work
• Building Hall Call buttons do not light when pressed
• Building Hall Call buttons do not stay on until elevator arrives
• Elevator reports “Wild Operation” (stopping at every floor)
• iBox LCD displays Emergency Dispatch
• LEDs not lighted on the base board of the serial/Ethernet assembly
• Both Network Link and Network Activity LEDs OFF
• Hall Call LEDs or lamps flashing or not operating normally
If you are seeing any of the above problems, evaluate using the “Check” procedures below.
Quick Check
• During power up, -2 Boards:
• Two red SC-HCE board LEDs (V OK and Bus Error) should remain on for 30-40 sec-
onds after the Hall Call Driver is powered-up.
• After solid-on, LEDs will cycle through a period of start up activity then indicate nor-
mal operation as described below.
• During power up, -ME Boards:
• Two red SC-HCE board LEDs (FHCE and Bus Error) should remain on for 30-40 sec-
onds after the Hall Call Driver is powered-up.
• After solid-on, LEDs will cycle through a period of start up activity then indicate nor-
mal operation as described below.
• Normal operation indication, -2 Boards:
• Network Link Status LED on solidly (right, yellow).
• Network/Serial Port Activity LED flashes once every five seconds or more (left,
orange) when communicating with iCue.
• Network/Serial Port Activity LED should flash once when a Hall Call button is pressed.
• DS3 (red) LED on SC-HCE board solidly on.
• Bus Error (red) LED on SC-HCE board off. DIP switches 5 and 6 determine IP address;
the other switches should be OFF.
• Normal operation indication, -ME Boards:
• Network Link Status LED on solidly (left, yellow).
• Network/Serial Port Activity LED flashes once every five seconds (right, green) when
communicating with iCue.
• Network/Serial Port Activity LED should flash once when a Hall Call button is pressed.
• FHCE (red) LED on SC-HCE board solidly on.
• Bus Error (red) LED on SC-HCE board off.
• Auto Reset
• Check that the iCue software is running properly on the PC. If not, restart iCue by
clicking the Windows Start button and selecting Start/Programs/Startup/iCue.
5-26 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

General Check
1. Check all power and data cable connections.
• Port status LED on System hub/switch should light when the Ethernet cable is plugged
in between the hub/switch and the serial/Ethernet board.
• Ribbon cable (if used) seated properly on the hall call driver and the serial/Ethernet
board.
5
• Use a voltmeter to measure between each of the three DC voltages (3.3V, 5V, 9V) on
the serial/Ethernet (SC-HCE) board to ground. Voltages should read the provided
level, +/- 10%.
iView Check Use the iView System I/O Configuration screen, Bus tab to see if trouble is
indicated and to check that hall calls are addressed as specified in your job prints.
1. Launch iView and connect to the group.
2. Open the System I/O Configuration screen and select the Bus tab.
3. Verify the state of the indicator LEDs and that the addresses are as defined in the group
job prints (inputs as expected per serial address and Labels mapped to correct floor).
42-02-7223 B8 5-27
System Options
Serial Connection Check, -2 Board The Hyperterminal utility may be used to check
or default internal settings on SC-HCE boards. Contact MCE for information.
5-28 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

TCP Address Check, -ME Board The Digi Device Discovery utility may be used to
check and/or reset the TCP/IP address of the serial/Ethernet assembly (SC-HCE-ME). This
utility is available from MCE.
1. Start the Digi Device Discovery utility. The utility will launch, and check the System net-
work for any connected SC-HCE-ME.
5
2. Select the device. Click on Configure Network Settings.
Note that, to change Digi configuration, you will need to provide USN Name and Password:
• Default USN Name: root
• Default USN Password: dbps
42-02-7223 B8 5-29
System Options
3. In the Configure Network Settings dialog that appears, select Manually configure net-
work settings.
4. Check the drawing package for the dispatcher or the Ethernet Address examples draw-
ing in the manual.
5. If the IP address of the device is incorrect, set it appropriately.
Note
When entering the IP address, do not enter leading zeros. For example, in the address 192.168.192.056,
056 is entered as 56, with no leading zero.
6. Click Save. A Reboot Device dialog will appear:
7. Wait for ten to fifteen seconds (until the Diagnostic LED on the serial/Ethernet assem-
bly blinks for eight to ten seconds and then goes off), then click OK.
8. Restart the iCue PC.
5-30 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Hall Call Driver
Serial cable to serial/

ethernet translator
board
5
Serial Bus connection
AC power
Quick Test You can do a basic functionality test on the hall call driver.
With power applied:
1. Verify 120VAC power to the driver.
2. Unplug the Serial Bus connection (orange/blue wires).
3. Use a voltmeter to check the voltage between SHCS and SHCC. You should see approxi-
mately 30V, + or - 10%. (This voltage will only be present if the SC-HCE-ME or EM is
working properly as verified in preceding troubleshooting steps.)
If this voltage is present, the driver is probably operating properly.
42-02-7223 B8 5-31
System Options
Driver Voltages Test The hall call driver can be more thoroughly tested if necessary.
The test is relatively simple on iCentral units shipped after July, 2005 because a female, “test”
connector has been installed in the middle of the ribbon cable connecting the driver to the SC-
HCE (Digi board) assembly. Earlier units do not have the test connector.
Note
Note: Digi-board connector ground pins are 2,3,4,6,9,11,12,13,14,15, and 17.
1. Cut three pieces of 22 AWG solid wire 2” in length. Strip ½” insulation off each end.
These will be used as “jumpers” and test probes during the test.
2. At the SC-HCE board end, disconnect the
ribbon cable connected to the hall call
driver. Note the test connector in the middle
of the cable. Its pinout is as shown.
Note
Alternatively, if the cable does not have a test connector,

insert a 20 conductor ribbon cable, with a female connec-
tor at each end, into the SCHCD J2 socket.
3. Remove orange and blue bus wires from the

hall call driver bus terminal connector.
4. Connect 120 VAC power to Serial Hall Call
Driver power input terminals.
5. Insert the negative DC voltmeter lead to the
Hall Call Bus SHCC Terminal connector.
• Driver DC power supply test

1. Insert a wire test probe into pin 19. Connect
the positive voltmeter lead.
2. You should see 42-volts (+/- 10%). Remove the wire probe.
• Digi-board DC power supply test

1. Connect the positive voltmeter probe/lead to pin 8.
2. You should see 10-volts (+/- 10%).
5-32 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Flexible I/O
• Node Response test

1. Insert a probe wire into pin 20, connect the positive voltmeter lead.
2. You should see 5-volts, +/- 10%. Leave the probe wire in place.
3. Bend the wire/jumper and short pin 20 to pin 17.
4. Insert a probe at pin 5 and connect the positive voltmeter lead. 5
5. You should see something under 1-volt.
6. Leave the pin 20 to pin 17 jumper in place and the positive voltmeter lead connected to
pin 5.
7. Use a second jumper to short pin 10 to pin 12.
8. You should see something over 20 volts.
9. Leave the pin 20 to pin 17 jumper in place. Remove the lead from pin 5.
• Driver output voltage test

1. Place the positive DC voltmeter lead on the Hall Call Bus SHCS Terminal.
2. You should see something over 35-volts.
3. Insert a probe wire at pin 16 and connect the positive voltmeter lead
4. You should see something over 25-volts.
5. Leave the pin 20 to pin 17 jumper in place. Remove the lead from pin 16.
• Node control flag test

1. Insert a probe wire at pin 18 and connect the positive voltmeter lead.
2. Bend the wire probe and temporarily short pin 18 to pin 17 or pin 15.
3. Watch the voltmeter as you unplug the wire from pin 17 (or 15), it should read less than
1-volt when the short is released.
• Node control flag test preferred alternate method
1. Install a ¼ Watt 10K Ohm (brown, black, red) resistor between pin 15 and pin 18 and
connect voltmeter to pin 18.
2. Release pin 20 from the ground (pin 17). The voltmeter should read something over 20-
volts.
If the preferred alternate method is used you will see a short positive pulse on your voltme-
ter.
1. Place the positive DC voltmeter lead on the Hall Call Bus SHCS Terminal. The voltmeter
should indicate less than 1-volt.
2. Remove all test connections. If the driver passed all of the above tests it will likely oper-
ate OK.
Flexible I/O
iCue makes extensive use of a serial bus to handle a range of communication and control needs.
The serial bus is used to service the MCE Serial Hall Call System and to control I/O through one
or more SC-ION boards (input/output expansion boards). Each SC-ION board provides 16
user-configurable inputs and 16 user-configurable outputs. Input and output configuration,
using the MCE iView graphical user interface, is described in Section 6 of this guide. This sec-
tion describes physical I/O connections.
42-02-7223 B8 5-33
System Options
SC-ION Boards
The number of SC-ION boards in an iCue system will vary depending upon system configura-
tion and the number of additional inputs and outputs required for the job. A typical job might
have one SC-ION board, providing 16 additional inputs and 16 additional outputs.
Figure 5.12 SC-ION Board in iCue Cabinet

Factory programming serial port. Input/Output wires
Used to configure the board. to terminal strip
Inputs Board Reset

MCE Serial Bus Connection
Outputs High/Low (Current
Source/Current Sink)
Output Selection (J4)
In this configuration, inputs and

outputs have been routed to clearly
labeled terminal strips for easy user
identification and connection.
Terminal strips are located behind

the hinged panel inside the iCentral
cabinet, mounted for convenient
user access.
5-34 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Flexible I/O
I/O Connections
Connect inputs and outputs as shown in your job prints. SC-ION board inputs are always
117VAC. Outputs may be configured (in specific groups) to provide either a path to ground or
current to drive indicator lamps/LEDs.
Output State Selection The outputs are divided into three groups. Each group shares 5
a common. The common may be wired to provide a current source or a path to ground. The
groups are:
• Relays 1 — 4
• Relays 5 — 8
• Relays 9 — 16
The commons for the groups are determined by the connections made to board connector J4.
The appropriate connections are determined during the job survey. Each system is configured
before shipment. You need only connect the inputs and outputs as shown on the job prints.
Board Addresses Each of the 16 inputs and 16 outputs on the board has an address on
the system bus. The addresses are assigned as indicated by the job survey before the system is
shipped. A software tool, accessed through the iView, System, I/O screen, is used to set individ-
ual addresses and also to set the address range (10-488 or 10-988) for the job. To configure the
board, a iCue PC must be physically connected to the board serial port.
42-02-7223 B8 5-35
System Options
Serial COP
With the Serial Car Operating Panel system, car call buttons connect directly to a serializing
board located in the car station enclosure. Multiple Serial COP boards daisy-chain together to
accommodate high-rise installations with a lot of call buttons.
Figure 5.13 Serial COP board - typical installation
CAR CALL
BUTTON
+24V
Caution COM
This system is designed for 24 VDC cir-
+24V SIGNAL
cuits maximum. Connecting 120VAC or
DC will open the input fuses.
Connection Example:
Universal 4-pin inputs COM
5-36 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Serial COP
Wiring from the Serial COP board(s) to the iLink cartop box is a short length of shielded cable
with a telephone-style RJ-11 connector at each end. The iLink cartop box supports up to four
serial control panel connections. Communication between iLink and the controller is also serial,
thereby reducing the traveler and hoistway cabling.
Figure 5.14 iLink Cartop Box 5
42-02-7223 B8 5-37
System Options
Serial COP Board Specifications

Each Serial COP board handles up to 24 call buttons or switches. If more inputs are required,
Serial COP boards are daisy-chained together.
• Each of the Serial COP board’s 24 I/O connections can be used as an input, an output or a
combined call input and output.
• Pluggable connections are provided for COP buttons and switches.
• Inputs can be 12 - 24 VDC (24V preferred).
• Outputs: 24V, 6W (maximum) lamps or 250mA LEDs recommended.
• Socketed, easily replaceable drivers protect the board from damage due to out-of-range
inputs.
• The initial Serial COP board (ICE-COP) communicates with the iLink ICE-CTP board
using an RJ-11 cable.
• Additional Serial COP boards (ICE-COP-X) are daisy-chained using RJ-11/RJ-45 cables.
• All Serial COP board I/O assignments are field configurable using the iView Configuration
> I/O Boards > Configuration tab. The signal types include:
• Car calls
• Car call enables (security)
• Enable overrides (security)
• Door controls
• Car status
• Position indicators
• Alarm I/O
• Load indicators
• Operating mode I/O including: Fire service, Attendant service, Independent service,
Flood operation, Inspection operation, Swing operation, Earthquake operation, Sab-
bath operation, Recall operation and CFSS (Commandeer for Special Service) opera-
tion.
Serial COP Installation

1. Mount the Serial COP boards in the car operating panel.
2. Connect the COP switches and lamps to the Serial COP board(s) using the pluggable
connectors. Refer to job print drawings - Cartop Details (-CTx).
3. Verify the COP board I/O assignments using the iView Configuration > I/O Boards >
Configuration tab.
ICE-COP Board Diagnostics The DIP switches and LEDs in the upper right corner of
the ICE-COP board provide diagnostic information. Please refer to “ICE-COP-2 Serial Car
Operating Panel Board” on page 6-80.
5-38 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Load Weighers
Load Weighers
Please see the installation instructions shipped with the selected load weigher.
Weigher Calibration with iControl

1. Connect a multimeter to test points TP_LW and GND on the ICE-CTP board in the 5
cartop Box. Adjust trimpot LW ADJ until the meter reads the same value noted in step
6 in the calibration procedure.
Figure 6. ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board
TP_LW test point
LW ADJ trim pot
GND test point
2. To view load weigher voltages using the iView Virtual Oscilloscope:

• Connect to the controller; display the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Virtual Oscillo-
scope)
• Select Load Weigher (Raw) for Test point 1
• Observe Load Weigher voltage values on the digital display.
3. To verify the linearity of the load weigher, place weights in the car that represent the fol-
lowing and observe the voltage values:
• Empty car - about 0.0 volts
• 25% of overload weight - about 2.5 volts
• 50% of overload weight - about 5.0 volts
• 75% of overload - about 7.5 volts
• Full load weight - about 8 volts
• Overload weight - about 10 volts
4. On the iView Controller > Configuration > Load Weigher tab:
• Set Load weighing device type to Analog signal.
• Set Sensing type to Cross head deflection or rope tension sensing.
42-02-7223 B8 5-39
System Options
5. If the load weigher will be used to implement dispatching options, the parameters asso-
ciated with these options must be set (see Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching in
Section 4.
6. iControl needs to learn the empty and full load weights at every landing available to this
car. This is a semi-automated process (see Learning Load Values in Section 4.
5-40 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Troubleshooting
About Troubleshooting
This section contains information to help you diagnose and correct problems. If you are viewing
this on a computer, click the page number to jump to the appropriate section.
Troubleshooting Topics Description See

Troubleshooting Tools Lists the troubleshooting tools available. page 6-2
Safety String Bypass Jumper Temporarily bypasses an open safety string. page 6-3
Fault and status messages table - includes a description, car
iControl Messages page 6-14
reaction and troubleshooting tips for each message.
A description of the iBox boot process, procedure for
iBox Troubleshooting page 6-75
upgrading iBox firmware and for replacing an iBox.
Replacing Circuit Boards Instructions for removing and replacing circuit boards page 6-78
Descriptions of circuit board connections, indicators, jump-
Circuit Board Quick References page 6-79
ers and test points.
COP Board Diagnostics Use to diagnose problems with Serial COP boards. page 6-82
iLink Cartop Diagnostics Use to diagnose problems with iLink. page 6-85
Information for troubleshooting and replacing various com-
System 12 SCR Drive page 6-116
ponents in the System 12 Drive.
For Quattro DC Drive faults and alarms, refer to the Troubleshooting sec-
Quattro DC Drive Faults
tion of the Quattro DC Elevator Drive Technical Manual.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-1

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tools
The iBox provides status and trouble shooting information:
• The status line of the iBox display scrolls messages about system operation. Please refer to
“LCD Display and Keypad” on page 7-2.
• The iBox Event Log captures a FIFO file of the last 50 system events by event number and
name, and provides additional data for each. Press softkey (1) beneath the Car label, scroll
down to View Event Log and press Enter. To view event details, scroll to the desired event
and press Enter. Scroll down to see all of the data, including the event name. A descrip-
tion and troubleshooting suggestions for each event can be found in iView online Help
(Help > iView Help > Messages Reference) and in the iControl Messages table in this user
guide. Please refer to “iControl Messages” on page 6-14.
iView provides an extensive toolset to help you diagnose problems, including:
• Hoistway: The Hoistway window (Controller > View > Hoistway) shows the current posi-
tion of the car in the hoistway, calls registered, car speed and current operating mode.
• Operational Status tab: The Operational Status tab shows the current speed, position, pat-
tern, and motion of the car. Also, the status of the Safety and Cartop processors, safety cir-
cuits, leveling sensors and door locks is shown. The Faults and Car status text boxes show
general and car operation faults and car status so that you can monitor them easily while
viewing hoistway information and running the car. A description and troubleshooting sug-
gestions for each fault or status message can be found in iView online Help (Help > iView
Help > Messages Reference) and in the iControl Messages table in this user guide. Please
refer to “iControl Messages” on page 6-14.
• Event Log: The Event Log tab (View > Diagnostics > Event Log) monitors and records sys-
tem events. You can easily save event log information to a file on your iView PC for archi-
val and future reference. A description and troubleshooting suggestions for each event can
be found in iView online Help (Help > iView Help > Messages Reference) and in the iCon-
trol Messages table in this user guide. Please refer to “iControl Messages” on page 6-14.
• Fault Bypass: The Fault Bypass tab (View > Diagnostics > Fault Bypass) allows you to
bypass over 50 system faults. The Fault Bypass switch on the iBox must be ON and each
fault bypass times out after fifteen minutes to prevent the possibility of unintended, long
term bypassing of a critical faults. To bypass faults, the car must be on Machine Room
Inspection or Test Operation.
• Diagnostic Flags: The Diagnostic Flags tab (View > Diagnostics > Diagnostic Flags) allows
you to view system diagnostic flags and car statuses in four classifications (Operation,
Motion, Safety, Drive).
• Terminal Switches Status: The Terminal Switches Status tab (View > Diagnostics > Termi-
nal Switches Status) shows information about the speed and position of the car when each
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch opened.
• Diagnostic Outputs: Diagnostic Outputs (View > Diagnostics > Diagnostic Outputs win-
dow) allows you to choose and simultaneously monitor up to 16 system outputs on screen.
• Virtual Oscilloscope: The oscilloscope (View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope) allows
you to select and view two system outputs simultaneously on a virtual oscilloscope.
6-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Safety String Bypass Jumper
Safety String Bypass Jumper

If any switch or relay in the safety string opens, the car immediately loses power and stops. In
some situations, you may need to temporarily bypass an open safety string to move the car so
that the safety string can once again be “made up.” For example, if the car has tripped a final
limit, you will need to bypass the safety string and move the car up (or down) the hoistway past
the limit switch so that the safety string can again be completed. Once the safety string is com-
6
plete again, you must immediately remove the bypass jumper.
The safety string bypass location is accessed through ports on the front cover of the iBox. The
ports are sized so that a jumper wire (16AWG minimum) with insulated clips on each end can
be used to short the SB and 3 terminals to bypass the safety string.
Danger
You are jumpering 110VDC. Place the jumper with caution, being certain that you are insu-
lated from the possibility of electrical shock.
SB ------ CAUTION! HIGH VOLTAGE ------ 3
Safety String Bypass Jumper
The safety bypass circuitry is intelligent. The jumper will have no effect if it is put in place with
the safety string intact (other than to generate a time out after 15 minutes pass). The jumper will
bypass the string and allow the car to be moved only if it is placed after the safety string has
opened. If the jumper is in place when the string opens, you must remove the
jumper, then replace it before it will bypass the string.
The jumper is monitored by a timer. If the jumper is in place for longer than 15 minutes, the
timer will expire, drop the brake and motor contactors and generate a Safety Bypass Jumper
Time Out. To clear the fault and restart the car, you must remove the bypass jumper. If more
time is needed, re-install the jumper and the fifteen-minute timer will restart.
The table below specifies what is and is not bypassed by the jumper.
Table 6.1 Safety String Bypass Jumper
Bypasses Does not bypass

Cartop exit input Rope Gripper OK from Rope Gripper board
Emergency Stop switch on car Unintended motion fault already tripped
Governor switch input Rope brake fault already tripped
Hoistway safety string Machine Room Emergency Stop switch
Car safety string Any Safety Processor A or B fault
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-3

Troubleshooting
iControl Messages List - Numerical

Almost all troubleshooting begins with examining system messages. System outputs are dis-
played alternating with other messages on the iBox LCD. Status, Fault, and Event messages are
displayed by iView. (iBox maintains an Event Log as well.) This section contains two tables.
Table 6.2 provides a cross-reference from iBox ID numbers to the associated iControl message
name. Table 6.3 lists system messages in alphabetical order and describes the cause and recom-
mended troubleshooting procedures if appropriate.
Table 6.2 Cross Reference: iBox Event Log ID Numbers to iControl Messages
ID # iControl Message (iBox Event Log and iView Controller Event Log)
1 Drive On Fault (was Drive Ready On Fault)
2 Brake Enable Fault
4 Insufficient Brake Feedback Fault
5 Brake Voltage Not On Fault
6 Excessive Brake Feedback Fault
7 Brake Pick Fault
8 Brake Module Over Temperature Fault
9 Heat Sensor Fault 2
12 Power Supply Fault 1
16 Drive At-Speed Fault
17 Drive Fault
18 Drive Ready Fault
19 Front Door Close Time-out
20 Front Door Close Fault
21 Front Door Open Time-out
22 Front Door Open Fault
23 Rear Door Close Time-out
24 Rear Door Close Fault
25 Rear Door Open Time-out
26 Rear Door Open Fault
27 Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch)
28 Earthquake Operation (Counterweight)
29 Earthquake Run
30 Earthquake Operation Activated
31 Earthquake Operation Deactivated
32 Earthquake Emergency Stop
33 Fire Service Recall Main
34 Fire Service Recall Alternate
35 Fire Service In-car Activated
36 Elevator Recall Operation (Switch 1)
42 Emergency Power Recall
43 Emergency Power Shutdown
6-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

44 Emergency Power Run
45 Front Door Contact Fault
46 Rear Door Contact Fault
47 Front Photo Eye Failure
48 Front Safe Edge Failure 6
49 Rear Photo Eye Failure
50 Rear Safe Edge Failure
51 Cartop Inspection Operation
53 Hoistway Access Operation
54 Machine Room Inspection Operation
55 Test Mode
56 Capture Mode
57 Independent Service
60 Attendant Service
61 Passenger Operation
62 Up Normal Terminal Switch 1 Position Fault
67 Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault
68 Down Normal Terminal Switch 1 Position Fault
73 Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault
74 Position Quadrature Fault
75 Position Speed Threshold Fault
76 Position Speed Deviation Fault
77 Motion Start Fault
78 User code accessing an invalid logical indicator (internal event)
79 Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Activated)
80 Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Deactivated)
81 Car delayed with doors open
82 Car delayed with doors closed
83 Car out of service with doors open
84 Car out of service with doors closed
85 Earthquake board power supply ON
86 Earthquake board power supply OFF
87 Earthquake reset button stuck ON
88 Earthquake reset button OK
89 Fire Service In-car Hold Operation
90 Fire Service In-car Recall Operation
91 Load learn process activated
92 Load learn process deactivated
93 Car Heavy Load Activated - Hall Calls Bypassed
94 Car Over Load Activated
95 Fire Service Recall Deactivated
96 Fire Service In-car Deactivated
97 Emergency Power Activated
98 Emergency Power Deactivated
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-5

Troubleshooting
100 Car Dispatch Load
102 Car Heavy Load - Deactivated
104 Car Over Load Deactivated
105 Photo Eye Antinuisance
106 Light Load Antinuisance
107 Nudging Operation
108 Front Photo Eye Bypassed
109 Rear Photo Eye Bypassed
110 Front Safe Edge Bypassed
111 Rear Safe Edge Bypassed
118 Inspection Overspeed Fault
119 Tach Error Fault
120 Drive Enable Feedback Fault
121 Safety A Inspection Overspeed Fault
122 IO Map Compare Fault
123 IO Map Toggle Compare Fault
124 Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out
125 Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out
126 Learn Switch Timed Out Fault
127 Safety A SIB Device Fault
128 Safety B SIB Device Fault
129 QPRAM Device Error
130 EEPROM Device Error
131 Front Door Open Button Bypassed
132 Rear Door Open Button Bypassed
135 Door Lock Clipped Greater than 200fpm
136 Safety String Open
137 Motion stopped due to IO toggle test
138 Safety Configuration Mismatch
139 Safety Configuration Learn Fault
140 IO Map Compare Alert
141 Safety A Contract Overspeed Fault
142 Safety A Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault
143 Safety Inventory Checksum Fault
144 Safety Configuration Checksum Fault
145 Limit Switches Checksum Fault
146 Safety Configuration Inventory Cross Check Fault
147 Safety Inventory Learn Fault
148 Limit Switches Learn Fault
149 Dual Channel QUAD Fault
150 Single Channel QUAD Fault
151 Loss of Position or Speed Indicators
152 Safety Inventory Comparison Fault
153 Safety Inventory Creation Fault
154 Position Quadrature Reversed Fault
155 Down Normal Terminal Switch 1 Level 1 Speed Fault
6-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

165 Up Normal Terminal Switch 1 Level 1 Speed Fault
166 Up Normal Terminal Switch 2 Level 1 Speed Fault 6
175 Safety A DETS Level 2 Speed Fault
176 Safety A UETS Level 2 Speed Fault
177 Excessive Faults Shutdown
178 Safety A Unintended Motion Fault
179 Ascending Car Overspeed Fault
180 Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
181 Position Synchronized at Terminal
182 Position Synchronization Required at Floor
183 Position Synchronized at Floor
184 Cartop Communication Fault
185 Cartop Inspection Unintended Motion Fault
186 Cartop Automatic Unintended Motion Fault
187 Motor Limit Timed Out
188 Safety B Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out
189 Safety B Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out
190 IO Map Compare Long Term Alert
191 IO Map Compare Long Term Fault
192 Position Location Error Fault
193 Position Cartop Offset Fault
194 Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
195 Motor Contactor Proofing Fault
196 Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
197 Brake Contactor Proofing Fault
198 Safety B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault
199 Safety B DETS Level 2 Speed Fault
200 Safety B Inspection Overspeed Fault
201 Safety B Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault
202 Safety B Contract Overspeed Fault
203 Excessive Relevels Fault
204 Excessive Restarts Fault
205 Cartop Emergency Stop
206 Cartop Power Loss
207 Up Direction Limit Open
208 Down Direction Limit Open
209 Floor Location Fault
210 Floor Sensor Fault
211 Power Transfer Input Activated
212 Power Transfer Input Deactivated
213 Invalid Front Door Position
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-7

Troubleshooting
214 Invalid Rear Door Position
215 Earthquake Reduce Speed
216 Cartop Inspection Operation
217 Car Panel Inspection Operation
218 Hoistway Access Inspection Operation
219 Machine Room Inspection Operation
220 Inspection Operation
221 Construction Cartop Inspection Operation
222 Construction Car Panel Inspection Operation
223 Construction Hoistway Access Inspection Operation
224 Construction Machine Room Inspection Operation
225 Construction Inspection Operation
226 Door Lock Clipped Less than 200fpm
227 Invalid Configuration Input (was Invalid Input)
228 Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch 1)
229 Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch 1)
230 Emergency Medical Service Deactivated
231 Emergency Medical Service Bypassed
232 SCR Power Supply Fault
233 SCR AC Phase Fault
234 SCR Contactor Fuse Fault
235 SCR Phase Lock Loop Fault
236 SCR Phase Lock Loop Warning
237 SCR Dynamic Brake Fault
238 SCR Instantaneous Over Current
239 SCR Armature Voltage On
240 SCR High Temperature Fault
241 SCR Loop Over Current
243 SCR Insufficient Armature Current
244 SCR Excessive Armature Current
245 SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Enabled
246 SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Disabled
247 Insufficient Motor Field Forcing Feedback Fault
248 Insufficient Motor Field Feedback Fault
249 Swing Operation Activated
250 Swing Operation Deactivated
251 Field Module Over Temperature Fault
252 Speed Limit, MF Forcing
253 Tach Failure
254 Sabbath Operation Activated
255 Sabbath Operation Deactivated
256 Emergency Brake Tripped
257 Landing System Sensor Fault
258 Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short Fault
259 Emergency Brake Leg 2 Short Fault
260 Alternate Speed Profile 1 Activated
261 Alternate Speed Profile 1 Deactivated
262 Alternate Speed Profile 2 Activated
263 Alternate Speed Profile 2 Deactivated
264 Motor Field Forcing Timed Out
265 iView Logged On
266 iView Logged Off
6-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

267 iView Timed Out
268 iView Lost Connection
269 Balanced Mode
270 Lobby Peak Mode
271 Demand Up Peak Mode 6
272 Demand Down Peak Mode
273 CFSS Mode 1 Recall Activated
274 CFSS Mode 1 at Floor Activated
275 CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated
276 CFSS Mode 2 Recall Activated
277 CFSS Mode 2 at Floor Activated
278 CFSS Mode 2 In-car Activated
279 Emergency Alarm Acknowledged
280 Emergency Alarm Activated (Safety opened)
281 Emergency Alarm Activated (Car delayed with doors closed)
282 Emergency Alarm Activated (Alarm button)
283 Emergency Alarm Activated (In-car stop switch)
284 Emergency Brake OK open
285 Cartop Exit Open
286 Governor open
287 Safety H String Open
288 Safety C String Open
289 Machine Room Stop Switch Open
290 Car Stop Switch Open
291 Controller Main Computer Startup
292 Floor Synchronization Fault
293 Terminal Synchronization Fault
294 Position Synchronization Fault
296 Up Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown
297 Down Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown
298 Power Up Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
299 Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Speeds
300 Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Positions
301 Excessive Motor Field Feedback Fault
302 Brake Output Circuit Failure
303 Group Communication Lost
304 Group Communication Established
305 Flood Operation Activated
306 Flood Operation Deactivated
307 Emergency Brake UIM Reset Button Stuck
308 Exercise Operation Activated
309 Exercise Operation Deactivated
310 SCR Low Line Fault
311 SCR Low Line Caution Activated
312 SCR Low Line Caution Deactivated
313 SCR Low Line Test Fault
314 Excessive Restarts Warning
315 Governor Speed Reduction Switch Fault
316 Software Recall Switch Activated
317 SCR Drive Ready Fault
318 Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated
319 Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Deactivated
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-9

Troubleshooting
320 Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated
321 Retiring Cam Protection Fault Deactivated
322 Watchdog Ordered Control Stop Before Reset
323 Front Hall Door Open Button Bypassed
324 Rear Hall Door Open Button Bypassed
327 Bus 2 Fuse Open
328 Bus 2D Fuse Open
329 Bus 2MC Fuse Open
330 Bus 2PI Fuse Open
331 Bus 3 Fuse Open
332 Bus 3HA Fuse Open
333 Watchdog Ordered Emergency Stop Before Reset
334 Local Dispatcher Activated
335 Local Dispatcher Deactivated
336 Drive Start Failure
337 Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch 2)
338 Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch 2)
339 Pre-start Door Lock Fault
340 Emergency Alarm Deactivated without Acknowledgement
341 Cartop Exit no Counterweight Configuration Error
342 Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
343 Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
344 Sheave Brake Pick Fault
345 Sheave Brake Drop Fault
346 Serial COP Buss 1 Comm Fault
350 Serial COP Bus 1 Inventory Fault
354 User Defined Event 1 On
355 User Defined Event 1 Off
6-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

374 Drive Communication Fault
375 Drive Communication Warning
376 Motor Limit Protection Timer Elapsed
377 Shuttle Service Activated
378 Shuttle Service Deactivated 6
379 Event Log Cleared
380 Front Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed
381 Rear Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed
382 Backup Power Unit Failure Activated
383 Backup Power Unit Failure Deactivated
384 Backup Power Direction Reversal
385 Backup Power Recall ON
386 Backup Power Recall OFF
387 Machine Room Heat Detectors Activated
388 Machine Room Heat Detectors Deactivated
389 Hoistway Heat Detectors Activated
390 Hoistway Heat Detectors Deactivated
391 Floor Heat Detectors Activated
392 Floor Heat Detectors Deactivated
393 Heat Detectors Recall Activated
394 Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated
395 Heat Detectors Recall Complete
396 Brake Drop Fault
397 Cartop Communication Established
398 Hall Call Service Disabled
399 Hall Call Service Enabled
400 Nudging Front
401 Nudging Rear
402 Emergency Dispatch On
403 Emergency Dispatch Off
404 Safety B Unintended Motion Fault
405 SPA Spare Event 1
413 LCD Fault
414 Battery Voltage Low - IMP
415 Emergency Brake OK open Off
416 Safety H String Open Off
417 Safety C String Open Off
418 Cartop Exit Open Off
419 Brake Pick Fault Off
420 IO Map Compare Fault Off
421 IO map Toggle Compare Fault Off
422 Safety A SIB Device Fault Off
423 Safety B SIB Device Fault Off
424 Invalid Configuration Input Off
425 Invalid Configuration Input DLMS
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-11

Troubleshooting
426 Invalid Configuration Input DLAT
427 Invalid Configuration Input DLAB
428 Invalid Configuration Input DCMS
429 Invalid Configuration Input DCAT
430 Invalid Configuration Input DCAB
431 Invalid Configuration Input DPM
432 Invalid Configuration Input CTEX
433 Invalid Configuration Input DLMSR
434 Invalid Configuration Input DCMSR
435 Invalid Configuration Input DPMR
436 Safety String Closed
437 IMP Switch Fault - Emergency Stop
438 IMP Switch Fault - Fault Bypass
439 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection DOWN
440 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection UP
441 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection Enable
442 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection
443 IMP Switch Fault - Learn
444 IMP Switch Fault - Test
445 IMP Switch Fault - Write Enable
446 IMP Switch Fault - Hoistway Door Bypass
447 IMP Switch Fault - Car Door Bypass
448 IMP Switch Fault - None
451 Excessive Faults Warning
452 Stuck Cartop Inspection Input
453 Cartop Inspection Inputs OK
454 Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input
455 Car Panel Inspection Inputs OK
456 Cartop Inspection Disabled
457 Cartop Inspection Enabled
458 Hoistway Access Disabled
459 Hoistway Access Enabled
460 Car Panel Inspection Disabled
461 Car Panel Inspection Enabled
462 Machine Room Inspection Disabled
463 Machine Room Inspection Enabled
464 Stuck Inspection Input Fault
465 DBD Mode Activated
466 ETA Mode Activated
467 Hall Call Bypass Input ON
468 Hall Call Bypass Input OFF
469 Capture Input ON
470 Capture Input OFF
471 Brake Voltage Not Off Fault
474 Emergency Power Recall (In Service)
475 Emergency Stop Input Activated
476 Emergency Stop Input Deactivated
477 Silent Mode Activated
478 Silent Mode Deactivated
479 Safety B Fault Activated
480 Safety B Fault Deactivated
481 Jail Master Mode
6-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

482 Jail Secure Mode
495 DBD PHE Antinuisance
496 DBD Empty Car Antinuisance
498 Load Weigher Zero Calibration: Manual
501 Load Weigher Zero Calibration: Complete 6
508 ESTOP due to disabled direction of travel
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-13

Troubleshooting
iControl Messages
Table 6.3 iControl Messages
iControl Messages
Alternate Floor Smoke Sensor Recall, ALTERNATE FLOOR SMOKE
Description: Recall to main fire floor due to smoke detector input(s) from floors other than main recall floor.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined main fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation is
according to user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the sensor input and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Smoke and fire sensors as indicated in job prints.
Alternate Speed Profile 1 Activated, Alternate Speed Profile 1, ALT SPEED PROFILE 1
Description: Indicates that the Alternate Speed Profile has been enabled via a keyed or switched input. When
so configured, Alternate Speed Profiles 1 and 2 use Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 performance patterns respec-
tively. (Pattern Configuration/Alternate ‘n’.)
Car Reaction: Car uses assigned pattern (Alternate 1 or 2).
Alternate Speed Profile 1 Deactivated
Alternate Speed Profile 2 Activated. Alternate Speed Profile 2, ALT SPEED PROFILE 2. See Alternate
Speed Profile 1 Activated.
Alternate Speed Profile 2 Deactivated
Ascending Car Overspeed Fault, ASCND CAR OVR SPD FLT
Description: Ascending Car Overspeed Fault. This fault is tripped if the elevator is traveling in the up direc-
tion, the Governor contact opens, and the Rope Gripper option is selected on the Safety Configuration
screen. You will also see a Governor Open fault.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. The rope brake
drops if installed. If you do not have a RG (Rope Gripper) or EB (Emergency Brake) board in your controller,
this fault will not appear.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iView event log for related events.
2. Identify and correct any operational problems. Check for proper governor operation.
3. Resetting the Governor switch will automatically clear this fault.
Attendant Service, Attendant Svc
Description: Indicates that the elevator is operating under Attendant Service mode of operation. Generally
initiated via an input (switch or button) at the car operating panel.
Car Reaction: Car operates under attendant mode.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related input: Attendant service as indicated on the job prints.
Automatic Stop
Description: The Automatic Stop feature has been enabled.
Car Reaction: The car will stop at a user-defined floor whenever it passes that floor in a user-defined direc-
tion and the doors will open and remain open for a user-defined time.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the parameters on the Configuration > Car Operation > Auto Stop tab for proper configuration.
Backup Power Direction Reversal
Description: The Backup power recall reverse direction input has been activated (signal from the TAPS Trac-
tion Auxiliary Power Supply).
Car Reaction: The car direction of travel is reversed unless the car is on Earthquake operation and the CW1/
CW2 inputs (Counterweight movement sensor) are active and reversal would move the car in the direction
towards the counter weight.
Backup Power Recall OFF
Description: The Backup power recall input has been deactivated.
6-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iControl Messages

iControl Messages
Backup Power Recall ON, BACKUP POWER RECALL
Description: The Backup power recall input has been activated (signal from the TAPS Traction Auxiliary Power
Supply).
Car Reaction: If the car is not currently at a floor, it will move to a floor and cycle the doors. If no load
6
weigher is used, the car will move to the closest floor. If a load weigher is used, direction is dependent on the
car load and the Counterweight percentage parameter. If load weight is greater than Counterweight percent-
age, car moves down and vice versa.
Backup Power Unit Failure Activated, Backup power unit failure, BACKUP POWER FAILURE
Description: The Backup power unit failure input is low.
Car Reaction: None. The event is displayed and logged.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the UPS unit for faults.
2. Check the connection to the Backup power unit failure input.
3. It may be necessary to replace the battery
Backup Power Unit Failure Deactivated
Description: The Backup power unit failure input has changed back to its normally high state.
Balanced Mode
Description: Passenger operation. Up and Down traffic treated equally. Assigned by group controller.
Battery Voltage Low-IMP, BATTERY VLTG LOW-IMP
Description: The voltage on Battery B1 on the IMP board has dropped below 2.22 VDC and the battery must
be replaced. Otherwise the BBRAM will be unable to retain the data stored during a power loss or shut down.
Blocking New Remote Connections, BLOCKING REMOTE UIS
Description: When a car switches from Local to Local Dispatcher, many parameters and connections to other
cars must be stabilized. During this time the new Local Dispatcher will not accept any new remote connec-
tions for 30 seconds.
Car Reaction: iView will remain connected if it was already connected. Any new iMonitor, iReport, Liftnet,
BMS, etc. connections will be denied for 30 seconds while the car is syncing up and stabilizing data.
Troubleshooting:
1. If this message is persistent for more than 30 seconds or if it seems to come and go for extended periods
of time, the car may be confused as to if it should be the Local Dispatcher. Check the Alternate Dis-
patcher settings (System Configuration > Building tab), and Car ID (Controller > General > General tab)
parameters. This has been an issue when upgrading a car designated as Alternate Dispatcher with a Car
ID not = 1. A reboot was necessary to fix it, but is also necessary after an upgrade anyway.
Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault, BRAKE CNT DRV PRF FLT
Description: Fault signal for brake contactor driver proofing.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify brake contactor driver proofing circuits.
Brake Contactor Proofing Fault, BRAKE CONT PRF FAULT
Description: Fault signal for brake contactor proofing.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify brake contactor proofing circuits.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-15

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Brake Drop Fault, BRAKE DROP FAULT
Description: Indicates brake contact input (SP2D or Brake Switch) was not in the state required by the
“Brake is picked when SP2D or Brake Switch terminal is high (low)” parameter, indicating brake was not fully
dropped for more than one second after the car had stopped. This fault may be bypassed on the Controller >
Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab by setting Brake Switch.
Car Reaction: Car is removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Controller > Configuration > Brake > Control tab, check “Brake is picked when SP2D or Brake Switch ter-
minal is high (low)” to determine proper state of terminal SP2D or Brake Switch when brake is dropped.
2. Verify operation of brake and brake switch (open or closed, see step 1) when the brake is fully dropped.
3. With the brake dropped, verify the state of input SP2D or Brake Switch (low or high, see step 1). Please
refer to “Installing Brake Monitoring” on page 3-6.
4. Use the iBox Fault reset button to clear the fault.
Brake Enable Fault
Description: When the brake module is enabled, a feedback signal is generated for the iBox. If the feedback
signal is not detected, this fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the Brake Voltage Feedback test point on the iView Oscilloscope screen.
2. Check the iField Brake Module connections.
3. Check the brake and brake connections.
4. If brake feedback voltage is actually present, the iBox Safety board may be defective.
Brake Module Over Temperature Fault, BRAKE OVER TEMP FAULT
Description: Temperature sensor in the brake module detected an overheat condition.
Car Reaction: If the car is running, it will continue to answer current call. After the car is stopped at a floor,
the car will not be allowed to run until the overheat condition clears.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for excessive machine room ambient temperature. (Should not exceed 104 degrees F or 40C.)
2. Verify that air enters through the bottom of the power box and is only expelled via the fan at the top of
the power box.
3. Check the running temperature inside the power box (should not exceed 105 degrees F).
4. Check for insufficient air circulation through the power box.
5. Check for improperly picking brake.
6. Check for faulty brake module.
7. Check for faulty connection between brake module and iBox.
Brake Output Circuit Failure, BRAKE OUTPUT FAILURE
Description: The flywheel brake IGBT has failed or the fuse has opened.
Car Reaction: Normal stop.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify proper operation of the brake module while running on machine room inspection:
• Does the brake pick voltage match the setting on the Configuration > Brake tab?
• Does the brake hold voltage match the setting on the Configuration > Brake tab?
2. Verify proper operation of the brake module while performing the Brake Calibration:
• Does the voltage max out and then slowly ramp down to about 10% of maximum supply voltage?
• Does the current max out and then slowly ramp down to about 10% of maximum supply current?
If the brake module is constantly outputting maximum voltage and current based on the testing in steps 1
and 2, the main IGBT on the module is most likely damaged. The module must be replaced.
CAUTION: An open or damaged RB resistor can cause the IGBT to fail. Check the resistor by removing the
center tap and measuring the value of the entire resistor. It is strongly recommended to do this before
installing another brake module.
6-16 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Brake Pick Fault, BRAKE PICK FAULT
Description: Indicates brake contact input (SP2D or Brake Switch) not in state required by “Brake is picked
when SP2D or Brake Switch terminal is high (low)” parameter, indicating brake not fully picked during one
entire run or was late going low (or high) indicating slow picking brake during three consecutive runs. Fault 6
may be bypassed on Controller > Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab by setting Brake Switch.
Car Reaction: Car completes it’s nearest run and is removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Controller > Configuration > Brake > Control tab, check “Brake is picked when SP2D or Brake Switch ter-
minal is high (low)” to determine proper state of terminal SP2D or Brake Switch when brake is picked.
2. Verify operation of brake and brake pick switch (open or closed, see step 1) when brake is fully picked.
3. With the brake picked, verify the state of input SP2D or Brake Switch (low or high, see step 1). Please
refer to “Installing Brake Monitoring” on page 3-6. Use the iBox Fault reset button to clear the fault.
Brake Pick Fault Off (See: Brake Pick Fault)
Brake Voltage Not Off Fault, BRAKE V NOT OFF FAULT
Description: Indicates that after the brake contactor picked and before the brake was enabled, brake output
voltage exceeded 70% of picking voltage. The likely cause is a shorted IGBT in the brake module.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Fault will self clear and car will attempt to run again.
Troubleshooting: Check resistance between TP5 (+ lead) and FMSO (- lead) on brake module. Less than 500
ohms indicates that the brake IGBT is shorted.
Brake Voltage Not On Fault, BRAKE V NOT ON FAULT
Description: After brake contactors are picked and controller did not receive more than 30% of the picking
voltage after 1 second, this fault is generated. May be bypassed on the iView Fault Bypass screen.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Fault will self
clear and car will attempt to run again.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Brake AC input voltage at FB1 and FB2. Verify FB1 and FB2 fuses are good.
2. Verify BRAKE connector (25 pin DSUB) on right side of iBox is seated properly.
3. Verify brake output voltage with multimeter on terminals B1 and B2.
4. Recalibrate brake module if applicable.
5. Replace Communication cable (25pin M/F 6FT DSUB)(PN: C-COMM-25P-M/F-6) from iBox BRAKE port to
iField Module inside the iPowerbox.
Bus 2 Fuse Open, BUS 2 FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2 fuse is open.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Cancel demand and open doors. No further movement is allowed.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2 fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 2D Fuse Open, BUS 2D FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2D fuse is open.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2D fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 2MC Fuse Open, BUS 2MC FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2MC fuse is open.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2MC fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 2PI Fuse Open, BUS 2PI FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2PI fuse is open.
Car Reaction: None. The PI signals will not be active.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2PI fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 3 Fuse Open, BUS 3 FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 3 fuse is open.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-17

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Troubleshooting: Check bus 3 fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 3HA Fuse Open, BUS 3HA FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 3HA fuse is open.
Car Reaction: None. No further movement is allowed when on Access operation.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 3HA fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Capture Input OFF (see Capture Input ON)
Capture Input ON
Description: Discrete input used to capture the car. This input will activate Capture mode, similar to the iBox
Capture switch (see also: Capture Mode).
Car Reaction: The car takes itself out of hall call service. Hall calls are canceled if no other car is available for
hall call service. The car is also not eligible for parking.
Troubleshooting: Check the related discrete inputs.
Capture Mode, Capture
Description: Indicates the Capture mode switch on the iBox has been placed in the ON position.
Car Reaction: Car enters capture mode, removing itself from group operation (hall calls assigned to it will be
reassigned to another elevator if possible). The car answers registered car calls but does not respond to hall
call demand. Intended to allow maintenance personnel access to the car.
Car delayed with doors closed, CAR DEL DOORS CLOSED
Description: Indicates that a car, with doors fully closed, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destina-
tion.
Car Reaction: Assigned hall calls will be reassigned to other available cars.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is inhibiting the car from reaching its destination.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the car from moving.
Car delayed with doors closing, CAR DEL DOORS CLOSING
Description: Indicates that a car, with doors closing, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
Car delayed with doors open, CAR DEL DOORS OPEN
Description: Indicates that a car, with doors fully open, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destina-
tion.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is keeping the doors open or inhibiting them from closing.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the doors from closing.
Car delayed with doors opening, CAR DEL DOORS OPENING
Description: Indicates that a car, with doors opening, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is inhibiting the doors from opening.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the doors from opening.
Car delayed with doors stalled, CAR DEL DOORS STALLED
Description: Indicates that a car, with doors stalled, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is inhibiting the doors from closing.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the doors from closing.
6-18 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Car delayed with unknown door position, CAR DEL DOORS UNKNOWN
Description: Indicates that a car, with unknown door position, has been delayed in reaching an assigned des-
tination.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is causing the doors to be reported in an invalid condition.
Car Dispatch Load. Not currently used.
Car Door Bypass, CAR DOOR BYPASS
Description: The Car Door Bypass switch on the iBox is in the Bypass position. (View-only on iView Safety
screen, enabled/disabled by MCE according to safety jurisdiction.)
Car Reaction: The car is placed in Inspection mode. To move the car, you must place it in either cartop or car
panel inspection mode. No other modes of operation are allowed.
Car Heavy Load Activated - Hall Calls Bypassed, CAR HEAVY LOAD
Description: The load in the car has exceeded the Heavy Load Threshold setting.
Car Reaction: Hall calls are bypassed until the heavy load condition is cleared. Hall calls assigned to this car
are reassigned to other cars if possible.
Troubleshooting: (If displayed in error)
1. Verify the programmed “Heavy Load Threshold” value and adjust if needed (Load Weigher Configuration
screen).
2. Evaluate whether or not the load in the car exceeds the Heavy Load Threshold. Calibrate the load
weigher if needed.
3. For discrete input load weighers, check the Heavy Load Input shown on the job prints.
Car Heavy Load - Deactivated
Car out of service with doors closed, CAR OS DOORS CLOSED
Description: A delayed car with closed doors has remained so for an excessive period of time (as determined
by a user-programmed timer parameter, Car Operation Screen/Passenger tab.
Car Reaction: The car removes itself from car and hall call service (car calls are canceled and hall calls are
canceled or reassigned).
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with doors closing, CAR OS DOORS CLOSING
Description: A delayed car with closing doors has remained so for an excessive period of time (as determined
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with unknown door position, CAR OS DOORS UNKNOWN
Description: A delayed car with invalid doors has remained so for an excessive period of time (as determined
Troubleshooting:
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-19

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Car out of service with doors open, CAR OS DOORS OPEN
Description: A delayed car with open doors has remained so for an excessive period of time (as determined
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with doors opening, CAR OS DOORS OPENING
Description: A delayed car with opening doors has remained so for an excessive period of time (as deter-
mined by a user-programmed timer parameter, Car Operation Screen/Passenger tab.
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with doors stalled, CAR OS DOORS STALLED
Description: A delayed car with stalled doors has remained so for an excessive period of time (as determined
Troubleshooting:
Car Over Load Activated, CAR OVERLOAD
Description: The load in the car has exceeded the Overload Threshold setting.
Car Reaction: The car is held at the floor with doors open. Over load indicators, if present, will be activated.
Troubleshooting:
1. If this message appears to be displayed in error, verify the programmed Over Load Threshold value and
adjust if needed.
2. Evaluate whether or not the load in the car exceeds the Over Load Threshold value. Calibrate the load
weigher if necessary.
3. For discrete input load weighers, check the Over Load input shown on the job prints.
Car Over Load Deactivated
Car Panel Inspection Disabled, CP INSP. DISABLED
Description: Car Panel inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on car panel inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent car panel inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
2. Check for the Stuck Inspection Input Fault.
3. Check all inspection buttons (Enable, Up, Down) and verify that none are stuck in the ON position.
Car Panel Inspection Enabled
Description: Car Panel inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Car Panel Inspection Inputs OK
Description: One or more previously stuck cartop inspection inputs (Enable, Up, Down) have been deacti-
vated (see Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input message).
6-20 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Car Panel Inspection Operation, Car Panel Inspection, Car Panel Insp.
Description: Car has been placed in inspection using a (typically) keyed switch on car operation panel.
Car Reaction: If running, car makes an emergency stop and is taken off passenger service. Car uses inspec-
tion pattern settings and can only be moved using car panel inspection key switches.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the car panel inspection switch and related inputs.
2. The Car Panel Inspection input is Normally High.
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Activated)
Description: iControl has detected that an emergency power condition exists and has not established com-
munication with the emergency power supervisor (typically a group controller).
Car Reaction: Car is not allowed to move to prevent overloading emergency power generator. If car is mov-
ing when event occurs, car will make an emergency stop. Motor contactor and brake contactor are immedi-
ately dropped. The car is also shut down (calls and all other demands are canceled).
Troubleshooting:
1. If condition exists and system is NOT operating under emergency power, refer to job prints and verify
wiring to controller Emergency Power status input.
2. Verify correct input state (high/low) on iView/Car Operation/Emergency Power/EPI Input setting.
3. Check group to car communication.
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Deactivated)
Description: Emergency power condition, without communication with group supervisor, has been resolved.
Either communication with supervisor has been established or emergency power condition has resolved.
Car Reaction: While emergency power is in effect, car is allowed to move as determined by group controller
(iCue). Car selection for recall and emergency power operation is user-determined (iView/Car Operation/
Emergency Power and iCue iView/Emergency Power Configuration screens).
Car Stop Switch Open, CAR STOP SWITCH OPEN
Description: The car panel stop switch input has dropped (in-car stop switch has been activated). This switch
may be bypassed during special modes of operation such as fire, CFSS, or EMS.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if running. The car is not allowed to run again until the car panel stop switch
is moved to the RUN position.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the in-car stop switch and switch connections.
2. Check current mode of operation and verify that the stop switch operation is as expected.
Cartop Automatic Unintended Motion Fault, CARTOP AUTO UIM FLT
Description: Unintended motion fault detected while car was running under Passenger operation.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Cancel all calls. This fault will self reset.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iView Event Log for preceding activity.
2. Correct initiating problem, if any.
Cartop Communication Established
Description: Communication between iControl (iBox) and the iLink ICE-CTP board has been established. This
communication is through twisted-pair, shielded cabling in the traveler cable.
Cartop Communication Fault, CARTOP COMM FAULT
Description: Communication fail between iControl and iLink. This communication is through twisted-pair,
shielded cabling in the traveler cable.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Cancel all calls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check connections at the iBox and iLink ends. Refer to -CW job print drawing.
2. If connections are clean and tight, use an oscilloscope to check TX and RX signals. Or, if practical, con-
nect the iBox end of the connection to another iControl in the machine room and see if that controller can
communicate with the iLink box.
3. If required, replace the iLink Cartop board or the iBox as appropriate.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-21

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Cartop Emergency Stop
Description: The cartop processor has detected a fault and initiated an emergency stop. The Cartop Safety
relay has opened in response to an unsafe condition.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Cancel all calls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iView Event Log for related preceding events.
2. Troubleshoot and correct any initiating problem.
3. Restore safety string and test.
Cartop Exit Open, CARTOP EXIT OPEN
Description: The Cartop Exit Switch input has dropped. The input is normally on when the configuration
states that the switch is installed. The input may be bypassed by: 1) the car being on car top or car panel
inspection while on earthquake, and 2) the safety bypass jumper being installed.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if running. The car is not allowed to run until the problem is corrected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the switch status and configuration (Safety screen).
2. Check elements related to bypassing.
Cartop Exit Open Off (see: Cartop Exit Open)
Cartop Exit no Counterweight Configuration Error, CTEX NO CWI CFG ERROR
Description: Car Top Exit, on the Safety tab, has been checked but Counter weight displacement detection,
on the Car Operation - Earthquake tab, has not been checked. A car equipped with both Earthquake Opera-
tion and Cartop Exit must have a counterweight derailment device.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to run until the problem is corrected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify the status of the Car Top Exit parameter (Safety tab).
2. Verify the status of the Counter weight displacement detection parameter (Car Operation - Earthquake
tab).
Cartop Firmware Update Mode, CARTOP FW UPDATE MODE
Description: The cartop processor is not running the cartop application firmware but is instead either waiting
for or processing the firmware update (iView > File > Firmware update).
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to run until the procedure is completed.
Cartop Inspection Disabled, CT INSP. DISABLED
Description: Cartop inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on cartop inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent cartop inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
Cartop Inspection Enabled
Description: Cartop inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Cartop Inspection Inputs OK
Description: One or more previously stuck cartop inspection inputs (Enable, Up, Down) have been deacti-
vated (see Stuck Cartop Inspection Input message).
Cartop Inspection Operation, Cartop Inspection, Cartop Insp
Description: The car has been placed in Inspection mode using the cartop inspection switch.
Car Reaction: The car enters inspection mode and uses the Inspection pattern settings.
6-22 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Cartop Inspection Unintended Motion Fault, CARTOP INSP UIM FLT
Description: An unintended motion fault was detected while the car was being operated on Cartop Inspection
Operation.
Car Reaction: Car motion stopped after 24 inches of travel. The safety circuit is opened.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iView Event Log for related events.
2. Troubleshoot and correct any initiating problems.
3. Press iBox Fault Reset.
4. Test.
Cartop Power Loss
Description: A loss of power was detected by the iLink processor.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check 1, 2, and 3 bus terminal voltages from iControl, through traveler, to car terminal strip.
2. Refer to job print drawing CT, check strip to iLink connections.
3. Check iLink fuses F1 and FCT1.
CFSS Mode 1 at Floor Activated, CFSS 1 at Floor. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated, CFSS 1 In-car.
Description: Commandeer For Special Services is a special operating mode. When activated by a (typically)
keyed hall switch the car recalls to that floor. Two CFSS operating modes may be configured on the Car Oper-
ations screen/CFSS tab (Mode 1, Mode 2). Typically, one of the two is used for Hospital Operation, the sec-
ond as the user determines. Once recall is activated, the car disposes of existing calls as configured on the
CFSS tab, then moves to the recall floor. At the recall floor, In-Car CFSS is activated by an in-car switch or as
configured on the CFSS tab (In-Car).
Car Reaction: As configured on the Car Operations screen/CFSS tab.
CFSS Mode 1 Recall Activated, CFSS 1 Recall. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 2 at Floor Activated, CFSS 2 at Floor. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 2 In-car Activated, CFSS 2 In-car. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 2 Recall Activated, CFSS 2 Recall. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
Construction Car Panel Inspection Operation, Cnstr Car Panel Insp, Cnstr CP Insp
Description: The car is on Construction mode and car panel inspection.
Car Reaction: Car is out of service and cannot be moved using the car panel inspection key switches.
Troubleshooting: When Construction mode is active, car panel operation switches are ignored. The car can
only be moved using Machine Room or Cartop Inspection switches. Place the car on Machine Room or Cartop
Inspection and use the appropriate switches to move the car.
Construction Cartop Inspection Operation, Cnstr Cartop Insp, Cnstr CT Insp
Description: Car is on Construction mode and Cartop Inspection. When in construction mode, the iBox is
always “on inspection” operating only in Cartop or Machine Room inspection. Car top has precedence over
Machine Room, just as in Passenger operation. If neither of these two modes of operation are selected, the
controller goes into a non-specific inspection mode and will not run for any inspection direction input.
Car Reaction: The car can be moved using the cartop inspection key switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. If it appears that the car is on Cartop Inspection operation in error, verify wiring to the iBox INCT input.
If no voltage exists on this input, the car will operate under Cartop Inspection operation.
Construction Hoistway Access Inspection Operation, Cnstr HA Inspection, Cnstr HA Insp
Description: Car is on construction mode and hoistway access.
Car Reaction: Car is out of service and cannot be moved using the hoistway access Up or Down switches.
Troubleshooting: When Construction mode is active, hoistway access switches are ignored. The car can only
be moved using Machine Room or Cartop Inspection switches. Place the car on Machine Room or Cartop
Inspection and use the appropriate switches to move the car.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-23

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Construction Inspection Operation, Cnstr Inspection
Description: The car is operating in Inspection mode and the Construction setting on the Safety Configura-
tion screen is selected.
Car Reaction: The car will operate using the Inspection performance pattern using Cartop or machine room
inspection modes only.
Construction Machine Room Inspection Operation, Cnstr Mach Room Insp, Cnstr MR Insp
Description: Car is on inspection mode using the iBox inspection switch while on construction mode.
Car Reaction: Car begins operating in Inspection mode. If running, car will make an emergency stop and be
taken out of normal service. In this mode of operation, car can be moved using Inspection Up/Down.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
MachineRoomInspection: Normally high
Controller Main Computer Startup
Description: iBox main processor booting up.
DBD Mode Activated
Description: The Destination Based Dispatching engine is now active.
DBD PHE Antinuisance
Description: DBD Photo Eye Antinuisance option set and although a call had been assigned to the car per a
source floor entry, the photo eye has registered no entry and calls assigned to the car have been cancelled.
Car Reaction: Car is available for new assignment.
Troubleshooting: If calls were cancelled in error, verify that the photo eye device is working. If this function-
ality is not desired, turn OFF the DBD Antinuisance option.
Demand Down Peak Mode, DEMAND DOWN PEAK MODE
Description: The car is running in Demand Down Peak mode, favoring traffic in the down direction as config-
ured on the group control screens.
Demand Up Peak Mode, DEMAND UP PEAK MODE
Description: The car is running in Demand Up Peak mode, favoring traffic in the up direction as configured on
the group control screens.
Dispatcher = Car ‘n’, DISPATCHER = CAR’n’ (n = 1 to 15)
Description: Communication with the main iCue dispatcher has been lost or not established. This car is com-
municating with Car 'n' (n = 1 to 15) which is acting as the backup dispatcher.
Troubleshooting: Check the group to car communication related connections and parameters.
Door Lock Clipped Greater than 200fpm, DOOR LK CLIPPED G200
Description: The door lock signal (DLAT, DLMS, DLAB, or GS) went low for over 300mS while the car was
moving at over 200 fpm.
Troubleshooting:
1. Use Event Log to determine where fault occurred. Examine the locks in that area of the hoistway first.
2. Usually caused by a misadjusted door, where the pickup rollers do not have adequate running clearance
from the door clutch.
3. Because this fault must persist for over 300mS, a slight “bumping” of the door lock will not set it off. If
the door clutch/pickup roller clearance is adequate, make sure the door contacts are clean and the door
lock mechanism drops cleanly without friction or binding.
Door Lock Clipped Less than 200fpm, DOOR LK CLIPPED L200
Description: The door lock signal (DLAT, DLMS, DLAB, or GS) went low while the car was moving at under
200 fpm.
Car Reaction: ASAP stop.
Troubleshooting:
1. Usually caused by a misadjusted or damaged door. Because it only occurs at speeds under 200 fpm, it is
usually seen when the car leaves the floor where the problem door is located.
6-24 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
DOOR LOCK OPENED
Description: Status message indicating safety processor has detected open door lock. A fault is generated if
car is moving or attempts to move while door lock open.
Down Direction Limit Open, DOWN DIR LIMIT OPEN
6
Description: Down normal terminal direction limit switch is open.
Car Reaction: Initiate an immediate stop if moving. Further down direction movement is prevented.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the switch is operating properly.
2. Verify correct state of the iBox DNTD input.
3. Verify DNTD switch is activating/deactivating at correct location (normally 2” below bottom terminal.
Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault, DN ETS POSITION FAULT
Description: Reported position upon encountering Terminal Switch differed from learned position by more
than set position margin. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. All hall and car
calls cancelled. After car is stopped, it will run at Correction speed to next available floor and cycle door. Door
Open button will remain operational. If fault generated when car is moving, fault will stay latched and Fault
Reset button must be pushed to clear it. If generated when car is not moving, fault will self clear when con-
dition no longer exists.
Troubleshooting:
1. Physically check the integrity of the switch and wiring.
2. Check the iBox input for the switch.
3. On the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare the last pass position against the learned
position for this switch. Verify that Position Margin is within a reasonable range. Relearn the NTS and ETS
switches. Please refer to “Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches” on page 4-12.
Down Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown, DOWN ETS SHUTDOWN
Description: Down Emergency Terminal switch opened at a speed or position exceeding its specified thresh-
old. Fault stays latched and Fault Reset button must be pushed to clear. If generated when car is stopped,
fault will self clear when the condition no longer exists.
Troubleshooting:
1. Fault is logged in conjunction with either a speed or position fault at DETS. Check Event Log and follow
troubleshooting for Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault or Safety A (or B) DETS Level 2
Speed Fault.
2. Press iBox Fault Reset to reset fault.
Down Normal Terminal ’n’ Level 1 Speed Fault, DN NTS’n’ L1 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: A Level 1 Overspeed fault has been detected at Down Normal Terminal switch ‘n’ (1 to 5). When
switch opened, car was traveling faster than defined by level 1 overspeed settings (sum of learned speed
plus Overspeed 1 Margin percentage on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab) but not fast enough to trig-
ger Level 2 overspeed fault. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Controlled stop using Emergency Slowdown pattern parameters.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare last pass and Learned speeds for switch. If
appropriate, increase Overspeed 1 Margin on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab.
2. May be caused by a change in Pattern parameters. Always re-learn terminal switches after any changes
to Pattern parameters.
3. One or two floor runs can sometimes come in “hotter” than multi-floor runs. (Remember that switches
are learned making full hatch runs.) If short runs are causing this, you may have to increase Overspeed
1 Margin or lower Standard profile - High Roll Jerk parameter.
4. Can also be caused by a car that is following pattern poorly, possibly due to heavy load or poor speed
loop performance. In this case, adjust speed loop to follow pattern as well as possible and/or alter pat-
tern parameters to produce a gentler deceleration and approach to floor (then re-learn switches). Please
refer to “Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults” on page 4-61.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-25

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Down Normal Terminal ’n’ Level 2 Speed Fault, DN NTS’n’ L2 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: A Level 2 Overspeed fault has been detected at Down Normal Terminal switch ‘n’ (1 to 5). When
the switch opened, the car was traveling faster than defined by Level 2 overspeed settings (105% of the sum
of the learned speed plus the Overspeed 1 Margin percentage setting on the Configuration > Terminal
Switches tab). This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. On the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare the Last pass and Learn speeds for this
switch. If appropriate, increase the Overspeed 1 Margin on the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab.
2. May be caused by a change in the Pattern parameters. Always re-learn the terminal switches after any
changes to Pattern parameters.
3. One or two floor runs can sometimes come in “hotter” than multi-floor runs. (Remember that the
switches are learned making full hatch runs.) If short runs are causing this, you may have to increase
the Overspeed 1 Margin or lower the Standard profile - High Roll Jerk parameter.
4. Can also be caused by a car that is following the pattern poorly, possibly due to heavy load or poor speed
loop performance. In this case, adjust the speed loop to follow pattern as well as possible and/or alter
the pattern parameters to produce a gentler deceleration and approach to the floor (then re-learn the
switches). Please refer to “Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults” on page 4-61.
Down Normal Terminal ’n’ Position Fault, DN NTS’n’ POSITION FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: When the switch opened or closed, the car’s reported position was different from the learned
position by an amount exceeding the margin set on the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab. This may
mean that the switch opened early, late or not at all on approach to the terminal. It may also mean that the
switch closed early, late, or not at all on departure from the terminal. Finally, the switch can go open while
standing at a floor where its learned position is closed, or go closed at a floor where its learned position is
open. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: If traveling down, the car executes an emergency slowdown, then continues at low speed until
it encounters a floor. The car stops at the floor, opens its doors, and performs a floor sync operation. If the
fault persists, the car goes out of service. If traveling up, the car continues normally to the first stop, opens
its doors and performs a floor sync operation. If the fault persists, the car goes out of service. If stopped at
a floor, the car opens its doors, does a floor sync, and, if the fault persists, takes itself out of service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass position to Learned position for switch.
2. If the fault is mechanical (switch movement, magnet movement, or bad traveler cable), the fault will
tend to repeat at the same position every time.
3. A stuck switch is easy to spot by running the car on inspection and observing the input LEDs on the iBox.
4. Perform a Terminal Sync operation (Terminal button on the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
Drive At-Speed Fault, DRIVE AT-SPEED FAULT
Description: Detected by the drive, this fault indicates that the motor speed is outside threshold limits
defined by the drive parameter. AC controls only. (This fault is not monitored for the TORQMAX F5 drive).
Troubleshooting:
1. If the job has a TORQMAX F5 drive and this fault occurs, verify that wires AT and GND (from iBox J46)
are connected to drive terminal X2A-26 (Common).
Drive Communication Fault, DRIVE COMM FAULT
Description: Indicates that the iBox is unable to communicate with the AC drive. It can only be generated if
“Drive interface” and “Reference type” are set to “Serial” (Controller > Configuration > Drive > General tab).
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped and the car will
not move until communication is established.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that a proper and functional serial cable (not an off-the-shelf serial cable) is connected between
the iBox (MODEM) and the drive (operator serial port - bottom).
2. Verify that the drive is configured for control signals via serial communication (LF.02 Signal/operating
mode is set to SErSP Serial Comm. Speed Control).
6-26 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Drive Communication Warning, DRIVE COMM WARNING
Description: Not currently used.
Drive Enable Feedback Fault, DRIVE ENABLE FDBK FLT
Description: iControl failed to send the Drive Enable signal to the drive or the drive failed to respond to the
6
Drive Enable signal. (applies to both AC and DC drives).
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Followed by nor-
mal run. Fault will self clear and car is able to run again.
Troubleshooting:
1. This fault may indicate a problem with the Gate Switch, or one of the door locks, opening up during the
initial start of car motion. Verify that the inputs (GS, DLAT, DLAB, DLMS) remain high.
2. Verify that Safety Processors A and B are looping (iBox status LEDs).
3. Verify that there are no faults active on Safety Processors A and B that would prevent motion.
4. Check the iBox power supply.
5. Verify that all drive connections match wiring prints.
Drive Fault, DRIVE FAULT
Description: Detected by the drive, this fault indicates that the motor speed is outside threshold limits
defined by the drive parameter. (TORQMAX drive only.)
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify encoder wiring and polarities.
2. Check F5 drive terminals X2A-29 (Drive Fault) to X2A-26 (Common). The value should be high during
normal operation and low during a fault condition.
3. Verify that the brake is working correctly.
4. Verify drive gains, Proportional Gain (LF.31) and Integral Gain (LF.32).
5. Check drive parameters, Speed Following Error (LF.57), Speed Difference (LF.58), and Following Error
Timer (LF.59). Refer to the TORQMAX manual.
Drive Inspection Overspeed Fault, DRIVE IOS FAULT
Description: Inspection Overspeed fault. (TORQMAX drive only.)
Car Reaction: Emergency stop.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Inspection speed.
2. Check safety configuration.
3. Calibrate car speed with a hand-held tachometer.
Drive On Fault, DRIVE ON FAULT (was Drive Ready On Fault)
Description: When the SCR drive receives Direction (UP/DN), Run Enable (RE) and M Contactor (M1/M2 side
mount auxiliaries) it must activate the DRO signal within 0.250 seconds. If not, this fault is generated. (DC
drive only)
Troubleshooting:
1. Check M1 & M2 Contactor side-mount auxiliaries. N.O. contact may not be making.
2. Check the 26 pin connector J5 on SCR-LGA board for proper seating at both ends (46 pin D-sub on the
right side of the PowerBox).
3. Then verify that the cable that extends to the iBox (AC/DC Drive jack) is properly seated. If the cable
inside the PowerBox is suspect, temporarily connect directly from the drive into the iBox.
4. Check the RJ45 serial drive cable (J8 on the SCR-LGA board) to the Serial Drive jack on the iBox.
5. On iView, display the Controller > Diagnostics > Diagnostic Outputs > Drive screen and verify that the
commands are being sent from the iBox to the System 12 drive.
6. Check M1 and M2 side mount auxiliaries again.
7. Verify that Speed Pick Delay 1 is 0.2 or higher.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-27

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Drive Ready Fault, DRIVE READY FAULT
Description: AC drive ready signal is low. (TORQMAX drive only.)
Troubleshooting:
1. Check F5 drive terminal X2A-24 to X2A-26 (Common). X2A-24 should be low during normal operation
and high during fault.
2. Check connection from AC drive to iPower Box and J46 connector on ICE-SAF board.
Drive Start Failure
Description: The drive control logic has not responded to a movement request from the motion control logic
for more than ten seconds.
Car Reaction: The motion control logic will continue to request movement from the drive logic for up to ten
seconds before declaring a Motion Start Failure fault.
Troubleshooting: Verify that no drive or motor faults exist.
Dual Channel QUAD Fault, DUAL CHANNEL QUAD FLT
Description: The Safety system did not detect movement of the car even though the iBox processor reported
car movement, or the Safety system reported car movement while the processor did not.
Troubleshooting:
1. Press the Fault Reset button.
2. Check the wiring for the DP1 and DP2 encoder signals from the landing system to the iBox.
3. Check the motor encoder or tachometer (whichever is present).
4. Compare Pattern Command and Speed Feedback on the iView oscilloscope screen to make certain they
track one another.
5. Check reported speed accuracy using a hand-held tachometer.
Earthquake board power supply OFF
Description: The controller has detected a failure of the earthquake board power supply.
Car Reaction: The car behaves as if the counterweight derailment detector has been triggered (car generally
makes an emergency stop, and is removed from service at the next available landing).
Troubleshooting:
1. Check board connections.
2. Replace the EQ board.
Earthquake board power supply ON
Description: The earthquake board (ICE-EQ) power supply is operational.
Car Reaction: Car is no longer prevented from operating due to a loss of the earthquake board power supply.
Earthquake Emergency Stop
Description: Earthquake operation has been activated by the seismic or counterweight displacement
switches and the car has performed an emergency stop as specified by the earthquake user settings.
Car Reaction: The car will perform an emergency stop. After a pause, the car will react as directed by user
settings on the Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the wiring for the seismic and counterweight displacement inputs.
2. Check the earthquake user settings on the Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
Earthquake Operation Activated
Description: The car is on earthquake operation.
Car Reaction: Car behavior is according to the user settings on the Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
This operation is latched until the EQ reset button is pressed on the ICE-EQ board.
Troubleshooting: NA. See also “Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch)” and “Earthquake Operation (Coun-
terweight)”.
Earthquake Operation Deactivated
6-28 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Earthquake Operation (Counterweight)
Description: The Counterweight Derailment Detector has been activated, indicating an earthquake condition.
Car Reaction: The car will typically make an emergency stop, then move slowly to the next available floor in
a direction away from the counterweight. The fault is latched until the EQ reset button (ICE-EQ board) is
6
pressed.
Troubleshooting:
1. If it is suspected that this event happened in error, check the counterweight derailment detector opera-
tion and associated wiring to the ICE-EQ board.
Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch)
Description: The Seismic Switch has been activated (input has gone low), indicating an earthquake condi-
tion.
Car Reaction: The car will react as determined by user configuration. (iView/Car Operation/Earthquake) The
car will either make an emergency stop and then move slowly to the next available floor or it will stop nor-
mally at the next available floor in the direction of travel. The fault is latched until the EQ reset button (ICE-
EQ board) is pressed.
Troubleshooting:
1. If it is suspected that this event happened in error check the seismic switch input and the associated wir-
ing to the ICE-EQ board. The seismic input is normally on.
Earthquake Reduce Speed
Description: An earthquake event (seismic switch) has initiated a car speed reduction (150 fpm or less) as
required by some code jurisdictions.
Car Reaction: Control stop.
Earthquake reset button OK
Description: A previously declared failure of the earthquake reset button has been resolved.
Car Reaction: Previous failure is no longer a reason to keep the car out of service.
Earthquake reset button stuck ON
Description: The controller has detected that the earthquake reset button (located on the ICE-EQ board) has
failed in the “on” state.
Car Reaction: If moving, the car will complete its run. Once stopped, the car is removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. It is likely that the reset button (or related circuitry) on the ICE-EQ board is faulty.
2. Replace the ICE-EQ board.
Earthquake Run, EARTHQUAKE RUN
Description: Some code jurisdictions allow the car to run normally (at a speed no greater than 150 fpm)
under earthquake conditions. This event indicates that the car is being allowed to run in this manner.
Car Reaction: Car operates “normally” at reduced speed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the wiring for the seismic and counterweight displacement inputs.
2. Check the earthquake user settings on the Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
Earthquake Shutdown, EARTHQUAKE SHUTDOWN. See Earthquake Operation Activated.
EEPROM Device Error, EEPROM DEVICE ERROR
Description: Safety Processor A EEPROM fault.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Safety Processor A EEPROM - board test. Contact MCE.
Elevator Recall Operation (Switch ‘n’), ELEVATOR RECALL SW’n’ (n = 1 to 6)
Description: Elevator Recall Operation has been initiated by the switch identified.
Car Reaction: In most usages, the car immediately removes itself from hall call service, answers remaining
car calls, then proceeds to the recall floor and cycles its doors. (The disposition of car calls, recall floor, and
door operation are user-programmable. iView/Car Operation/Elevator Recall.)
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-29

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Emergency Alarm Acknowledged
Description: This message indicates that the emergency alarm has been acknowledged and reset by the
Emergency Alarm Reset input.
Car Reaction: The Distress Light and the Distress Buzzer outputs will be extinguished.
Troubleshooting: NA
Emergency Alarm Activated (Alarm button), Emergency Alarm Activated, EMERG ALARM ACTI-
VATED
Description: Emergency Alarm input activated. Typically used to sound an alarm and/or illuminate an indica-
tor light to alert security personnel.
Car Reaction: Distress Light will be illuminated until acknowledged by Emergency Alarm Reset input. Distress
Buzzer output will either pulsate or be continuously activated as long as car remains in this condition.
Troubleshooting:
1. Attend to the car and verify the distress signal.
2. To reset, verify alarm button is restored to normal condition and activate Emergency Alarm Reset input.
Emergency Alarm Activated (Car delayed with doors closed)
Description: This message indicates that the emergency alarm has been activated due to the car being
delayed with its doors closed. This is an optional emergency alarm monitor specified by the user.
Car Reaction: The Distress Light will be illuminated until it is acknowledged by the Emergency Alarm Reset
input. The Distress Buzzer output will be active as long as the car remains in this condition.
Troubleshooting:
2. To reset the alarm, verify that the car condition is restored to normal and activate the Emergency Alarm
Reset input.
Emergency Alarm Activated (In-car stop switch)
Description: This message indicates that the emergency alarm has been activated due to the in-car emer-
gency stop switch being pulled.
input. The Distress Buzzer output will be active as long as the switch remains active.
Troubleshooting:
2. To reset the alarm, verify that the car emergency stop switch is restored to normal position and activate
the Emergency Alarm Reset input.
Emergency Alarm Activated (Safety opened)
Description: This message indicates that the emergency alarm has been activated due to the safety circuit
being opened (excluding the in-car emergency stop switch). This is an optional emergency alarm monitor
specified by the user.
input. The Distress Buzzer output will be active as long as the car remains in this condition.
Troubleshooting:
2. To reset the alarm, verify that the car condition is restored to normal and activate the Emergency Alarm
Reset input.
Emergency Alarm Deactivated without Acknowledgment
Description: This message indicates that the emergency alarm has been deactivated because all signals that
would activate it are now off and the Require Acknowledgment parameter is not checked.
Car Reaction: The Distress Light and Distress Buzzer outputs are deactivated.
6-30 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short Fault, EMERG BRK LEG 1 SHORT
Description: Emergency brake board (ICE RB or ICE EB) verification failed after a stop or as a result of a
fault reset. During these scenarios, the emergency brake circuitry is verified by transitioning between leg 1
and leg 2. One of the legs must be active to prevent the emergency brake from deploying. 6
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify system configured for emergency brake board (ICE-RG or ICE EB).
2. Make sure the emergency brake board is physically present and correctly connected.
Emergency Brake Leg 2 Short Fault, EMERG BRK LEG 2 SHORT. See Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short
Fault.
Emergency Brake OK open, EMERG BRAKE OK OPEN
Description: The Emergency Brake OK input has dropped (off) when the configuration states that the brake
is installed and therefore the input should be picked (on).
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the Rope Gripper board is properly installed, connected, and powered.
2. If this job has a sheave brake, verify that the associated circuitry is per the job prints.
Emergency Brake OK open Off (See: Emergency Brake OK open)
Emergency Brake Tripped, EMERG BRAKE TRIPPED
Description: The emergency brake output (ICE RG or ICE-EB board) has gone low, causing the emergency
brake to set.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the output did not go low in error and is properly connected.
2. Check the elevator for underlying causes.
Emergency Brake UIM Reset Button Stuck, EM BK UIM RESET STUCK
Description: The reset button on the Rope Gripper board (ICE-RG) or Emergency Brake board (ICE-EB) has
been activated for more than 15 seconds.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move. If in motion, the car is allowed to finish the run.
Troubleshooting: Check the reset button on the ICE-RG or ICE-EB board.
Emergency Dispatch On, Emergency Dispatch, EMERGENCY DISPATCH
Description: The car is automatically servicing the building in a pre-defined pattern. This operation is
invoked when a failure of the hall calls bus or group communication is detected. This operation may also be
activated using a key switch input.
Car Reaction: The car automatically moves to every floor in the building in a predefined pattern and cycles
its doors.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check group/car communications.
2. Check the hall call bus drivers.
3. Check the Emergency Dispatch input.
Emergency Dispatch Off (see Emergency Dispatch On)
Emergency Medical Service Bypassed
Description: EMS is active but has been bypassed by another mode of operation.
Car Reaction: EMS service is bypassed and the car operates under the new mode of operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the current mode of operation and the EMS user settings.
Emergency Medical Service Deactivated
Description: EMS has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: Car is returned to prevailing mode of operation.
Troubleshooting: NA
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-31

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch ‘n’), EMS In-car (Switch ‘n’) (n = 1 or 2)
Description: EMS In-Car service activated by in-car EMS switch. Also referred to as EMS Phase II operation.
Car Reaction: Car remains out of hall call service. Car calls are enabled. After answering a car call, doors will
open automatically but close with constant pressure on Door Close Button only.
Troubleshooting:
1. EMS In-Car terminated by taking car to EMS recall floor by car call and deactivating in-car EMS switch or
by removing in-car EMS switch from pre-programmed IO configuration.
2. Related inputs:
EMSCarSwitch0: Normally low
EMSCarSwitch1: Normally low
Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch ‘n’), EMS Recall (Switch ‘n’) (n = 1 or 2)
Description: EMS recall activated via one of the EMS recall key-switches located next to the designated EMS
elevator. This is also referred to as the EMS Phase I operation.
Car Reaction: Momentary activation of EMS recall switch will initiate recall to user-defined EMS Recall floor.
Car removes itself from car and hall call service. Once at EMS recall floor, door operation is in accordance to
user-defined door operation under EMS recall. Car will remain on EMS Phase I as long as hall switch is acti-
vated. Once hall switch is deactivated, car will return to normal operation upon expiration of user-defined
timer if in-car switch has not been activated.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify no hall EMS recall switch is activated.
2. EMS Recall operation can also be terminated by removing in-car EMS switch from pre-programmed IO
configuration.
3. Related inputs:
EMSHallSwitch0: Normally low
EMSHallSwitch1: Normally low
Emergency Power Activated
Description: Commercial power has been lost and power is now supplied by an emergency power generator.
Car Reaction: Car will make an emergency stop due to loss of power and will remain shut down until com-
manded to either lower to a pre-determined floor or proceed to next available floor. Once all cars have
reached a floor, one or more cars will be selected to run under emergency power generator.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs: EPI: Active level field adjustable.
Emergency Power and no communication with group, EMERG PWR NO COMM
Description: iControl has detected that an emergency power condition exists and it has not established com-
munication with the emergency power supervisor (typically a group controller).
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move to prevent overloading the emergency power generator. If the
car is moving when the event occurs, the car will make an emergency stop. motor contactor and brake con-
tactor are immediately dropped. The car is also shut down (calls and all other demands are canceled).
Troubleshooting:
1. If this condition exists and the system is NOT operating under emergency power, refer to the job prints
and verify wiring to the controller Emergency Power status input.
2. Verify correct input state (high/low) on iView/Car Operation/Emergency Power/EPI Input setting.
3. Check group to car communication.
Emergency Power Deactivated. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: This event is logged when commercial power is restored.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
EPI: Active level field adjustable.
6-32 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Emergency Power Recall, EMERG POWER RECALL. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: Logged when elevator has been commanded to lower to emergency power recall floor.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined emergency power recall floor. Door operation at recall floor in
accordance with user defined door operation under emergency power recall conditions.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
EPR: Normally low (high to lower the car)
PTR: Normally low (low to lower the car)
Emergency Power Recall (In Service), EP RECALL-IN SERVICE
Description: This event is logged and related car status messages displayed on the OBD and iView if a car
that has been commanded to recall during emergency power remains in service for car calls.
Car Reaction: An attendant operated car (FIRE II, IND, ATS, CFSS In-Car, EMS) goes back into service for car
calls only when it is selected to recall. The car is shut down once it is at a floor with doors open or if the car
fails to move or open its doors within a user defined timer (30 seconds).
Troubleshooting: Check the Emergency Power Version option (System > Configuration > Emergency Power)
and set it to Pre 2008 if this operation is not desired.
Emergency Power Run, EMERG POWER RUN. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: This elevator is allowed to respond to calls during emergency power operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs (only on elevators with emergency power overlay operation)
EPR: Normally low (low to run the car)
PTR: Normally low (low to run the car)
Emergency Power Shutdown, EMERG POWER SHUTDOWN. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: This event is logged when emergency power is initially activated or if communication with the
emergency power supervisor has been lost while on emergency power.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Car removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
EPI: Active level field adjustable.
Emergency Stop Input Activated, EMERGENCY STOP INPUT
Description: The events are logged and related car status messages displayed on the OBD and iView to
reflect the status of the Emergency Stop Input.
Car Reaction: When the Emergency Stop Input is activated, the car makes an emergency stop and cancels
all calls. This input has priority over all modes of operation including Fire Service.
Troubleshooting: Check the status of the Emergency Stop Input.
Emergency Stop Input Deactivated see Emergency Stop Input Activated.
ESTOP due to disabled direction of travel
Description: The car has performed an emergency stop because the current travel direction has been disal-
lowed due to flood operation becoming active, disallowing the destination floor.
Car Reaction: After stopping, the car will correct to a floor above the flood zone.
ETA Mode Activated
Description: The Estimated Time of Arrival dispatching engine is now active.
Event Log Cleared
Description: Indicates that all of the events previously logged in the event log were removed using the “Clear
all” button (iView Controller > View > Diagnostics > Event Log tab).
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-33

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Excessive Brake Feedback Fault, EXCESS BRAKE FDBK FLT
Description: After each brake activity, controller checks brake current is bleeding off properly. (After 1 sec-
ond, brake voltage should be at or below 85% of voltage applied by last command.) This fault is issued if
brake voltage remains too high when checked by the controller.
Troubleshooting:
1. At factory, RB (brake resistor circuit value) set 3 to 5 times brake coil resistance. Reduce RB to allow cur-
rent to bleed off more quickly. (Do not reduce RB below 3 times brake coil resistance.) Please refer to
“Verifying Brake Current Resistance” on page 2-11.
2. On the iView Brake screen, Timers tab, reduce Voltage Decay Time (minimum, 0.0 seconds).
3. Check Brake Voltage Feedback test point on iView Oscilloscope screen.
4. Check iField Brake Module connections.
5. Check brake and brake connections.
6. If this fault persists, you may have a defective brake module or iBox Safety board.
Excessive Faults Shutdown, EXCESSIVE FAULTS
Description: Generated if car is already at a floor or after it has reached a floor when Excessive Faults
Warning detected. Also generated when there are another five faults that resulted in an emergency, con-
trolled or ASAP stop as the car was trying to reach a floor after an Excessive Faults Warning fault (see
also Excessive Faults Warning).
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Doors cycle if at a floor.
Latching fault. Clear by pressing iBox Fault Reset button, toggling Inspection or cycling power to controller.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Event Log for drive faults generated before fault triggered. Trouble discovered faults.
Excessive Faults Warning, EXCESSIVE FLTS WARN
Description: Excessive number of faults detected. Generated when more than five faults that resulted in an
emergency, controlled or ASAP stop. The counter resets if the car makes ten normal runs without any faults.
Car Reaction: Car taken out of service; registered calls canceled. Car proceeds to next available floor; cycles
doors to let passengers out. At floor “Excessive Faults Shutdown” fault activated and car will remain shut
down until iBox Fault Reset button is pressed, Inspection is toggled or power to the controller is cycled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Event Log to see drive faults generated before fault triggered. Troubleshoot discovered faults.
Excessive Motor Field Feedback Fault, EXCESS MF FDBK FAULT
Description: Excessive current in motor field. Threshold set to 85% of forcing current for more than 4 sec-
onds. If fault is recurring, excessive faults will be generated and the motor field module will be disabled.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop.
Troubleshooting: May be related to faulty motor field module, iBox, or invalid motor field calibration.
1. If excessive faults (fault) generated, module is disabled and should not be outputting voltage. If this is
not the case, there may be a problem with the motor field module.
2. Calibrate the motor field. During calibration, the current and voltage should start at their maximum value
and decrease as calibration proceeds. If this is not the case, there may be a problem with the iBox.
Excessive Relevels Fault, EXCESS RELEVELS FAULT
Description: The car has failed to relevel after ten attempts.
Car Reaction: Cancel all calls and shutdown. The doors are cycled and the car remains shutdown until the
fault is reset by pressing the iBox Fault Reset button, toggling Inspection or cycling power to the controller.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for mechanical or other failure preventing proper releveling.
2. Adjust brake and motor control during releveling with a full load in the car.
6-34 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Excessive Restarts Fault, EXCESS RESTARTS FAULT
Description: Car has attempted movement from same floor an excessive number of times. This fault is
issued after twenty-five attempts. The counter is reset if the car makes one successful run.
Car Reaction: Cancel all calls and shutdown. Doors cycle and car remains shutdown for five minutes after
6
first fault or until fault is reset by pressing iBox Fault Reset button, toggling Inspection or cycling power.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for mechanical or other failure preventing car from moving away from floor the floor.
Excessive Restarts Warning
Description: The elevator has attempted to start movement from the same floor successively for an exces-
sive number of times. This fault is issued after ten attempts. The counter is reset if the car makes one suc-
cessful run.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for mechanical or other failure preventing car from moving away from floor the floor.
Exercise Operation Activated, EXERCISE OPERATION
Description: The car has been idle for a predetermined user-defined time and is now performing a user-
defined number of Exercise operation runs.
Car Reaction: The car lowers to the bottom landing, then proceeds to the top landing and back down to the
bottom landing without cycling the doors. Moving the car to the top landing and then back down to the bot-
tom landing is considered one exercise run. The user defines the number of exercise runs.
Exercise Operation Deactivated
Description: The car has completed all of the exercise runs or Exercise operation has been terminated due to
change in mode of operation or calls being entered into the system.
Fault Bypass Switch On, FAULT BYPASS SW ON
Description: The iBox Fault Bypass switch is in the ON position.
Car Reaction: None.
Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out, FLT BYP SW TIMED OUT
Description: Indicates that a fault bypass has timed out. (Bypasses are allowed for 15 minutes with the iBox
Fault/Function Bypass switch in the ON position.)
Troubleshooting:
1. To clear this fault, place the Fault/Function Bypass switch to the OFF position.
F DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED. See Front DPM Open - GS Closed.
F DR CLS FLT REC FAIL. See Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
Field Module Over Temperature Fault, FIELD MODULE OVR TEMP
Description: Motor Field module heat sink temperature is excessive (DC only).
Car Reaction: Stop at next floor. Restart not permitted.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check machine room temperature (should not exceed 104 degrees F or 40 degrees C).
2. Verify air enters through bottom of power box and is expelled via fan at top of power box.
3. Check for insufficient air circulation through the power box.
4. Check running temperature inside power box (should not exceed 105 degrees F).
5. Check for faulty field module.
6. Check for faulty iBox.
7. Check for faulty connection between motor field module and iBox.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-35

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Fire Service In-car Activated, Fire Service In-car, Fire Svc In-car
Description: In-car firefighters service has been activated via the in-car fire service key-switch.
Car Reaction: Car and Door operation according to user-defined fire code. (iView/Car Operation/Fire Ser-
vice.)
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
FireIIOn: Normally low
FireIIOff: Normally high
FireIIHold: Normally low
Fire Service In-Car Deactivated
Description: In-car firefighter service has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: Car is returned to prevailing mode of operation.
Fire Service In-car Hold Operation
Description: Car is on in-car firefighter hold operation.
Car Reaction: Car is held at a floor, typically with doors open. Car calls and door close buttons are disabled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the in-car firefighter switch status and Fire II hold operation user settings.
Fire Service In-car Recall Operation
Description: A car on in-car firefighter operation is being recalled to the designated fire recall floor.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to designated fire recall floor. At recall floor, door operation is according to user-
defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the in-car firefighter switch status and Fire II operation user settings.
Fire Service Recall Alternate, Fire Recall Alternate, Fire Recall Alt.
Description: Fire recall to the alternate fire floor has been initiated.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined alternate fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation is
according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the fire sensor and switch inputs and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Smoke sensors and fire recall switches as indicated on the job prints.
Fire Service Recall Main, Fire Recall Main, Fire Recall Main
Description: Fire recall to the main fire floor has been initiated.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to the user-defined main fire recall floor. Once at the recall floor, door operation
is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the fire sensor and switch inputs and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Smoke sensors and fire recall switches as indicated on the job prints.
Fire Service Recall Deactivated
Description: Fire service recall operation has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: Car returns to its prevailing mode of operation.
Troubleshooting: NA
Flood Operation Activated, FLOOD OPERATION
Description: Flood operation has been activated via system command or hardware switch.
Car Reaction: A car in the flood zone area moves immediately to a floor outside the flood zone. The car will
no longer service the floors in the flood zone until Flood Operation is deactivated.
Troubleshooting: Check the flood zone switch and the user interface command.
Flood Operation Deactivated
Description: Flood operation has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: The car will service all eligible floors.
6-36 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Floor Heat Detectors Activated, FLOOR HEAT DETECTORS
Description: One or more floor heat detector inputs are activated. The fire warning light will flash until all
heat detectors have been reset. The fire-warning buzzer will sound until the car is shutdown at a floor.
Car Reaction: A car that is parked at a floor will open its doors and shut down. A car in motion will proceed in
6
the current direction to the next available floor where the heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in
the current direction are tripped, the car will reverse direction and proceed to the first floor where the heat
detector is not tripped. If again all heat detectors are tripped, the car will proceed to the main fire recall floor
unless the car is also on Fire Service, in which case the car will proceed to the appropriate fire recall floor.
Once the car is stopped at a floor it will automatically open its doors and shut down. Then, if the machine
room or hoistway heat detectors are active, a signal is provided to disconnect the main power line and/or
activate the sprinklers where available.
Floor Heat Detectors Deactivated
Description: All floor heat detector inputs are deactivated.
Car Reaction: The car is allowed to run.
Floor Location Fault, FLOOR LOCATION FAULT
Description: Floor magnet location is recorded during the floor height learn procedure. The on and off posi-
tions for both the ULM and DLM sensors are recorded, for a total of four pieces of data for every floor mag-
net, front and rear. The controller watches for the floor magnets constantly and checks to see that each is in
its learned location.
Car Reaction: Run to next stop, then shut down.
Troubleshooting:
1. Usually, a magnet has shifted position or fallen off.
2. Check the clearance between the floor sensor board and the magnets. Set if necessary. (Sometimes this
clearance will be off just enough to make some magnets fail to register properly.)
3. Re-learn floor heights.
4. Perform a Terminal synchronization.
Floor Sensor Fault, FLOOR SENSOR FAULT
Description: The system did not detect a floor sensor while performing floor synchronization. Terminal syn-
chronization will be performed as a result.
Car Reaction: Normal stop.
Troubleshooting: Indicates that the elevator location in the hoistway is not where the system expected or the
door zone sensor is not being detected.
1. Fault will be generated if the car was moved while the controller was not powered. The system will detect
movement of the elevator for only ten seconds after power is removed. This will be sufficient to accom-
modate the time required for an elevator to stop after power is removed when running at contract speed.
2. On Inspection, verify that the system is detecting the LU, DZ, and LD signals when the elevator passes a
floor. The signals can be observed on the iView Floor Heights Configuration screen.
Floor Synchronization Fault
Description: While performing floor synchronization, the system either did not receive edge position data
from the cartop or did not detect a floor position magnet where expected.
Car Reaction: The car will stop and initiate terminal synchronization.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the car was not moved after power was shut off.
2. Move car past floors in vicinity of the fault and verify the proper activation of the LU and LD sensors.
3. Verify that the system is communicating with the cartop (no Cartop Communication Fault).
4. Verify that the absolute and cartop positions change by the same amount and in the same direction while
moving the car.
5. Verify that a magnet has not fallen off.
6. Check the clearance between the floor sensor board and the magnets. Sometimes this clearance will be
off just enough to make some magnets fail to register properly. Adjust clearance if necessary.
7. Re-learn the floor heights.
8. The iLink, iLand or iBox may be faulty.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-37

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Front Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed, FRONT AUX DOB BYP
Description: The front auxiliary door open button has been continuously activated for a user-defined time
and is now bypassed according to the user-defined setting. (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Opera-
tion > Doors)
Car Reaction: The front auxiliary door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the corresponding input: Front Auxiliary Door - Open Button (Normally low).
2. The operation of the door open button can also be restored by setting the Door open button bypass
option to off (unchecked) (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Front Door Close Fault, FRONT DOOR CLOSE FLT
Description: One or more front door failures to close have been detected. The controller will attempt to close
the doors as defined by user parameters (door close protection timer and number of attempts) before
declaring this fault. (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors)
Car Reaction: The doors will reopen fully. All car calls are canceled and car removes itself from hall call ser-
vice (hall calls assigned to this car are canceled or reassigned to other cars if available). Doors may be closed
using constant pressure on the front door close button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status is determined by the front door close limit and by the front door position monitor con-
tact if applicable. Check the wiring of these signals.
2. Check the door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on the Car Operation - Doors tab.
Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure, F DR CLS FLT REC FAIL
Description: The Door Close Fault Recovery timer starts when a Door Close Fault is generated. When the
timer expires, the Door Close Fault is cleared to allow the doors to again attempt to close (see Front Door
Close Fault). This is repeated the number of times specified by the Door Close Fault Recovery Attempts
parameter. If the doors have failed to close when the number of attempts equals the recovery attempts
parameter setting, the Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure is generated.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to run until a mode change is detected or the doors are successfully
closed via constant pressure on the Door Close Button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status is determined by the front door close limit and by the front door position monitor con-
tact if applicable. Check the wiring of these signals.
2. Check the door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on the Car Operation - Doors tab.
Front Door Close Time-out
Description: Front door failure to close detected. Controller will attempt to close doors for a period of time
defined by Closing protection timer parameter (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to doors
closing fully, this event is generated.
Car Reaction: Doors reopen fully and again attempt to close.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status is determined by front door close limit and front door position monitor contact.
2. Check the wiring of these signals.
3. Check Closing protection timer (iView Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/General Tab/Door Motor
Protection Timers).
Front Door Contact Fault, FRONT DOOR CNTCT FLT
Description: Faulty front door contact (gate switch, door lock) has been detected. This is detected when the
doors are in their fully open position and either the gate switch contact is closed or the doors appear to be
locked.
Car Reaction: All car calls are canceled and the car removes itself from hall call service. The front doors are
not allowed to close and the car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the front door gate switch and door lock contact at the floor at which the car is located.
2. Check associated wiring for these signals.
6-38 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Front Door Open Button Bypassed, FRONT DOB BYPASSED
Description: The front door open button has been continuously activated for a user-defined time and is now
bypassed according to the user-defined setting. (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors)
Car Reaction: The front door open button is rendered inoperative.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the corresponding input: Front Door - Open Button (Normally low).
option to off (unchecked) (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors)
Front Door Open Fault, FRONT DOOR OPEN FAULT
Description: One or more front door failures to open fully detected. After repeated attempts to open door (as
specified by user parameters), a door open failure is declared. Amount of time allowed for door to open and
the number of attempts made are user parameters. iView Car Operation/Doors tab, plus Advanced dialog.
Car Reaction: Door stalls at last position. Car calls are canceled and car removes itself from hall call service
(hall calls assigned to this car are canceled or reassigned to other cars). Doors may be moved via constant
pressure on door open and door close buttons.
Troubleshooting:
1. The door open status is determined by the front door open limit status.
2. Check the wiring of this signal.
3. Check door open protection timer and number of open attempts on Operation screen Doors tab and
associated Advanced dialog.
Front Door Open Time-out
Description: Failure of front door to open detected. Controller will attempt to open doors for time defined by
Opening protection timer (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to doors opening fully, this
event is generated.
Car Reaction: Door open cycle is halted and door is allowed to reclose. If so configured, repeated attempts
will be made to open the door. Otherwise, the car is allowed to leave the landing once the doors are closed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door open status is determined by front door open limit and front door position monitor contact.
3. Check Opening protection timer, iView Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/Door Motor Protection
Timers.
Front Doors Stopped, FRONT DOORS STOPPED
Description: The Door Stop button or Emergency Stop switch was activated causing the doors to be pre-
vented from moving.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move unless the doors are fully closed.
Troubleshooting: This condition can be cleared by activation of the Door Open button, Door Close button or if
the car goes into Inspection or Fire Service mode, provided that the Door Stop input is off.
Front DPM Open - GS Closed, F DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED
Description: The front door position monitoring contact is open while the gate switch is closed.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting: Check the front door position monitoring contact, gate switch and all related circuitry.
Front Hall Door Open Button Bypassed, FRONT HALL DOB BYP
Description: The front hall door open button has been continuously activated for a user-defined time (Door
open bypass timer) and is now bypassed in accordance with the user-defined setting (iView Controller >
Configuration > Car Operation > Doors)
Car Reaction: The front hall door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the corresponding input, Front Door - Hall Door Open Button: Normally low.
2. The operation of the hall door open button can also be restored by setting the Door open button bypass
option to off (unchecked) (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors)
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-39

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Front Photo Eye Bypassed, FRONT PHOTO EYE BYP
Description: The front photo eye device has been continuously activated for a user-defined time and is now
bypassed in accordance to the user-defined setting. (iView/Car Operation/Passenger/Anti Nuisance.)
Car Reaction: The front photo eye device is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. To restore the operation of the photo eye device, check the corresponding input.
2. Related inputs: PhotoEyeFront: Normally low
Front Photo Eye Failure, FRONT PHOTO EYE FAIL
Description: This event is logged when the photo eye is continuously activated for a predetermined time (4
seconds) while the front doors are fully closed.
Car Reaction: The front photo eye is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for abnormal blockage or failure of the front optical device.
2. Related inputs: FrontPhotoEye: Normally low
Front Safe Edge Bypassed, FRONT SAFE EDGE BYP
Description: The front door safe edge has been continuously activated for a user-defined time and is now
bypassed according to the user-defined setting. (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors)
Car Reaction: The front safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the state of the front safe edge input.
2. Related inputs: SafeEdgeFront: Normally low
Front Safe Edge Failure, FRONT SAFE EDGE FAIL
Description: This event is logged when the front door safe edge is continuously activated for a predetermined
time (4 seconds) while the front doors are fully closed.
Car Reaction: The front door safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for abnormal blockage or failure of the front door mechanical reopening device.
2. Related inputs:
FrontSafeEdge: Normally low
Global Parameter Update, Reset Controller, PARAM CHNG-RESET CAR
Description: Indicates controller parameters updated, controller reset required (iBox COMPUTER RESET).
Car Reaction: Car is not allowed to run until parameter update completed and computer reset.
Governor open, GOVERNOR OPEN
Description: Gov input dropped. Will also cause an Ascending Car Overspeed Fault and set rope gripper if
running up.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if running. The car is not allowed to run again until the problem is corrected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the GOV (Governor) input, connection, and function.
Governor Speed Reduction Switch Fault, GOV SPEED SWITCH FLT
Description: Generated if elevator is moving and Governor Speed Reduction Switch input goes low (input
assigned via iView under Motor and Drive). Fault bypassed for Car/Counterweight Safety and Electrical Gov-
ernor tests.
Car Reaction: Immediate slowdown to leveling speed, stop at next floor and cycle the doors. Car is not
allowed to run again until the fault is reset.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify the state of the Governor Speed Reduction Switch and input.
2. Reset the Governor Speed Reduction Switch and press the iBox Fault Reset button.
Group Communication Established
Description: The car has established communication with the main iCue dispatcher.
6-40 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Group Communication Lost
Description: Communication with main iCue dispatcher has been lost.
Car Reaction: Car establishes communication with backup dispatcher if one is selected. Otherwise car goes
into emergency dispatch mode if that operation is not bypassed via the hardware override switch.
6
Troubleshooting: Check the group to car communication related connections and parameters.
Hall Call Bus ‘n’ Failure, HALL CALL BUS ‘n’ FAIL (n = 1 to 4)
Description: There is no power to the named hall call bus.
Car Reaction: No response to calls from the affected floor.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check bus fuses and connections.
2. Test associated hall call bus driver.
Hall Call Bypass Input OFF (see Hall Call Bypass Input ON)
Hall Call Bypass Input ON, HALL CALL BYPASS INP.
Description: Discrete input used to bypass hall calls.
Car Reaction: Car takes itself out of hall call service. Hall calls remain registered until answered. Car is also
not eligible for parking.
Troubleshooting: Check the related discrete inputs.
Hall Call Service Disabled
Description: Car is rejecting hall calls (iBox IN GROUP indicator Off and Hall call reject status LED on iView
Diagnostics > Diagnostic Outputs > Car Operation tab On) due to current mode of operation (Inspection,
Test, Independent service, Capture) or fault condition.
Car Reaction: Hall calls are rejected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car is not on mode of operation in which hall calls are not accepted.
2. Check iView Faults text box and Event Log for faults that would cause car to reject hall calls.
3. If car is not responding to hall calls, but neither 1 or 2 apply, problem could be due to loss of communi-
cation with dispatcher, security settings, heavy load status or hall call system malfunction.
Hall Call Service Enabled
Description: Car is accepting hall calls (iBox IN GROUP indicator is On). See also, Hall Call Service Disabled.
Heat Detectors Recall Activated, HEAT DETECTORS RECALL
Description: A heat detector input has been activated.
Car Reaction: A car parked at a floor will open its doors and shut down. A car in motion will proceed in cur-
rent direction to next available floor where heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in current direc-
tion are tripped, car will reverse direction and proceed to first floor where heat detector is not tripped. If
again all heat detectors are tripped, car shall proceed to main fire recall floor. Once stopped at a floor car will
automatically open doors and shut down.
Heat Detectors Recall Complete
Description: Indicates car has completed Heat Detectors Recall operation (reached a floor, doors fully open).
Car Reaction: Car remains shut down until all heat detector inputs have been deactivated (see Heat Detec-
tors Recall Deactivated).
Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated
Description: All heat detector inputs are deactivated.
Heat Sensor Fault ‘n’ (n = 2 to 4)
Description: Not currently used.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-41

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Hoistway Access Disabled, HA INSP. DISABLED
Description: Hoistway access inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on hoistway access inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent hoistway access inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
Hoistway Access Enabled
Description: Hoistway access inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Hoistway Access Inspection Operation, Hoistway Access Operation, Hoistway Access
Description: Car is on Hoistway access (enabled by the Hoistway access switch).
Car Reaction: If running, the car will make an emergency stop and is taken out of normal service. Under this
mode of operation, car can only be moved manually using the access key switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
HoistwayAccess: Normally high
Hoistway Door Bypass, HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS
The Hoistway Door Bypass switch on the iBox is in the Bypass position. (View-only on iView Safety screen,
enabled/disabled by MCE according to safety jurisdiction.) The ability to set this bypass must be enabled at
the factory and is only available if allowed by safety regulations in your area. Check the iView Safety Config-
uration screen to see if the feature is enabled in your installation.
Description:
Car Reaction: The car is placed in Inspection mode. To move the car, you must place it in either cartop or car
panel inspection mode. No other modes of operation are allowed.
Hoistway Heat Detectors Activated, HOIST HEAT DETECTORS
Description: The hoistway heat detector input is activated. The fire warning light will flash until all heat
detectors have been reset. The fire-warning buzzer will sound until the car is shutdown at a floor.
Car Reaction: A car that is parked at a floor will open its doors and shut down. A car in motion will proceed in
the current direction to the next available floor where the heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in
the current direction are tripped, the car will reverse direction and proceed to the first floor where the heat
detector is not tripped. If again all heat detectors are tripped, the car will proceed to the main fire recall floor
unless the car is also on Fire Service, in which case the car will proceed to the appropriate fire recall floor.
Once the car is stopped at a floor it will automatically open its doors and shut down. Then, if the machine
room or hoistway heat detectors are active, a signal is provided to disconnect the main power line and/or
activate the sprinklers where available.
Car Reaction:
Hoistway Heat Detectors Deactivated
Description: The hoistway heat detector input is deactivated.
HOISTWAY LEARN ON
Description: This status message, on the iBox display, indicates that the system is ready to perform the
hoistway learn operation.
IMP Switch Fault - Car Door Bypass, IMP SW FLT:C DOOR BP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox CAR DOOR BYPASS switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Sometimes the switch fault can be temporarily cleared by toggling the switch multiple times.
2. The iBox slide switches can be repaired using MCE part: IMP-SW-JUMPER-KIT.
6-42 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
IMP Switch Fault - Emergency Stop, IMP SW FAULT: EM STOP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox CONTROLLER STOP switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: If stopped, the car is immediately shut down and taken out of service for all types of demands,
including fire and medical emergencies. If the switch fault is detected while running, the car is allowed to
6
reach its next destination before shutting down.
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Fault Bypass, IMP SW FAULT: FLT BYP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox FAULT/FUNCTION BYPASS switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Hoistway Door Bypass, IMP SW FLT: H DOOR BP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection, IMP SW FAULT: INSP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox INSPECTION switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: If stopped, the car is immediately shut down and taken out of service for all types of demands,
including fire and medical emergencies. If the switch fault is detected while running, the car is allowed to
reach its next destination before shutting down.
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection DOWN, IMP SW FAULT: INSP DN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox Inspection DOWN switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection Enable, IMP SW FAULT: INSP EN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox Inspection ENABLE switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection UP, IMP SW FAULT: INSP UP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox Inspection UP switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
IMP Switch Fault - Learn, IMP SW FAULT: LEARN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox LEARN switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - None
Description: This message is generated when an IMP switch fault has occurred and is then cleared. If multi-
ple switch faults occur at the same time, the message is generated when all faults have been cleared.
Car Reaction: If the car had been shut down due to the IMP switch faults, it is cleared to run again.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-43

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
IMP Switch Fault - Test, IMP SW FAULT: TEST
Description: There is a problem with the iBox TEST switch. Both poles of this switch must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Write Enable, IMP SW FLT: WRITE EN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox WRITE ENABLE switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
Independent Service, Independent Svc
Description: Indicates that the Independent Service switch has been activated.
Car Reaction: Car and door operation in accordance to user-defined settings for independent service. (iView/
Car Operation/Independent Service.) Car does not respond to hall calls.
Troubleshooting:
1. If reported in error, check the Independent Service switch and wiring.
Inspection Operation, Inspection
Description: The car is operating in Inspection mode.
Car Reaction: One of the inspection modes (in-car, machine room, or cartop) is active. The car will operate
using the Inspection performance pattern.
Inspection Overspeed Fault
Description: While operating in Inspection mode, the car exceeded the Inspection Overspeed setting on the
iView Safety Configuration screen.
Troubleshooting:
1. The fault will automatically clear 5 seconds after the car stops. The car is then allowed to run again.
2. If reported in error, check the Inspection Overspeed setting on the Safety Configuration screen.
3. Check the iView event log for any events immediately preceding the overspeed fault.
4. Determine and correct the cause of the overspeed.
Insufficient Brake Feedback Fault, INSFCNT BRK FDBK FLT
Description: Brake current feedback is abnormally low.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check DB-25 connector from iField module to iBox is seated properly.
2. Check power supply on brake iField module.
3. Verify all wiring connections on the brake (BK) contactors are properly terminated and conducting.
4. Verify brake voltage parameters.
5. If used, verify iField Module setting for terminals FMCI and FMHC. Please refer to “IFIELD-MODULE-L Ter-
minals on the ICE-FM Board (Brake Module)” on page 6-91.
6. Verify that the brake is properly calibrated. Please refer to “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12 SCR
Drive)” on page 2-38. Please refer to “Brake Parameter Adjustments” on page 4-27.
7. Check Brake voltage on the Operational Status tab. If the value goes below 0.00 volts, and/or the drive
offset (Input ADC) was recently calibrated or adjusted, verify / set the Input ADC = 0.0 on the Configu-
ration > Drive > Calibration tab.
6-44 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Insufficient Motor Field Feedback Fault, INSFCNT MF FDBK FLT
Description: Indicates that Motor Current Feedback signal is less than 50% of the commanded field current.
Car Reaction: If detected four times over seven runs the car will shut down.
Troubleshooting:
6
1. Check motor field AC supply off isolation transformer.
2. Check connections from controller to motor.
3. Check connections to iField motor module.
4. Check for open fuses.
5. Recalibrate motor field.
Insufficient Motor Field Forcing Feedback Fault, INSFCNT MF FORCNG FLT
Description: Motor field voltage is inadequate. DC motors only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify motor field voltage parameters.
2. The motor field may be improperly calibrated. Check settings (iView Motor Configuration screen).
3. Recalibrate motor field if necessary.
Invalid Configuration BALRQ, INVALID CNFG BALRQ
Description: Bottom Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system has detected the improper use of
BALRQ option on the iView safety configuration screen.
Car Reaction: Safety OK status remains off.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the Safety Configuration, Bottom Access Landing Rear option is properly set.
Invalid Configuration Input, INVALID CNFG INPUT
Description: An invalid input was discovered when cross checking safety inputs against safety configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check car setup/wiring against Safety Screen configuration.
2. Press Fault Reset to clear.
3. Re-learn Safety Configuration.
Invalid Configuration Input Off (See: Invalid Configuration Input)
Invalid Configuration Input CTEX, INVLD CNFG INPUT CTEX
Description: Cartop Emergency Exit. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
cross checking inputs against configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car setup/wiring matches the Safety screen setting for the option.
3. Re-learn the Safety Configuration.
Invalid Configuration Input DCAB, INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAB
Description: Door Close Access Bottom. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-45

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Input DCAT, INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAT
Description: Door Close Access Top. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DCMS, INVLD CNFG INPUT DCMS
Description: Door Close Main String. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DCMS R, INV CNFG INPUT DCMS R
Description: Door Close Main String Rear. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference
when cross checking inputs against configuration.
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DLAB, INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAB
Description: Door Lock Access Bottom. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DLAT, INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAT
Description: Door Lock Access Top. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DLMS, INVLD CNFG INPUT DLMS
Description: Door Lock Main String. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
6-46 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Input DLMS R, INV CNFG INPUT DLMS R
Description: Door Lock Main String Rear. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
6
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DPM, INVLD CNFG INPUT DPM
Description: Door Position Monitoring. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DPM_R, INV CNFG INPUT DPM_R
Description: Door Position Monitoring Rear. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference
when cross checking inputs against configuration.
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration TALRQ, INVALID CNFG TALRQ
Description: Top Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system detected an input/safety setting differ-
ence when cross checking inputs against configuration.
Car Reaction: Safety OK remains off.
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check BALRQ,INV INVTRY XCHK BALRQ
Description: Bottom Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory
(board complement) difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the Configuration settings on the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab match the car options/
wiring. Any rear door options require a rear door board be attached to the safety expansion bus. Like-
wise, a rear door board attached to the safety expansion bus requires at least one rear door option be
selected on the Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If the safety configuration is incorrect, make appropriate changes and re-learn the new configuration
using the Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab.
3. Re-learn inventory of boards using Inventory Learn procedure on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
4. Reset the fault (press the iBox FAULT RESET button).
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-47

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check DCCOR, INV INVTRY XCHK DCCOR
Description: Door Close Contact Rear. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board comple-
ment) difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
3. Re-learn inventory of boards using Inventory Learn procedure on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check NMS R, INV INVTRY XCHK NMS R
Description: No Main String Rear. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement)
difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
3. Re-learn the inventory of boards using the Inventory Learn procedure on the Setup > Safety > Inventory
tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RD Board, INV INVTRY XCHK RD BD
Description: Rear Door board. Safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement) differ-
ence when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Configuration settings on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab match car options/wiring. Any rear
door options require a rear door board. Likewise, a rear door board requires at least one rear door option
be selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make changes, re-learn configuration using Learn operation on Setup
> Safety > Configuration tab.
3. Re-learn inventory of boards using Inventory Learn procedure on Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RDOPT, INV INVTRY XCHK RDOPT
Description: Rear Door Option. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement)
Troubleshooting:
be selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make changes and re-learn configuration using Learn operation on
Setup > Safety > Configuration tab.
3. Re-learn board inventory using Inventory Learn procedure on Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
6-48 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RG Board, INV INVTRY XCHK RG BD
Description: Rope Gripper board. Safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement) dif-
ference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Configuration settings on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab match car options/wiring. Any emer-
gency brake options require an emergency brake. Likewise, an emergency brake board requires at least
one emergency brake option be selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
3. Re-learn board inventory using Inventory Learn procedure on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RGOPT, INV INVTRY XCHK RGOPT
Description: Rope Gripper Option. Safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement)
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Configuration settings on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab match car options/wiring. Any emer-
gency brake options require an emergency brake board. Likewise, an emergency brake board requires at
least one emergency brake option selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration).
4. Reset fault (press iBox FAULT RESET button).
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check TALRQ, INV INVTRY XCHK TALRQ
Description: Top Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board
complement) difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make changes and re-learn new configuration using Learn operation
on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab.
4. Reset fault (press iBox FAULT RESET button).
Invalid Destination, INVALID DESTINATION
Description: The car has been assigned to a destination floor that does not have an opening.
Car Reaction: Car ignores the demand.
Troubleshooting: Check the current mode of operation and check the corresponding recall floor and verify
that the floor is set to a floor with an opening.
Invalid Front Door Position, INVLD FRONT DOOR PSTN
Description: The front door inputs are in an invalid state (i.e.: doors open and closed at the same time).
Car Reaction: Car is taken out of service and doors will stall.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check all the front door inputs and wiring.
2. Related inputs:
FrontDoorCloseLimit: Low when the doors are fully closed
FrontDoorPositionMonitoring: High when the doors are fully closed
FrontDoorOpenLimit: Low when doors are fully open
FrontCarGate: High when doors are fully closed
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-49

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Invalid Input (See: Invalid Configuration Input)
Invalid Rear Door Position, INVLD REAR DOOR PSTN
Description: The rear door inputs are in an invalid state (i.e., doors open and closed at the same time).
Car Reaction: Car is taken out of service and doors will stall.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check all the rear door inputs and wiring.
2. Related inputs:
RearDoorCloseLimit: Low when the doors are fully closed
RearDoorPositionMonitoring: High when the doors are fully closed
RearDoorOpenLimit: Low when doors are fully open
RearCarGate: High when doors are fully closed
IO Map Compare Fault, IO MAP COMPARE FAULT
Description: Safety A IO Map did not match Safety B IO Map.
Car Reaction: If running, car makes an emergency stop. Car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Before the fault has been cleared, you can access additional information about this fault by clicking the
Generate IO Map Fault Report button on the iView > Controller > View > Diagnostics > Data Trap tab.
2. Press the Fault Reset button to clear the fault.
3. If problem persists it is an indication that the iBox may need to be replaced. Consult MCE Technical Sup-
port for instructions.
IO Map Compare Fault Off (See: IO Map Compare Fault)
IO Map Compare Long Term Fault, IO MAP COMPARE LT FLT
Description: Safety A long term products did not match Safety B long term products for 1.2 seconds.
Car Reaction: If running, car makes an emergency stop. Car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
IO Map Toggle Compare Fault, IO MAP TOGLE COMP FLT
Description: The failure of a safety input was detected during the “input toggle test” (performed at the end of
each run). This test verifies the proper operation of safety system inputs that normally remain unchanged
during the course of elevator operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Before the fault has been cleared, you can access additional information about this fault by clicking the
Generate IO Map Fault Report button on the iView > Controller > View > Diagnostics > Data Trap tab.
IO Map Toggle Compare Fault Off (See: IO Map Toggle Compare Fault)
iView Logged Off. Passenger operation. A previously active iView connection to the controller has logged
off.
iView Logged On. Passenger operation. An iView user has logged on to the controller.
iView Lost Connection. An iView connection has been dropped.
iView Timed Out. An iView connection was inactive for a period of time beyond the idle time out and has
been disconnected.
Jail Master Mode
Description: The car has been placed in Jail Master Mode via the Jail Master Mode Input or via the Jail Oper-
ation PC application.
Car Reaction: The car operates as configured via the Jail > Master mode parameters.
6-50 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Jail Secure Mode
Description: Car placed in Jail Secure Mode via Jail Secure Mode Input or Jail Operation PC application.
Car Reaction: The car operates as configured via the Jail > Secure mode parameters.
Landing System Sensor Fault, LAND SYS SENSOR FAULT
6
Description: Generated if ULM or DLM sensor activated while car running and away from floor. May be gener-
ated if M contactor ON (car commanded to run) and safety system sees a door zone magnet for more than
16 inches of single direction travel.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
2. If allowed, set Contactor Drop Delay Time to 0.9 seconds.
3. Check for stuck door zone sensor input (front or rear).
LCD Fault
Description: Generated if controller gets a “not ready” state from LCD. This can happen if iBox LCD is not
connected properly or, with some LCD models, if contrast is set to far to an extreme.
Car Reaction: None. The fault is simply an indication to adjust or replace the iBox LCD.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iBox Onboard Display LCD. If the LCD is blank or frozen, adjust the contrast dial to midpoint.
2. If the display looks corrupted, press the iBox Computer Reset button.
Learn Switch Timed Out Fault, LEARN SW TIMED OUT
Description: When the Learn Switch is ON for more than 15 minutes, the car will shut down.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to restart after the current run is completed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Turn OFF the iBox Learn switch.
2. If more time is needed in Learn mode, turn the Learn switch back ON to reset the fifteen minute timer.
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Positions, LEARN U/DTS POSITIONS
Description: The positions for the normal and emergency terminal limit switches have not been learned.
Car Reaction: The elevator can only be run on Inspection or Test modes.
Troubleshooting: Perform normal and emergency terminal limit switches learn (Learn tab on iView Terminal
Switches Configuration screen)
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Speeds, LEARN U/DTS SPEEDS
Description: The speeds for the normal and emergency terminal limit switches have not been learned.
Car Reaction: The elevator can only be run on Inspection or Test modes.
Troubleshooting: Perform normal and emergency terminal limit switches learn operation (Learn tab on the
iView Terminal Switches Configuration screen)
Learning empty load values, LEARNING EMPTY LOAD
Description: Empty car load learn calibration has been initiated.
Car Reaction: Car will start load learn process.
Learning full load values, LEARNING FULL LOAD
Description: Full car load learn calibration has been initiated.
Light Load Anti-nuisance
Description: Light load anti-nuisance operation. Load in car is less than programmed Light Load Threshold.
Car Reaction: Anti-nuisance feature limits number of car calls registered. If exceeded, all car calls canceled.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, verify “Light Load Threshold” value. (Adjust on Load Weigher Configuration screen.)
2. Verify user-defined number of car calls allowed if car load less than Light Load Threshold.
3. Check if load in car is less than the Light Load Threshold value. Calibrate the load weigher if necessary.
4. For discrete input load weighers, check the Light Load input shown on the job prints.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-51

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Limit Switches Checksum Fault, LIMIT SW CHKSUM FAULT
Description: Learned ETS and NTS limit switch speed values have Invalid Checksum in nonvolatile memory.
An invalid checksum means that the data stored may not be reliable.
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn Hoistway limit switches. Use the Default option on the Terminal Switch learning screen.
Limit Switches Learn Fault, LIMIT SW LEARN FAULT
Description: Safety Processor A experienced a failure when storing learned limit switch speed values to non-
volatile memory.
Troubleshooting:
2. If problem persists, consult MCE Technical Support.
Load calibration on, LOAD CALIBRATION ON
Description: Load learn calibration has been initiated.
Load learn process activated. See Load Calibration On.
Load learn process deactivated
Load weigher zero calibration: Complete
Description: Load weigher zero calibration has completed.
Load weigher zero calibration: Manual
Description: Load weigher zero calibration manually initiated.
Load weigher zero calibration: Periodic
Description: Load weigher periodic zero calibration initiated.
Load weigher zero calibration: Recall
Description: Load weigher zero calibration recall initiated.
Load weigher zero calibration: Recall Aborted/Pending
Description: Load weigher zero calibration recall waiting to execute or aborted after beginning execution.
Lobby Peak Mode, LOBBY PEAK MODE
Description: The elevator is operating in lobby peak mode, favoring traffic coming from the lobby.
Local / Dispatcher Activated, LOCAL DISPATCHER
Description: Communication with the central or local dispatcher has been lost or not established. This car
controller is acting as the Local / Dispatcher.
Car Reaction: Car establishes communication with other cars in group and assumes dispatching.
Troubleshooting: Check the system communication related connections and parameters.
Local / Dispatcher Deactivated
Description: This car is no longer performing the dispatching functions.
Loss of Position or Speed Indicators, LOSS OF POS/SPD IND
Description: A discrepancy was detected between the feedback signal from motor encoder and the velocity
feedback signal from the car top, indicating a loss of traction.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Latched fault must be manually reset.
Troubleshooting:
1. Examine ropes and sheaves for slippage, wear or damage.
2. On iView oscilloscope or DVM connected between STP1 and STP2, compare Pattern Command and Speed
Feedback. They must match within 0.050 VDC while car is running at steady speed. If not, adjust TACH
ADJ trimpot. Please refer to “Following Error Margin” on page 2-43.
3. Use hand-held tach to verify car speed. If actual speed does not match commanded speed, adjust motor
parameter LF.22. Please refer to “Set the Following Error” on page 2-43.
4. Run the car on inspection and check the speed displayed on the iBox display.
6-52 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Mac Address Error, MAC ADDRESS ERROR
Description: The iBox has detected that one of its three MAC addresses has been defaulted or set to zero.
This could lead to multiple cars having the same MAC address, which will cause network problems.
Car Reaction: None.
6
Troubleshooting: Remove iBox front cover. On iBox OBD select Car > View Factory Data > MAC Addresses.
Verify MAC addresses displayed on LCD match addresses on barcodes on ICE-IMP board. Correct if needed.
Machine Room Heat Detectors Activated, MR HEAT DETECTORS
Description: The machine room heat detector input is activated. The fire warning light will flash until all heat
detectors have been reset. The fire-warning buzzer will sound until the car is shutdown at a floor.
Car Reaction: A car parked at a floor will open its doors and shut down. A car in motion will proceed in cur-
rent direction to next available floor where heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in current direc-
tion are tripped, car will reverse direction and proceed to first floor where heat detector is not tripped. If
again all heat detectors are tripped, car will proceed to main fire recall floor unless the car is also on Fire Ser-
vice, in which case the car will proceed to the appropriate fire recall floor. Once the car is stopped at a floor it
will automatically open its doors and shut down. Then, if the machine room or hoistway heat detectors are
active, a signal is provided to disconnect the main power line and/or activate the sprinklers where available.
Machine Room Heat Detectors Deactivated
Description: The machine room heat detector input is deactivated.
Machine Room Inspection Disabled, MR INSP. DISABLED
Description: Machine room inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on machine room inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent machine room inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
Machine Room Inspection Enabled
Description: Machine room inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Machine Room Inspection Operation, Machine Rm Inspection, Mach Rm Insp
Description: Car placed in Machine Room Inspection operation using the iBox Inspection switch.
Car Reaction: Car begins operating in Inspection mode. If running, the car will make an emergency stop and
is taken out of normal service. Under this mode of operation, car can only be moved manually using the iBox
Inspection Up and Down switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
MachineRoomInspection: Normally high
Machine Room Stop Switch Open, MR STOP SWITCH OPEN
Description: The machine room stop switch input has dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the Machine Room stop switch on the front panel of the iBox.
Main Floor Smoke Sensor Recall, MAIN FLOOR SMOKE
Description: Recall to the alternate fire floor due to active or latched smoke detector inputs from the main
floor.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to the user-defined alternate fire recall floor. Once at the recall floor, door opera-
tion is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the sensor input and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Main floor smoke and fire sensors as indicated on job print drawing(s) -1.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-53

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Motion Start Fault, MOTION START FAULT
Description: Car initiated movement but was unable to start for more than ten seconds.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine mechanical or other reason car is unable to start.
Motion stopped due to IO toggle test, MOTION STOPPED-IO TST
Description: iBox requested start of motion while a toggle test was being performed.
Car Reaction: None. iBox will resend request.
Troubleshooting: NA
Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault, MOTR CNTR DRV PRF FLT
Description: Fault signal for motor contactor driver proofing circuits.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify motor contactor driver proofing circuits.
2. Check the coil of the motor contactor.
Motor Contactor Proofing Fault, MOTOR CNTR PROOF FLT
Description: Fault signal for motor contactor proofing circuits.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify motor contactor proofing circuits.
Motor Field Forcing Timed Out, MF FORCING TIMED OUT
Description: DC motors only. The motor field was being forced for over 1 minute.
Car Reaction: Stop the run. Restart.
Troubleshooting:
1. The motor field starts forcing if there is a demand and the doors are closing. Check that the doors are
not obstructed and/or that passengers are not holding the doors open past the 1 minute limit.
Motor Limit Protection Timer Elapsed, MOTOR LMT TIMED OUT 2
Description: A fault is generated is the system requests movement for more than ten minutes but no move-
ment is detected.
Car Reaction: Currently for informational purposes only.
Motor Limit Timed Out, MOTOR LIMIT TIMED OUT
Description: Generated if no other fault has been generated and the system has attempted to move the car
for three minutes with no movement detected or has detected only minimum movement for ten minutes.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that Pattern Scaling is not set to 0.0.
2. Check Contract Speed is correctly set.
3. Check pattern voltage to drive (0 - 10V) with meter.
Nudging Front, NUDGING FRONT
Description: This event is logged when front door nudging operation is invoked.
Car Reaction: Front doors start closing at reduced speed and torque.
Nudging Operation
Description: The doors are operating in Nudging mode. (Passenger operation).
Nudging Rear, NUDGING REAR
Description: This event is logged when rear door nudging operation is invoked.
Car Reaction: Rear doors start closing at reduced speed and torque.
6-54 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Other Cars Alternate Fire Sensor Recall, OTHER CARS ALT FIRE
Description: Alternate fire recall due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from the hoistway or
machine room of other cars in the system.
6
tion is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the sensors, inputs, and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Other Cars Alt Recall sensor inputs as indicated on job prints.
Other Cars Main Fire Sensor Recall, OTHER CARS MAIN FIRE
Description: Main fire recall due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from the hoistway or machine
room of other cars in the system.
is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
2. Related Inputs: Other Cars Main Recall sensor inputs as indicated on job prints.
PARAM CHNG-RESET CAR, see Global Parameter Update, Reset Controller
Passenger Operation, Passenger. Normal operation status message.
Photo Eye Antinuisance
Description: This event is logged when car calls are canceled due to a user-defined number of car calls being
registered without interruption of the photo eye device.
Car Reaction: All car calls are cancelled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the user defined options related to the operation. (iView/Car Operation/Passenger/Anti Nuisance.)
2. Check the photo eye device and related inputs.
Position Cartop Offset Fault, POSTN CARTP OFFST FLT
Description: Each time the car stops, it obtains position information from the cartop position encoder. If the
reported position varies from the position last reported at this location by more than two feet, this fault is
generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting: Perform a Terminal Synchronization (Pattern Configuration screen>Common tab>Position
Synchronization.
Position Location Error Fault, POSTN LCTN ERROR FLT
Description: If the difference between the learned position of a floor (magnet) and the currently indicated
position of that floor (magnet) is greater than 2 feet, this fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Car will perform a terminal synchronization.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the iLand landing system is properly installed and adjusted. (Refer to Section 3 of this guide.)
Position Quadrature Fault, POSITION QUAD FAULT
Description: iLand quadrature signal not detected (one or both streams). At above 30 fpm, system expects
proper transitions on both quadrature signals.Fault may be bypassed on Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that both quadrature channels are arriving at the iBox.
2. Hoistway screen: Verify absolute position increments when moving up and decrements when moving
down (on inspection). If absolute position does not change, there may be a problem with the iBox.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-55

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Position Quadrature Reversed Fault, POSITN QUAD RVRSD FLT
Description: Arrival sequence of quadrature streams indicates travel in opposite direction of commanded.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the elevator moves in the requested direction.
2. On the Hoistway screen, verify that the cartop position increments when moving up and decrements
when moving down (on inspection).
3. On the Hoistway screen, verify that the absolute position increments when moving up and decrements
when moving down (on inspection).
4. Check JP1 jumper on iLAND-c. Position A is for normal mounting orientation; position b is for upside
down mounting position.
Position Speed Deviation Fault, POSITN SPEED DVTN FLT
Description: Safety processor compares distance travelled reported by position quadrature with distance
travelled according to motor rotation. If quadrature reports 48” travelled but motor reports less than 32”,
this fault is generated. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check velocity feedback from drive.
2. Check that Pattern Configuration/General tab Position Encoder Resolution is set to 256.
3. Check calibration of speed feedback signal.
Position Speed Threshold Fault, POSTN SPD THRSHLD FLT
Description: The quadrature synthesized speed exceeds 115% of contract speed. This fault may be bypassed
on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. On the iView oscilloscope, compare Pattern Command and Speed Feedback to see that they match.
2. Use a hand-held tachometer to verify car speed.
3. Run the car on inspection and check the speed displayed on the iBox display.
4. For SCR drives, verify that programmed running motor field is close to actual motor field value running at
contract speed. If value is higher, system will have to weaken motor field as elevator reaches contract
speed. If motor field is very inductive, this may cause overshoot. If value is too low, excessive current
may flow through armature. Note that load will affect this value. Running in up direction with full load in
car will yield worst-case scenario. For an empty elevator, running in down direction produces worst-case
scenario (value will be higher than for fully loaded car.)
5. For highly inductive motor fields, begin motor field weakening earlier and end motor field weakening ear-
lier. If begin weakening percentage is too low, poor control will result when elevator is approaching des-
tination floor (spotting). If so, reduce end weaken percentage without modifying (by much) the begin
weakening percentage. Generally, begin is recommended around 50% while end is recommended around
90% for normal motor fields.
6. Reduce high roll jerk.
Position Synchronization Fault
Description: The system was not able to read the position correction value stored in battery backed RAM
when the controller powered up. This fault usually results in a floor sensor fault or a position location fault.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify iBox battery connection and charge (lower left side of ICE-IMP board - iBox cover removed).
Battery type: 1/2 AA, 3.6V Lithium. Manufacturer: SAFT, part # LS14250. MCE part # 30-05-0001.
Position Synchronization Required at Floor, POSITION SYNC-FLOOR
Description: The elevator needs to verify position by crossing a door zone sensor.
Car Reaction: Cancel all existing calls, synchronize to floor.
6-56 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Position Synchronization Required at Terminal, POSITION SYNC-TERMINAL
Description: Elevator is lost and needs to locate a terminal door zone sensor to establish position.
Car Reaction: Cancel all existing calls, synchronize to terminal.
Position Synchronized at Floor
6
Description: Elevator completed synchronizing position using a door zone sensor. See Position Synchroniza-
tion Required at Floor.
Car Reaction: Return to normal service.
Position Synchronized at Terminal
Description: The elevator has completed synchronizing its position using a terminal door zone sensor. See
Position Synchronization Required at Terminal.
Car Reaction: Return to normal operation.
Power Transfer Input Activated, Power Transfer, POWER TRANSFER
Description: Power transfer input activated. Power transferring from emergency to commercial service.
Car Reaction: Cancel existing calls. Stop at next floor and open doors.
Troubleshooting: Check the Power Transfer input.
Power Transfer Input Deactivated
Power Up Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
Description: Position synchronization at terminal landing required after power-up/reset. Terminal synchroni-
zation after power-up will occur if the elevator was required to synchronize before power was lost or the con-
troller was reset, or if synchronization information in battery backed SRAM is invalid.
Car Reaction: The elevator will synchronize at a terminal landing.
Troubleshooting:
1. Battery may need to be changed.
2. Check for faulty SRAM.
3. Check for SRAM not correctly inserted in socket.
4. Check for faulty iBox.
Pre-start Door Lock Fault
Description: Once the decision to move the elevator has been made, three acknowledgments (motion start,
door lock and drive start) must be received before physical movement is allowed. However, if the system is
so configured, pre-start sequencing will begin while the doors are closing. If the door lock acknowledgement
is not received within 15 seconds (after the pre-start sequence is begun), this fault is generated.
Car Reaction: The pre-start sequence will stop and the sequence will repeat. If the fault persists, an exces-
sive restarts fault will occur.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the doors (front and/or rear) become locked within the prescribed time.
2. Verify, iView Diagnostics - Motion tab, that system sees doors closing and locked within prescribed time.
The information reflects front and rear door status combined.
3. Verify, via the Diagnostics - Car Operation - Front/Rear tabs, that the system sees the front/rear doors
closing and becoming locked within the prescribed time.
Primary Fire Switch Bypass, PRI FIRE SWITCH BYP
Description: The primary fire switch is in the Bypass position.
Car Reaction: According to selected Fire Code.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the primary fire recall switch inputs.
Primary Fire Switch On, PRI FIRE SWITCH ON
Description: The primary fire switch is in the On position.
Car Reaction: Car will recall to Main fire recall floor, position its doors as directed on Car Operation/Fire/Mod-
ify/Fire Recall screen, and wait for activation of the in-car firefighter switch.
Troubleshooting: If in error, check the Primary Fire Recall Switch input.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-57

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
QPRAM Device Error, QPRAM DEVICE ERROR
Description: Safety Processor A problem writing to QPRAM device.
Troubleshooting:
1. Replace QPRAM on Safety Processor A. Contact MCE.
Rear Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed, REAR AUX DOB BYP
Description: Rear auxiliary door open button continuously activated for user-defined time and is now
bypassed according to user defined setting (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Car Reaction: The rear auxiliary door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check corresponding input: Rear Auxiliary Door - Open Button (Normally low).
2. Operation of door open button can also be restored by setting Door open button bypass option to off
(unchecked) (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Rear Door Close Fault, REAR DOOR CLOSE FAULT
Description: One or more rear door failures to close detected. Controller will attempt to close doors as
defined by user parameters (door close protection timer and number of attempts) before declaring fault.
(iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Car Reaction: Doors will reopen fully. All car calls canceled and car removes itself from hall call service (hall
calls assigned to car canceled or reassigned). Close doors using constant pressure on rear door close button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status is determined by rear door close limit and rear door position monitor contact.
3. Check the door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on the Operation/Doors tab.
Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure, R DR CLS FLT REC FAIL
Description: Door Close Fault Recovery timer starts when Door Close Fault generated. When timer expires,
Door Close Fault cleared to allow doors to again attempt to close (see Rear Door Close Fault). Repeats the
number of times specified by Door Close Fault Recovery Attempts parameter. If doors have failed to close
when number of attempts equals recovery attempts, Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure generated.
Car Reaction: Car is not allowed to run until a mode change is detected or doors are successfully closed via
constant pressure on Door Close Button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status is determined by rear door close limit and rear door position monitor contact. Check
wiring of these signals.
2. Check door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on the Car Operation - Doors tab.
Rear Door Close Time-out
Description: Rear door failure to close detected. Controller will attempt to close doors for period of time
defined by Closing protection timer (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to doors closing
fully, this event is generated.
Car Reaction: Doors reopen fully and again attempt to close.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status determined by rear door close limit and rear door position monitor contact
3. Check the Closing protection timer (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Rear Door Contact Fault, REAR DOOR CONTCT FLT
Description: Faulty rear door contact (gate switch, door lock) detected. This is detected when the doors are
in their fully open position and either the gate switch contact is closed or the doors appear to be locked.
Car Reaction: All car calls are canceled and the car removes itself from hall call service. The rear doors are
not allowed to close and the car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the rear door gate switch and door lock contact at the floor at which the car is located.
2. Check associated wiring for these signals.
6-58 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Rear Door Open Button Bypassed, REAR DOB BYPASSED
Description: The rear door open button has been continuously activated for a user-defined time and is now
bypassed according to the user defined setting. (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Car Reaction: The rear door open button is rendered inoperative.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the corresponding input: Rear Door - Open Button (Normally low).
Rear Door Open Fault, REAR DOOR OPEN FAULT
Description: One or more rear door failures to open fully detected. After repeated attempts to open door (as
specified by user parameters), door open failure declared. Amount of time allowed for door to open and
number of attempts made are user parameters.(iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Car Reaction: The door stalls at its last position. Car calls are canceled and the car removes itself from hall
call service (hall calls assigned to this car are canceled or reassigned to other cars if available). Doors may be
moved via constant pressure on the door open and door close buttons.
Troubleshooting:
1. The door open status is determined by the rear door open limit status.
2. Check the wiring of this signal.
3. Check the door open protection timer and number of open attempts (iView Controller > Configuration >
Car Operation > Doors).
Rear Door Open Time-out
Description: A failure of the rear door to open has been detected. The controller will attempt to open the
doors for a period of time defined by the Opening protection timer parameter (Door Motor Protection Tim-
ers). If the timer elapses prior to the doors opening fully, this event is generated.
Car Reaction: The door open cycle is halted and the door is allowed to reclose. If so configured, repeated
attempts will be made to open the door. Otherwise, the car is allowed to leave the landing once the doors are
closed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door open status is determined by the rear door open limit and by the rear door position monitor contact
if applicable.
3. Check the Opening protection timer (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Rear Doors Stopped, REAR DOORS STOPPED
Description: The Door Stop button or Emergency Stop switch was activated causing the doors to be pre-
vented from moving.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move unless the doors are fully closed.
Troubleshooting: This condition can be cleared by activation of the Door Open button, Door Close button or if
the car goes into Inspection or Fire Service mode, provided that the Door Stop input is off.
Rear DPM Open-GS Closed, R DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED
Description: The rear door position monitoring contact is open while the gate switch is closed.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting: Check the rear door position monitoring contact, gate switch and all related circuitry.
Rear Hall Door Open Button Bypassed, REAR HALL DOB BYP
Description: The rear hall door open button has been continuously activated for a user-defined time (Door
open bypass timer) and is now bypassed in accordance with the user-defined setting (iView Controller >
Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Car Reaction: The rear hall door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the corresponding input, Rear Door - Hall Door Open Button: Normally low.
2. The operation of the hall door open button can also be restored by setting the Door open button bypass
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-59

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Rear Photo Eye Bypassed, REAR PHOTO EYE BYP
Description: The rear photo eye device has been continuously activated for a user-defined time and is now
bypassed in accordance to the user-defined setting. (iView/Car Operation/Passenger/Anti Nuisance.)
Car Reaction: The rear photo eye device is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. To restore the operation of the photo eye device, check the corresponding input.
2. Related inputs:
PhotoEyeRear: Normally low.
Rear Photo Eye Failure, REAR PHOTO EYE FAIL
Description: This event is logged when the photo eye is continuously activated for a predetermined time (4
seconds) while the rear doors are fully closed.
Car Reaction: The rear photo eye is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for abnormal blockage or failure of the rear optical device.
2. Related inputs:
RearPhotoEye: Normally low.
Rear Safe Edge Bypassed, REAR SAFE EDGE BYP
Description: The rear door safe edge has been continuously activated for a user-defined time and is now
bypassed according to the user-defined setting. (iView Controller > Configuration > Car Operation > Doors).
Car Reaction: The rear safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the state of the rear safe edge input.
2. Related input - SafeEdgeRear: Normally low.
Rear Safe Edge Failure, REAR SAFE EDGE FAIL
Description: This event is logged when the rear door safe edge is continuously activated for a predetermined
time (4 seconds) while the rear doors are fully closed.
Car Reaction: The rear door safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for abnormal blockage or failure of the rear door mechanical reopening device.
2. Related inputs:
RearSafeEdge: Normally low.
Receive Sys Params
Description: Indicates that this controller is receiving system parameters from the Central or Local / Dis-
patcher. (DO NOT RESET THE CONTROLLER).
Restricted, RESTRICTED
Description: Indicates that this controller has been shipped with Restricted Mode enabled. The controller will
run in all modes of operation, but will not accept hall call assignments. Restricted mode can be terminated at
any time by entering the Restricted Mode Key as described in document 42-IS-0144, Restricted Mode
Instruction for iControl Users. Obtain the Restricted Mode Key by calling MCE’s Credit Department at (916)
463-9582. When calling, please provide the controller’s job number and car identifier.
R DR CLS FLT REC FAIL. See Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated, Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault, RETIRING CAM DLK FLT
Description: The door locks have failed to make up within a pre-determined user-adjustable time after a user
adjustable number of attempts to lock the doors. This fault is detected on cars equipped with a retiring cam
door lock mechanism.
Car Reaction: Car is taken out of service and doors re-open fully. The doors can be closed with constant pres-
sure on the door close button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the door locks and the retiring cam circuitry.
2. Verify that the related user-defined parameters are correct.
3. Cleared by mode of operation change or if doors closed with constant pressure on door closed button.
6-60 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Deactivated. See Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated, Retiring Cam Protection Fault, RET CAM PROTECTIN FLT
Description: The retiring cam output has been activated for a pre-determined user-adjustable time after the
doors have successfully been locked. This fault is monitored in the event the car fails to reach its destination.
6
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if traveling when fault detected. Car taken out of service. If car is at a landing,
doors re-open fully.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the door locks and the retiring cam circuitry.
2. Verify that the related parameters are correct.
3. This fault is cleared by any mode of operation change or by the iBox Fault Reset button.
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Deactivated. See Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated
Sabbath Operation Activated, Sabbath Operation, SABBATH OPERATION. Car operating in Sabbath
mode initiated by software command, switched input or timer. Mode allows car to operate without buttons
pressed for hall calls or car calls. See parameters located on Car Operation Configuration > Sabbath tab.
Sabbath Operation Deactivated. See Sabbath Operation Activated.
Safety A Contract Overspeed Fault, SPA COS FAULT
Description: Car exceeded Contract Overspeed (iView, Safety Configuration). May be bypassed on Diagnos-
tics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check the contract overspeed parameter for proper setting (iView/Safety Configuration/General).
Safety A DETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPA DETS L2 SPEED FLT
Description: The car contacted the Down Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
speed. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the DETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety A IMP Configuration Mismatch
Description: Safety system saved parameters do not match values saved in main processor. When Safety
screen parameters are changed, this message appears after the Send button is pressed. Complete a Safety
learn operation as directed on the iView Safety Configuration screen to learn the new safety configuration.
Car Reaction: Car will not run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Using iView, check values programmed under Safety Configuration screen. Verify that they are correct.
2. Download correct values to the Safety system by executing the learn process from the Safety screen.
Safety A Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault, SPA LOS FAULT
Description: The car exceeded the leveling overspeed limit (detected by safety processor A). This fault may
be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. The fault will automatically clear 5 seconds after the car stops. The car is then allowed to move again.
2. Check the leveling overspeed parameter for proper setting (iView/Safety Config/General).
Safety A Inspection Overspeed Fault, SPA IOS FAULT
Description: The car has exceeded the inspection overspeed limit of 150 fpm (detected by safety processor
A). This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-61

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Safety A SIB Device Fault, SPA SIB DEVICE FAULT
Description: Safety Processor A has a problem writing Safety Ice Bus.
Troubleshooting:
1. Replace iBox. SAF Board damaged. Contact MCE.
Safety A SIB Device Fault Off (See: Safety A SIB Device Fault)
Safety A UETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPA UETS L2 SPD FLT
Description: The car contacted the Up Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
speed.This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the UETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety A Unintended Motion Fault, SPA UNTD MOTION FLT
Description: Safety processor A has detected that both hoistway doors and car gate doors were open as the
car moved away from the floor without a command from the iControl main processor (IMP board) to move.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. If applicable, the
rope brake drops.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for proper door operation and control.
2. Close the hoistway doors and close the car gate.
3. Press the Fault Reset button. Test.
Safety B Contract Overspeed Fault, SPB COS FAULT
Description: The car has exceeded the Contract Overspeed setting. This fault may be bypassed on the Diag-
nostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check the contract overspeed parameter for proper setting. (iView/Safety Config/General)
Safety B DETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPB DETS L2 SPEED FLT
Description: The car contacted the Down Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the DETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety B Fault Activated, SAFETY B FAULT
Description: This event is logged and related car status messages displayed on the OBD and iView if a fault is
detected by safety processor B but not by safety processor A.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. If the fault per-
sists, after a delay all calls are cancelled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the Event Log for other faults and information related to this fault.
Safety B Fault Deactivated (See: Safety B Fault Activated)
Safety B Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out
Description: Indicates that a fault bypass has timed out. (Bypasses are allowed for 15 minutes with the iBox
Fault/Function Bypass switch in the ON position.) On Inspection mode, this fault is bypassed indefinitely.
Troubleshooting:
1. To clear this fault, place the Fault/Function Bypass switch to the OFF position.
6-62 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Safety B Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault, SPB LOS FAULT
Description: The car exceeded the leveling overspeed limit (detected by safety processor B). This fault may
be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
6
Troubleshooting:
2. Check the leveling overspeed parameter for proper setting (iView/Safety Config/General).
Safety B Inspection Overspeed Fault, SPB IOS FAULT
Description: The car has exceeded the inspection overspeed limit of 150 fpm (detected by safety processor
B).
Troubleshooting:
Safety B SIB Device Fault, SPB SIB DEVICE FAULT
Description: Safety Processor B has a problem writing Safety Ice Bus.
Troubleshooting:
1. Replace iBox. SAF Board damaged. Contact MCE.
Safety B SIB Device Fault Off (See: Safety B SIB Device Fault)
Safety B Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out
Description: Safety Processor B has detected that the Safety Bypass Jumper has been on for more than 15
minutes.
Car Reaction: The car will not be allowed to restart after the end of the current run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Remove the iBox Safety Bypass Jumper.
2. If more time is needed in the Safety Bypass mode, then reinstall Safety Bypass Jumper and the 15 min-
ute timer will restart.
Safety B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPB UETS L2 SPD FLT
Description: The car contacted the Up Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the UETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety B Unintended Motion Fault, SPB UNTD MOTION FLT
Description: Safety processor B has detected that both hoistway doors and car gate doors were open as the
car moved away from the floor without a command from the iControl main processor (IMP board) to move.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. If applicable, the
rope brake drops.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for proper door operation and control.
2. Close the hoistway doors and close the car gate.
3. Press the Fault Reset button. Test.
Safety Bypass Jumper On
Description: Indicates that the Safety Bypass Jumper is in place.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-63

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out, SFTY BYP JMPR TMD OUT
Description: Safety Processor A has detected that the Safety Bypass Jumper has been on for more than 15
minutes.
Car Reaction: The car will not be allowed to restart after the end of the current run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Remove the iBox Safety Bypass Jumper.
2. If more time is needed in the Safety Bypass mode, then reinstall Safety Bypass Jumper and the 15 min-
ute timer will restart.
Safety C String Open, SAFETY C STRING OPEN
Description: The input has dropped.Input does not come on when bypassed, but the bypass will allow it to
run on Test and Machine Room Inspection.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the car safety string elements and finally the actual input to the iBox.
Safety C String Open Off (See: Safety C String Open)
Safety Configuration Checksum Fault, SFTY CONFIG CHKSM FLT
Description: Safety configuration parameters stored in nonvolatile memory are corrupt or missing.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Learn the Safety Configuration.
Safety Configuration Learn Fault, SFTY CONFIG LEARN FLT
Description: Safety Processor A had a failure when storing configuration values to nonvolatile memory.
Car Reaction: Car will not run until fault is cleared.
Troubleshooting:
1. Make sure the car is on Machine Room Inspection before learning the safety configuration.
2. Check that the installed safety configuration matches the selections on the Safety Configuration screen
and that no bypasses are in place.
3. Repeat the learn process.
4. If unsuccessful, contact MCE Technical Support. (Possible iBox failure.)
Safety Configuration Mismatch, SFTY CONFIG MISMATCH
Description: The parameters saved in the Safety system do not match the values saved in the main proces-
sor.
Troubleshooting:
1. Using iView, check the values programmed under the Safety Configuration screen. Verify that they are
correct.
2. Download correct values to the Safety system by executing the learn process from the Safety screen.
Safety Configuration Inventory Cross Check Fault, SFTY VCTR XCHK FLT
Description: The safety-related boards in the controller do not match the learned configuration.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify safety bus inventory against the safety configuration. If changes are made, re-learn the safety
configuration.
2. Re-learn the board complement (inventory).
Safety H String Open, SAFETY H STRING OPEN
Description: The input has dropped.Input does not come on when bypassed, but the bypass will allow it to
run on Test and Machine Room Inspection.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the car safety string elements and finally the actual input to the iBox.
6-64 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Safety H String Open Off (See: Safety H String Open)
Safety Inventory Checksum Fault, SFTY INVTRY CHKSUM FLT
Description: The Safety Ice bus board inventory stored in nonvolatile memory is corrupt or missing.
Car Reaction: The car will not run.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn the inventory of boards using the Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Safety Inventory Comparison Fault, SFTY INVTRY COMPARE FLT
Description: iBox safety boards do not match safety board inventory kept in safety system.
Car Reaction: The car will not run.
Troubleshooting:
Safety Inventory Creation Fault, SFTY INVTRY CREATION FLT
Description: Relearn of Safety board inventory could not be stored in non-volatile storage.
Troubleshooting:
3. If the fault does not clear, cycle power to the controller. Repeat the first two steps if the fault reoccurs.
4. If the previous steps are unsuccessful, iBox replacement may be indicated.
Safety Inventory Learn Fault, SFTY INVTRY LEARN FLT
Description: Safety Processor A failed to store inventory values to nonvolatile memory.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
3. If the fault does not clear, cycle power to the controller. Repeat the first two steps if the fault reoccurs.
4. If the previous steps are unsuccessful, iBox replacement may be indicated.
Safety String Open
Description: Contact in safety circuit is open.
Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to the job prints. Verify all safety string switches and wiring.
2. Verify the following have power: SAFC, SAFH, GOV, ESM, and ESC (if the car stop switch bypass is off).
Note that SAFC and SAFH can be bypassed by installing the Safety Bypass Jumper on the IRB board if
the car needs to be moved off the final limits for example).
3. If a rope gripper is installed and the rope gripper option is selected, check RGOK is equal to 1.
4. If a cartop exit is present and the cartop exit option is selected, check that CTEX input is equal to 1.
5. If Unintended Motion was tripped, clear the Unintended Motion fault.
6. Clear any faults left on the iBox display.
7. When the problem is fixed, the fault will automatically clear after 5 seconds.
Safety String Closed (See: Safety String Open)
SCR AC Phase Fault, SCR AC PHASE FAULT
Description: Fault indicates the 6 feed wires to M-contactor at bottom of System 12 Drive incorrectly con-
nected. If so, 30-degree phase angle between X and Y inputs is lost. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for a defective or disconnected 32-pin ribbon cable between SCR_LGA board and iBox.
2. Check if the SCR Drive Diagnostic indicators WYE PR, DELTA PR, or 30-Degree PR are ON.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-65

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
SCR Armature Voltage On, SCR ARM VOLTAGE ON
Description: Indicates presence of a DC voltage between armature terminals A1 and A2 in excess of 0.7VDC
before RE relay is enabled. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: Failure prevents a normal run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify test point TP1 on SCR-LGA board (See “SCR-LGA Board Layout” on page 6-118.) is 0.0mv when no
direction is commanded. Adjust R2 if needed.
2. Check for defective cable between the iBox AC/DC Drive jack and the SCR drive.
3. Check SCR-LGA board (see Section 6).
SCR Contactor Fuse Fault, SCR CNTACTR FUSE FLT
Description: Indicates that either the semiconductor fuse has blown or one or more of the 6 contacts within
the two contactors has failed. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check secondary wires of drive isolation transformer.
2. Check primary voltage on each of the primary terminals of the drive isolation transformer.
3. Check for harsh motor control, vibration, or humming.
4. Check for motor mechanical defect such as interpole (partially shorted).
5. Set an oscilloscope to 2msec/div, 500mv/div, AC coupling. Verify that the 12 drive pulses have equal
amplitudes and periods.
6. Check M1 and M2 contacts.
7. Check semiconductor fuses. (See “Semiconductor Fuses” on page 6-120.)
SCR Drive Ready Fault, SCR DRIVE READY FAULT
Description: Ready signal from the System 12 SCR Drive is inactive. This signal is inactive when the System
12 Drive detects a fault or is being reset (about 5 seconds). DC controls only.
Car Reaction: The elevator is prevented from moving while this signal is inactive.
Troubleshooting: Check the Event Calendar, Hoistway display or iBox display for active SCR drive faults and
follow the recommended troubleshooting for those faults.
SCR Dynamic Brake Fault, SCR DYN BRAKE FAULT
Description: This fault indicates that there is either more than 18-volts across the dynamic braking resistor
or the dynamic brake input from the SCR drive is active. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. If this fault occurs with no other SCR Drive faults in the Event Log, it is likely that a different failure such
as an AC Phase Failure has occurred. However, that failure occurred too quickly to be captured.
2. If other SCR drive faults are present, indicates a possible defective dynamic brake SCR or SCR-LGA)
board (See “System 12 SCR Drive” on page 6-116.).
SCR Excessive Armature Current, SCR EXS ARM CURRENT
Description: Armature feedback current exceeded 200% of rated armature current within 250 milliseconds
after run enabled. Triggers a Drive Forced fault if encountered 4 times within 7 run attempts. DC controls
only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Run the car on inspection while monitoring armature current versus command current. Verify both values
are approximately equal.
2. Check interpole feedback, filter capacitors (SCR page of job prints), any component in the loop feedback
from the SCR drive out to the motor and back to the drive.
3. Verify drive header current and voltage. Please refer to “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (System 12 SCR
4. Check serial cable between iBox and drive.
5. Check SCR-LGA board (See “System 12 SCR Drive” on page 6-116.).
6-66 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Disabled, SCR EXS CURRENT CMD DD
Description: Current command output greater than 200mV before run enable. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
6
1. Verify standard control gains (proportional, integral) on drive screens.
SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Enabled, SCR EXS CURRENT CMD DE
Description: Current command output greater than 7VDC within 300mS after enabling the run enable relay,
drive enabled. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check serial cable between iBox and drive.
2. Check SCR-LGA board (See “System 12 SCR Drive” on page 6-116.).
SCR High Temperature Fault, SCR HIGH TEMP FAULT
Description: Ambient temperature inside System 12 drive exceeded 170 degrees F or bad or failing SCR.
iControl will attempt to bring the car to the nearest floor before shutting down. The fault clears when the
temperature drops below tripping threshold. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: Stop at nearest floor. Car out of service until fault cleared.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for excessive ambient temperature.
2. Insufficient air flow through drive, especially if fault generated when car is running and clears when car is
stopped. Verify that the fan is operating properly. Check the fan fuse.
3. Check for bad or failing SCR.
4. Check for defective fault-generating thermostat. There are two heat sensors, one on each heat sink.
Check the integrity of the heat sensor’s normally closed contacts.
5. Check the drive rated armature current to determine if it is operating close to the limit threshold. Please
refer to “Current Limit Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-39.
SCR Instantaneous Over Current, SCR INST OVER CURRENT
Description: Indicates System 12 SCR Drive detected excessive armature current. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the main supply is being shut off during regeneration.
2. Check for a clipped door lock.
3. Check for a motor connection problem.
4. Possible failure of an SCR in the System 12 Drive.
SCR Insufficient Armature Current, SCR INSF ARM CURRENT
Description: Insufficient armature feedback current detected. Generated if requested current is at least 20%
of rated armature current yet detected feedback remains below 10% of rated armature current. Automati-
cally reset if detected four or fewer times in seven consecutive runs. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Armature Voltage Limit and Armature Current Limit settings on iView/Drive/Safety. Please refer to
“Armature Voltage (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 4-9.
2. If fault occurs when car is running at speed, adjust Motor Field so that armature voltage is within rated
motor armature voltage.
3. Verify current sensor connection on SCR-LGA board (See “System 12 SCR Drive” on page 6-116.). Check
SCR-LGA board.
4. Check serial cable from drive to iBox.
5. Monitor Up and Down direction inputs on SCR-LGA board (bottom of R14 down, bottom of R22 up). If
there is a momentary drop in direction signal before run is complete, use jumpers to determine if a sec-
tion of safety string failing. WARNING: Car must be on Independent Service before performing this test.
6. If the failure persists from the beginning of the run, make sure the current signal on SCR-LGA board test
point TP3 is not dropping out.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-67

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
SCR Loop Over Current, SCR LOOP OVER CURRENT
Description: DC loop current has grossly exceeded the reference value. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the brake is completely lifting.
2. Check that the load in the car is not in excess of full load.
SCR Low Line Caution Activated, SCR Low Line Caution, SCR LOW LINE CAUTION
Description: The iBox has determined that the line voltage to the System 12 Drive is between 80% and 95%
of rated armature voltage. The line voltage test occurs every time the elevator stops. The detected percent-
age is based on the Rated Armature Voltage parameter setting on the iView Drive Configuration screen>Gen-
eral tab. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: None. Elevator speed is limited to the detected line voltage percentage.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the Rated Armature Voltage parameter value is correct. The RMS value (AC phase measure-
ment on a voltmeter) at TP4 on the System 12 SCR-LGA board reflects the line voltage divided by one
hundred (The RMS values of the line-to-line voltages at the wye and delta connections of the drive or
secondary isolation transformer).
2. Verify the voltage into the primary of the Drive Isolation Transformer is not sagging.
3. Check the drive header rating against the voltage on the isolation transformer secondary. Please refer to
“Current Limit Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-39.
SCR Low Line Caution Deactivated
Description: The iBox has determined that the line voltage to the System 12 Drive is above 90% of rated
armature voltage (see SCR Low Line Caution (Activated)). DC controls only.
SCR Low Line Fault, SCR LOW LINE FAULT
Description: Indicates that AC line voltage to the System 12 Drive has dropped below 95% of the SCR-LGA
header value. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: Car will not move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the Rated Armature Voltage parameter value is correct. The RMS value (AC phase measure-
ment on a voltmeter) at TP4 on the System 12 SCR-LGA board reflects the line voltage divided by one
hundred (The RMS values of the line-to-line voltages at the wye and delta connections of the drive or
secondary isolation transformer).
2. Verify the voltage into the primary of the Drive Isolation Transformer is not sagging.
3. Check the drive header rating against the voltage on the isolation transformer secondary. Please refer to
“Current Limit Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-39.
SCR Low Line Test Fault
Description: The test to determine the line voltage to the System 12 drive has failed to determine the line
voltage (see SCR Low Line Caution Activated). DC controls only.
Car Reaction: None. Previous line voltage test values are used.
Troubleshooting: Possible internal hardware error on iBox trying to update System 12 drive’s MDAC.
SCR Phase Lock Loop Fault, SCR PHASE LCK LP FLT
Description: This fault indicates that the phase lock loop circuit PLL LED is ON in the SCR-LGA and that the
System 12 SCR Drive was unable to lock onto the incoming line frequency. The PLL LED is normally on for a
few seconds during power up. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Contact MCE technical support.
6-68 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
SCR Phase Lock Loop Warning
Description: Phase lock loop circuit PLL LED is ON in SCR-LGA and that System 12 SCR Drive was unable to
lock onto incoming line frequency. PLL LED is normally on for a few seconds during power up. Detected while
the car is not moving. DC controls only. 6
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify PLL indicator is active on SCR-LGA board.
2. Verify iBox is not resetting SCR drive. If so, PLL indicator will be active for a short interval. For a recur-
ring drive fault, iBox should reset SCR drive every 15 seconds. If so, there is probably an underlying fault
the iBox is trying to clear.
3. Contact MCE technical support.
SCR Power Supply Fault, SCR POWER SUPPLY FLT
Description: Indicates that power supplied to the System 12 SCR Drive is insufficient. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check all supply voltages on SCR-PS board (See “System 12 SCR Drive” on page 6-116.).
2. Check F2D fuse. Verify voltages in drive within 1%. Please refer to “Calibrating Actual Car Speed (Sys-
tem 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-38.
3. If voltages are correct, check drive cable from the iBox to the drive. Check the SCR-LGA board (See
“System 12 SCR Drive” on page 6-116.).
Secondary Fire Switch On, SEC FIRE SWITCH ON
Description: The Secondary Fire Recall Switch is in the ON position.
Car Reaction: Car will recall to Main fire recall floor, position doors as indicated on Car Operation > Fire Ser-
vice > Fire Code > Fire Recall tab, and await activation of in-car firefighter switch.
Troubleshooting: If in error, check the Secondary Fire Recall switch input.
Security On
Description: Indicates that system security is On.
Security Config ‘n’ (n = 1 - 8)
Description: Indicates the security configuration that is being used.
Send Sys Params to ‘n’ (n = 1 - 15)
Description: Indicates that this controller (iCentral or Local/Dispatcher) is sending system parameters to car
‘n’ (n = 1 - 15). (DO NOT RESET CAR ‘n’).
Serial COP Bus ‘n’ Comm Fault, SCOP BUS ‘n’ COMM FAULT (n = 1 - 4)
Description: Indicates lost communication between the ICE-CTP (cartop processor) board and the ICE-COP
(serial COP) board for at least 1.5 seconds.
Car Reaction: none
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for a bad cable between the ICE-CTP and ICE-COP boards.
2. Check for a bad ICE-COP board.
3. Check electrical noise interference and proper shielding of cables (board to board, board to controller).
Serial COP Bus ‘n’ Inventory Fault, SCOP BUS ‘n’ INVENTORY FLT (n = 1 - 4)
Description: Can indicate lost communication between ICE-COP board and one or more expansion boards or
that an ICE-COP board was connected or disconnected after system powered up (I/O inventory changed).
Car Reaction: none
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for bad cable(s) between the ICE-COP and ICE-COP-x boards.
2. Check for a bad ICE-COP-x board.
3. Press the RESET button on the ICE-COP board (takes a new inventory).
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-69

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Sheave Brake Drop Fault, SHEAVE BRAKE DROP FLT
Description: Sheave brake disabled via Sheave Brake Enable output but Sheave Brake Monitor input high.
There is a five second delay before fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. All calls are can-
celled. The doors will cycle.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Sheave Brake Monitor input and Sheave Brake Enable output are programmed (Configuration > I/
O Boards > Configuration tab).
2. Check voltage at Sheave Brake Monitor input and internal representation via View button on Configura-
tion > I/O Boards > Configuration tab.
3. Check voltage at Sheave Brake Enable output and internal representation via View button on Configura-
tion > I/O Boards > Configuration tab.
4. Check the sheave brake mechanism and circuitry.
Sheave Brake Pick Fault, SHEAVE BRAKE PICK FLT
Description: Sheave brake enabled via Sheave Brake Enable output, but Sheave Brake Monitor input low.
There is a five second delay before a fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactor immediately dropped. All calls cancelled. The
doors will cycle.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Sheave Brake Monitor input and Sheave Brake Enable output have been programmed (Configura-
tion > I/O Boards > Configuration tab).
2. Check the voltage at the Sheave Brake Monitor input and the internal representation via the View button
on the Configuration > I/O Boards > Configuration tab.
3. Check the voltage at the Sheave Brake Enable output and the internal representation via the View button
on the Configuration > I/O Boards > Configuration tab.
4. Check the sheave brake mechanism and circuitry.
Shuttle Service Activated, SHUTTLE SERVICE ON
Description: Shuttle service has been activated via key-switch/input, software command or timer.
Shuttle Service Deactivated, SHUTTLE SERVICE OFF (see Shuttle Service Activated).
Silent Mode Activated
Description: Silent mode activated via Activate button (Controller > View > Configuration > Car Operation >
Devices tab), timer (System > Configuration tabs > Timer Tables) or iMonitor.
Silent Mode Deactivated (see Silent Mode Activated).
Single Channel QUAD Fault, SNG CHANNEL QUAD FLT
Description: Failure of one of the two landing system quadrature signals (DP1 or DP2).
Troubleshooting:
1. Check DP1 and DP2 wiring from the landing system to the iBox.
Software Recall Switch Activated, SOFTWARE RECALL ON
Description: The software recall command has been activated via iMonitor.
Car Reaction: Car recalls to specified floor. Car calls and doors operate per recall command parameters.
Troubleshooting: Check the status of the recall command and related parameters.
SPA Spare Event ‘n’ (n = 1 to 8)
Description: SPA Spare Events 1 through 8 are used for testing.
Speed Limit, MF Forcing, SPD LMT MF FORCING
Description: System detected armature current without armature current command. (The motor field is
forced to help dynamic braking slow the car.) DC controls only.
Car Reaction:
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the brake is setting properly.
6-70 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Stuck Cartop Inspection Input, STUCK CT INSP. INPUT
Description: Stuck inspection monitoring is enabled by the Monitor cartop and car panel inspection inputs
option (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab). During passenger (automatic) operation, this message is gen-
erated if any of the cartop inspection inputs (CTEN, ICTU, ICTD) remain high for more than 250msec. During 6
inspection operation, this message is generated if any combination of cartop inspection inputs remain high
for more than five seconds, except for the following two, Enable plus Up (CTEN + ICTU) and Enable plus
Down (CTEN + ICTD).
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting: Check and fix the car panel inspection buttons and related circuitry (Enable, Up, Down).
Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input, STUCK CP INSP. INPUT
Description: Stuck inspection monitoring is enabled by the Monitor cartop and car panel inspection inputs
option (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab). During passenger (automatic) operation, this message is gen-
erated if any of the car panel inspection inputs (ICEN, ICPU, ICPD) remain high for more than 250msec. Dur-
ing inspection operation, this message is generated if any combination of car panel inspection inputs remain
high for more than five seconds, except for the following two, Enable plus Up (ICEN + ICPU) and Enable plus
Down (ICEN + ICPD).
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting: Check and fix the cartop inspection buttons and related circuitry (Enable, Up, Down).
Stuck Inspection Input Fault, STUCK IN. INPUT FLT
Description: This fault is generated when a stuck inspection input is detected during passenger (automatic)
operation (see Stuck Cartop / Car Panel Inspection Input message). The fault is not generated if the car was
on inspection operation. To avoid entrapment, the fault is not generated until the car has reached a floor.
Car Reaction: All hall calls are reassigned or canceled. The car will complete its run. When the car is at a
floor, doors are cycled to let the passengers out and all car calls are canceled. The car is shut down and
remains out-of-service until the fault is cleared.
Troubleshooting: Check and fix all inspection inputs/buttons. Then press the iBox Fault reset button.
Swing Operation Activated, Swing Operation, SWING OPERATION
Description: Indicates that the car is in swing car operation, independent of the Group Controller. The car
should be servicing a riser of hall calls dedicated to the car. The car will use settings from the Simplex Hall
Call and Parking related settings from the car Simplex supervisor screens.
Swing Operation Deactivated. See Swing Operation Activated.
SYSTEM SYNC
Description: The iBox is establishing communication with the cartop and acquiring position data.
Tach Error Fault, TACH ERROR FAULT
Description: Indicates that the difference between the intended speed and the speed feedback signal has
exceeded the Following Error parameter.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Followed by nor-
mal run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment” on page 4-49.
Tach Failure, TACH FAILURE
Description: Difference between synthetic tach signal and external speed feedback signal exceeds tolerance.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check velocity encoder and recalibrate tach failure and synthetic speed. Please refer to “Tach Failure Cal-
ibration (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-45 and See “Synthetic Speed Calibration (System 12 SCR
TERMINAL LEARN ON
Description: This status message, on the iBox display, indicates that the system is prepared to learn the
speed and position values for the normal (UNT1-5/DNT1-5) and emergency (UETS/DETS) terminal switches.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-71

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Terminal Synchronization Fault, TERMINAL SYNC FAULT
Description: The system either did not receive edge position data from the cartop or the system did not
detect a floor position magnet where expected.
Car Reaction: Car stops after crossing floor magnet at top or bottom terminal and is not allowed to move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car was not moved after power shut off.
2. Verify up/down normal terminal switch #5 opens at appropriate location. When up/down switch opens,
no LU or LD sensor should be active. Also, only one floor magnet should be encountered in direction of
travel after up/down switch opens.
3. Move car past floors around vicinity of fault and verify proper activation of LU and LD sensors.
4. Verify that the system is communicating with the cartop (no Cartop Communication Fault).
5. Verify absolute and cartop positions change by same amount and same direction while moving the car.
6. Verify that the terminal magnet has not fallen off.
7. Check the clearance between the floor sensor board and the magnets. Sometimes this clearance will be
off just enough to make some magnets fail to register properly. Adjust the clearance if necessary.
8. Re-learn the floor heights.
9. The iLink, iLand or iBox may be faulty.
Test Mode, Test
Description: Indicates that the elevator is in the Test mode of operation. iBox Test switch in Test position.
Car Reaction: Door operation is disabled. This setting is used to adjust or test the elevator.
This Car Alternate Fire Sensor Recall, THIS CAR ALT FIRE
Description: Recall to the alternate fire floor due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from the cars
hoistway or machine room.
tion is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation. The fire warning indicator
light will flash.
Troubleshooting:
2. Related Inputs: This Car Alt Recall sensor inputs as shown on the job prints.
This Car Main Fire Sensor Recall, THIS CAR MAIN FIRE
Description: Recall to the main fire floor due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from the cars hoist-
way or machine room.
is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation. The fire warning indicator light will
flash.
Troubleshooting:
2. Related Inputs: This Car Main Recall sensor inputs as shown on the job prints.
Unintended Motion Fault (see Safety A Unintended Motion Fault)
Up Direction Limit Open, UP DIR LIMIT OPEN
Description: The up normal terminal direction switch is open
Car Reaction: Immediate stop if moving. Further up direction movement is prevented.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the switch is operating properly.
2. Verify correct state of the iBox UNTD input.
3. Verify UNTD switch activating/deactivating at the appropriate location (normally 2” below the bottom ter-
minal landing - see prints).
6-72 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iControl Messages
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault, UP ETS POSITION FAULT
Description: Reported position encountering Terminal Switch differed from learned switch position by more
than set position margin. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop: Motor and brake contactor immediately dropped. All hall and car calls can-
6
celled. After car is stopped, it will run at Correction speed to next available floor and cycle door. Door Open
button will remain operational. If generated when car moving, fault will stay latched and Fault Reset button
must be pushed to clear. If generated when car stopped, fault will self clear when condition ends.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check integrity of switch and wiring. Check iBox input for switch.
2. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass position to Learned position for
switch. Verify Position Margin within reasonable range (Configuration > Terminal Switches tab). If appro-
priate, move switch closer to the terminal landing.
3. Relearn the NTS and ETS switches. Please refer to “Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit
Switches” on page 4-12.
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown, UP ETS SHUTDOWN
Description: Up Emergency Terminal Switch opened at speed or position exceeding specified threshold. Fault
stays latched and Fault Reset button must be pushed to clear. If generated when car stopped, fault will self
clear when condition ends.
Troubleshooting:
1. Fault logged in conjunction with a speed or position fault at UETS. Check Event Log and follow trouble-
shooting for Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault or Safety A (or B) UETS Level 2 Speed Fault.
2. Press iBox Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Up Normal Terminal Switch ’n’ Level 1 Speed Fault, UP NTS’n’ L1 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: Level 1 Overspeed detected at Up Normal Terminal switch 'n' (1 to 5). When switch opened, car
was traveling faster than Level 1 overspeed settings (sum of learned speed plus Overspeed 1 Margin per-
centage setting on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab) but not fast enough to trigger Level 2 overspeed.
May be bypassed on Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Controlled stop using Emergency Slowdown pattern parameters.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass and Learned speeds for switch. If
appropriate, increase Overspeed 1 Margin on the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab.
2. May be caused by pattern parameter change. Re-learn terminal switches if Pattern parameters change.
3. One or two floor runs can come in “hotter” than multi-floor runs.(switches are learned making full hatch
runs). If short runs are the problem, increase Overspeed 1 Margin (Configuration > Terminal Switches
tab) or lower the Standard profile - High Roll Jerk parameter (Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab.
4. May be caused by car following pattern poorly (heavy load or poor speed loop performance). If so, adjust
speed loop to follow pattern; alter pattern parameters for gentler deceleration and approach to floor
(then re-learn switches). Please refer to “Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults” on page 4-61.
Up Normal Terminal Switch ’n’ Level 2 Speed Fault, UP NTS’n’ L2 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: Level 2 Overspeed detected at Up Normal Terminal switch 'n' (1 to 5). Car traveling faster than
Level 2 overspeed settings (105% of sum of learned speed plus Overspeed 1 Margin percentage setting on
Configuration > Terminal Switches tab). May be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status. Compare last pass and learned speed. If appropriate,
increase Overspeed 1 Margin on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab.
2. May be caused by Pattern parameters changes. Always re-learn switches after changes to Pattern.
3. One or two floor runs may be “hotter” than multi-floor runs. (Switches learned making full hatch runs.) If
short runs are causing this, increase Overspeed 1 Margin or lower Standard profile - High Roll Jerk.
4. May be caused by car following pattern poorly (heavy load or poor speed loop performance). Adjust
speed loop to follow pattern; alter pattern parameters for gentler deceleration and approach to floor
(then re-learn switches). Please refer to “Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults” on page 4-61.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-73

Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Up Normal Terminal Switch ’n’ Position Fault, UP NTS’n’ POSITION FLT (n = 1 to 6)
Description: When switch opened or closed, car reported position different from learned position by value
exceeding margin set on Configuration > Terminal Switches. Switch may have opened early, late or not at all
on approach to terminal. Switch may have closed early, late, or not at all on departure from terminal. Switch
can go open while at a floor where learned position is closed, or go closed at floor where learned position is
open. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: If traveling up, car executes emergency slowdown, continues at low speed until floor encoun-
ter. Car stops at floor, opens doors, performs floor sync. If fault persists, car goes out of service. If traveling
down, car continues to first stop, opens doors, performs floor sync. If fault persists, car goes out of service.
If stopped at floor, car opens doors, does a floor sync, and, if fault persists, goes out of service.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status, compare Last pass position to Learned position for switch.
2. If mechanical (switch movement/magnet movement, bad traveler), will tend to repeat at same position.
3. A stuck switch is easy to spot by running the car on inspection and observing the input LEDs on the iBox.
4. Perform a Terminal Sync operation (Terminal button on the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
User code accessing an invalid logical indicator (internal event)
User Event ‘n’ Off (n = 1- 10) (see User Defined Event ‘n’ On)
User Event ‘n’ On (n = 1 - 10),
Description: Indicates that User Event ‘x’ (1 - 10) has been activated via User Input ‘n’ (1 - 10)
Car Reaction: Determined by user programming (Configuration > Advanced > User Inputs tab)
Troubleshooting: Determined by user programming (Configuration > Advanced > User Inputs tab)
Vector Checksum Fault (see Safety Inventory Checksum Fault)
Vector Comparison Fault (see Safety Inventory Comparison Fault)
Vector Creation Fault (see Safety Inventory Creation Fault)
Vector Learn Fault (see Safety Inventory Learn Fault)
Watchdog Ordered Control Stop Before Reset
Description: A critical component in the system has locked up.
Car Reaction: The car will come to a controlled stop and the system will reboot automatically.
Watchdog Ordered Emergency Stop Before Reset
Description: A critical component in the system has locked up.
Car Reaction: The car will perform an emergency stop and the system will reboot automatically.
6-74 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iBox Troubleshooting
iBox Troubleshooting
In this section we describe the following:
• iBox boot-up sequence
• Upgrading iBox firmware
• iBox removal and replacement
6
iBox boot-up sequence

Beginning with the April 09 release of iControl (IMP Boot ROM version 4.0.0) the iBox firm-
ware includes visual feedback as the boot-up process progresses. The time at the beginning of
each step is the approximate number of seconds from the beginning. The sequence is as follows:
1. :oo All of the status LEDs on the
iBox turn on momentarily.
2. :02 The Drive On LED turns on
indicating that the root task has COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK
started. The Safety OK, Computer, SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOORS LOCKED
Safety A and Safety B LEDs turn on SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION

IN GROUP
as the safeties are checked. CARTOP
SYS COMM
RUN
RELEVEL FAULT
3. :05 The message shown on the right appears on iBox

the LCD. Boot ROM
4. :06 The Down LED turns on indicating that the Version 4.0.0
EEPROMS have been read.
System Booting...
5. :07 The Run LED turns on indicating that the
application has loaded.
6. :10 The Relevel LED turns on indicating that the
application is running.
7. :20 All of the center column of LEDs turn off. @003 s 015 FG RO L03
8. :40 The LCD message turns off. Passenger
9. :50 The Standard LCD display appears and iCon-
trol begins normal operation. Ofpm
2:26:22AM
11/30/2009
Car Mgmt
If the iBox fails to boot-up as described above, contact MCE Technical Support.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-75

Troubleshooting
Updating iBox Firmware

The iBox program files are stored in flash memory. These program files can be updated in the
field using the iView PC. Please refer to “Updating Controller Firmware” on page 8-41.
iBox Removal and Replacement

The iBox is designed for relatively simple removal and replacement. The configuration file for
the original iBox can be uploaded from a computer to the replacement iBox so that many opera-
tional settings will be in place. Some information, like floor heights and brake calibration, etc.,
may need to be “re-learned” when an iBox is replaced. This section contains:
• iBox Configuration > Save
• iBox Removal
• iBox Installation
• iBox Configuration > Load
iBox Configuration > Save

As described in Section 8, you can save the configuration parameters for the iBox to a computer
hard drive (See “Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration File” on page 8-21.). Some or all
of the information in the file can then be “loaded” to the same or another iBox, simplifying con-
figuration.
1. Locate the Configuration file for the iBox you need to replace (default location is My
Documents > Motion Control Engineering> iView > Configurations). If no Configura-
tion file exists, depending on the nature of the malfunction, you may be able to create a
Configuration file now:
• Connect to the iBox through its #3 PC Ethernet connector.
• Select Save from the File > Configuration menu.
A typical Windows save dialog will appear. The default name suggested for the file will be the
controller connection name and date.cfg, e.g., if the connection name was Car A, the suggested
file name would be CarA_mm_dd_yyyy.cfg. The default file suggested (My Documents >
Motion Control Engineering> iView > Configurations) will be the file folder that contains the
connection icon for the controller. You may change either or both of the default suggestions and
store the file wherever you wish under any name you wish. As with any Windows file, if you
change or delete the file extension (.cfg) it will lose its association with the application that cre-
ated it. It is best to leave the file extension as-is.
2. Save the file to the desired location.
iBox Removal
1. Shut off power at the main disconnect.
2. Open the iControl cabinet.
3. Loosen the iBox cover retaining screws and remove the cover.
4. Unplug all connections to the body of the iBox. You can leave the connections to the rail-
mounted circuit boards above and below the iBox connected.
5. Slightly loosen the retaining screws for the rail-mounted circuit boards and slide them
away from the iBox (disconnecting the pluggable central bus).
6. Loosen the four captive, retaining screws that secure the iBox to the circuit board rails.
7. Remove the iBox.
6-76 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iBox Troubleshooting
iBox Installation
1. Verify that power is off at the main disconnect.
2. Open the iControl cabinet.
3. Remove the cover (bezel) from the new iBox.
4. Secure the new iBox in position between the rail-mounted circuit boards. 6
5. Slide the rail-mounted circuit boards above and below the iBox back into position so
that the central bus is plugged back in.
6. Tighten the retaining screws for the iBox and all of the circuit boards.
7. Reinstall the iBox cover.
8. Reconnect all cabling to the body of the iBox.
iBox Configuration > Load

While online (connected to a controller, you may select a Configuration (.cfg) file and send all or
selected data from that file to the controller. Please refer to “Loading Parameters from a Config-
uration File” on page 8-22.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-77

Troubleshooting
Replacing Circuit Boards

In the event of a circuit board failure it will be necessary to remove the defective board and
replace it.
Circuit Board Removal and Replacement

Peripheral circuit boards in iControl and in the iLink cartop box are connected along a central,
pluggable bus. The boards are mounted on slide-tracks so that, if you need to replace a board
you can loosen the mounting bolts of the boards above or below it, slide them away, then
loosen, slide, and remove the board you need to replace. In iControl, the central bus extends
both above and below the iBox.
Figure 6.1 Circuit Board Removal and Replacement
Board retaining
screws: Loosen to
slide board
Pluggable central
bus connectors
Note
Before using iView to assign or reassign inputs or outputs to I/O boards, consult MCE so that
your job prints can be corrected. Remember that reassigning an input or output will also
require appropriate re-routing of the wiring.
6-78 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iControl Circuit Board Quick References
iControl Circuit Board Quick References

This section contains information about iControl circuit boards and assemblies, including pho-
tographs with informational call outs, input/outputs, indicators, jumpers, test points and other
information pertinent to troubleshooting.
The circuit boards are listed in the table below. If you are viewing this file on a computer, click
6
the page number to jump to the appropriate section.
Table 6.4 iControl Circuit Boards
Board Name Where Used See
ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board Car Operating Panels page 6-80
ICE-CTP-2 Car Top Processor Board iLink Car Top Interconnect page 6-83
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board iControl AC and DC page 6-87
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board iControl AD, DC page 6-88
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board iControl AC, DC page 6-91
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board iControl AC, DC page 6-94
ICE-IRB Relay Board iControl AC, DC page 6-96
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board iControl AC, DC page 6-99
ICE-LCB Low Current Brake Board iControl AC, DC page 6-100
ICE-MIAC Multiple Input (120V) AC Board

iControl AC, DC, iCentral Group, iLink page 6-101
ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input (24V) AC or DC Board
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board iControl AC, DC, iCentral Group, iLink page 6-103
ICE-RG-2 Rope Gripper Board iControl AC, DC page 6-105
ICE-SAF Safety Board iControl AC, DC page 6-106
ICE-SF Serial Fixture Board iControl AC, DC page 6-111
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board iControl AC, DC Simplex / Swing Car page 5-23
SC-HCE-2 Serial Hall Call Ethernet - Digi board iCentral Group page 5-23
SC-HCE-ME Serial Hall Call Ethernet - Digi Board iCentral Group page 6-113
SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board Hall Call Fixture Enclosures page 6-113
SC-ION Serial Control I/O Node Board iCentral Group page 6-114
SCR-LGA SCR Drive Logic Board System 12 SCR Drive page 6-116
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-79

Troubleshooting
ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board

The ICE-COP-2 board interfaces between analog devices in the elevator car and serial devices in
the elevator controller. Multiple ICE-COP-2 boards may be “daisy-chained” together to accom-
modate high-rise installations.
Board connection is described in detail on the prints for the specific job.
Normal Operation
During normal operation, I/O LEDs will be lighted when the associated I/O is active (dimmer
when the output is active; brighter when the input is active). The SPA processor LED will be
continuously lighted. If I/O LEDs remain in a static condition or the SPA processor LED is not
continuously on:
• Press the RST button on the board. The I/O LEDs will all cycle and the board will resume
operation.
• Select RS485 communication: DIP switch S2, rocker 8 to the OFF position.
• Input Threshold Level:
• DIP switch S2, rocker 5 OFF = 900mV
• DIP switch S2, rocker 5 ON = 700mV
• Other DIP switch S2 rockers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 - OFF (Default).
Board Diagnostics
DIP switches and the I/O status LEDs also provide diagnostic information. When diagnosing
the board, you may:
• Set the two bottom DIP switches (1 and 2) to the ON position.
• I/O 1 and 2 LEDs will flash if RS485 with the cartop is good. LED1 monitors received
data; LED 2 monitors transmitted data. If an LED is not flashing, that phase of com-
munication has failed.
• I/O 4 and 5 LEDs will flash if ICE-EXP-IN port communication with the preceding
board in the chain is good. LED 4 monitors received data; LED 5 monitors transmitted
data. If an LED is not flashing, that phase of communication has failed.
• I/O 7 and 8 LEDs will flash very rapidly (appearing to remain on) if ICE-EXP-OUT
port communication with the next board in the chain is good. LED 7 monitors received
data; LED 8 monitors transmitted data. If an LED is not flashing, that phase of com-
munication has failed.
• Over voltage detection:
• Set all DIP switches OFF:
• LEDs will “scroll” upwards if 33 VDC or greater is detected between V+ and COM.
• Under voltage detection:
• Set all DIP switches OFF:
• LEDs will “scroll” downwards if 18 VDC or less is detected between V+ and COM.
6-80 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Software Version Query

Used by themselves (not in conjunction with another DIP switch as in Diagnostics), switches 1,
2, and 3 will separately display the board software version level (iControl only):
• Switch 1 ON will display the low version number on the first 8 LEDs (IO1 - IO8).
• Switch 2 ON will display the middle version number on the first 8 LEDs (IO1 - IO8). 6
• Switch 3 ON will display the high version number on the first 8 LEDs (IO1 - IO8).
The number is expressed in binary format with IO1 the least significant and IO8 the most signif-
icant value.
Table 7. iControl Software Version Number Example
IO8=128 IO7=64 IO6=32 IO5=16 IO4=8 IO3=4 IO2=2 IO1=1 Value

S1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 16
S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 8
S3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3
Example software version: 3.8.16
If you do a software version query, BE SURE to set the DIP switch rockers (1, 2,
3,4, 6, 7 back to OFF afterwards. OFF is their default.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-81

Troubleshooting
Figure 6.2 ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board

4-pin “universal” inputs may be used
instead of screw terminals if desired. Test points,+5v
OUT to additional
ICE-COP boards
(RJ45)
Reset button
8-position DIP
I/O Status LEDs switch package
I/O SPA processor OK

connections
24 VDC
6W max.
Test point,+3.3v
To CTP board in NOT USED for

iLink Cartop box iControl
IN from additional
ICE-COP boards
(RJ45)
+24VDC power
for COP
Board power buttons
input. See
prints.
Test point COM, GND

CAR CALL
BUTTON
+24V
Caution
This system is designed for 24 VDC cir-
cuits only. Connecting 120VAC or DC will
open the input fuses and may damage the COM
board. +24V SIGNAL
Connection Example:
Universal 4-pin inputs
COM
6-82 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board

The Cartop Processor board handles local control and communications for the iLink cartop
interconnect. Like the iBox, the Cartop Processor usually has track-mounted expansion boards
for extra inputs and outputs.
Figure 6.3 ICE-CTP-2 Cartop Processor Board 6
Battery
CAUTION! Insulator must

be removed prior to use.
Ground Test point
LED, Computer On
RST OUT test point
Diagnostic Switches
Load Weigher test point

LW
Clock Out test point
CTS Cartop Safety Relay,

part of the safety string
TP_LW test point
Load Weigher adjust,

Refer to iControl User
Manual, Section 5 for
adjustment instructions
Ground test point
Connectors for serial

Front door level sensor
Car Operating Panel
from iLand
COP boards
Rear door level sensor
from iLand
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-83

Troubleshooting
Table 6.1 ICE-CTP-2 Board Connections
Terminal Description
1 Common
DLSP Door Logic Supply (See job prints for source level)
2 120VAC
DOF Door Open Function output (active level =DLSP)
DBF Door Boost Function output (active level =DLSP)
DCF Door Close Function output (active level =DLSP)
NUDG Door Nudge output (active level =DLSP)
SP1 Spare Input (120VAC signal level)
IMP_RST Reset from ICE-IMP board
SE (Door) Safe Edge Input (120VAC signal level)
PHE Photo Eye input (120VAC signal level)
DOL Door Open Limit input (120VAC signal level)
DCL Door Close Limit input (120VAC signal level)
DPM Door Position Monitor input (120VAC signal level)
ICTD Cartop inspection down button (110VDC= switch closed)
ICTU Cartop inspection up button (110VDC= switch closed)
INCT Cartop inspection switch active (110VDC= switch closed)
GS Gate Switch input (110VDC= switch closed)
GS-R Gate Switch Rear (110VDC= switch closed)
ULM-R Up Level Marker Rear output (110VDC= output active)
DZ-R Door Zone Rear (110VDC= output active)
DLM-R Down Level Marker Rear (110VDC= output active)
ULM Up Level Marker (110VDC= output active)
DZ Door Zone (110VDC= output active)
DLM Down Level Marker (110VDC= output active)
1 Common
2 120VAC
3 110VDC
SCT1 Cartop Safety Contact 1 (110VDC= contact closed)
SCT2 Cartop Safety Contact 2 (110VDC= contact closed)
6-84 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 6.2 ICE-CTP-2 Board Connections
SHLD Shield: Common
+26V 26V output to load weigher
6
LW- Input from Load Weigher (analog voltage)
LW+ Input from Load Weigher (analog voltage)
DP2- Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP2+)
DP2+ Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP2-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with DP2.
DP1- Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP1+)
DP1+ Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP1-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with DP1
TX+ Transmit to iBox (connect to iBox terminal RX+)
TX- Transmit to iBox (connect to iBox terminal RX-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with TX.
RX+ Receive from iBox (connect to iBox terminal TX+)
RX- Receive from iBox (connect to iBox terminal TX-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with RX.
Table 6.3 ICE-CTP-2 Board Testpoints
Test point State

GND (x4) Ground test points
Volt (x8) +3.3, +E3.3, +5, -15, +15, -26, +26V
LW Measured from LW to TP_LW, 0.3 — 1.0 VDC = Empty car.
LW- Measured from LW- to TP_L@, -0.3 — -1.0 VDC = Empty car.
TP_LW Measured from TP_LW to GND, 4 — 8 VDC = Full car.
RSTOUT 0V= computer reset
CLKOUT Microprocessor clock
ICE-CTP-2 Cartop Diagnostics

There are eight diagnostic LEDs on the CTP-2 board. On power up or reset, these LEDs will
light sequentially, first in one direction, then the other, after which they will briefly clear.
Diagnostic LED 1 Regardless of the switch settings, LED 8 is ON when an interrupt is

being serviced. In normal operation it turns on and off quickly enough that it is almost as bright
as a fully illuminated LED. If LED 8 stays OFF, it indicates that the board is not functioning
normally and should be reset (press the RESET button).
Note
If there is a problem with communication between the iBox and the CTP-2 board after initial
installation, verify that the iBox TX+ and TX- terminals are connected to the CTP-2 board RX+
and RX- terminals, and the iBox RX+ and RX- terminals are connected to the CTP-2 board TX+
and TX- terminals (See “ICE-CTP-2 Board Connections” on page 6-85.).
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-85

Troubleshooting
Manual Reset Regardless of switch settings, the LEDs have the same meaning during
reset and startup.
• When the reset button is release, the LEDs will light up one at a time in the following
sequence - (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1). Normal operation should commence
immediately following the reset sequence.
If the reset sequence consists of three iterations of all LEDs on at the same time followed by all
LEDs off, the board has been programmed with a non-production version of firmware. The
board should be reprogrammed.
Diagnostic Switches The Diagnostic Switches should all be in the fully OFF position in
normal operation. Be sure to push the switches firmly in the appropriate direction when setting
the switches. The use of a small screwdriver or ballpoint pen is recommended.
Normal Operation The normal operating condition is with all DIP switches OFF.
Table 6.4 Diagnostic Indicators (Normal Operation - All DIP Switches OFF)
LED Description
1 Message input from iBox to iLink. With normal communication, toggles every 80mS. Goes
OFF and stays OFF if input is lost.
2 Indicates cartop detected unintended motion safety fault. With the car on Passenger opera-
tion, after the car had reached a landing, the car moved at a speed greater than 150 feet-
per-minute.
3 Indicates that the cartop detected an unintended motion safety fault. With the car on
Inspection, after the car had reached a landing, the car moved with doors open.
4 Message output from iLink to iBox. With proper communication, toggles approximately every
80mS. Goes OFF and stays OFF if output is lost.
5 This is the “alive” indicator. It toggles every 80mS during normal operation.
6 Lights when the car is on Inspection mode.
7 Unused.
8 Indicates that an interrupt is being serviced. If it goes off and stays off, the board is not
functioning normally and should be reset (press the RESET button).
When the iBox is not active, only LED 5 will toggle. When the iBox is active and normal opera-
tions are in progress, LEDs 1, 4 and 5 will toggle regularly.
Firmware Download Firmware updates can be downloaded via iView. Normally, no

manual intervention is needed at the cartop. However, if a problem does develop, the following
may be of use in recovering:
1. Set the S1 DIP switches 1, 6 and 8 = ON.
2. Press the manual Reset button on the ICE-CTP-2 board. This tells the cartop firmware
to wait for a firmware download without attempting to run the normal cartop applica-
tion first.
3. Perform the firmware update using iView (File > Firmware Update).
Battery If the elevator performs a terminal sync when power is restored, check the ICE-
CT-2 battery with a volt meter. If the top of the battery measures below 2.8 Vdc with respect to
GND, replace the battery with a CR2477 or equivalent battery.
6-86 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board

The Emergency Brake board is used in iControl AC and DC elevator controllers to control a
hoist motor-mounted emergency brake. The emergency brake is typically a separate friction
brake mounted on an extended or secondary sheave.
Figure 6.4 ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board
Factory wiring connections Factory wiring connections
6
Central interconnect/control bus
Unintended Motion
Fault indicator
Signal presence Unintended Motion
indicators Fault reset button
Voltage test Safety Processor Poll

points SPA
Left-to-Right SPB
GND
+3.3V
+5V
Fuse FEBP Fuse FEB2

1/10A, 250V, MDQ 1/2A, 250V, AGC
24VDC input 120VAC input
LED lighted = Fuse OK LED lighted = Fuse OK
Table 6.5 ICE-EB Board Inputs and Outputs
Connector Signal Connector Signal

EBP1: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 1: Common
EBP2: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 24X2: 24VDC input
EBP3: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 24: 24VDC input
EBP4: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 2: 120VAC input
EBS1: 120VAC= Brk OK (picked)
EBS2: 120VAC= Brk OK (picked)
EBR1: 120VAC= Brk picked, 0VAC= Brk engaged
EBR2: 120VAC= Brk picked, 0VAC= Brk engaged
The user makes no direct connections to this board. Refer to job prints for circuit information.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-87

Troubleshooting
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board

iField Modules are used to supply power to the brake on iControl AC and DC systems and to the
motor field on iControl with DC drive. The iField Modules used for both purposes are the same,
with the exception of the wiring to terminal J7 on the ICE-FMP, Field Module Power Board.
IFIELD-MODULE Specifications
Inputs: 70 VAC min, 300 VAC max, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz, 42 AMPS Maximum
Outputs: 0 VDC minimum, 265 VDC maximum, 45 AMPS Maximum
OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION REQUIRED ON INPUT

- For loads up to 30A - use Bussman type FNQ or LittleFuse type FLQ
- For loads over 30A - use Ferraz Shawmut type A50QS80-4 or LittleFuse type L50S80
ICE-FM Field Module Board

iField-Module-L is used to supply power to the brake on iControl AC and DC systems.
IFIELD-MODULE-L Specifications
Inputs: 70 VAC Min, 300 VAC Max, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz, 8 AMPS Maximum Continuous
Outputs: 0 VDC Minimum, 300 VDC Maximum, 6 AMPS Maximum Continuous
OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION REQUIRED ON INPUT

- Replace with 5x10 mm 6.3A 500v SL0-BL0
- LittleFuse 047706.3 or equivalent
6-88 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Figure 6.5 ICE-FM Field Module-L Logic Board
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-89

Troubleshooting
Table 6.6 IFIELD-MODULE-L Indicators on the ICE-FM Board
Indicators Description
+15v ISO LED indicator for isolated +15V power supply, measured with respect to isolated
Ground, GND-ISO. Normally ON. Turns OFF when module loses +15 ISO voltage.
F. BAD LED indicator for AC input on FMX1 and FMX2 terminals (on ICE-FM board). Normally
OFF. Turns ON when any input side AC fuse opens.
+15v LED indicator for +15V power supply, measured with respect to Ground. Normally
ON. Turns OFF when module looses +15V.
HI TEMP LED turns ON to indicate high temperature on the heat sink. Normally OFF. Turns ON
when the temperature of the board raises above 85oC (185oF).
IGBT FLT LED turns ON to indicate that the AUX IGBT has shorted.
BRK FLT LED turns ON to indicate that the TRIAC is shorted or an over-current situation
exists.
6-90 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 6.7 IFIELD-MODULE-L Terminals on the ICE-FM Board (Brake Module)
1 1 BUS: AC input supply to the ICE-FML Board.
2 2B BUS: AC input supply to the ICE-FML Board.

6
FMO+ Field Module Output, positive, to brake coil.
FMO- Field Module Output, negative, to brake coil.
FMSI Field Module Safety Input: Jumpered to FMSO. FMSI and FMSO are always jump-
ered together unless there is a requirement for a mechanical safety contact to
break between the load and the field module.
FMS0 Field Module Safety Output: Jumpered to FMSI. (see FMSI)
FMS1 Field Module Snubber 1: When used as a Brake Module, a shunt RC parallel net-
work (RB & CB) is connected between FMS1 and FMLD.
FMS2 Field Module Snubber 2: N/C
FMLD Field Module Load Diode: FMLD is connected to the cathode of a diode on the ICE-
FM board. FMLD is also connected to RC network RB & CB (see FMS1).
DTP Factory Use Only
FMX1 AC power input to Field Module from brake contacts (70 VAC min, 300 VAC max)
FMX2 AC power input to Field Module from brake contacts (70 VAC min, 300 VAC max)
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board

The Earthquake board provides an interface between motion sensing devices and the iControl
elevator controller.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-91

Troubleshooting
Figure 6.6 ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board
Testpoints
GND, On = EQ sensor tripped
+5V,
+3.3V Board Query LED
EQ Board Reset
Fuse FCW
EQSP LED 1/4A, 250V, MDQ
On = EQ fault
Off = No EQ fault
ESS LED
On = Normal
Off = Seismic device tripped
+24VDC Test point
CW2 LED, On = CW String OK
CW1 LED, On = CW String OK
Table 6.8 Earthquake Board Connections

EQSP 1:Spare. 0V=Normal. 120VAC=Tripped 1: Common
ESS: 120VAC= Normal, 0V= Tripped CWX2: 18VAC
(120VAC from #2 bus, through sensor to ESS)
CWX1: 18VAC
CW2: 24VDC= Normal, 0V= String shorted

CW1: 24VDC= Normal, 0V= String shorted
6-92 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Figure 6.7 Earthquake Board, Supporting Information
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-93

Troubleshooting
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board

JP8, JP16
JP1
Test Points:
+1.5V TorqMax
+2.5V Interface
+3.3 B
+5V
DGND
RS 232 PC
Ethernet
3 = PC
Programming
port, factory
use only Ethernet
2 = SYSTEM
Ribbon cable to
Onboard Display Ethernet
1 = LAN
Internal CAN
JP14, JP13, JP12 +5V to power

supply shunt
IMP Flash
JP6 Internal CAN
CAN Trmnate
External CAN
AC 18V
Battery:
1/2 AA, 3.6V
Lithium Serial Hall
Call 1
Switches:
INSPECTION
UP
ENABLE
DOWN Serial Hall
CONTRLR. STOP Call 2
CAPTURE
TEST
FAULT BYPASS
WRITE ENABLE
LEARN Magnetek
C.DOOR BYPASS Interface
H.DOOR BYPASS
6-94 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

The ICE-IMP Main Processor Board provides central processing, data storage, control switches
and communication. The Onboard display and ICE-SAF boards plug into the ICE-IMP board.
Table 6.9 ICE-IMP Jumper Table
Jumper Setting Description

JP1 B
6
I2C EEPROM Write Protect, A = ON, B = OFF
JP2 B MODCK1, processor speed setting
JP3 A MODCK2, processor speed setting
JP4 B MODCK3, processor speed setting
JP5 B Processor HRESET configuration
JP6 Battery SRAM power select (Battery/Regular)
JP7 B Socket 1 setting, A = Flash, B = SRAM
JP8 A CANH configuration to expansion boards (future)
JP9 ON CAN1 Termination
JP10 B RSTCONF, A = used for debugging, B = normal setting
JP11 ON CAN2 Termination
JP12 ON* IMP (iControl Main Processor): ON = enables iBox COMPUTER RESET button
to reset this processor.
*iBox Rev. 7 thru 10 have a wire from this jumper to the ICE-SAF board
which allows resetting if any power supply voltages are out of tolerance.
iBox Rev. 11 and above use an internal circuit for this purpose.
JP13 ON SPA (Safety Processor A): ON = enables iBox COMPUTER RESET button to
reset this processor.
JP14 ON SPB (Safety Processor B): ON = enables iBox COMPUTER RESET button to
reset this processor.
JP15 ON Serial interface transmit configuration
JP16 A CANL configuration to expansion boards (future)
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-95

Troubleshooting
ICE-IRB-2 Relay Board

The Relay Board is an integral part of the iBox. Three system relays are mounted on the board.
The SAFT relay is socketed (replaceable). There are also six fuses protecting the 110VDC and
120VAC iBox output buses that may be replaced. Electrically, the Relay Board is between the
iBox processor and the motor and brake field modules inside the iPower Box. The SB and 3 ter-
minals are accessible through the front of the iBox and bypass the safety string when “jump-
ered” together. If a jumper is placed, it “times out” automatically after 15 minutes. In TSSA
jurisdictions, SB and 3 terminals are capped with insulators and are not front panel accessible.
Figure 6.8 ICE-IRB Relay Board
Motor Driver Relay

Brake Driver Relay TM Triac
Testpoints: Safety Relay
3.3V, 5.0V, 15V
Power Bus Fuses

250VAC,
Bussman MDQ or
Littelfuse Type 313
6-96 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 6.10 ICE-IRB Relay Board
Signal (Left Edge) Signal (Right Edge)

BD: Brake Driver relay indicator. When the BD relay on M1: Drive contactor coil connection.
the Relay board is closed to pick the brake, this LED
will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
6
TB: Brake Triac active indicator. When the brake triac M2: Drive contactor coil connection.
on the Relay board is active (completes circuit for BD
relay), this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Proces-
sor B.
BRD: Brake Redundancy. This LED lights when the MR: Connects to drive contactor auxiliary contact
main brake contactor drops out. for redundancy input.
BDRD: Brake Drive Redundancy. This LED lights when MX: Connects to drive contactor auxiliary contact
the BD relay drops out. for brake qualification.
MD: Motor Drive relay indicator. When the MD relay on M: Part of MX circuit.
the Relay board is closed to enable the motor, this LED
will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TM: Motor Triac active indicator. When the motor triac UP: Up direction output to MCE System 12 SCR
on the Relay board is active (completes circuit for MD Drive.
relay), this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Proces-
sor B.
MRD: Motor Redundancy. This LED lights when the DN: Down direction output to MCE System 12
main motor contactor drops out. SCR Drive.
MDRD: Motor Drive Redundancy. This LED lights when _ _: Not connected.
the MD relay drops out.
SAFC: Safety Cartop input. Cartop safety relays and 2D: 120VAC power to the drive. Fused on IRB
switches are wired in series between SAFH (Safety board (fuse F2D).
Hoistway) and SAFC. If any contact in the safety string
opens, there will be 0VDC on this input and the car will
not run. If all safety contacts in the string are closed,
there will be 110VDC on this input.
SAFH: Safety Hoistway input. Hoistway safety relays 1D: System common to the drive - source is the
and switches are wired in series between the #3 bus 1 bus.
and SAFH. The patch also includes the Governor
switch, with the GOV connection providing access to
the #3 bus via the governor switch. (#3 to GOV
through governor switch, GOV to SAFH through hoist-
way safety relays and switches). The job prints for the
job provide specific wiring instructions. If any contact
in the safety string opens, there will be 0VDC on this
input and the car will not run. If all safety contacts in
the string are closed, there will be 110VDC on this
input.
SP1 D: Optional input. See job prints. BK2: Connects to the brake contactor for redun-
dancy checking. The source of power for this cir-
cuit comes from fuse F2 on the IRB board.
SP2 D: Optional input. See job prints. (When used as BK1: Connects to the brake contactor for redun-
a brake pick switch input: Set brake = 110VDC. Picked dancy checking. The source of power for this cir-
brake = 0VDC. cuit comes from fuse F2 on the IRB board.
SP2: Optional input. See job prints. BC1: Connects to the brake contactor coil (see
job prints for connection).
SP3: Optional input. See job prints. BC2: Connects to the brake contactor coil (see
job prints for connection).
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-97

Troubleshooting
Signal (Left Edge) Signal (Right Edge)

SP4: Optional input. See job prints. SAF: When used, provides an additional SAF
relay.
1: (4x) Common bus connections. 0VDC 1: Common bus.
2PI: (2x) 120VAC outputs for position indicator. LED DOF: Door Open output.
ON = bus powered.
2: (2x) #2 bus outputs. 120VAC. 2 LED lighted when DBF: Door Boost Output.
bus is powered.
3HA: (2x) #3 bus outputs for hoistway. 110VDC. 3HA DCF: Door Close Output.
LED lighted when bus is powered.
3: (2x) #3 bus outputs. 110VDC. 3 LED lighted when NUDG: Door Nudging Output.
bus is powered.
RCO: Retiring Cam Output.
DLSP: Door Logic Supply Voltage. Selectable (by
wiring) power input to door control relays. See
job prints.
1: Common bus.
2: (2x) 120VAC bus.
3D: (2x): 110VDC bus.
Checking TM Triac on ICE-IRB Board

If the PM or M contactors are not picking, you might see the following fault messages:
• Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
• Drive Ready On Fault
• Drive Enable Feedback Fault
• SCR Insufficient Armature Current
Note
These faults do not necessarily mean that the problem is with the TM Triac. It is recommended
to first consult the iControl Messages table in the Troubleshooting section and follow the trou-
bleshooting tips for the message(s) displayed.
To check the TM triac:

1. With controller power off remove the cover on the iBox.
2. The TM triac is in the upper right hand corner of the ICE-IRB board, which is the lowest
board under the iBox cover and has three relays on it.
3. Measure the resistance across the outside legs of the TM triac. The legs can be hard to
get to depending on the probe leads used. You can get to the upper leg from the left and
the lower leg from below.
4. If the resistance is 60-70 ohms then the triac is good and continue troubleshooting the
fault. If the resistance is 15 ohms or less the ICE-IRB board needs to be replaced.
6-98 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-IRD Rear Door Board

The Rear Door board provides additional door zone inputs.
Figure 6.9 ICE-IRD Rear Door Board
Testpoints L to R:
+5V, GND, +3.3V
Safety Processor 6
Query LEDs. Safety
Processors A, and B
Table 6.11 Rear Door Board Connections

DZ-R: Rear Door Zone signal from iLink. 110VDC active 1 (4x): Common bus
signal level. Off = 0. connections.
ULM-R: Rear Up Level Marker signal from iLink. 110VDC
active signal level Off = 0.
DLM-R: Rear Down Level Marker signal from iLink.
110VDC active signal level. Off = 0.
DPM-R: Rear Door Position Monitor input. Door closed,
input inactive. 120VAC. Door not closed, 0VAC.
GS-R: Rear Gate Switch input. The gate switch makes
up when the elevator doors close. When the switch is
made, there will be 110VDC on this input. When the
switch is open, there will be 0VDC on this input. The
gate switch may be wired in series with other switches
or locks on the elevator doors (as shown in the job
prints) so that, if any of the switches do not make, the
GS input will remain low and the car will not run.
DLMS-R: Rear Door Lock Main String input. If top and
bottom hoistway access is not provided, all hoistway
rear door locks are wired in series between the #3 bus
and this input. When the switch is made, there will be
110VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there
will be 0VDC on this input and the car will not run.
DCMS-R: Rear Door Contact Main String input. If top
and bottom hoistway access is not provided, all hoist-
way rear door contacts are wired in series between the
#3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there
will be 110VDC on this input. When any switch is open,
there will be 0VDC on this input and the car will not run.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-99

Troubleshooting
ICE-LCB Low Current Brake Board

Most iControls use the iField brake module for precise control of brake picking, holding, and
application. If the requirements of the job permit, the Low Current Brake board may be used
instead to provide simple brake pick and hold control. If used, the Low Current Brake board is
usually mounted on the right wall inside the iPower Box. Brake adjusting components (resis-
tors, capacitors, diodes) may be “wired in” to the board circuitry using AWG 18 wire and on-
board screw terminals to modify the performance of the circuit. The job prints will show the
Low Current Brake board connections clearly if it is used.
Table 6.12 Low Current Brake Board Signals
Signal Use
B2 -, B1+ Brake voltage feedback signals to iControl Safety Board.
BKX1, BKX2 110VAC (typical) inputs to Low Current Brake Board rectifier.
BKD1 Brake Diode D1 cathode (used to include D1 in the circuit)
B2MCE Used to include external components in the circuit
FBS1 Brake Diode D1 anode (used to include D1 in the circuit)
FBS2 Used to include external components in the circuit
BK2 Used to include external components in the circuit
BK1 Used to include capacitor C1 in the circuit
B1 Positive voltage output to brake coil via controller B1 terminal
B2 Return from brake coil via controller B2 terminal
6-100 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-MIAC (-24V) Multiple Input Board

The ICE-MIAC board is used in AC and DC iControls and in the iLink cartop interconnect as a
general purpose input board suitable for industry-common 120VAC input signal levels. The
ICE-MIAC-24V board can be used for 24V AC or DC inputs.
Figure 6.10 ICE-MIAC Multiple Input AC Board
6
120VAC input terminals (Orange) 3.3V, 5V, and GND Testpoints
LED lights when associated input is active Board Query LED
Figure 6.11 ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input AC/DC Board
Caution!
Blue terminals indicate low voltage (24V AC or DC) input.
Connecting 120VAC to these inputs will damage the board.
ICE-MIAC-24V
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-101

Troubleshooting
Table 6.13 ICE-MIAC Board Connections

Orange Terminals 1: Common
Inputs 1 - 32
Orange
Orange 120VAC = input active
Typical Input Circuit
LST 670
Table 6.14 ICE-MIAC-24V Board Connections

Blue Terminals 1: Common
Blue Inputs 1 - 32
Blue 24V AC or DC = input active
Caution! Connecting 120V
to these terminals will
damage the board.
Typical Input Circuit
8.2K
2.21K
LST 670
6-102 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board

The ICE-MOR board is a multi-purpose, relay-closure output board. ICE-MOR boards are used
in iControl elevator controllers and in iLink cartop enclosures.
Output Connections
Connect outputs as shown in your job prints. Outputs may be configured (in specific groups) to 6
provide either a path to ground or current to drive indicator lamps/LEDs.
Output State Selection The outputs are divided into five groups. Each group shares a
common. The common may be wired to provide a current source or a path to ground. The
groups are:
• Relays 1 — 4
• Relays 5 — 8
• Relays 9 — 16
• Relays 17 - 24
• Relays 25 - 32
before shipment. You need only connect outputs as shown on the job prints.
Table 6.15 ICE-MOR Board Connections

Output determined by Common 1: Common
connection to board connector J5. 1: Common
AC2: MOR2, typical 18VAC
AC1: MOR1, typical 18VAC
Common 25 - 32
Common 9 - 16
Common 5 - 8
Common 17 - 24
Common 25 - 32
1: Common
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-103

Troubleshooting
Figure 6.12 ICE-MOR Board
FMOR Fuse
6/10A, 250V, MDQ
+5V Test point
+24V Test point 18VAC
Board Query LED
24V OK LED 1 bus
On when iBox queries board
LED lights when corresponding

output relay is active.
Active = Open
Active = Closed
Determined by iView settings
according to user requirements.
Typical output circuit
6-104 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-RG-2 Rope Gripper Board

The Rope Gripper board monitors and resets a rope gripper (emergency brake). The board is
used in both AC and DC iControls.
Figure 6.13 ICE-RG Rope Gripper Board
Reset button Fault indicator 6
Fuse F2EB, 4A, MDQ

Test Points
Ground, +3.3V, +5V, +24V
Fuse FRG, 1/10A, MDQ
Safety Processor A and B

query indicators
Table 6.16 Rope Gripper Board Connections

RG1:120VAC to RG power supply 1: Common
RG2: RG power supply return 24x2: 18VAC in
RG5:120VAC=rope gripper OK 0V=rope gripper tripped 24: 18 VAC in
RG7: 120VAC signal to rope gripper 2: 120VAC in
Figure 6.14 Simplified Rope Gripper Operation
Rope Gripper
120VAC
RG1 Rope Gripper Power Supply
RG2
RG5 RG OK Safety A
120VAC
RG7 RG OK Safety B
Manual switch:
Open = manual operation, rope gripper disabled Closed = Rope Gripper Retracted
Closed = normal operation, rope gripper enabled Open = Rope Gripper Actuated
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-105

Troubleshooting
ICE-SAF Safety Board

To I/O Boards
Status LEDs JP5, JP6 Encoder/Tach Switch
TACH ADJ.
trimpot
Power Input
1
-15VDC
+15VDC
GND
+5VDC
Motor Field
connections
RS485 Fault LED
Brake
connections
FIELD WIRING
AC/DC Drive
connections
DCC Filter
OFF
ON
J3 AC Drive
Encoder Output
Drive Serial Port
Test Points
STP1
STP2
GND
To ICE-IRB Board
JP1
6-106 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 6.17 ICE-SAF Board Jumper Table
JP1 A Encoder Voltage. A = +5V, B = +15V

JP3 AC Pre-Torque Filter (AC / DC): AC setting is hard wired, adds filtering to the pre-
torque output. 6
JP5 B Tach input range. A = 20-80V, B = 81-190V
JP6 B Tach input range. A = 20-80V, B = 81-190V
Table 6.18 ICE-SAF Board Switches
Switch Description
SW1 Serial Port switch: Setting for the Drive Serial Port (AC Drive / DC Drive). DC Drive setting
hard wired.
SW2 Encoder / Tach:
Encoder = AC drive with velocity encoder connected to AC drive.
Tach = DC drive or AC drive with velocity encoder connected to iBox VELOCITY inputs.
SW4 DCC Filter (ON / OFF) Default = ON, adds filtering to Drive Current Command output.
.
Table 6.19 iBox Field Connections on ICE-SAF Board
Source Connection Signal Description

TS Tach positive signal. Analog. 0 - 30 VDC (15 VDC @ 1000 RPM). Please refer to
“Tachometer or Encoder Installation and Wiring” on page 2-11.
TACH
TC Tach common (negative in respect to TS when car moving down)

SHLD Tach shield connection (connect at iBox-end only)
DP1+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox (DP1 leads
DP2 when car moves up).
DP1- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox.
POSITION
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair DP1+/DP1-

DP2+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox (DP2 leads
DP1 when car moves down)
DP2- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox
A+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder. Please refer to
“Tachometer or Encoder Installation and Wiring” on page 2-11.
VELOCITY ENCODER
A- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.

B+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
B- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
VE- Encoder power return
VE+ +12 VDC power to encoder (relative to VE-)
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-107

Troubleshooting

TX+ iBox transmit, positive going serial communication stream from iBox to iLink.
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX+. TX+ and TX- comprise a
differential communications pair. Please refer to “Installing iLink” on page 3-3.
TX- iBox transmit, negative going serial communication stream from iBox to iLink.
CARTOP LINK
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX-.

SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair TX+/TX-
RX+ iBox receive, positive going serial communication stream from iLink to iBox.
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX+. RX+ and RX- comprise a
differential communications pair.
RX- iBox receive, negative going serial communication stream from iLink to iBox.
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX-.
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair RX+/RX-
DZ Door Zone Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ULM Up Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
DLM Down Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
INCT Cartop Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICTU Cartop Inspection Station UP Button input (includes SAF button). Activated =
110 VDC.
ICTD Cartop Inspection Station DN Button input (includes SAF button). Activated =
110 VDC.
INCP COP Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICPU COP Inspection Station UP Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.
CAR
ICPD COP Inspection Station DN Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.

INA Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input. 0 VDC active signal level. Off
= 110 VDC.
ESC Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input. 0 VDC active signal level stops car. Off
= 110 VDC.
DCL Door Close Limit input. Door fully closed, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not closed
signal level, 120 VAC.
DOL Door Open Limit input. Door fully open, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not open
signal level, 120 VAC.
DPM Door Position Monitor input. Door closed, input inactive, 120 VAC. Door not
closed, 0 VAC.
6-108 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


UNTD Up Normal Limit Direction switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed. 0
VDC = input off/switch open.
UNT5 Up Slowdown Limit switch #5 input. (see UNTD) 6
UNT4 Up Slowdown Limit switch #4 input. (see UNTD)
UETS Up Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. (see UNTD)
LIMITS

DNT1 Down Slowdown Limit switch #1 input. (see UNTD)
DETS Down Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. (see UNTD)
DNTD Down Normal Limit Direction switch input. (see UNTD)
ATU Hoistway Access Top Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable switch
(INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here (110 VDC) will cause
the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electrically between
the ATU input and the activating switch will open and stop the car after it has
moved the required distance up the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0
VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
ATD Hoistway Access Top Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
switch (INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here (110 VDC)
will cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electri-
cally between the ATD input and the activating switch will open and stop the car
after it has moved the required distance down the hoistway (if installed). Nor-
H/WAY
mal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
ABU Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
will cause the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electrically
between the ABU input and the activating switch will open and stop the car
after it has moved the required distance up the hoistway (if installed). Normal/
Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
ABD Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
will cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electri-
cally between the ABD input and the activating switch will open and stop the car
after it has moved the required distance down the hoistway (if installed). Nor-
mal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-109

Troubleshooting

GS Gate Switch input. The gate switch makes up when the elevator doors close.
When the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch
is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input. The gate switch may be wired in
series with other switches or locks on the elevator doors (as shown in the job
prints) so that if any of the switches do not make, the GS input will remain low
and the car will not run.
DLAT Door Lock Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided (see INA,
ATU, and ATD), the hoistway door lock associated with that landing is con-
nected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there will
be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this
input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in response to
the ATU or ATD input.
DLMS Door Lock Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see INA, ATU,
ATD, ABU, and ABD) is not provided, all hoistway door locks are wired in series
between the #3 bus and DLMS. When the switches are made, there will be 110
VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input
and the car will not run.
DLAB Door Lock Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is provided
(see INA, ABU, and ABD), the hoistway door lock associated with that landing is
LOCKS/CONTACTS
connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there
will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on
this input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in response
to the ABU or ABD input.
DCAT Door Contact Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided (see
INA, ATU, ATD, and DLAT), the hoistway door contact associated with that land-
ing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made,
there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be 0
VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in
response to the ATU or ATD input.
DCMS Door Contact Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see INA,
ATU, ATD, ABU, and ADB) is not provided, all hoistway door contacts are wired
in series between the #3 bus and DCMS. When the switches are made, there
will be 110 VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on
this input and the car will not run.
DCAB Door Contact Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is provided
(see INA, ABU, ABD, and DLAB), the hoistway door contact associated with that
landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is
made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will
be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then
only in response to the ABU or ABD input.
GOV Governor input. The governor is connected between the #3 bus and this input.
When the governor switch is made, there is 110 VDC on this input. It the gover-
nor switch trips/opens, there is 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run.
SP 1 Spare input 1. If used, connect as shown in the job prints.
6-110 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ICE-SF-x Serial Fixtures Board

The Serial Fixtures board is used in iControl elevator controllers to communicate with serial-
control audible and visual indicators, e.g., voice annunciators or character displays. The board
provides two identical outputs — one for hall displays and one for car displays. The “x” in the
part number refers to the fixture type:
• CE = CE Electronics
6
• EM = E-Motive
• HJ = Hong Jiang
Figure 6.15 ICE-SF Serial Fixtures Board
Left-to-Right
3.3V Test point
24V Test point
FSF Fuse, 4A, 250V, AGC
Computer On LED, ON
= Computer running
DIP switches
+5V Test point Reset button
Ground Test point
Board Query LED
4-Character Display
of transmitted data
Table 6.20 Serial Fixture Board Connections

1: Common 18VAC
+24: 24VDC 18VAC
CData: Data to car 1: Common
1: Common 1: Common
+24: 24VDC
HData: Data to hall
DIP Switches and Display The DIP switches and 4-character display are used for fac-
tory testing and diagnostics. For normal operation, all of the DIP switches are set to OFF
(down). The 4-character display shows direction and ascii floor number.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-111

Troubleshooting
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board

The SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board is used on iControl AC and DC Sim-
plex and Swing car controllers. The isolation board is placed between the SC-HCDA Serial Hall
Call Driver (usually mounted inside the iPower Box) and the Serial Hall Call Input on the right
side of the iBox. Revision 6.0 and later of the ICE-IMP board incorporates the isolation circuitry
thereby eliminating the need for the SC-HCDA-ISO. Please refer to “Serial Hall Call” on page 5-
17 for additional information.
Figure 6.16 SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board
6-112 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board

In a typical installation, an SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node board is mounted in each hall call
fixture enclosure. Please refer to “Hall Call Installation” on page 5-19. The board provides two
outputs to power the hall call lamps or LEDs, two inputs for the hall call buttons, and jumpers
to set the floor ID and hall call “type”.
6
Figure 6.17 SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board
JP5 Future use

JP3 Floor Address X10 JP2 Floor Address X1
JP4 unused JP1 Call Type
Hall Call Bus

Power / signal
Up / Down
buttons
Up / Down
indicators
For more information on setting the node board addresses, See “Setting Node Board Addresses”
on page 5-20..
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-113

Troubleshooting
SC-ION: Serial Control I/O Board

One or more SC-ION boards may be used in an iCentral group. The SC-ION board provides a
communications interface between discrete signal or relay-oriented field equipment and the
serial communications bus used for serial hall call and other serial messaging. Inputs and out-
puts on the SC-ION board are assigned unique serial addresses at the factory according to cus-
tomer requirements. Using iView, customers can view the function assigned to each address
and may even assign a different (MCE-supported) function if their needs change. Each SC-ION
board provides 16 user-configurable inputs and 16 user-configurable outputs.
I/O Connections
Connect inputs and outputs as shown in your job prints. SC-ION board inputs are always
117VAC. Outputs may be configured (in specific groups) to provide either a path to ground or
current to drive indicator lamps/LEDs.
Output State Selection The outputs are divided into three groups. Each group shares
a common. The common may be wired to provide a current source or a path to ground. The
groups are:
• Relays 1 — 4
• Relays 5 — 8
• Relays 9 — 16
before shipment. You need only connect the inputs and outputs as shown on the job prints.
Board Addresses Each of the 16 inputs and 16 outputs have an address on the system
bus. The addresses are assigned as indicated by the job survey before the system is shipped. The
board may be configured using a serial cable connected from the iView computer to the board.
The configuration screen is available through iView/System/System Configuration/System I/O
- SC-ION board configuration.
Table 6.21 SC-ION Board Inputs and Outputs

In 1-16:117VAC when active 1: Common
Out 1-16: Determined by common SHCS: Serial signal, +/-15V bit
connection stream
SHCC: Serial signal, common
1: Common
SHCS: Serial signal, +/- 15V bit
stream
SHCC: Serial signal, common
COM 9-16: Connect to select

active output for outputs 9-16.
COM 5-8: Connect to select active

output for outputs 5-8.
COM 1-4: Connect to select active

output for outputs 1-4.
6-114 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Figure 6.18 SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board
COMP ON:
On = Computer on
Off = Computer resetting
RST_OUT: Low when computer is in reset mode

Inputs 6
Board programming port:
Outputs Factory use only.
DIP switch and LEDs used Board

in factory diagnostics and Reset
programming. No field
application.
High/Low (Current Source/
Testpoints, Current Sink) Output Selec-
Ground tion (J4). For example, con-
+24V necting the COM 9 - 16
+3.3V terminal to the MCE #1
+5.0V (common) bus would mean
that when one of outputs 9
through 16 was active the
signal connected to it would
be taken to ground (sink/
active low).
LED lights when corresponding
input or output is active.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-115

Troubleshooting
System 12 SCR Drive

This section provides a quick reference to the indicators, test points and jumper settings found
on the SCR-LGA Drive Logic board and explains how to replace various components in the Sys-
tem 12 SCR Drive, including:
• Replacing Fuses
• Replacing Contactors
• Replacing SCRs and Diodes
• Replacing PC Boards
SCR-LGA - SCR Drive Logic Board Quick Reference

This quick reference provides descriptions of the following:
• Indicators on the SCR-LGD and SCR-LGA boards
• SCR-LGA Test Points
• SCR-LGA Jumper Settings
Refer to the SCR-LGA Board Layout to locate the jumpers and test points.
Table 6.22 Indicators on the SCR-LGD and SCR-LGA Boards
Indicator Description
Up Direction Up direction is selected.
Down Direction Down direction is selected.
Drive Ready There are no faults and the drive is ready to run.
Drive ON The drive is enabled and is producing torque output.
The drive has reached either the current or voltage limit set by the drive header and
Current Limit software parameters Armature current limit or Armature voltage limit (Configuration
> Safety tab).
Low Line - WYE The voltage at the Wye connection of the drive isolation transformer secondary is
Secondary below 30% of the rated value.
Low Line - Delta Sec- The voltage at the Delta connection of the drive isolation transformer secondary is
ondary below 30% of the rated value.
WYE P.R. The phase relationship of the Wye connection (Y1, Y2, Y3) is incorrect.
Delta P.R. The phase relationship of the Delta connection (X1, X2, X3) is incorrect.
300 P.R. The phase relationship between the Wye and Delta connections is incorrect.
Contactor or High Cur- The main contactor is not picked, or one or more of the high current fuses is open
rent Fuse Failure when the drive is enabled.
(SCR-LGA board) The PLL circuit has a problem of synchronization with the Delta
PLL No Lock connection from the AC line. This indicator will also turn on while the controller is
powering up and when the SCR-LGA board is being reset.
6-116 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC System 12 SCR Drive
Table 6.23 SCR-LGA Board Test Points
Test Point Description

FA Firing Angle: ‘+’ = not firing, ‘-’ = firing (-6VDC = maximum output)
IZO Integrator Reset Status: Used to adjust the zero offset for the Current Loop Integrator or the
Voltage Loop Integrator.
6
TP1 Armature Differential: Hoist motor armature voltage = TPI volts x 100.
TP2 Armature Voltage (scaled): 10VDC = 100% of Drive armature voltage rating. Actual armature
voltage = Drive voltage rating x voltage at TP2 I 10 volts.
TP3 Armature Current (scaled): Measured in volts, 1.8 volts = 100% of Drive armature current
rating. Actual armature current = Drive current rating x voltage at TP3 I 1.8 volts.
TP3F Pure DC Armature Current: 1.8 volts = 100% of Drive current rating.
TP4 Line Frequency: Sine wave with frequency = line frequency (50 Hz or greater).
TP5 Direction of Current Flow: When drive is enabled, +15VDC = current flow from A2 to A1 and
0 VDC = current flow from A1 to A2. When drive is disabled, test point indicates previous
direction of armature current flow.
TP6 Current Loop integrator Output: 0.0 VDC when drive is disabled. Voltage at TP6 should not
drift when the Pattern scaling parameter (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab) = 0 and
the drive is enabled.
TP17 Burst Enable: 720 Hz square wave with on-time of 300 microseconds A10%.
TP18 Total Current Command: measured in volts.
TP19 Fault Bus: 15 VDC = normal, 0 VDC = fault condition in the SCR drive.
TP20 Drive reset: 0.0 VDC = normal (Ready is ON), -15 VDC = drive is being reset.
Table 6.24 SCR-LGA Board Jumper Settings for use with iControl

JP1 N/C (Header U81) Function not used.
JP2 N/C (Header U81) Function not used.
JP3 B (Header U81) B = Current Loop selected.
JP4 A (Header U81) Permanently soldered jumpers
JP5 B If JP2 is not selected, JP5 can be set to either A or B.
JP6 ON On = Continuous/Discontinuous Detection circuit selected.
JP7 A A = Low gain for current loop. B = High gain for current loop.
JP8 ON ON = Auto-tune for Current Loop Offset selected.
JP9 ON Must be set the same as JP8.
JP10 ON ON = Auto-tune for Current Sensor Offset selected.
A = Current balancing selected for more current in WYE.
JP11 A
B = Current balancing selected for more current in DELTA.
JP12 N/C N/C = Normal operation. Always use N/C setting for iControl.
A = Current balancing selected for more current in WYE.
JP13 A
B = Current balancing selected for more current in DELTA.
JP14 N/C N/C = 60Hz AC. ON = 50Hz AC.
JP15 A A = iControl setting.
JP16 A A = iControl setting.
JP17 A A = iControl setting. Loss of power at the Emergency Power Input causes a signal to
be sent to the drive which causes the drive to modify the PLL feedback gain so that
the PLL circuit can tolerate frequency shift for faster response.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-117

Troubleshooting
Figure 6.19 SCR-LGA Board Layout
6-118 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Replacing Fuses
The 12-pulse drive has a total of 9 fuses. Of the 9, 6 are semiconductor fuses (FL1 - FL6, one on
each input line terminal for a 6 phase transformer). These semiconductor fuses are located
above the contactors, under the drive cover. The 12-Pulse Drive also has 2 fuses (FD1, FD2) pro-
tecting the 120VAC line. FD1 and FD2 are located on the left side of the controller in panel
mounted fuse holders. Fuse FD3 protects the commutation circuit. FD3 is located near the top 6
of the drive under the cover.
Caution
The fuse ratings for the 12-Pulse Drive have been calculated to provide the best protection.
DO NOT replace fuses with a higher rated fuse than the one specified in this manual.
NEVER bypass a fuse with a direct short.
Fuse replacement instructions include:

• Semiconductor Fuses
• AC Fuses
• Commutation Fuse
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-119

Troubleshooting
Semiconductor Fuses Replace semiconductor fuses as described here.
Figure 6.20 Replacing the Semiconductor Fuses
The semiconductor fuses (FL1 - FL6) are rated at 200 Amps, 500 Volts. Before removing or
replacing a fuse, ensure that all power is OFF. The cover of the 12–Pulse SCR Drive must be
removed to access the semiconductor fuses.
Table 6.25 Parts List for Semiconductor Fuses
ITEM (DESCRIPTION) MCE PART # UNIT

Semiconductor Fuse (fuse 500VAC 250 Amp) 17-02-0032 Each
1. Remove the two screws that hold the fuse in place (see the illustration). When removing
screws, make sure that no loose parts (bolts, screws, or washers) fall into the drive.
2. Install the replacement semiconductor fuse. Replace the screws.
3. On the SCR side of the fuse, torque the screw to 22-30 inch pounds. On the Contactor
side of the fuse, torque the screw to 140-150 inch pounds. Ensure that no loose parts are
left in the drive enclosure.
6-120 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

120VAC Fuses (FD1, FD2) Replace AC line fuses as described here.
Figure 6.21 120VAC Fuses (FD1, FD2)
FD1 protects the power supply and the trigger transformer. FD2 protects the two fans. Both
fuses are 1 Amp, 250VAC Slow Blow. Do not use a fuse with a different rating. The fuses are
located on the left side of the drive enclosure.
1. Press in and turn the cap counter-clockwise to remove the fuse. Replace if necessary.
Continual failure of a fuse may indicate an underlying problem.
Table 6.26 120VAC Fuse Replacement Parts

FD1 & FD2 Fuse (fuse 250VAC 1 Amp) MDQ type 17-02-0100 Each
Fuse Holder (Fuse Holder Panel Mount) 17-03-0005 Each
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-121

Troubleshooting
Commutation Fuse (FD3) Commutation fuse replacement is described here.
Figure 6.22 Commutation Fuse (FD3)
Fuse (FD3) protects the commutation circuit. The cover of the drive must be removed. FD3 is
located on the top of the drive above the swing tray. The fuse is a KLKD type rated at 30 Amps
DC at 600VAC. Do not use a fuse that has a different rating.
1. Remove the fuse using a fuse puller. Replace if necessary. If a fuse continues to fail,
there may be an underlying problem.
Table 6.27 Replacement Parts for Commutation Fuse

FD3 Fuse (fuse 600VAC 30 Amp) KLKD type 17-02-0095 Each
Fuse Block (Fuse block 600V 30 Amp) 17-03-0013 Each
Screw (8-32 x 3/8 KEP Screw) 19-01-0012 Each
6-122 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Replacing Contactors
The 12-Pulse Drive has two main contactors located at the bottom of the enclosure. The left con-
tactor is used to terminate Delta phases (X1, X2, X3) from the 6 phase transformer. The right
contactor is used to terminate Wye phases (Y1, Y2, Y3).
Replacing Auxiliary Contactors There are two auxiliary contactors on each main 6
contactor. The auxiliary contacts open or close 120VAC lines when the main contactor is picked.
The auxiliary contactors are attached to the right and left sides of the contactor. Mark wires for
identification before removing them. It is VERY IMPORTANT that the wires are reconnected
to the correct terminals.
Danger
Before working on the 12-Pulse Drive, ensure that all power going to the drive is OFF. Be
sure that power to the Drive Isolation Transformer is OFF at the main disconnect.
1. Mark all wires for identification before disconnecting.

Figure 6.23 Auxiliary Contactor Detail
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-123

Troubleshooting
2. Loosen the two screws on the right and left side of the auxiliary contactor and remove it
by pulling out and away from the main contactor.
3. Install the new auxiliary contactor. Make sure that the auxiliary contactor pin is inserted
into the body of the main contactor.
4. Replace the mounting screws (torque to 4 IN LBS.).
5. Reconnect the wires. Note: Load the outer-most terminals first.
Table 6.28 Replacement Parts for Contactors

Contactor (Contactor for SCR Drive) 35-12-0001 Kit
Terminal Lug Kit (Lug Kit for Contactor set) 35-14-0001 Kit (3 sets)
Auxiliary Contactor 35-14-0002 EA
Contactor Coil 35-14-0003 EA
Contacts 35-15-0001 KT
Replacing a Contactor Coil

To replace the coil on a contactor, the contactor must first be removed.
1. Remove the coil by pressing up on the red tab and pulling out.
2. Insert the new coil into the slot on the contactor and lock it in place.
Replacing Contactor Internal Contacts 1.

1. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the top contacts by lifting the metal bracket up and then removing the contact.
3. Replace the contacts:
• Use a small screwdriver to lift the metal bracket up.
• While lifting, insert the contact at an angle, then lay it flat and lower the metal bracket.
4. Remove the bottom contacts using a 3mm Allen wrench.
5. Install a new bottom contact by inserting it in the contactor and replacing the mounting
screw.
6. Replace the cover. The mounting screws should be torqued to 30-35 inch pounds.
6-124 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Replacing the Contactors Refer to the following illustration.

1. Remove all semiconductor fuses attached to the contactor being replaced.
2. Mark and disconnect all necessary wires.
3. Loosen the four contactor mounting bolts. Remove the contactor.
4. Replace the contactor. Torque the bolts to 110 - 120 inch pounds. Reconnect wires. 6
Figure 6.24 Drive Contactors
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-125

Troubleshooting
Replacing SCRs and Diodes

SCR devices are located on and near the drive heatsinks. There are 6 SCR devices (12 Pulse
Bridge) on the heatsink located in the middle of the drive. Three SCR devices (Direction Bridge
and Dynamic Braking) are on the top-most heatsink in the drive. Just below the top-most heat-
sink is a combination SCR/Diode device and a dual Diode device.
Replacing the 12 Pulse Bridge SCRs (SCR1 - SCR6) Be sure to mark all
wires for identification before removing them. They must be correctly replaced.
Table 6.29 Replacement Parts for SCRs and Diode Devices
SCR (162 Amp 1600V SCR Pack) 33-03-0011 Each
Heatsink Gasket (Heatsink Gasket, SCR 162 Amp) 41-06-0021 Each
Standoff (M6 x 16MM Standoff) 41-04-0036 Each
Split Washer (1/4” Split Washer) 19-04-0013 Each
Mach. Screw (1/4-20 x 3/4” Mach. Screw) 19-01-0065 Each
Thermal Compound Spray Non-Silicone 13-01-0020 A/R
Figure 6.25 12 Pulse Bridge (SCR1 - SCR6)
6-126 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

1. Remove the semiconductor fuse attached to the SCR device being replaced.
2. Remove bus bars G and H.
3. Loosen and remove the screws in terminals 2 and 3 on SCR1 - SCR6. (The terminal
number is on top near the left side of the SCR pack.)
4. Remove bus bars A and B and the connecting wires from the SCR-SN board. 6
5. Remove the mounting screws and the leads that go to the Firing board (SCR-DS)
6. Remove the heatsink gasket.
7. Clean the surface of the heatsink where the SCR device is to be placed. There cannot be
any foreign matter between the SCR and the heatsink.
8. Install the SCR device, heatsink gasket, and mounting screws. Torque the mounting
screws to 40-48 inch pounds.
9. Install the standoff (M6 x 16MM, 41-04-0036) and the split washer (1/4”, 19-04-0013).
Torque the standoff to 22-30 inch pounds. Note: Over-torquing will damage the stand-
off.
10. Reinstall bus bars A and B and the connecting wires.
11. Torque the screws to 40-48 inch pounds. Ensure that the shaft of the ring lug stays over
the bus bar it is attached to. The ring lug should not touch the other bus bar. To main-
tain clearance, the ring lug cannot pass the edge of the bus bar.
12. Reinstall semiconductor fuses and bus bars G and H.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-127

Troubleshooting
Replacing Direction Bridge (SCR7, SCR8) and Dynamic Braking (SCR9)

Ensure that all power is OFF at the main disconnect.
Figure 6.26 SCR7, SCR8, SCR9
1. Remove the bolts on terminals 1, 2, and 3 of the SCR being replaced. Place the bus bars
that connect to the SCR so that they will not obstruct removal and replacement.
2. Remove the SCR.
3. Clean the area where the SCR will be placed. Spray a thin layer (0.001 approximately) of
Thermal compound to the component surface contact area.
4. Install the SCR. Torque the mounting screws to 22–30 inch pounds.
5. Reconnect all wires and bus bars to the correct terminals. Torque bolts 1, 2, and 3 on the
SCR to 106–132 inch pounds.
Table 6.30 Replacement Parts for Direction Bridge and Dynamic Braking

SCR (330 Amp 1200V SCR Pack) 33-03-0021 Each
Thermal Compound Spray - Non Silicone 13-01-0020 A/R
Mach. Screw (10-32 x 3/4” Mach. Screw) 19-01-0022 Each
Split Lock Washer (#10) 19-04-0012 Each
Flat washer (#10) 19-04-0005 Each
6-128 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Commutation SCR/Diode and Dual Diode Device To gain access to the Com-
mutation SCR/Diode and Dual Diode Device, the SCR–DS board must be partially removed.
We suggest you leave the connections on the bottom of the board connected and remove only
the mounting screws.
Figure 6.27 Replacing the Commutation SCR/Diode and Dual Diode 6
1. The SCR-DS board is directly over the Commutation SCR. This means that the SCR-DS
board must be moved into a position that will not interfere with the removal or installa-
tion of the commutation SCR. Refer to “Replacing the SCR-DS board.”
2. Label all the wires connected to the device being removed before disconnecting them.
3. Note the orientation of the device, then remove it and clean the surface of the SCR
mounting plate.
4. Install the new device. Torque the mounting screws to 22-30 inch pounds.
5. Reconnect all wires. Torque the terminal screws to 22-30 inch pounds.
6. Reinstall the SCR-DS board.
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-129

Troubleshooting
Table 6.31 Replacement Parts for Commutation SCR/Diode and Dual Diode Device

Thyristor Diode (95 Amp 1400V) 33-03-0018 Each
Thermstrate 41-06-0030 Each
SCR Mounting Plate 40-02-0084 Each
Dual Diode Pack (105 Amp 1500V Diode/Diode) 33-03-0014 Each
Star Lock Washer (#10 Star Lock Washer) 19-04-0018 Each
Replacing PC Boards
There are a total of 6 boards (SCR-LGD, SCR-LGA, SCR-PS, SCR-SN, SCR-DS and SCR-CC) in
the System 12 SCR Drive. While replacing boards, other parts may require removal. Ensure that
all power is OFF at the main disconnect before removing boards.
Replacing the SCR-LGD Logic Display Board The SCR-LGD board displays the
status of the System 12 Drive.
Figure 6.28 Replacing the SCR-LGD Board
6-130 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

1. Remove the two mounting screws from the SCR-LGD board.

2. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J10 on the SCR-LGA board and remove the SCR-LGD
board.
3. Install the new SCR-LGD board and torque the mounting screws to 15-20 inch pounds.
4. Connect the SCR-LGD board ribbon cable to J10 on the SCR-LGA board. 6
Table 6.32 Replacement Parts for SCR-LGD

SCR-LGD (SCR Drive Display Board) SCR-LGD Each
Standoff (8-32 x 3/8” F/F Standoff) 41-04-0037 Each
Kep Screw (8-32 x 3/8 Kep Screw) 19-01-0012 Each
Replacing the SCR-LGA SCR Drive Logic Board When replacing the SCR-LGA
board, the SCR-LGD board must be transferred from the old SCR-LGA board to the new board.
This is best done when both boards are detached from the drive. The transfer includes installing
the standoffs needed to hold the SCR-LGD. The standoffs are loaded from the back of the SCR-
LGA board.
Figure 6.29 Replacing the SCR-LGA Board
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-131

Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect all connections to the board (J1-J10 and the ribbon cable ground wire
attached to the bottom right corner mounting screw).
2. Remove the mounting screws and the board. Ensure that no loose parts fall into the
drive.
3. Install the new board and torque the mounting screws to 15-20 inch pounds. Please
refer to “SCR-LGA Board Jumper Settings for use with iControl” on page 6-117 and See
“SCR-LGA Board Layout” on page 6-118..
4. Reinstall the board connectors (J1-J10 and the ground wire). Ensure that the bottom
right corner mounting screw is torqued to 15-20 inch pounds.
Table 6.33 Replacement Parts for SCR-LGA

SCR-LGA (SCR Drive Logic Board) SCR-LGA Each
Replacing the SCR-PS Board Only The SCR-PS board supplies DC power to the
SCR-LGA board. Ensure that the new SCR-PS board is generating the correct DC voltage before
connecting it to the SCR-LGA board. Please refer to “Replacing the SCR-LGA SCR Drive Logic
Board” on page 6-131 for an illustration.
1. Disconnect the ribbon cable from SCR-LGA board J9 and remove the 6 position IDC
from J1 on the SCR-PS board.
2. Remove the mounting screws and remove the board.
3. Install the board and torque the screws to 15-20 inch pounds.
4. Connect the ribbon cable from the SCR-PS board to J9 on the SCR-LGA board. Recon-
nect the 6 position IDC to J1 on the SCR-PS board.
5. Test the SCR-PS board for the correct voltage:
• Disconnect the ribbon cable from J9 on the SCR-LGA board.
• Turn ON power to the enclosure at the main disconnect. Ensure that the controller is
on Inspection.
• Using a DC voltmeter, verify +5V, -5V, +15V, and -15V on the test points on the SCR-
PS board. If the voltages are not within ±1% of the correct value, adjust the following
on the SCR-PS board: R16 for +5V, R2 for -5V, R13 for +15V, or R5 for -15V.
• Turn power OFF at the main disconnect. Reconnect the ribbon cable to J9 on the SCR-
LGA board and turn power ON at the main disconnect.
Table 6.34 Replacement Parts for SCR-PS

SCR-PS (SCR Drive Power Supply Board) SCR-PS Each
6-132 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Replacing the SCR-SN Board Removing the SCR-SN board requires that a few wires
be disconnected. Label the wires to ensure they can be reconnected correctly. The right angle
copper brackets and the insulator on the SCR-SN board must be transferred to the new board.
This is best done when both boards are detached from the drive. The swing tray that holds the
SCR-LGA and the SCR-PS board must be removed to make it simpler to remove the SCR-SN
board. Do not disconnect the boards from the tray; remove the tray with the board on it. 6
Figure 6.30 Replacing the SCR-SN Board
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-133

Troubleshooting
1. Remove the semiconductor fuses and the ribbon cable from J2 on the SCR-LGA board.
2. Disconnect the wires attached to terminals 2 and 3 on SCR1 through 6 in the drive.
3. Remove the three mounting screws on top of the SCR-SN board and remove the board.
Transfer the angle brackets (35-30-0009) to the new board. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Install the new SCR-SN board and install the mounting screws (19-01-0012) and flat
washer (19-04-0004). Torque the mounting screws to 15-20 inch pounds.
5. Connect the wires as indicated below. Torque the M6 machine screws to 40-48 inch
pounds. Ensure that the ring lug does not cross the outer limits of the bus bar. To ensure
proper clearance, the space between bus bars A and B must be maintained.
• Note: The terminal number is on the top left side of the SCR pack near the terminal.
• Wire from E1 to SCR1 terminal 2
6. Install the semiconductor fuses (see Replacing the Semiconductor Fuses) and tighten
the screws that attach the copper bracket to the SCR-SN board.
7. Reinstall the swing tray that holds the SCR-LGA and SCR-PS board.
Table 6.35 Replacement Parts for SCR-SN
SCR-SN (SCR Drive Snubber Board) SCR-SN Each
Insulator (Insulator for the SCR-SN board) 41-06-0017 Each
M6 Mach. Screw (M6 x 16MM Mach. Screw) 35-74-A5FT Set (30 EA.)
Kep Screw (8-32 x 3/8” Kep Screw) 19-01-0012 Each
Flat Washer (#8 Flat Washer) 19-04-0004 Each
Kep Nut (8-32 Kep Nut) 19-02-0005 Each
Angle Bracket (Copper Angle Bracket Bus Bar) 35-30-0009 Each
6-134 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Replacing the SCR-DS Board The SCR-DS board contains the SCR firing leads that
attach to the SCR devices. Handle these wires with care. In some cases, the SCR-DS board does
not require complete removal. Partial removal consists of removing all of the items stated below
except the cathode and gate connectors on the bottom of the SCR-DS board, the 6 phase wires,
and the A2 wire.
6
Figure 6.31 Replacing the SCR-DS Board
Table 6.36 Replacement Parts for SCR-DS

SCR-DS (SCR Drive Driver/Snubber Board) SCR-DS Each
Kep Screw (8-32 x 3/8” Kep Screw) 19-01-0012 Each
Current Sensor (70 Amp board mounted) 38-01-0502 Each
Manual # 42-02-7223 B8 6-135

Troubleshooting
Replacing the SCR-CC H/L Board To gain access to the SCR-CC-H/L board, the
SCR-DS board must be removed. Label the wires you disconnect so they can be reconnected
correctly. The three studs (X1, A, AX) on the board should be torqued with care.
Figure 6.32 Replacing the SCR-CC H/L Board
1. Label and disconnect the wires on the studs (X1, A, AK) and J1 of the SCR-CC-H/L
board.
2. Remove the mounting screws and the board.
3. Install the new SCR-CC board and torque the mounting screws to 15-20 inch pounds.
4. Install all the wires that connect to J1.
5. Reconnect the wires to the studs (X1, A, AK). Torque the nuts to 22-30 inch pounds.
6. Reinstall the SCR-DS board.
Table 6.37 Replacement Parts for SCR-CC

SCR-CC-L (commutation Board Low Voltage) SCR-CC-L Each
SCR-CC-H (Commutation Board High Voltage) SCR-CC-H Each
6-136 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iBox Front Panel Controls
About the iBox Front Panel

System status indicator LEDs and function control switches are on the iBox front panel. The
front panel also provides:
• LCD display and entry keypad (see page 7-2).
• Access to iBox Ethernet Port addresses (see page 7-8).
• System-level diagnostic LED display (see page 7-10).
• System function control switches (see page 7-11).
Front panel controls allow you to:

• Directly view and adjust iBox configurable parameters (see page 7-2).
• Quickly ascertain system status (see page 7-10).
• Access Controller mode and other function switches (see page 7-11).
42-02-7223 B8 7-1
LCD Display and Keypad

The iBox LCD display and keypad allow you to:
• View and change parameter settings
• View and register calls
• View the status of inputs, outputs, and flags
• View error messages and the system event log
Typically, when you need to view or change parameters in an iControl, you connect to the iBox
through the PC or LAN ethernet port and use the iView graphical user interface running on a
Windows OS PC to easily access, view, or edit any desired parameter. However, during initial
system setup when setting the parameters that allow PC access to your system, or when a PC is
not available, some parameters can be directly accessed and edited through the keypad and
LCD display located on the front panel of every iBox.
Figure 7.1 iBox Data Entry Keypad and LCD Display
LCD Display
@040 001 F R L01

Passenger COMPUTER
0fpm RESET
6:15:09AM
11/30/2003
Car FAULT Softkeys
RESET
Directional Arrows /
1 2 3 4 Value Incrementers
Select Parameter /
Enter Value
ENTER
7-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC LCD Display and Keypad
Keypad Controls
Keypad controls include:
• Display Contrast — adjusts the LCD display
• Computer Reset — resets the iBox computers
• Fault Reset — initializes the fault list 7
• Softkeys — selects the associated topic across the bottom of the LCD display
• Up Arrow — moves the selection bar up or increases a parameter value
• Down Arrow — moves the selection bar down or decreases a parameter value
• Left Arrow — moves the cursor left (digit selection)
• Right Arrow — moves the cursor right (digit selection)
• ENTER — confirms a selection or enters a parameter value
LCD Display
The LCD display allows you to view iBox parameters. The @003 s 015 FG RO L03
top line of each display “screen” provides a status “snap- Passenger
shot” for the car associated with the controller. In our
example: Ofpm
2:26:22AM
• @ (door zone) —
11/30/2003
• @: in door zone
• —: below door zone Car Mgmt
• +: above door zone
• 003 — current floor
• s or t (direction arrows)
• 015 — next floor
• F (front doors) —
• G Open
• OClosed
• Opening/Closing
• Invalid door position
• R (rear doors) —
• G Open
• O Closed
• Opening/Closing
• Invalid door position
• S or L (Simplex or Local)
• 03 (Car ID)
The second line of the display shows the mode of operation (Passenger in the example) dis-
played in rotation with any active status or error messages.If a soft key is pressed (Car or Mgmt)
the remaining display lines change to display appropriate information. The labels in the bottom
line change to indicate the function of their associated soft key.
42-02-7223 B8 7-3
Parameter Entry
To edit or view a parameter, you select a broad topic by pressing the Enter soft key, then select
and view or edit a parameter. For example, to change or edit a Car-associated parameter.
1. Press the soft key (1) beneath the Car label. The @003 s 015 FG RO L03
LCD will change as shown to the right. Passenger
2. Use the arrow keys to scroll to a topic. Network Setup
3. With the topic selected (Network Setup in our View Event Log
View/Register Calls
example), press ENTER.
Set Time/Date
Fiew Factory Data
Note that the soft key labels have changed:
Home Back PgUp PgDn
• Home — Returns you to the home screen.
• Back — Takes you back one screen.
• PgUp — When there are more topics than can be listed on a single screen, PgUp moves you
up the list a full “screen” at a time.
• PgDn — When there are more topics than can be listed on a single screen, PgDn moves you
down the list a full “screen” at a time.
4. Use the arrow keys to scroll to a topic.
5. With the topic selected, press ENTER.
When you press ENTER, the display updates.

6. Use the arrow keys to scroll to a topic.
7. With the topic selected, press ENTER.
When you press ENTER, the display updates. The cursor/arrow indicates a parameter can be
edited.
8. Use the left/right arrow keys to position the arrow below the number to be changed.
9. Use the up/down arrow keys to increment or decrement the value.
10. Repeat positioning and incrementing/decrementing as necessary. Press ENTER to enter
the new value.
11. The soft key labels will indicate Save and Cancel. Press Save to save your changes after a
yes or no acknowledgement.
or,
12. Press Cancel to leave the screen without saving your changes (after a yes or no acknowl-
edgement).
7-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Editing a Controller Parameter

To edit a parameter:
1. Navigate to the desired screen.
2. Edit the parameter.
3. Save the edited parameter. 7
The following illustration shows which parameter groups are accessible on the Car and Mgmt
menu LCD screens. Use the illustration and Table 6.1 to help you locate a parameter to be
adjusted.
Figure 7.2 Onboard Diagnostics Car Menu Tree
Car Mgmt
Network Setup End Write Privilege

FTP User Name Write Privlge Timeout
FTP User Password Clone Controller Data
IP Name 1
IP Address 1
IP Gateway 1
IP Subnet Mask 1 View Event Log
IP Name 2 View/Register Calls
IP Address 2 Set Time & Date
IP Gateway 2 View Factory Data
IP Subnet Mask 2 MAC Addresses
IP Name 3 Manufacturing Information
IP Address 3 Version Info
IP Gateway 3 View / Clear Statistics
IP Subnet Mask 3 View Statistics
Clear Statistics
42-02-7223 B8 7-5
Table 7.1 Car Menu Parameters
Car Menu Parameters

Network Setup
There are three Ethernet ports on the iBox.
#1 is the Local Area Network connection used to connect Group and Elevator controllers to your Local Area
Network.
#2 is the MCE equipment connection used to interconnect Group and Elevator controllers for equipment
control purposes.
#3 is the PC Direct connection used to connect a PC directly to a Controller.
Network setup parameters allow IP information to be set for each of the ports. Additionally, an FTP User
Name and Password must be set here without which the File Transfer Protocol server may not be accessed.
There are many websites that are helpful in learning about TCP/IP.
To set the FTP User Name:
Enter a User Name that must be employed to access the FTP server.
To set the FTP User Password:
Enter a password that must be employed to access the FTP server.
To set the IP Name 1:
Enter a name for the #1 port. This is the peripherals port used for local area network connection, typically
for networked PCs running iView.
To set the IP Address 1:
Enter an address for the #1 port. Please refer to “System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses” on page 7-8.
To set the IP Gateway 1:
Enter a gateway address for the #1 port. Please refer to “System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses” on
page 7-8.
To set the IP Subnet Mask 1:
Enter a subnet mask address for the #1 port. Please refer to “System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses” on
page 7-8.
Enter a name for the #2 port. This is the system port used to connect to the hub that supports MCE control-
lers, serial hall call, etc.
Enter an address for the #2 port. Please refer to “System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses” on page 7-8.
page 7-8.
page 7-8.
Enter a name for the #3 port. This is the PC port meant for direct connection to a PC running iView using a
standard Ethernet cable and NO HUB.
Address for the #3 port. Default at 192.168.193.1.
page 7-8.
page 7-8.
7-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 7.1 Car Menu Parameters
Car Menu Parameters

View Event Log
View Event log accesses the event database maintained by the controller. This database lists messages by
ID Number, ordered by time-of-occurrence. Additional data is also stored, e.g. Type, Date, Time, Acknowl-
edgement Status, and Event (name) for each event. A listing of iBox Event Log ID Numbers and a cross-ref- 7
erence to iControl Messages and descriptions can be found in Section 6 of this User Guide. Please refer to
“Cross Reference: iBox Event Log ID Numbers to iControl Messages” on page 6-4 and see “iControl Mes-
sages” on page 6-14
To view the Event Log:
Press softkey (1) beneath the Car label, scroll down to View Event Log and press Enter. To view event
details, scroll to the desired event and press Enter. Scroll down to see all data, including event name.
View/Register Calls
The View/Register Calls dialog allows you to send transport commands to the controller.
To View/Register Calls:
Allows you to enter car and hall calls for Front or Rear Car Operating Panels.
Set Time/Date
This parameter sets the real time clock for the controller.
To set the Set Time/Date:
Enter the current time and date for use by the controller real time clock.
View Factory Data
View Factory Data accesses serial number, date, and MAC address information for the controller. This infor-
mation is very useful should you ever have to contact MCE about your equipment.
MAC Addresses:
A six-byte, unique, identifying code used by LANs to positively identify communicating equipment. This
parameter allows you to view the MAC address for each of the three Ethernet ports.
Manufacturing Info:
View the controller serial number, revision, and ICE-IMP information.
Version Info
Version Info provides version information for the software currently installed on your controller.
Version Info:
View the software version information for the controller and car top processors.
View / Clear Statistics
View/clear statistical data collected by controller. Statistical data includes odometer, power-up cycles, front
and rear door cycles, motion cycles, floor time, floor runs, inspection runs, auto runs, and auto relevels.
Table 7.2 Mgmt Menu Parameters
Mgmt Menu Parameters

End Write Privilege
Use to cancel write privilege which has been granted to an iView PC connected to the controller.
Write Privlge Timeout
Use to change the write privilege timeout timer setting. The default value is 15 minutes.
Clone Controller Data
When replacing an iBox (or ICE-SAF board), this option allows safety learned and inventoried parameters
to be saved to flash memory. That memory can then be physically transferred to the new iBox (or ICE-SAF
board), eliminating the need to enter or relearn those settings. Specific instructions for using this feature
are provided with the replacement iBox.
42-02-7223 B8 7-7
Setting iBox Ethernet Port Addresses

The table below lists the factory default addresses TCP/IP addresses. The iBox 3 = PC port (PC
direct) is set to 192.168.193.001 and should not be changed.

Group IP, Primary System/Serial Hall
& Backup Call Bus 1 - 4
System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

LAN A 192.168.191.201-202 1-20 192.168.191.001-020 192.168.192.101-200*
LAN B 192.168.191.203-204 1-20 192.168.191.021-040
LAN C 192.168.191.205-206 1-20 192.168.191.041-060
LAN D 192.168.191.207-208 1-20 192.168.191.061-080
LAN E 192.168.191.209-210 1-20 192.168.191.081-100
The default Subnet Mask for all ports is 255.255.255.000.

The default Gateway for the #1 (LAN or Peripheral Port) is 192.168.191.254.
The default Gateway for the #2 and #3 ports is 000.000.000.000.
You should not need to change the factory-set IP information. If you are having problems con-
necting to an iBox Ethernet port, refer to the following topic to verify and, if necessary, set IP
addresses.
Note
The Group ID setting in iView determines the iCue System IP address at which iCue will accept
messages. NO NOT set the Group ID to a setting other than 1 unless instructed to do so
by MCE. Group IDs other than 1 are reserved for future use and will cause group-to-car commu-
nication to fail. If you need advanced System addressing information, please contact MCE.
7-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Setting iBox Ethernet Port Addresses
IP Address Verification/Setting
You should not need to change the factory-set IP information. If you are having problems con-
necting to an iBox Ethernet port, verify that IP information is correct as described here. If you
find an incorrectly set port, these instructions will help you correct it. These instructions are for
Port 1 but the procedure is the same for all iBox ports.
1. Press the soft key (1) beneath the Car label. The
7
@003 s 015 FG RO L03
LCD will change as shown to the right. Passenger
2. With Network Setup selected, press ENTER. Network Setup
3. Scroll down to IP Address 1, press ENTER. View Event Log
View/Register Calls
4. Verify that the Address displayed is correct (see Set Time/Date
preceding table). For example, Car A of Group 1 View Factory Data
should be 192.168.191.001. Home Back PgUp PgDn
5. If you are using the default addresses, and the
address displayed is incorrect, set it according to the table using Left and Right arrow
keys to select a number and Up and Down arrow keys to change the value. Continue
until the address is correct, then press ENTER. Press SAVE to save your changes (if
any).
6. Scroll down to IP Gateway 1. The default for the #1 Port is 192.168.191.254. (The default
for the #2 and #3 Ports is 000.000.000.000) If necessary, change it as described above.
7. Scroll down to IP Subnet Mask 1. The default is 255.255.255.000. If necessary, change
as described above.
8. Continue as above to verify the IP information for the #2 and #3 Ports respectively.
Check the preceding table for factory default addresses.
42-02-7223 B8 7-9
System Status Display

iBox front panel LEDs and the LCD display both provide status information.
LED Status Display

The LEDs of the front panel display provide immediate controller status information:
• Computer: Lights green when the controller microprocessor is running properly.
• Safety A: Lights green when Safety System A is functioning properly.
• Safety B: Lights green when Safety System B is functioning properly.
• Car Top: Lights green when the Cartop microprocessor is running properly.
• Sys Comm: Lights green when controller is communicating with Group.
• Up: Lights amber when car is moving up.
• Drive On: Lights amber when drive has control of car. Drive On may be ON while UP and
DOWN are OFF indicating no movement but drive is holding zero speed.
• Down: Lights amber when car is moving down.
• Run: Lights green when car is making a run between floors. Remains off during re-leveling
operations.
• Relevel: Lights red when car is releveling.
• Safety OK: Lights green when safety path is made up.
• Doors Locked: Lights green when doors are locked.
• Inspection: Lights amber when car is on Cartop, In-Car, Machine Room, or Hoistway
Access Inspection.
• In Group: Lights green if car is able to respond to group hall call demand.
• Fault: Lights red if one or more system faults are active.
COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK
SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOORS LOCKED
SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION

CARTOP RUN IN GROUP
SYS COMM RELEVEL FAULT
Note
These displays are frequently used when the elevator controller is being configured. Please refer
to Sections 3 and 4 of this guide for use descriptions.
7-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC System Status Display
LCD Status Display

The LCD screen displays text messages advising of sys- @003 s 015 FG RO L03
tem status. The second line of the display shows the mode Passenger
of operation (Passenger in the example) displayed in
rotation with any active status messages. Please refer to Ofpm
“iControl Messages” on page 6-14 for description. 2:26:22AM 7
11/30/2003
Car Mgmt
System Control Switches

The front panel system control switches allow you direct access to system functions including:
• Inspection: Switch used to place the car on Machine Room Inspection (Insp) or Normal
operation (Norm).
• Up: Push switch used to run the car up when the system is on Machine Room Inspection
and the Enable button is simultaneously pressed and held.
• Enable: Push switch used to run the car up or down when the system is on Machine Room
Inspection and the Up or Down button is simultaneously pressed and held.
• Down: Push switch used to run the car down when the system is on Machine Room
Inspection and the Enable button is simultaneously pressed and held.
• Controller Stop: Switch used to immediately remove hoist motor and brake power (Stop)
or apply power to those systems (Run).
• Capture: Switch used to place Car on Capture operation (On). While this switch is On, the
car will not respond to hall call demand or Parking.
• Test: Switch used to place the car on Test Mode operation (On).
• Fault/Function Bypass: Switch to allow specific faults and safety functions (as determined
by Keypad/LCD settings) to be bypassed. Car must be in Test mode.
• Write Enable: (Factory only) Switch used to allow special data to be saved (On).
• Learn: Switch used to confirm intended Learn operation. The learn procedure must be
selected. For Hoistway Learn, the car must be on Inspection mode. For Terminal Switch
Learn, the car must be on Test mode.
• Car Door Bypass: Switch used to bypass the car door electric contacts (Bypass position).
When set to Bypass, the car will run only on Inspection mode. The ability to set this bypass
must be enabled at the factory and is only available if allowed by safety regulations in your
area. Check the iView Safety Configuration screen to see if the feature is enabled in your
installation.
42-02-7223 B8 7-11
• Hoistway Door Bypass: Switch used to bypass the hoistway door electric contacts (Bypass
position). When set to Bypass, the car will run only on Inspection mode. The ability to set
this bypass must be enabled at the factory and is only available if allowed by safety regula-
tions in your area. Check the iView Safety Configuration screen to see if the feature is
enabled in your installation.
INSP RUN ON
NORM STOP OFF

ON ON
OFF OFF
ENABLE TEST LEARN

ON ON
OFF OFF
CAR DOOR HOISTWAY

BYPASS BYPASS
OFF OFF
Note
These control switches are used when the elevator controller is being configured. Please refer to
Sections 3 and 4 of this guide for use descriptions.
Safety Bypass Jumper and Fuses

The iBox provides four fused outputs:
• 120v/60Hz AC: Fuses F2 and F2PI.
• 110v DC: Fuses F3 and F3HA.
• 120v/60Hz AC: Motor Drive. Fuse F2D.
• 120v/60Hz AC: Motor Contactor. Fuse F2MC.
When installed, the Safety Bypass jumper electrically connects the SB and 3 terminals on the
IRB Relay Board. Information about the Safety Bypass jumper is in Section 6 of this guide (see
“Safety String Bypass Jumper” on page 6-3).
Danger
The fuses and the bypass jumper expose dangerous high voltages that can cause bodily
harm or death. ONLY TRAINED, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL should have access to these
areas.
7-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Using iView
About iView
This section provides working instructions for the iView application. iView on-line Help pro-
vides detailed information about settings and is available anytime you are working in the iView
application. This section contains:
• How iView Works (see page 8-2)
• Setting up an iView PC (see page 8-3)
• LAN Connections (see page 8-12)
• Working Online (see page 8-16)
• Saving Parameters to a Configuration File (see page 8-21)
• Saving Default Parameters to a Configuration File (see page 8-22)
• Loading Parameters from a Configuration File (see page 8-22)
• Working Offline (see page 8-23)
• Accessing Online Help (see page 8-24)
• iView Windows and Tabs (see page 8-25)
• Resizing Windows & Docking/Undocking Windows (see page 8-34 & page 8-35).
• Updating Controller Firmware (see page 8-41)
42-02-7223 B8 8-1
Using iView
How iView Works

iView software runs on any PC using the Windows 2000 or later operating system. iView com-
municates with a controller through an Ethernet connection and loads operating parameters
stored on the controller into iView screens. The iView user can view virtually any controller
parameter and can edit/adjust any user-configurable parameter, then send changed parameters
to the controller.
Because iView communicates with elevator controllers through an Ethernet connection, a single
PC can be used to administer multiple elevators or even multiple groups of elevators (with each
group operating under the direction of a group dispatcher). Elevator adjusters who service mul-
tiple sites will find it convenient to connect directly to a controller, then easily upload proven
settings from a file on their hard drive to the controller. The diagram below illustrates just a few
of the ways Ethernet connectivity allows iView to communicate with elevator controllers.
iBox elevator controllers
Hub or Router
PC Ethernet through Local Area Network (LAN)
iBox elevator controllers
Hub or Router
PC
PC to local modem, through phone lines to site
modem, through Local Area Network (LAN).
PC
Directly to the iBox PC Ethernet port (3).
8-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Setting Up an iView PC
Setting Up an iView PC
Important If you purchased your iView PC from MCE, iView was installed at the factory.
In addition, all of the network assignments (connections) for your job have been created and
stored on the iView PC. Therefore, once the physical connections (cables) between each iCon-
troller’s iBox and the iCentral or Comm-Connect Ethernet Switches have been installed per the 8
job prints, you are set to go. You can power up the iView PC and launch the iView.NET applica-
tion. If this is the case you can skip this section and go to Working Online (see “Working
Online” on page 8-16).
The following information is provided in case you find it necessary to reinstall iView or if you
wish to install and setup iView on a laptop or other PC. Setting up an iView PC for the first time
is a three step process:
1. Installing the iView application software (see Installing iView below).

2. Setting the iView PC’s IP address (depends on the type of connection to be used). Please
refer to “Setting the iView PC’s IP Address” on page 8-4.
3. Creating Connections in iView. For a direct connection see “It is important that a free-
standing iView PC have only one IP address assigned (The iView/iCue PC in the iCentral
dispatcher has two network interface cards; each with its own IP address). Click the
Advanced button and verify that the PC is configured for only a single IP Address
(192.168.193.2 for a direct connection and an unused address like 192.168.191.110 - 200
for a LAN connection). Creating a Direct Connection in iView” on page 8-7. For LAN
connections see “Creating a New LAN Connection” on page 8-12.
Installing iView
Minimum requirements for the iView PC are:
• At least 1GB free hard drive space for installation
• Minimum 256MB RAM
• Windows 10 operating system
• CD-ROM drive
• 10/100 Ethernet capable
• Simple text or comparable text editing software
These instructions assume familiarity with personal computers. To install iView:
1. Insert the iView CD-ROM in the computer CD-ROM drive.
2. Launch the CD.
3. Double-click the ReadMeFirst (or other accompanying text file) to review the latest
iView instructions.
4. Double-click on the Setup.exe application.
5. Follow on-screen instructions to install iView.
After installation, the iView icon will appear on your desktop .
Double click the iView.NET icon to launch the iView application.
42-02-7223 B8 8-3
Using iView
Setting the iView PC’s IP Address

There are two ways to connect the iView PC to an iController’s iBox:
• Direct Connection: Connect the PC directly to the iBox using the iBox 3 = PC port. Unless
the LAN hub/switch has already been installed, you will find it easiest to connect a PC to
the iBox using the 3 = PC port (direct connection).
• LAN Connection: Connect the PC to the LAN hub/switch supporting one or more iCon-
trollers (iBox 1 = LAN port). The LAN hub/switch is part of the iCentral/Comm-connect
installation.
Figure 8.1 Ethernet Cable and iBox Ethernet Ports
iBox ethernet ports
1 = LAN 2 = System 3 = PC
Direct (no hub) connection to
PC only
Connection through LAN hub

or switch only. 2 port is for
MCE equipment (elevator and
group controllers). 1 port is for
Typical ethernet CAT-5 shielded cable.
Local Area Network connec-
RJ45 connectors at each end.
tion.
The IP address to which you set the iView PC depends on the type of connection you intend to
use:
• For a direct connection the iView PC’s IP address is typically set to 192.168.193.2
• For a LAN connection the main iView PC’s IP address is typically set to 192.168.191.101
(see About LANs below). Note that each PC connected to the LAN must have a unique IP
address.
About LANs: LAN stands for Local Area Network. A LAN is basically several computers
(or smart equipment with a computer inside — like the iBox or iCue) all connected at a common
point (the hub or switch) so they can communicate with each other. In order for a message from
one computer to reach the computer (or iCue/iBox) it wants to talk to, all the computers con-
nected to the LAN must have their own unique address. The address is called a TCP/IP number.
The table below lists iControl default IP addresses. Your job prints provide specific instructions
as to how all of your IP addresses are set.
Please refer to “System and LAN Ethernet” on page 9-15 for more detail. Also please see “Sys-
tem, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses” on page 8-5.
8-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Group IP, Primary System/Serial

& Backup Hall Call Bus 1 - 4
System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214 8

LAN A 192.168.191.201-202 1-20 192.168.191.001-020 192.168.191.101-200*
LAN B 192.168.191.203-204 1-20 192.168.191.021-040
LAN C 192.168.191.205-206 1-20 192.168.191.041-060
LAN D 192.168.191.207-208 1-20 192.168.191.061-080
LAN E 192.168.191.209-210 1-20 192.168.191.081-100
To set the iView PC’s IP Address:

1. Start the PC.
2. From the Windows Start menu, double click Control Panel.
3. Double click Network and Sharing Center to open the Network and Sharing Center dia-
log.
4. Click Change adapter settings to

open the Network Connections dialog.
5. Double-click the Local Area Connection icon to open the Local Area Connection Status
dialog.
42-02-7223 B8 8-5
Using iView

Area Connection Status dialog.

Protocol (TCP/IPv4).

Internet Protocol (TCP/IPv4)
Properties dialog
8-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

9. For a direct connection, set the IP Address to match the iBox EXCEPT FOR the last set
of numbers. The #3 iBox port is defaulted to 192.168.193.1. Typically, you can set your
PC’s IP address to 192.168.193.2
10. For a LAN connection, the IP addresses available are 192.168.191.101 - 200. The main
iView PC’s IP address is typically set to 192.168.191.101. Each PC connected to the net-
work most have a unique address. 8
to 255.255.255.0.
any instructions to
made.
Sample screens are Windows

10 operating system.
The default Subnet Mask for all ports is 255.255.255.000.

The default Gateway for the #1 (LAN or Peripheral Port) is 192.168.191.254.
The default Gateway for the #2 and #3 ports is 000.000.000.000.
Note
It is important that a free-standing iView PC have only one IP address assigned (The iView/iCue
PC in the iCentral dispatcher has two network interface cards; each with its own IP address).
Click the Advanced button and verify that the PC is configured for only a single IP Address
(192.168.193.2 for a direct connection and an unused address like 192.168.191.110 - 200 for a
LAN connection). Creating a Direct Connection in iView
42-02-7223 B8 8-7
Using iView
Once you have set your computer TCP/IP as described previously, you need to create a connec-
tion in iView.
1. Double-click on the iView icon on your computer screen to launch iView.
2. Click File on the menu bar.
3. Select Connection and click New to open the Connection dialog.
4. Type in a name for the connection.

5. Enter the direct connection IP
Address for the iBox (192.168.193.1).
6. Select Controller/Simplex.
7. Click OK. The Save As dialog opens.
8-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

8. Enter a File name for this connection in the Save As dialog. When creating direct con-
nections, it is a good practice to name them clearly so they are easy to distinguish (i.e.,
“CarA Direct”).
9. The suggested (default) location for connections is the Connections folder (My Docu-
ments > Motion Control Engineering > iView > Connections). You may choose another
location using standard windows methods. You may also create sub-folders inside the 8
iController Connections folder in which groups of connections can be stored.
10. Click Save to save the connection.
42-02-7223 B8 8-9
Using iView
Connecting to the iBox Once the connection is created and saved, you are ready to
connect.
1. Click the Open Connection button

2. or click File on the menu bar, select
Connection and click Open. The
Open dialog appears.
3. To connect to a controller, double click the desired connection or select the connection
and click Open.
4. If there is a problem making the connection, you can “ping” the address using the iView
PC (see “Pinging” on page 5-11).
8-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

5. When iView is communicating with a controller, this symbol

is displayed in the bottom left corner of the iView screen.
6. When iView is not communicating with a controller, this
symbol is displayed in the bottom left corner of the
iView screen.
7. When the connection is established, the Operational Status tab and Hoistway window
8
are displayed.
42-02-7223 B8 8-11
Using iView
LAN Connections
In most installations, there will be at least one iView PC continuously connected to the Local
Area Network on which the iBox controllers reside. LAN TCP/IP addresses and associated set-
tings for any hubs, routers, or other equipment involved are resolved when network equipment
is installed. In these instances, the iView PC is already connected through the network to the
controllers.
Creating a New LAN Connection
A controller connection must be created before it appears in the iView Connections folder. This
is typically completed at the factory, before the system is shipped (if your PC was purchased
through MCE). Creating a new LAN connection is similar to creating a new Direct connection.
To create a LAN connection:
1. Double-click on the iView icon on your computer screen to launch iView.
2. Click File on the menu bar.
3. Select Connection and click New to open the Connection dialog.
4. Type in a name for the connection.

5. Enter the Ip Address, the controllers
#1 (LAN) Ethernet port address. The
site network administrator should
have this information for you. Please
refer to “System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/
IP Addresses” on page 8-5 for the
factory default settings.
6. Select Controller/Simplex.
7. Click OK. The Save As dialog opens.
8-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

8. Enter a File name for this connection in the Save As dialog (the Connection automati-
cally suggested).
9. The suggested (default) location for connections is the Connections folder (My Docu-
ments > Motion Control Engineering > iView > Connections). You may choose another
location using standard windows methods. You may also create sub-folders inside the
iController Connections folder in which groups of connections can be stored. 8
10. Click Save to save the connection.
42-02-7223 B8 8-13
Using iView
Connecting to the iBox

Once the connection is created and saved, you are ready to connect.
1. Click the Open Connection button

2. or click File on the menu bar, select
Connection and click Open. The
Open dialog appears.
3. To connect to a controller, double click the desired connection. The connection will take
a moment or two to establish, then a main screen will appear.
4. If there is a problem making the connection, you can “ping” the address using the iView
PC (see “Pinging” on page 5-11).
Note
The default location for connection (.conn) files is the Connections folder (My Documents >
Motion Control Engineering > iView > Connections). The default location for configuration
(.cfg) files is the Configuration folder (My Documents > Motion Control Engineering > iView >
Configuration). If you want to work online, connected to a controller, select Connection > Open
from the File menu. Connection (.conn) files will be displayed in the Open dialog. If you want to
work in an offline configuration file, select Configuration File > Edit from the File menu. Con-
figuration (.cfg) files will be displayed in the Open Configuration File dialog. Refer to the Work-
ing Online and Working Offline topics later in this section for more information.
8-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Editing an Existing LAN Connection

You can edit existing LAN connections:
1. Click Edit on the File > Connection
menu.
2. The Open dialog is displayed. Double 8
click the connection you wish to edit.The
connection dialog is displayed. Click in
any field and correct the information you
wish to edit.
3. Click OK.
Deleting an Existing LAN Connection You can delete an existing connection from
the iControl Connections folder:
1. Select Edit on the File > Connection menu.
2. The Open dialog is displayed. Right-click on the connection you wish to delete.
3. Select Delete from the popup menu.
4. A warning dialog will appear. Click Yes to delete the connection or No to cancel without
deleting.
42-02-7223 B8 8-15
Using iView
Working Online
Working Online means that you are connected to an iController and are viewing or adjusting its
parameters. To work online, select Open from File > Connection menu and double click the
desired connection in the Open dialog.
When the connection is established, the Operational Status tab and Hoistway window are dis-
played with the Controller’s connection name on the top left side of the title bar.
When iView is communicating with a controller, this symbol

When iView is not communicating with a controller, this symbol

When working online, you may:
• View and adjust any configurable settings.

• Send adjusted settings to the controller.
• Save parameters to a Configuration file.
• Get parameters from a Configuration file and send them to the controller.
• Access Online Help
8-16 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Working Online
iView Menu Bar

Table 8.2 lists the description and location where the menu bar options are explained.
8
Table 8.2 iView Menu Bar Options
Menu Option Description
File Connection Create a new direct connection (page 8-7) or LAN connection
(page 8-12). Open, close, edit or delete an existing connec-
tion (page 8-14).
Configuration Save default parameters (page 8-20) or current parameters

(page 8-21) to a configurations file. Load parameters from a
configuration file (page 8-22).
Event Log View the controller’s event log.
Firmware Update Update the controller’s firmware files (page 8-41).
Upgrade Options Allow an old version of iView to connect and make upgrade
(page 8-43).
Exit Close the iView application.
Write Privilege Acquire Send adjustments to the controller (page 8-17).
Relinquish Relinquish write privilege.
View Configuration Please refer to “Controller - View Menu” on page 8-26.
Diagnostics Please refer to “Controller - View Menu” on page 8-26.
Setup Please refer to “Controller - View Menu” on page 8-26.
Hoistway Please refer to “Controller - View Menu” on page 8-26.
Safety Tests Please refer to “Controller - View Menu” on page 8-26.
Layouts Please refer to “Controller - View Menu” on page 8-26.
Tools FTP File Viewer Use under direction of MCE Tech Support to copy, save or
replace controller firmware files (page 8-44).
Boot parameter Use under direction of MCE Tech Support if the controller is
recovery unable to boot-up (page 8-49).
Help iView Help View the on-line help for the iView application (page 8-24).
About iView iView and controller firmware version numbers.
42-02-7223 B8 8-17
Using iView
iView Button Bar

Table 9.2 lists the locations where the functions of the buttons are explained.
Open Connection System view

Open Configuration File Controller view
Save Configuration File Refresh
Call Registration
Table 8.3 Buttons and Dialogs

Buttons / Dialogs Description See
Open Connection Displays the Open dialog page 8-10
Open Configuration File Displays the Open Configuration File dialog page 8-22
Save Configuration File Displays the Save Configuration File dialog page 8-21
Call Registration Place car calls and hall calls
Refresh Refreshes the parameters being displayed
Firmware Update Update the iBox imbedded firmware page 8-41
Controller Causes the Controller view to be displayed
System Causes the System view to be displayed
iView Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the iView screen provides the following information:
Connection status Date and time

Write privilege status
Controller Type
Connection Status Connected arrows, shown above, indicate that iView is communi-
cating with the controller. Broken arrows indicate that the connection has been broken.
Write Privilege Status/Time Remaining An unlocked lock, shown above, indi-

cates that this connection does not have write privilege. A locked lock indicates that write privi-
lege has been granted, and the time remaining before time-out is displayed.
Controller Type Indicates the type of controller to which iView is connected. For a
description of each type. The controller types include:
• Simplex - a single car that is not part of a group.
• Local - a car that is part of a group.
• Local (Swing) - a local car that can swing away (detach from the group).
• Swing - a local car that is currently detached from the group and is acting like a simplex.
• Local (Alternate Dispatcher) - a local car that can assume dispatching responsibilities.
• Local / Dispatcher - a local car that is also currently the dispatcher. iCue dispatching soft-
ware is running on the local car’s iBox.
• iCentral - a central dispatcher with iCue dispatching software running on a dedicated PC
or embedded micro controller.
8-18 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Viewing and Adjusting Settings

To view and/or adjust settings, you first select the Configuration tab associated with those set-
tings. There are two ways to select Configuration tabs:
1. Click the desired tab on the View > Configuration menu.
2. To display all of the configuration tabs (this takes a few seconds), click View > Layouts > 8
Configuration. You can then click the desired tab (Configuration layout shown with Pat-
tern/Modes tab selected).
Some tabs have one or more “sub-tabs,” each

supporting a related set of controls or displays.
For example, if you want to adjust a timer
associated with the brake, click the Brake tab
and then click the Timers tab. The Timer set-
tings will appear.
To adjust a particular setting, Pick delay for
example, you may either drag the cursor over
the existing value and type in a new value or
you may use the associated control (up/down
arrows) to increase or decrease the setting.
42-02-7223 B8 8-19
Using iView
Sending Adjustments to the Controller

After making adjustments you will want to send the new parameter values to the controller. To
send the new values:
1. Select Acquire from the1Write Privilege menu.

2. Press the “Yes” softkey on the iBox to grant the privilege
request.
3. Then click Send to send changes to the controller. (The
Send button becomes active when parameter changes
have been made.)
Saving Default Parameters to a Configuration File

The Controller and/or System default parameter settings can be saved to a configuration (.cfg)
file. The default parameter values can then be loaded onto the controller should you determine
that you want to start making adjustments beginning with the default values.
To Save the Default Parameters:

1. Select Controller or System
from the File > Configuration
> Generate default menu. The
Controller or System default
configuration dialog appears.
2. In the Controller or Sys-

tem default configuration
dialog, enter the desired
file name.
3. The default folder sug-
gested is the Configura-
tions folder (My
Documents > Motion
Control Engineering >
iView > Configurations).
You may change this if
you so desire.
4. Click Save to save the file.
5. Once you have saved the
file, it will appear in the
Open Configuration File
dialog the next time you
select either Load or Edit from the File > Configuration menu. You can load the default
parameters onto the controller by selecting Load from the File > Configuration menu as
described on the next page.
1. If iView and iCue are on the same PC in a central dispatcher, write privilege for that PC/Dispatcher is automatic.
8-20 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration File

All of the iView settings associated with a controller can be saved in a configuration (.cfg) file.
The .cfg extension identifies a file used to store information in a predetermined, fixed structure
(XML).
Using configuration files to store settings on a hard drive, USB Flash Drive or other storage 8
media provides some great capabilities:
• Working Offline: Using iView, you can open a file and work with its settings without neces-
sarily having access to the controller itself.
• File Uploading: When connected to a controller, you can choose to get some or all of the
settings in a configuration file and send them to the controller.
• Adjuster Portability/Flexibility: Elevator adjusters can store configuration files associated
with all the controllers they service on their laptop PC. They can edit values offline, then
coordinate with on site, machine room personnel to connect and upload those changes to
the controller through the elevator Local Area Network or, through modems, DSL, T1 or
other internet connections, from virtually anyplace in the world.
• Archiving controller data for future use.
You create configuration files by saving controller parameters to a file while you are working
online.
Save to File
While connected to a controller, you can easily save all controller parameters to a configuration
(.cfg) file.
1. Click the Save Configuration File button

2. or select Save from the File >
Configuration menu. A typical
Windows save dialog appears.
• The default name suggested
for the file will be the control-
ler connection name with .cfg
appended. Caution: If the
parameters for this control-
ler have previously been
saved using the default name,
those previously saved
parameters will be overwrit-
ten unless you change the file
name. You may want to add a
number or date to the file
name.
• The default folder suggested in the dialog is the Configurations folder (My Documents
> Motion Control Engineering > iView > Configurations).
3. Click Save to save the file.
4. Once you have saved the file, it will appear in the Open Configuration File dialog the
next time you select either Load or Edit from the File > Configuration menu.
42-02-7223 B8 8-21
Using iView
Loading Parameters from a Configuration File

When working online (connected to a controller), you may load (send) selected data from a pre-
viously saved configuration (.cfg) file to the controller (after ensuring that it is safe to do so and
setting the iBox Controller Stop switch appropriately).
1. Acquire Write Privilege (select Acquire from the Write Privilege menu.
2. Select Load from the File > Configu-
ration menu.
3. The Open Configuration File dialog
is displayed, allowing you to choose
the desired configuration file. Select
the file and click Open or double
click the file.
4. The Select Categories dialog opens
allowing you to choose the data to
send: “All screens” or data from “Selected screens”.
5. After selecting the desired data, click Ok to send or Cancel. If you selected “All catego-
ries” or any “Security” parameters, you must enter the Security Password and click Ok.
The default security password is “manager”.
8-22 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Working Offline
Working Offline
Working offline means that you are not connected to a controller but are working with a config-
uration (.cfg) file. You must have previously created the configuration file by saving it while
working on line with a controller. Please refer to “Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration
File” on page 8-21. To work offline:
8
1. Launch iView.
2. Select Edit from the File > Configuration menu.
3. The Open Configuration File dialog opens. Double-click or select the desired configura-
tion file and click Open. The .cfg extension indicates that this is a configuration file used
when working off-line.
4. A top level screen resembling the controller screen will appear. The title bar of the
screen displays the path and file name. You access the parameter screens and edit
parameters just as you do online. However, you cannot send parameters to a controller
while offline. Please refer to “Loading Parameters from a Configuration File” on page 8-
22.
5. To save changes, click the Save button .
Note
While working offline you will not be able to view some real-time data screens such as Hoistway
and Floor Heights.
To copy a configuration file: You may not want to modify the original configuration
file. Instead, you can make a copy of the original and then edit the copy.
1. Click the Start button.
2. Click My Documents.
3. Double click the Motion Control Engineering folder.
4. Double click the iView folder.
5. Double click the Configurations folder.
6. Select the configuration file and click “Copy this file” in the File and Folder Tasks list.
7. Select a location from the Copy Items dialog and click Copy.
8. Right click the copied file and select Rename.
9. Type the new name and press Enter.
10. From the File menu in iView, select Configuration > Edit.
11. Select the file from the Open Configuration File dialog and click Open.
12. Edit and Save the file.
42-02-7223 B8 8-23
Using iView
Accessing Online Help

iView offers extensive online help. Help is available whether you are working online or offline.
On-line help is incorporated into iView to provide information about iControl screens and
parameters. You can access iView On-line Help in the following ways:
Context Sensitive Help You can view On-line Help information about any screen or
tab by pressing function-key one (F1) while a screen or tab has focus. Do the following:
• Click the title bar of a window, e.g., the Hoistway window, to bring focus to the window.
The background color of the window’s title bar darkens indicating that the window has focus.
Then press the F1 key. iView Help will display the topic that describes the window.
• Click a tab (title). An outline will appear around the tab title indicating that the tab has
focus. Then press the F1 key. iView Help will display the topic that describes the tab.
Context Sensitive Event Help The Controller logs status and error information in
the Event Log. To view the Event Log, Event Properties and Context Sensitive Event Help:
1. In the Controller view, click View > Diagnostics > Event Log to display the Event Log.
2. Double click an event in the Event Log to display the Event Properties dialog.
3. Click the Help button in the Event Properties dialog to display the Troubleshooting Tips
dialog which provides a description of the event, an indication of what action is taken,
and troubleshooting tips if appropriate.
Help Viewer iView On-line Help provides three additional ways of locating information.
The Contents and Index tabs let you find general information. The Search tab lets you look up
specific words or phrases.
To start iView On-line Help:
1. On the iView menu bar, click Help.
2. On the Help menu, click iView Help. The help viewer is displayed. Use the Contents,
Index or Search tabs to locate the desired information.
iView On-line Help provides the following kinds of information:

• Using iView Help - A description of the many options, capabilities and ways of using iView
On-line Help.
• Using iView - Provides information and instructions on how to use the iView graphical
user interface.
• iView Windows and Tabs - Lists all of the iView windows and tabs and provides links to
descriptions of the parameters on each tab.
• Message Reference - An alphabetical listing of iControl status and error messages. Each
listing includes a description, an indication of what action is taken, and troubleshooting
tips.
• Parameter Reference - a tab by tab listing of all of the Controller and System parameters
including a description of each parameter.
8-24 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iView Windows and Tabs
iView Windows and Tabs

The View menu is used to navigate to the various windows and tabs in the Controller view and
System view. Many tabs have subordinate tabs that are not shown here, but are documented in
the Content Overview tables that follow.
Controller - Configuration Tabs 8

Controller parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the Controller - Configura-
tion tabs. The Configuration tabs may be accessed in one of two ways.
1. While in Controller view, select the desired tab from the View > Configuration menu.
2. Display all of the Configuration tabs by selecting Configuration from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired configuration tab.
Controller - Diagnostic Tabs

The Controller - Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of the con-
troller. The Diagnostic tabs can be accessed in one of two ways.
1. Select the desired tab from the View > Diagnostics menu.
2. Display all of the Diagnostic tabs by selecting Diagnostics from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired diagnostics tab.
Controller - Setup Tabs

The Controller - Setup tabs are used to perform the iControl automatic and semi-automatic
setup procedures. The Setup tabs can be accessed by selecting Setup from the View menu. Then
click the desired calibration tab.
Additional Windows
Additional windows can be accessed from the View menu. They include:
• Data Trap
• Hoistway
• Outputs
• Safety Tests
• Virtual Oscilloscope
42-02-7223 B8 8-25
Using iView
Specific contents will vary depending on the hardware installed at your site and on the revision
level of your iView and iBox software. Always refer first to the online help available within
iView. Online help contains the most detailed and current information about your iView soft-
ware. For detailed parameter or display descriptions, refer to iView on line help.
Table 5.2 lists the items on the View menu and tables 5.3 through 5.5 list the tabs found on the
Configuration, Diagnostics and Setup menus. Click the “see page” links to jump to that page.
Table 8.4 Controller - View Menu
Window Content
Configuration Parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the Configuration tabs.
The tabs include Brake, Car Operation, Drive, General, I/O Board, Load Weigher,
Motor Field, Pattern, Safety, Serial I/O Simplex Configuration, Simplex Security,
Terminal Switches and Timer Tables.
Diagnostics The Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of the con-
troller. The tabs include Diagnostic Outputs, Event Log, Fault Bypass, Operational
Status and Terminal Switches Status. Three additional diagnostic screens, Data
Trap, Diagnostic Outputs and Virtual Oscilloscope, are displayed each in their own
window. This allows them to be used with other windows.
Setup The Setup tabs are used to perform the automatic and semi-automatic setup pro-
cedures. The tabs include Brake, Counterweight, Drive, Feed Forward Gain, Floor
Heights, Floor Offsets, Load Weigher, Motor Field, Safety, Synthetic Speed and Ter-
minal Switches.
Hoistway A graphical representation of the car in the hoistway, including assigned car and
hall calls. Shows the current mode of operation, direction preference, speed and
actual floor height information.
Safety Tests Automated control of acceptance test procedures.
Layouts Pre-programmed screen layouts can be displayed. Custom screen layouts can be
created and saved and displayed.
Table 8.5 Controller - Configuration Tabs
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Advanced Custom Allows existing inputs, outputs and internal flags to be combined in a logic
Outputs equation which can then generate a custom output.
User Events Configure User Events
Brake Control Brake voltage, timer and filter settings.
Configuration Brake voltage, Output timer, and Current reference settings for braking
progression at 10% increments (brake fine tuning).
Car Call Enable Configure the enable inputs to be active high or low.
Car Operation Doors Door motor protection timer settings, safe edge and photo eye bypass
selections, plus front and rear door closing delay, etc.
Devices Hall and car gong settings, emergency alarm monitoring, serial fixture
parameters and discrete PI outputs.
Passenger Anti-nuisance, nudging, exercise operation, automatic swing operation,
and door operation settings for car in normal passenger service.
Fire Service Main and alternate recall, fire code selection, and door functionality for
car in fire service operation.
Independent Door and call functionality for car on Independent service.
Service
8-26 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Tab Sub-Tab Content

Car Operation Elevator Recall Recall floor, call disposition, door operation, and override settings for car
(continued) on recall operation
Earthquake Counterweight displacement sensor enable/disable, and earthquake code
selection for car on earthquake operation.
8
EMS Emergency Medical Service settings (recall floor, switch, and doors etc.)
Emergency Includes recall, generator and door settings for car on Emergency Power
Power operation.
CFSS Commandeer for Special Services. Parameters determine car behavior
when operating in CFSS Recall and In-car modes
Flood Determines Flood operation floors, substitute Emergency Power and Fire
operation recall floors, and Flood operation bypass settings
Attendant Set front and rear door operation parameters used during Attendant Ser-
service vice operation.
Auto stop Parameters determine car behavior during Automatic Stop operation.
Sabbath Enable/disable, select floors and other parameters that determine car
operation behavior while on Sabbath operation.
Shuttle Allows a car to provide express service for a subset of the building’s
Service floors.
Heat Detectors Parameters determine car behavior when heat detectors are activated.
Jail Operation Provides special control over elevator use.
Destination General Enable DBD, set door operation, anti-nuisance and floor settings parame-
Based ters.
Dispatching Fixtures Car assignment tone, hall fixtures, car fixtures, car ID display and floors
with hall fixtures.
Drive General Drive type selection, speed reference selection, speed reference configu-
ration, and system drive-related selections for drive.
Safety Speed reference and over-current settings.
Control Drive gain, current, PID, and error compensation settings.
Filters Drive notch and system filter settings.
Dampening Drive speed and current control settings.
Pre-Torque Pretorque enable/disable and option settings.
Calibration Drive offset settings.
Floor Heights Configurations Use to view the learned values for the floor heights.
Floor Offsets Use to view the learned values of the floor offsets.
General General Job information, car label, ID, simplex car and backup dispatcher options.
Floors Data Front and rear opening settings for all floors.
Car Call Car Call eligibility settings for all floors. Default eligibility configurations to
Eligibility be used during special modes of operation, e.g. Independent service.
I/O Board Configuration Graphical display and organization of controller and cartop I/O boards
including specific input and output assignment on connectors.
Configurable Determines during which modes of operation the Door Enable Output,
outputs Automatic Closing Output and/or Hall Door Button Output are disabled.
IBox IP information for iControl.
Configuration
42-02-7223 B8 8-27
Using iView
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Load Weigher Load Weigher configuration and threshold settings.
Motor Field Control Motor Field operation, calibration, voltage, and PID settings
Configuration Voltage, Output timer, and Current reference settings across motor output
range in increments of 10% (fine tuning).
Pattern Common Display and edit parameters common to all pattern profiles. Position
encoder resolution, leveling and releveling speeds, pattern scaling, dead
zone distance, door pre-opening distance, and position synchronization by
floor or terminal switches.
Modes Parameter settings for Standard, Earthquake, Emergency power, Emer-
gency slowdown, Correction, Inspection, and Alternate 1-2 profiles.
Terminal Position margin settings for up and down normal terminal and emergency
Switches terminal switches, and Overspeed 1 margin setting.
Timer Tables Programming of timed operations (Sabbath, Swing and Auto stop opera-
tion).
Table 8.6 Controller - Diagnostics Tabs
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Operational Displays the car status including: motion, speed, position, pattern, motor
Status and brake, processor, in-service, leveling, door locks, faults and car sta-
tus.
Data Trap Use this tool to record and analyze controller data including input and out-
put states, internal flags and parameter values.
Diagnostic Car Operation Displays status of car operation input and output flags, including front and
Flags rear doors, e.g. car call above, car call below. Click arrow buttons to dis-
play dependent outputs.
Motion Displays the status of Passenger (automatic) and Inspection mode motion
related inputs and outputs, e.g. Ready, Synchronization and Qualifier sta-
tus.
Drive Displays the status of Drive related inputs and outputs, e.g. Up direction
request, Pattern enable, and Motor run mode.
Safety Displays the status of Safety related inputs and outputs, e.g. Car top exit
open, Governor open, and Safety (Car) open.
Diagnostic Selection and display of up to sixteen system outputs for monitoring or
Outputs diagnosis. Hundreds of outputs are available.
Event Log Display of recorded controller events.
Fault Bypass Enable/disable selected system faults to facilitate adjustment and testing.
Display of faults currently bypassed.
Terminal Displays the learned terminal switch speeds and positions, overspeed and
Switches Status position fault thresholds and last pass positions and speeds.
Virtual An on-board oscilloscope with software selection of test point signals to
Oscilloscope be monitored and customizable display.
Call Generator Use this dialog to generate a new call list (script) or execute an existing
script.
8-28 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 8.7 Controller - Setup Tabs
Tab Content
Brake Calibrate the brake voltage settings (see page 2-38).
Counterweight Learn the position where counterweight is adjacent to the car (see page 3-12). 8
Drive Learn the values for the Drive Offsets (see page 2-25).
Feed Forward Gain Determine a starting value for the Error Compensation parameter on the Configuration
> Drive > Control tab. The objective is to determine the minimum value that should be
used. The optimum value will be between 100% and 150% of calibrated value
(see page 4-15).
Floor Heights Learn the absolute floor positions (distance to each floor from the lowest landing). Also
used to assist in measuring and entering the floor offsets (deviation of floor magnet
position from actual floor stopping position) (see page 4-2, page 4-30).
Load Weigher Learn the car empty and full load weights (see page 4-41).
Motor Field Calibrate the motor field voltages (see page 2-29).
Safety Verify that the configurations of the main and safety processors match. Perform the
Inventory learn procedure.
Synthetic Speed Determine the values for the Voltage safety calibration and Current safety calibration
parameters (Calibration > Drive > Safety tab) which, in conjunction with the Following
error and Tach failure parameters and Speed feedback, are used to determine when a
Tach Failure fault should be generated (see page 4-14).
Terminal Switches Learn the speeds and positions of the normal and emergency terminal switches (see
page 4-12).
Table 8.8 Controller - Miscellaneous Dialogs/Controls
Tab Content
Call Allows you to register car and hall calls. This control is accessed by clicking the Call
Registration Registration button on the button bar.
Firmware Update Guides you through the process of updating iControl firmware. This control is accessed
by selecting Firmware Update from the File menu (see page 8-25).
Refresh Updates the information displayed on iView windows and tabs. This control is accessed
by clicking the Refresh button on the button bar.
42-02-7223 B8 8-29
Using iView
Controller - Layouts
With iView, you can move and size tabs to suit the task to be performed. When you find a partic-
ular arrangement to be useful, you can save it as a custom layout (View > Layouts > Save as).
You can then display that layout at any time by selecting your custom lay0ut from the View >
Layouts > Custom menu.
Some useful layouts have been pre-programmed and are supplied with iView. They include:
• Configuration: This layout displays all of the configuration tabs for easy selection.
• Diagnostics: Displays all of the diagnostic tabs for easy selection.
• Default: Displays the default (initial connection) layout.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Brake: Used to perform the brake calibration procedure. Displays the Brake setup and
configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
• Drive: Used to perform the drive offsets calibration. Displays the Drive setup and configu-
ration tabs plus the Hoistway pane (see page 2-25).
• Floor Heights: Used to perform the hoistway (floor heights) learn operation. Displays the
Floor Heights setup and configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
• Load Weigher: Used to perform the Load Weigher learn procedure. Displays the Load
Weigher setup and configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
• Motor Field: Used to perform the Motor Field calibration procedure. Displays the Motor
Field setup and configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
• Terminal Switches: Used to perform the Terminal learn procedure. Displays the Terminal
Switches setup, configuration and diagnostics tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Custom: Used to select a custom layout to be displayed. This is the listing of custom lay-
outs created using View > Layouts > Save as.
• Save As: Used to create and save a custom layout.
• Enter the name for the custom layout.
• Click OK.
8-30 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

System View Windows and Tabs

Note that, if iView and iCue are on the same PC in a central dispatcher, Write Privilege is
granted automatically to iView for that PC/Dispatcher/iCue.
System - Configuration Tabs

System parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the System - Configuration 8
tabs. The Configuration tabs may be accessed in one of two ways.
1. While in System view, select the desired tab from the View > Configuration menu.
2. Display all of the Configuration tabs by selecting Configuration from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired configuration tab.
System - Diagnostic Tabs

The System - Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of the system.
The Diagnostic tabs can be accessed in one of two ways.
1. Select the desired tab from the View > Diagnostics menu.
2. Display all of the Diagnostic tabs by selecting Diagnostics from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired diagnostics tab.
Additional Windows
Additional windows can be accessed from the View menu. They include:
• Hoistway
• System Performance
• Layouts
Table 8.9 System - View Menu
Window Content
Configuration System parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the Configura-
tion tabs. The tabs include Emergency Power, System Configuration, Legacy Group
Interface, Security, System I/O, Timer Tables, User Inputs and User Outputs.
Diagnostics The System Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of
the system. The tabs include Event Log.
Hoistway A graphical representation of the cars in the system hoistways, including assigned
car and hall calls. Shows the current mode of operation, direction preference and
current floor for each elevator.
System Performance Graphical representation of system performance statistics.
Layouts Use to load Configuration, Diagnostic or Custom layouts.
42-02-7223 B8 8-31
Using iView
Table 8.10 System - Configuration Tabs
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Emergency Use to indicate cars connected to each generator and define how switch-
Power ing to and from emergency power is handled.
System Building Floor definition and labeling. Car definition and labeling.
Configuration CFSS Definition of Commandeer For Special Services modes 1 and 2.
Dispatching Define system dispatching options and manually select dispatching con-
figurations
Hall Call Define up to eight Hall call eligibility configurations.
Eligibility
Mode of Define up to eight dispatching Mode of Operation configurations.
Operation
Parking Define up to eight Parking configurations
Parking Define up to eight Parking Eligibility configurations.
Eligibility
Split Bank This capability is only available through the Central Dispatcher.
Management Controls Remote Monitoring Authorization and Local Dispatcher - Resend
system parameters command.
Destination Enable DBD, set general DBD parameters, Destination Input Device
Based parameters, Hallway configuration and special operations configuration
Dispatching parameters.
Legacy Group Select either Cross-cancellation or Cross-registration.
Interface
Security General Shows the status of System Security. Use these controls to configure car
Hall Calls and hall call restrictions for a simplex or swing car or car assigned to be
the backup or local dispatcher for a group.
Car Calls
System I/O System Configuration of system input/output settings.
Bus Serial bus troubleshooting.
Timer Tables Use to configure timer tables to control system functions, e.g., Hall call
eligibility, Parking, Parking eligibility, Mode of operation, Security, and
User outputs 1 through 3.
User Events Define User Events which, when assigned a hardware input, are logged on
the System Event Log when activated and deactivated.
Remote Outputs Configuration Define and configure up to 32 Remote Outputs which can be wired to any
Trigger input or other device as needed.
Predictive Gongs Parameters determine the behavior of predictive gongs.
Table 8.11 System - Diagnostic Tabs
Tab Content
Event Log Display of recorded system events.
Network Diagnostics Controller and Remote Client network information.
DBD Call Diagnostics Destination Based Dispatching call diagnostics tool.
Table 8.12 System - Miscellaneous Dialogs/Controls
Tab Content
Call Allows you to register car and hall calls. This control is accessed by clicking the Call
Registration Registration button on the button bar.
8-32 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Table 8.12 System - Miscellaneous Dialogs/Controls
Tab Content
DBD Call Allows you to register DBD calls. This control is accessed by clicking the DBD Call Reg-
Registration istration button on the button bar.
Refresh Updates the information displayed on iView windows and tabs. This control is accessed
by clicking the Refresh button on the button bar.
8
Pinning and Unpinning Windows

iView windows have a little push-pin icon in the upper right
corner.
• When the pin is pointing down, the window is “pinned”
in its designated position.
• If you click the pin icon, it points to the left and a button
labeled Hoistway appears to the right of the window.
• The window remains in view if the window has focus
(click the window title bar) or as long as the mouse cur-
sor remains on the window or button.
• But if another window has focus and you move the

mouse cursor off the window or button, the window col-
lapses out of view.
• To temporarily bring the window into view again, place

the mouse cursor over the button. The window slides
into view and will remain in view if you click the window
title bar or as long as the cursor remains on the button
or window.
To permanently display the window again:

1. Bring the window into view by placing the cursor over
the button.
2. Click the pin so that it is pointing down again.
42-02-7223 B8 8-33
Using iView
Resizing Windows
iView windows can be resize so that you see just the data you need to perform a test or task.
To resize a window:
1. Place the mouse cursor in the space between the windows.
Cursor
2. When the cursor changes to a double line with arrows, click and drag the window
boundary and resize the window.
8-34 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Docking and Undocking Windows

iView windows can be undocked from their assigned position and moved to another position on
the screen.
To undock and move a window:

1. Notice that the Diagnostics window is positioned at the bottom of the screen (connec-
8
tion arrows at bottom left corner). Double click the window title bar.
2. The title bar and frame around the Diagnostics window change to a solid blue line indi-
cating that the window is now undocked and can be moved.
3. Click the title bar and drag (hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse)
the window to a new location.
4. Release the mouse button. The undocked window will appear in the new location, on top
of what ever is in that location. You can tell that it is undocked because the solid blue
frame remains.
5. You can quickly return the window to its original docked location by double-clicking in
the window’s title bar.
42-02-7223 B8 8-35
Using iView
To dock a window in a new location:

1. Notice that while moving an undocked window, docking controls appear near the center
and at the top, bottom and sides of the screen. As you slide the cursor over the controls,
a light blue highlight indicates the position to which the window will be moved. Release
the mouse button and the window docks in the new location.
Light blue highlighted area Docking controls
8-36 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

2. An alternate method of moving a window is to right click the title bar of the window. In
the drop down list that appears, select Dock to and click the desired location. In the
example below, the Diagnostics window has been moved to the top of the screen.
Drop down list

8
3. If you like this arrangement and would like to be able to easily display this arrangement
in the future, you can save it as a Custom Layout. Please refer to “Controller - Layouts”
on page 8-30.
42-02-7223 B8 8-37
Using iView
Printing Screens
1. With the screen displayed, press the Print Screen key to send the entire screen to the
clipboard (PC memory).
2. To send only the selected item (widow or dialog) to the clipboard, press and hold the Alt
key, then press the Print Screen key.
Items sent to the clipboard can be pasted into any of several applications. One that you should
definitely have on your PC is Wordpad.
3. Open the Wordpad application (Start > All Programs > Accessories > Wordpad).
4. Select Paste from the Edit menu or press and hold the Ctrl key while pressing and
releasing the “v” key to paste the captured screen into Wordpad.
5. Select Print from the File menu to print the screen.
6. Save the file if you want to keep a record of the screen on the PC hard drive.
Setting System Date and Time

The iControl system’s time and date can be set using the iView application connected to the
Central Dispatcher (iCue PC), Local/Dispatcher or Simplex car controller. The dispatcher’s time
and date are transferred to all local cars that are running (communicating) and all other cars as
they power up.
To set the time and date:

1. Establish an iView connection to the system dispatcher or simplex car.
2. Double-click the time/date display at the bottom-right of the status bar (shown
below). The Date / Time Configuration dialog will appear:
3. Use the controls to set the date and/or time and click Apply or OK. The date and time
will be updated on all controllers communicating with the dispatcher.
Note
The iView PC’s time, which is displayed at the very bottom-right corner of the screen, is not the
same as the iControl system’s date and time. The iControl system’s date and time are displayed
on the iView status bar and are set using the Date / Time Configuration dialog shown above.
8-38 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Editing Dynamic Displays

The virtual oscilloscope display is editable. You may easily modify labels, displays, animation,
and more to suit your immediate display needs. When a display is closed, then re-opened, it
reverts to its default values.
To edit a display: •
1. Right-click on the graph or on one of the scales
to reveal a popup menu. Select Edit from the
menu.
42-02-7223 B8 8-39
Using iView
2. Experiment with modifying the display to find the combinations that suit the signal
types you are currently examining. The Edit menu is extensive:
3. Several different editors are available depending on where you click in the graphic dis-
play.
8-40 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Updating Controller Firmware
Updating Controller Firmware

Warning! Do not attempt this procedure without first contacting
MCE Technical Support. Failure to do so can result in cata-
strophic failure of the iBox.
8
Firmware Update allows you to install updated iControl operating software. It is likely that two
firmware program files will be updated. They are:
• Bootrom.mce, the iControl boot-up program.
• vxworks.mce, the iControl IMP computer program.
To update iControl firmware:

1. Copy the new Bootrom.mce (Bootrom folder) and vxworks.mce (IMP folder) files to the
desktop of the computer being used to perform the firmware update.
2. Use iView to connect to the iBox on which the firmware is being updated.
3. If you want to save the configuration settings for later re-loading, select Save from the
File > Configuration menu. In the Save Configuration File dialog, type a name in the File
name: box and click Save. Please refer to “Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration
File” on page 8-21.
4. Select Firmware Update from the File menu.
5. Click Yes in the dialog “This action will automatically deactivate all screens. Proceed?”
42-02-7223 B8 8-41
Using iView
6. Follow instructions 1 through 4 in the Firmware Update dialog and then click Continue.
The Firmware Update dialog will change to:
7. Update the Bootrom first. Double click the (…) in the Bootrom row.
8. Use the Open dialog to navigate to the computer’s Desktop and double click the
Bootrom.mce file. The bootrom file will load and the version will be indicated in the
Upgrade version column.
9. Click Start upgrade. The upgrade progress will be indicated in the text window. When
the upgrade is completed you will be instructed to close iView and press the iBox Com-
puter Reset button.
Note
Note: If an FrmFtp Login dialog appears asking for a User and Password, click OK. The user
name and password are not used for this operation at this time.
10. Use iView to connect to the iBox when it finishes the re-boot.
11. Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6.
12. Click the check box to “Delete the paramf and constf files on the controller after IMP
upgrade”
13. Double click the (…) in the Imp row.
8-42 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

14. Use the Open dialog to navigate to the computer’s Desktop and double click the
vxworks.mce file. The IMP application file will load and the version will be indicated in
the Upgrade version column.
15. Click Start upgrade. The upgrade progress will be indicated in the text window. When
the upgrade is completed you will be instructed to close iView and press the iBox Com-
puter Reset button. 8
16. Use iView to connect to the iBox when it finishes the re-boot.
17. Select About iView from the Help menu and verify the version numbers for the IMP
Application and IMP Bootrom.
18. If you want to restore the original parameter settings which were saved in step #3, first
acquire write privilege and then select Load from the File > Configuration menu. Please
refer to “Loading Parameters from a Configuration File” on page 8-22.
19. Select and Open or double click the desired file from the Open Configuration File dialog.
20. Select All screens or the Selected screens for which you wish to restore the original
parameter settings, and click OK.
Upgrade Options
When upgrading firmware from a pre-December 2005 release to a later release, in the event
that the Upgrade Wizard fails to properly load the parameters file, iView may not be able to con-
nect to the upgraded controller. The Upgrade Options Dialog (File > Upgrade Options) can be
used to enable iView to connect to the controller or iCue and complete the upgrade.
42-02-7223 B8 8-43
Using iView
FTP File Viewer

The FTP File Viewer is a very useful troubleshooting tool. It can be used to copy firmware files
from an iBox to a PC, delete iBox firmware files or copy firmware files from a PC to an iBox. For
example, the Controller’s Event Log file could be copied from the iBox to the iView PC and then
sent via e-mail to MCE for evaluation. Typically this would be done per instructions from MCE
Tech Support.
Using the FTP File Viewer

1. From the iView Tools menu, click FTP File
Viewer.
2. The FTP Viewer window opens.
8-44 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

3. Connect the FTP File Viewer utility to

a controller: Select Connect from
the File menu and click Open
4. or click Connect next

to STEP 1:
5. The Open dialog

appears. Click the
desired connection.
6. Next acquire write privi-

lege. Click Acquire
next to STEP 2:
7. The Write Privilege dia-

log appears. Press Yes
(1) on the iBox Onboard
Display
42-02-7223 B8 8-45
Using iView
8. Set the iBox INSPECTION,

CONTROLLER STOP and
WRITE ENABLE
switches as shown.
9. The FTP Viewer window changes to:
8-46 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

10. To copy a file from an iBox to a PC, select a file in the Controller FLASH or
BBRAM list and then click Copy to PC. The default folder to which the files are copied
is Documents and Settings\User’s name\My Documents\Motion Control Engineer-
ing\FTP Viewer. Note that a description of the file is shown in the list box below the
lists.
8
11. To delete a file from the iBox FLASH or BBRAM lists, select a file and then
click Delete File.
Note
If you attempt to delete the PARAMF file, the following Information message appears:
42-02-7223 B8 8-47
Using iView
To copy a file from a PC to an iBox, select the file in the Computer list box and then
click Copy to iBox.
Note
If you attempt to copy the VXWORKS file to the iBox, the following Warning message appears:
8-48 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Boot parameter recovery

In very rare instances the iBox may refuse to bootup. This utility may be able to allow the iBox
to recover from this state. Note: To use this tool, the iBox must have Boot Loader version 4.0 or
greater.
1. An RS232 serial cable must be connected between a serial port on the PC and the RS232 8
PC port on the iBox.
2. Launch the Boot parameter recovery utility by

selecting Boot parameter recovery from the
iView Tools menu.
3. The iBox Boot Parameter Recovery dialog opens.
4. Click Connect.
Assign inputs on parameter

recovery:
5. Assign LAN IP Address:

If you wish to assign a new
LAN IP address as part of
the boot parameter recov-
ery, enter the new LAN IP
Address for the iBox.
6. The default subnet mask is

shown. If you need to
change it, click Assign
subnet mask and use the
drop down list to select.
7. If you wish to assign new

MAC addresses, click
Assign MAC addresses
and enter the new
addresses
8. Click Recover Params.
9. The iBox will automatically reboot, set the boot parameters to their default values, and
then reboot again.
42-02-7223 B8 8-49
Using iView
Bootrom Recovery via OBD

In rare instances the iBox may refuse to bootup, usually iBox
after updating or backdating firmware. This utility on the Boot ROM
OBD, may allow the ibox to be recovered. It is available Version 4.0.2
on bootrom version 4.0.2 or greater. These options are
meant for expert users or tech support only. System Booting
Begin by pressing and holding the ENTER button on the

iBox. Momentarily press the COMPUTER RESET button.
Continue holding in the ENTER button until the Boot Boot Menu:
Menu is displayed.
1: Change IP Address
Change IP Address - Use this option to change the IP 2: Default Boot Prms
address of the LAN Network port before bootup (see 3: Start FTP server
Default Boot Params). This is helpful if the boot parame- 4: Boot
ters have been corrupted or the IP is not correct and you
need to FTP into the iBox.
With the Boot Menu displayed, press soft switch #1: Use IP Address
the left/right arrow keys to select the digit and the up/ 010.010.052.041
down arrows to make the correction. Press Enter to save ^
the changed IP address. Mask:
FFFF0000
Default Boot Params - This option allows the com-
puter to reset all parameters to standard settings. With Use Arrows To Edit
the Boot Menu displayed, press soft switch #2: Press Enter to Save
The Parameters Defaulted message is displayed to indi- Parameters Defaulted

cate that the parameters have been defaulted. Press Enter Press Enter
to return to the Boot Menu. To Return
Warning: You will need to check the IP addresses and
MAC addresses to make sure they match the job site.
Also, all of the configuration parameters will be set to
their default values. If you have a saved configuration file
you can load it once the iBox has booted.
Start FTP Server - available on iView 3.5.0 and above. FTP Server Running..
With the Boot Menu displayed, press soft switch #3. To recover Controller
1. Open iView
This option starts an FTP server on the iBox to allow
2. Launch FTP Viewer
access to the Flash and BBRAM file system. This is useful
3. File > IBox File
if the vxworks.mce image is corrupted or missing. Using System Recovery
the FTP Viewer in iView, the vxworks file can be replaced, 4. Press Reset
the paramf file can be deleted, etc. Instructions for using
the FTP File Viewer are in the April 2010 Release or later
iControl User Guide.
Boot - This option causes the boot process to continue. Press soft switch #4.
8-50 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Reference
About this Section

This section contains detailed information about:
• iControl DC Specifications (see page 9-2).
• Software Test Point Signals: Descriptions of the signals that can be routed to hard-
ware and software test points (see page 9-3).
• iBox Field Connections: Descriptions of field input and output connections on the left
side of the iBox, including signal levels in active and inactive states (see page 9-7).
• Terminal Field Connections (see page 9-14).
• System and LAN Ethernet: Information about TCP/IP addresses (see page 9-15).
• Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference: A listing of Quattro DC Drive
parameters and their default and typical settings (see page 9-27).
42-02-7223 B8 9-1
Reference
iControl DC Specifications
Table 9.1 iControl DC Specifications
Parameter Specification
Car Speed Up to 1800 fpm (9.14 m/s)
Jerk 15 ft/sec3 (7.62 m/sec3) maximum
8 ft/sec3 (2.44 m/sec3) nominal
1 ft/sec3 (0.305 m/sec3) minimum
Acceleration 10 ft/sec2 (3.04 m/sec2) maximum
4 ft/sec2 (1.52 m/sec2) nominal
1 ft/sec2 (0.31 m/sec2) minimum
Number of Stops Up to 96 (60 floors for Simplex)
Number of Cars in Group Up to 15
Floor Leveling Accuracy +/- 0.25 inches (6.35mm) guaranteed
+/- 0.125 inches (3.18mm) typical
Minimum Floor to Floor Time 4.8 seconds for 12-foot (3.66m) floor heights if rotating equipment is
capable of delivering the necessary torque.
Environmental Limits 32 to 104 degrees F (0—40 degrees C) ambient
12,000 ft (3,658m) altitude
95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
9-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Software Testpoint Signals
Software Testpoint Signals

The iBox allows you to select any one of over fifty signals to display on-screen in iView or on the
iBox LCD display at each of two “software test points.” A signal selected on a software test point
(Test Point 1, Test Point 2) is also output on the corresponding iBox physical test point (STP 1,
STP 2). For example, if you selected Brake Voltage on software Test Point 1, the Brake Voltage
value would be displayed on screen and would also be output on iBox test point STP 1. Signals
9
you can choose from are listed in the following table.
Raw signals are unprocessed signals directly from a source. They are frequently too “spikey” to
use to read an average value but provide proof of activity and instantaneous reaction to chang-
ing conditions.
Filtered values represent the average, filtered value extrapolated from the raw signal to provide
a viewable, “smoothed,” signal.
Table 9.2 Test Point Signals

Test Signal Description / Text References
Acceleration (Command) Post-filter, acceleration command signal.
Acceleration (Directional) Directional acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Filtered) Pre-filtered acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Interpolated) Interpolated (smoothed) acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Raw) Raw acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Slew) Slew rate limited acceleration signal.
Armature Active Status High = armature control enabled.
Armature Command Control Filtered armature composite command.
Armature Command (Damped) Damped armature composite command.
Armature Command (Raw) Raw armature composite command.
Armature Composite Control The summation of Armature Command Control and Armature
Feed forward Control.
Armature Control Set PID control sets that reflect standard, start (normal), stop (nor-
mal), steady-state (normal) and start (relevel) adjustment
parameters.
Normal:
0 = Idle - before motor contactor picks [PID - Standard]
1 = Idle - after motor contactor picks [PID - Start (normal)]
2 = Acceleration [PID - Standard]
3 = Peak [PID - Steady-State (normal)]
4 = Deceleration [PID - Standard]
5 = Flare [PID - Stop (normal)]
6 = Leveling [PID - Standard]
7 = Idle - before motor contactor drops [PID - Standard]
Relevel:
8 = Idle - before motor contactor picks [PID - Standard]
9 = Idle - after motor contactor picks [PID - Start (relevel)]
10 = Acceleration - Leveling [PID - Standard]
Armature Current Dampen Feedback Armature current dampening signal.
Armature Current Signal Raw armature current feedback signal.
Armature Current Synthetic Feedback Armature current synthetic speed signal used for internal speed
reference and for current safety calibration.
Armature Differential Command Armature differential command.
Armature Differential Gain Armature differential gain.
42-02-7223 B8 9-3
Reference

Armature Error (Damped) Dampened armature error signal.
Armature Error (Raw) Raw armature error signal.
Armature Feedforward (Control) Filtered armature feedforward command.
Armature Feedforward (Raw) Raw armature feedforward command.
Armature Integral Command Armature integral command.
Armature Integral Gain Armature integral gain.
Armature On Status High = PID control enabled.
Armature Proportional Command Armature proportional command.
Armature Proportional Gain Armature proportional gain.
Armature Voltage Dampen Feedback Armature voltage dampening signal.
Armature Voltage Signal Raw armature voltage feedback signal. Please refer to “Armature
Voltage (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 4-9.
Armature Voltage Synthetic Feedback Armature voltage synthetic speed signal used for internal speed
reference and for voltage safety calibration.
Brake Contactor Status Indicates status (open/closed) of brake contactor. When the sig-
nal is high, the contacts are closed. When the contactor is closed
AND the brake field module is enabled, the brake will lift.
Brake Current Feedback Filtered brake current feedback signal.
Brake Current Signal Raw brake current feedback signal.
Brake Enable Status Indicates status of signal that enables the brake field module.
When high, the module is enabled. When the module is enabled
AND the contactor is closed, the brake will lift.
Brake Voltage Feedback Filtered brake voltage feedback signal.
Brake Voltage Signal Raw brake voltage feedback signal.
DAC Offset Status Indicates whether DAC signal offset is positive or negative.
Drive Enable Status Indicates status of signal that enables the motor field module.
When high, the module is enabled. When the module is enabled
AND the contactor is closed, the motor will run.
Drive IOS Limit This signal represents the hard-coded threshold at which an
Inspection Overspeed will be tripped. 150fpm.
Drive IOS Param Limit This signal represents the user-configurable threshold (Safety
screen) at which an Inspection Overspeed will be tripped.
Encoder Signal Raw encoder speed signal.
Field Active Status High = motor field control enabled.
Field Command (Control) Motor field composite command.
Field Control Path MCE internal diagnosis only.
Field Current Feedback Filtered motor field current feedback signal.
Field Current Signal Raw motor field current feedback signal.
Field Error Motor field error signal.
Field Integral Command Motor field integral command.
Field Integral Gain Motor field integral gain.
Field Proportional Command Motor field proportional command.
Field Proportional Gain Motor field proportional gain.
Field Voltage Feedback Filtered motor field voltage feedback signal.
Field Voltage Signal Raw motor field voltage feedback signal.
Load Weigher (Raw) Analog load weigher signal, after amplification (adjusted by
trimpot LW ADJ), at test point TP_LW on the CTP (cartop) board.
Load Weigher (Signal) The controller’s internal representation of the Load Weigher
(Raw) signal.
9-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Software Testpoint Signals

Load Weigher Balanced This signal is used to determine the amount of pretorque that
the controller needs to provide to the motor to help prevent roll-
back on takeoff. 0 = balanced load. Please refer to “Pretorque
Adjustments - Balanced Mode Method” on page 4-22. 9
Load Weigher Feedback This signal represents the smoothed, processed Load Weigher
(Signal), captured with doors closed, just before departure.
Motor Contactor Status Indicates status (open/closed) of motor contactor. When the sig-
nal is high, the contacts are closed. When the contactor is closed
AND the motor field module is enabled, the motor will run.
Over Current Armature current signal used for Loop Over Current. Adjusted
using Rated Loop Over Current and Loop Over Current Fault
Time. Please refer to “Armature Overcurrent Overload Protection
Adjustment (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 4-50.
Over Current Power Armature power accumulated. Used for Loop Over Current.
Adjusted using Rated Loop Over Current and Loop Over Current
Fault Time. Please refer to “Armature Overcurrent Overload Pro-
tection Adjustment (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 4-50.
Over Current Power Threshold The armature power threshold above which a Loop Over Current
fault is generated. Adjusted using Rated Loop Over Current and
Loop Over Current Fault Time. Please refer to “Armature Over-
current Overload Protection Adjustment (System 12 SCR Drive)”
on page 4-50.
Over Current Threshold Armature current signal threshold above which over current
power is accumulated. Used for Loop Over Current. Adjusted
using Rated Loop Over Current and Loop Over Current Fault
Time. Please refer to “Armature Overcurrent Overload Protection
Adjustment (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 4-50.
Pattern (Command) Post-filtered pattern command signal. Please refer to “Verify Pat-
tern Command and Drive Speed Feedback” on page 2-43. Please
refer to “Verifying a One Floor Run” on page 4-4. Please refer to
“Pattern Scaling (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 4-8. Please
refer to “Setting Pattern Parameters” on page 4-18.
Pattern (Directional) Directional pattern signal.
Pattern (Filtered) Pre-filtered pattern signal. Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping
Threshold Adjustment” on page 2-44
Pattern (Interpolated) Interpolated (smoothed) pattern signal.
Pattern (Phase) The numbers displayed represent segments of the speed profile.
Please refer to “Shaping the Speed Profile” on page 4-16.
0 = Idle
1 = Initial Jerk
2 = Acceleration
3 = Low Roll Jerk (during acceleration, high speed is reached)
4 = Peak (High Speed)
5 = High Roll Jerk (during acceleration, high speed not reached)
6 = High/Low Roll Jerk (during deceleration)
7 = Deceleration
8 = Flare Jerk (transition from deceleration to leveling)
9 = Approach Jerk (transition from deceleration to leveling)
10 = Leveling
Pattern (Raw) Raw pattern signal. Please refer to “Speed Loop Gains (System
12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-42
42-02-7223 B8 9-5
Reference

Pattern (Region) The numbers reflect a simplified representation of the speed
profile in comparison to Pattern (Phase).
0 = Idle 3 = Deceleration
1 = Acceleration 4 = Flare
2 = Peak 5 = Leveling
Pattern (Slew Limited) Slew rate limited pattern signal.
Position Bit This signal represents car position/motion. It is abstracted from
the motor velocity encoder or tach signal. The signal toggles low
or high with every 32-inches of motor travel. Increasing fre-
quency = increasing rate of position change.
Pre-Run Status High = Pre-energizes motor field as doors are closing and
demand occurs.
Pretorque (Command) This is the actual pretorque signal sent to the drive and used to
pretorque the motor. This is filtered representation of the raw
pretorque “demand” signal, captured as the doors close and
used to pretorque the motor as needed depending on the weight
in the car.
Pretorque (Raw) This is a representation of the raw pretorque “demand” signal. It
will react to car load changes (i.e., doors open, passengers load-
ing/unloading).
SCR Current Sensor Offset Status High = SCR current sensor signal offset positive.
SCR Intg Offset Status High = SCR integrator signal offset positive.
Speed Bit When the car is still, this signal is high. When the car is travel-
ling at a rate in excess of 40fpm, this signal is low.
Speed Feedback Filtered speed feedback signal. Please refer to “Verify Pattern
Command and Drive Speed Feedback” on page 2-43.Please refer
to “Tach Failure Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-
45. Please refer to “Empty Car Tests” on page 3-14. Please refer
to “Verifying a One Floor Run” on page 4-4. Please refer to “Set-
ting Pattern Parameters” on page 4-18. Please refer to “Tach
Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment” on page 4-49.
Sufficient Field Status High = sufficient motor field current has been achieved. Differ-
ent percentage of forcing, depending on mode. Inspection =
60% of forcing. Other, 80% of forcing.
Synthetic Signal Speed signal synthesized from armature voltage and current.
Please refer to “Tach Failure Calibration (System 12 SCR Drive)”
on page 2-45.
Tach Error Lower Limit This signal represents the lower margin of tach error allowed at
contract speed before a tach fault is generated. Display with
Speed Feedback signal to see the margin. If Speed Feedback
crosses Tach Error Lower Limit the tach fault will be generated.
Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment” on
page 2-44. Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjust-
ment” on page 4-49.
Tach Error Upper Limit This signal represents the upper margin of tach error allowed at
contract speed before a tach fault is generated. Display with
Speed Feedback signal to see the margin. If Speed Feedback
crosses Tach Error Upper Limit the tach fault will be generated.
Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment” on
page 2-44. Please refer to “Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjust-
ment” on page 4-49.
Tachometer Signal Raw tachometer signal. Please refer to “Speed Loop Gains (Sys-
tem 12 SCR Drive)” on page 2-42.
9-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC iBox Field Connections
iBox Field Connections

The majority of field connections to the iBox are made through plugable terminal strips along
the left edge of the iBox (as you face it). Field connections are control and data connections to
and from equipment external to the iBox. For example, connections through the traveler cable
to car and hoistway equipment or connections to additional machine room equipment like rope
grippers, velocity encoders, governors, etc. In this section, three tables describe connections —
9
iBox connections, expansion board connections, and iControl terminal connections respec-
tively.+--+Controller Terminal Field Connections
Table 9.3 iBox Field Connections
TS Tach positive signal. Analog. 0 - 30 VDC (15 VDC @ 1000 RPM). Please
refer to “Tachometer or Encoder Installation and Wiring” on page 2-11.
TACH
TC Tach common (negative in respect to TS when car moving down)
SHLD Tach shield connection (connect at iBox-end only)
DP1+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox
(DP1 leads DP2 when car moves up).
DP1- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox.
POSITION
DP2+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox
(DP2 leads DP1 when car moves down)
DP2- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox
A+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder. Please
refer to “Tachometer or Encoder Installation and Wiring” on page 2-11.
VELOCITY ENCODER
A- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
B+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
B- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
VE- Encoder power return
VE+ +12 VDC power to encoder (relative to VE-)
42-02-7223 B8 9-7
Reference
TX+ iBox transmit, positive going serial communication stream from iBox to
iLink. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX+. TX+ and TX-
comprise a differential communications pair. Please refer to “Installing
iLink” on page 3-3.
TX- iBox transmit, negative going serial communication stream from iBox to
CARTOP LINK
iLink. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX-.
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair TX+/TX-
RX+ iBox receive, positive going serial communication stream from iLink to
iBox. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX+. RX+ and RX-
comprise a differential communications pair.
RX- iBox receive, negative going serial communication stream from iLink to
iBox. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX-.
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair RX+/RX-
DZ Door Zone Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ULM Up Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
DLM Down Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
INCT Cartop Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110

VDC.
ICTU Cartop Inspection Station UP Button input (includes SAF button). Acti-
vated = 110 VDC.
ICTD Cartop Inspection Station DN Button input (includes SAF button). Acti-
vated = 110 VDC.
INCP COP Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
CAR
ICPU COP Inspection Station UP Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICPD COP Inspection Station DN Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.
INA Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input. 0 VDC active signal
level. Off = 110 VDC.
ESC Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input. 0 VDC active signal level stops
car. Off = 110 VDC.
DCL Door Close Limit input. Door fully closed, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not
closed signal level, 120 VAC.
DOL Door Open Limit input. Door fully open, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not
open signal level, 120 VAC.
DPM Door Position Monitor input. Door closed, input inactive, 120 VAC. Door
not closed, 0 VAC.
9-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

UNTD Up Normal Limit Direction switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch
closed. 0 VDC = input off/switch open.
UNT5 Up Slowdown Limit switch #5 input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed.
9
0 VDC = input off/switch open.
UETS Up Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch
LIMITS
DNT1 Down Slowdown Limit switch #1 input. 110 VDC = input on/switch
DETS Down Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. 110 VDC = input on/
switch closed. 0 VDC = input off/switch open.
DNTD Down Normal Limit Direction switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch
42-02-7223 B8 9-9
Reference
ATU Hoistway Access Top Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
switch (INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here (110
VDC) will cause the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch
electrically between the ATU input and the activating switch will open
and stop the car after it has moved the required distance up the hoist-
way (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW
drawing in the job prints.
ATD Hoistway Access Top Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access
Enable switch (INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here
(110 VDC) will cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway
limit switch electrically between the ATD input and the activating switch
will open and stop the car after it has moved the required distance down
the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -
H/WAY
MRW drawing in the job prints.
ABU Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access
(110 VDC) will cause the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit
switch electrically between the ABU input and the activating switch will
open and stop the car after it has moved the required distance up the
hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW
drawing in the job prints.
ABD Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access
(110 VDC) will cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway
limit switch electrically between the ABD input and the activating switch
will open and stop the car after it has moved the required distance down
the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -
MRW drawing in the job prints.
9-10 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

GS Gate Switch input. The gate switch makes up when the elevator doors
close. When the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input.
When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input. The gate 9
switch may be wired in series with other switches or locks on the eleva-
tor doors (as shown in the job prints) so that if any of the switches do
not make, the GS input will remain low and the car will not run.
DLAT Door Lock Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided (see
INA, ATU, and ATD), the hoistway door lock associated with that landing
is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is
made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open,
there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA is
active and then only in response to the ATU or ATD input.
DLMS Door Lock Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see
INA, ATU, ATD, ABU, and ABD) is not provided, all hoistway door locks
are wired in series between the #3 bus and DLMS. When the switches
are made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When any switch is open,
there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run.
DLAB Door Lock Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is pro-
vided (see INA, ABU, and ABD), the hoistway door lock associated with
that landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the
LOCKS/CONTACTS
switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is
open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless
INA is active and then only in response to the ABU or ABD input.
DCAT Door Contact Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided
(see INA, ATU, ATD, and DLAT), the hoistway door contact associated
with that landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When
the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch
is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless
INA is active and then only in response to the ATU or ATD input.
DCMS Door Contact Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see
INA, ATU, ATD, ABU, and ADB) is not provided, all hoistway door con-
tacts are wired in series between the #3 bus and DCMS. When the
switches are made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When any switch
is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run.
DCAB Door Contact Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is
provided (see INA, ABU, ABD, and DLAB), the hoistway door contact
associated with that landing is connected between the #3 bus and this
input. When the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input.
When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car
will not run unless INA is active and then only in response to the ABU or
ABD input.
GOV Governor input. The governor is connected between the #3 bus and this
input. When the governor switch is made, there is 110 VDC on this input.
It the governor switch trips/opens, there is 0 VDC on this input and the
car will not run.
SP 1 Spare input 1. If used, connect as shown in the job prints.
42-02-7223 B8 9-11
Reference
BD Brake Drive relay indicator. When relay BD (iBox IRB board) is closed to
pick the brake, this LED is ON. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TB Brake Triac active indicator. When the brake triac on the iBox IRB board
is active (completes circuit for BD relay), this LED will light. Monitored by
BRAKE
Safety Processor B.
BRD Brake Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the main brake con-
tactor drops out.
BDRD Brake Drive Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the BD relay
drops out.
MD Motor Drive relay indicator. When relay MD (iBox IRB board) is closed to
enable the motor, this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TM Motor Triac active indicator. When the motor triac on the iBox IRB board
is active (completes circuit for MD relay), this LED will light. Monitored
DRIVE
by Safety Processor B.
MRD Motor Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the main motor con-
tactor drops out.
MDRD Motor Drive Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the MD relay
drops out.
SAFC Safety Cartop input. Cartop safety relays and switches are wired in
series between SAFH (Safety Hoistway) and SAFC. If any contact in the
safety string opens, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not
run. If all safety contacts in the string are closed, there will be 110 VDC
on this input.
SAFETY
SAFH Safety Hoistway input. Hoistway safety relays and switches are wired in
series between the #3 bus and SAFH. The path also includes the Gover-
nor switch, with the GOV connection providing access to the #3 bus via
the governor switch. (#3 to GOV through governor switch, GOV to SAFH
through hoistway safety relays and switches). The job prints for the job
provide specific wiring instructions. If any contact in the safety string
opens, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run. If all
safety string contacts are closed, there will be 110 VDC on this input.
SP1 D Optional input. Job prints will show if and how this is used on a per
installation basis.
SP2 D Optional Brake Pick Switch input. The “Switch “parameters on the Con-
troller > Configuration > Brake > Control tab indicate the state of termi-
nal SP2D (110VDC or 0V) used to indicate that the brake is picked
SPARES
SP2 Optional input. Job prints will show if and how this is used on a per
installation basis.
installation basis.
installation basis.
9-12 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

1 Common Bus connections. 0 V

COMMON
1 Common Bus connections. 0 V 9

2 PI 120 VAC. Fused, 2PI.

120 VAC
2 PI 120 VAC. Fused, 2PI.
2 120 VAC. Fused, F2.
2 120 VAC. Fused, F2.
3 HA 110 VDC. Fused, F3HA.

110 VDC
3 HA 110 VDC. Fused, F3HA.
3 110 VDC. Fused, F3.
3 110 VDC. Fused, F3.
Table 9.4 Expansion Board Connections
Board Connection Signal Description
MOR Out 1 - Out 32 The MOR (Multiple Output Relay) board provides 32 outputs customers
may use as needed for the particular job. Typical uses include activat-
ing chimes, buzzers, lights, etc. Each MOR board is configured accord-
ing to the job survey for a particular job before the system is shipped.
MOR boards may be installed in the iControl cabinet, in the iLink cartop
box, or in the iCentral cabinet (for elevator group controller use). Out-
put selection instructions are transmitted serially to the board. The 32
outputs are divided into five groups (1-4, 5-8, 9-16, 17-24, and 25-
32). According to need, each group can be connected to provide the
required output. Specific connections and output values are specified in
the job prints.
MIAC In 1 - In 32 The MIAC (Multiple Input AC) board provides 32 inputs customers may
use as needed for the particular job. MIAC boards may be installed in
the iControl cabinet, in the iLink cartop box, or in the iCentral cabinet
(for elevator group controller use). Typical uses include car call but-
tons, operating mode switches, etc. Specific connections are detailed in
the job prints.
CAR 1 Common connection. 0V.
CAR +24 +24 VDC power to serial fixtures.

Serial Fixture
CAR CDATA Serial data stream to fixtures.

SF
HALL 1 Common connection. 0V.
HALL +24 +24 VDC power to serial fixtures.
HALL HDATA Serial data stream to fixtures.
42-02-7223 B8 9-13
Reference
Table 9.4 Expansion Board Connections
Board Connection Signal Description
EQSP 1 Earthquake spare sensor input.
ESS Earthquake Seismic Switch input. Normally at 120 VAC. If seismic

Earthquake
switch opens, 0 VDC. Press reset button on IEQ board to reset (after
clearing any potential problems caused by quake).
IEQ
CW2 Along with CW1, “ring and string” input from counterweight movement
sensor. Normally at 24 VDC.
CW1 Along with CW2, “ring and string” input from counterweight movement
sensor. Normally at 24 VDC.
RG1 24V DC power to rope gripper.

Rope Gripper
RG2 Common. 0 VDC.

RG
RG5 Rope gripper input. Normally at 120 VAC. If rope gripper manual oper-
ation is selected, or if rope gripper is triggered, 0 V.
RG7 120 VAC from #2 bus to rope gripper switches.
Field connections are also made to terminal strips in the iControl cabinet. Terminal connec-
tions provided vary from job to job depending upon need. Power distribution connections,
beyond the basic three system buses, are specified in the job prints and are not included here.
Table 9.5 Controller Terminal Strip Connections
Label Signal Description
B1, B2 DC power to motor brake. Voltage across terminals will vary depending upon brake
control method (Low Current Brake Board or iField Brake Module). See your job
prints. Significant voltage may be present even when brake is not picked.
MF1, MF2 DC power to motor field. Voltage across terminals will vary. Significant voltage may
be present even if motor is not running.
15A Final Limit switch. Wired as shown in job prints. 110 VDC when switch is made. 0
VDC when switch in string opens.
15B Pit/Final Limit switch. Wired as shown in job prints. 110 VDC when switch is made.
0 VDC when switch in string opens.
1 System common.
2 120 VAC bus.
3 110 VDC bus.
9-14 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC System and LAN Ethernet
System and LAN Ethernet

Communication between iControl elevator controllers and iCentral group control uses Ethernet
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) over the System network. Commu-
nication between iControl elevator controllers and/or the iCentral group control and personal
computers running iView or other iControl applications is over the LAN (Local Area Network)
network. Cables used in the two systems are color-coded for easy recognition. System cables
9
are orange. LAN cables are blue.
The following tables provide in-depth addressing information for the iControl/iCentral system.
MCE Direct-Connect Port (Links one iBox to one Laptop with iView)
IBox Direct Connect Port “= same as above
IP Subnet Gateway DNS
Any iBox 192.168.193.1 255.255.255.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0
Any PC / Laptop 192.168.193.2 “ “ “
(MCE reserved) All other addresses “ “ “
42-02-7223 B8 9-15
Reference
Elevator LAN Network

Normally extends throughout a building and may span to other buildings, networks, or loca-
tions across the internet/intranet.
“= same as above
LAN Network Hub (Blue cables)
* = see Note #1
(IEEE reserved) 192.168.191.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
Group 1 – LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.2 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.3 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.4 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.5 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.6 “ “ “
iBox – Car 7 192.168.191.7 “ “ “
iBox – Car 8 192.168.191.8 “ “ “
iBox – Car 9 192.168.191.9 “ “ “
iBox – Car 10 192.168.191.10 “ “ “
iBox – Car 11 192.168.191.11 “ “ “
iBox – Car 12 192.168.191.12 “ “ “
iBox – Car 13 192.168.191.13 “ “ “
iBox – Car 14 192.168.191.14 “ “ “
iBox – Car 15 192.168.191.15 “ “ “
iBox – Car 16 192.168.191.16 “ “ “
iBox – Car 17 192.168.191.17 “ “ “
iBox – Car 18 192.168.191.18 “ “ “
iBox – Car 19 192.168.191.19 “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.20 “ “ “
iView 192.168.191.101 – “ “ “
192.168.191.102
iCue 192.168.191.201 – “ “ “
192.168.191.202
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.21 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.22 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.23 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.24 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.25 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.26 “ “ “
iBox – Car 7 192.168.191.27 “ “ “
iBox – Car 8 192.168.191.28 “ “ “
iBox – Car 9 192.168.191.29 “ “ “
iBox – Car 10 192.168.191.30 “ “ “
iBox – Car 11 192.168.191.31 “ “ “
iBox – Car 12 192.168.191.32 “ “ “
9-16 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iBox – Car 13 192.168.191.33 “ “ “

iBox – Car 14 192.168.191.34 “ “ “
iBox – Car 15 192.168.191.35 “ “ “
iBox – Car 16 192.168.191.36 “ “ “
iBox – Car 17 192.168.191.37 “ “ “
iBox – Car 18 192.168.191.38 “ “ “ 9
iBox – Car 19 192.168.191.39 “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.40 “ “ “
192.168.191.103 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.104
192.168.191.203 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.204
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.41 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.42 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.43 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.44 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.45 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.46 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.60 “ “ “
192.168.191.105 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.106
192.168.191.205 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.206
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.61 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.62 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.63 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.64 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.65 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.66 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.80 “ “ “
192.168.191.107 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.108
192.168.191.207 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.208
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.81 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.82 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.83 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.84 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.85 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.86 “ “ “
42-02-7223 B8 9-17
Reference
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.100 “ “ “
192.168.191.109 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.110
192.168.191.209 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.210
Group 6– LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.121 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.122 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.123 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.124 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.125 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.126 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.140 “ “ “
192.168.191.111 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.112
192.168.191.211 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.212
Group 7– LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.141 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.142 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.143 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.144 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.145 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.146 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.160 “ “ “
192.168.191.113 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.114
192.168.191.213 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.214
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.161 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.162 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.163 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.164 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.165 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.166 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.180 “ “ “
192.168.191.115 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.116
192.168.191.215 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.216
9-18 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.181 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.182 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.183 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.184 “ “ “
9
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.185 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.186 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.200 “ “ “
192.168.191.117 – “ “ “
iView
192.168.191.118
192.168.191.217 – “ “ “
iCue
192.168.191.218
Note
#1: This parameter may have a site-dependant value depending on the unique DSL service or
internet connection details. The default value shown can be used until a new value is identified.
There may be more than one of these values provided.
Summary
This is a summary of the entire LAN IP address space including MCE supplied equipment and
non-MCE supplied equipment.
LAN Network IP Address Summary Map For Network=192.168.191.*)

IP
(IEEE non-usable) 192.168.191.0
IBox (Groups 1, 2, 3 4, 5) 192.168.191.1 - 192.168.191.100
iView 192.168.191.101 - 192.168.191.120
IBox (Groups 6, 7, 8, 9) 192.168.191.121 - 192.168.191.200
ICue 192.168.191.201 - 192.168.191.220
iMonitor 192.168.191.221 - 192.168.191.222
With Optional Third-party Access
3rd-Party access address 192.168.191.223
With Optional Firewall / Router / Modem Dial-in
DHCP addresses / 192.168.191.224 - 192.168.191.245
VPN Tunnel addresses /
Extra Dial-in addresses /
Extra Static IP addresses
Static IP addresses 192.168.191.246 – 192.168.191.251
First Dial-in address 192.168.191.252
MCE Reserved 192.168.192.253
Firewall / Router 192.168.191.254
(IEEE non-usable) 192.168.191.255
42-02-7223 B8 9-19
Reference
Summary by Group
Group #1 – Floors ( ) Machine Room Floor ( )
Group #1 -iBox Direct Connect Port “= same as above
Any iBox 192.168.193.1 255.255.255.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0
Any PC / Laptop 192.168.193.2 “ “ “
Group #1 -MCE System Network (Orange cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.192.1 “ “ “
iBox – Car 2 192.168.192.2 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.192.3 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.192.4 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.192.5 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.192.6 “ “ “
iBox – Car 7 192.168.192.7 “ “ “
iBox – Car 8 192.168.192.8 “ “ “
iBox – Car 9 192.168.192.9 “ “ “
iBox – Car 10 192.168.192.10 “ “ “
iBox – Car 11 192.168.192.11 “ “ “
iBox – Car 12 192.168.192.12 “ “ “
iBox – Car 13 192.168.192.13 “ “ “
iBox – Car 14 192.168.192.14 “ “ “
iBox – Car 15 192.168.192.15 “ “ “
iBox – Car 16 192.168.192.16 “ “ “
iBox – Car 17 192.168.192.17 “ “ “
iBox – Car 18 192.168.192.18 “ “ “
iBox – Car 19 192.168.192.19 “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.192.20 “ “ “
192.168.192.201 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.192.202
Digi Hall Calls 192.168.192.211 “ “ “

UDP 3000- –
3007 192.168.192.214
9-20 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Group #1 -LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.2 “ “ “

9
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.3 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.4 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.5 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.6 “ “ “
iBox – Car 7 192.168.191.7 “ “ “
iBox – Car 8 192.168.191.8 “ “ “
iBox – Car 9 192.168.191.9 “ “ “
iBox – Car 10 192.168.191.10 “ “ “
iBox – Car 11 192.168.191.11 “ “ “
iBox – Car 12 192.168.191.12 “ “ “
iBox – Car 13 192.168.191.13 “ “ “
iBox – Car 14 192.168.191.14 “ “ “
iBox – Car 15 192.168.191.15 “ “ “
iBox – Car 16 192.168.191.16 “ “ “
iBox – Car 17 192.168.191.17 “ “ “
iBox – Car 18 192.168.191.18 “ “ “
iBox – Car 19 192.168.191.19 “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.20 “ “ “
192.168.191.101 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.102
192.168.191.201 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.202
42-02-7223 B8 9-21
Reference
Group #2 – LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.21 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.22 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.23 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.24 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.25 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.26 “ “ “
iBox – Car 7 192.168.191.27 “ “ “
iBox – Car 8 192.168.191.28 “ “ “
iBox – Car 9 192.168.191.29 “ “ “
iBox – Car 10 192.168.191.30 “ “ “
iBox – Car 11 192.168.191.31 “ “ “
iBox – Car 12 192.168.191.32 “ “ “
iBox – Car 13 192.168.191.33 “ “ “
iBox – Car 14 192.168.191.34 “ “ “
iBox – Car 15 192.168.191.35 “ “ “
iBox – Car 16 192.168.191.36 “ “ “
iBox – Car 17 192.168.191.37 “ “ “
iBox – Car 18 192.168.191.38 “ “ “
iBox – Car 19 192.168.191.39 “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.40 “ “ “
192.168.191.103 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.104
192.168.191.203 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.204
9-22 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Group #3 - LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.41 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* * 9
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.42 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.43 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.44 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.45 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.46 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.60 “ “ “
192.168.191.105 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.106
192.168.191.205 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.206
Group 4 – Floors ( ) Machine Room Floor ( )
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.61 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.62 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.63 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.64 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.65 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.66 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.80 “ “ “
192.168.191.107 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.108
192.168.191.207 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.208
42-02-7223 B8 9-23
Reference
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.81 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.82 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.83 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.84 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.85 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.86 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.100 “ “ “
192.168.191.109 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.110
192.168.191.209 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.210
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.121 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.122 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.123 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.124 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.125 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.126 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.140 “ “ “
192.168.191.111 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.112
192.168.191.211 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.212
9-24 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.141 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* * 9
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.142 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.143 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.144 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.145 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.146 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.160 “ “ “
192.168.191.113 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.114
192.168.191.213 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.214
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.161 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.162 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.163 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.164 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.165 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.166 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.180 “ “ “
192.168.191.115 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.116
192.168.191.215 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.216
42-02-7223 B8 9-25
Reference
iBox – Car 1 192.168.191.181 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.25 192.168.191.254

4* *
iBox – Car 2 192.168.191.182 “ “ “
iBox – Car 3 192.168.191.183 “ “ “
iBox – Car 4 192.168.191.184 “ “ “
iBox – Car 5 192.168.191.185 “ “ “
iBox – Car 6 192.168.191.186 “ “ “
… … “ “ “
iBox – Car 20 192.168.191.200 “ “ “
192.168.191.117 “ “ “
iView –
192.168.191.118
192.168.191.217 “ “ “
iCue –
192.168.191.218
9-26 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

iControl DC Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference
Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference

This section includes quick reference information for the Quattro DC Drive parameters. Please
refer to the Quattro DC Elevator Drive Technical Manual provided with the drive for a detailed
explanation.
Table 9.6 Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference 9

Menu Parameter Units Range Default Factory Setting
fpm 0.0 – 1500.0 100.0
A1 CONTRACT CAR SPD *________
m/s 0.000 – 8.000 2.000
A1 CONTRACT MTR SPD RPM 30.0 – 3000.0 50.0 *________
A1 RESPONSE rad/sec 1.0 – 20.0 5.0 1.0
A1 INERTIA sec 0.25 – 50.00 2.00 2.00
A1 INNER LOOP XOVER rad/sec 0.1 – 20.0 2.0 1.0
A1 CURRENT LIMIT % 0.0 – 275.0 250.0 250.0
A1 GAIN REDUCE MULT % 10 – 100 100 100
A1 GAIN CHNG LEVEL % of rated spd 0.0 – 100.0 100.0 100.0
A1 TACH FILTER BW rad/sec 1 – 100 100 100
A1 TACH RATE GAIN none 0.0 – 30.0 0.0 0.0
A1 SPD PHASE MARGIN degrees 45 – 90 80 80
A1 RAMPED STOP TIME sec 0.00 – 2.50 0.20 0.20
A1 CONTACT FLT TIME sec 0.10 – 5.00 0.50 0.50
A1 BRAKE PICK TIME sec 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 1.00
A1 BRAKE HOLD TIME sec 0.00 – 5.00 0.50 0.50
A1 OVERSPEED LEVEL % of contract spd 90.0 – 150.0 115.0 115.0
A1 OVERSPEED TIME sec 0.00 – 9.99 0.10 1.00
A1 OVERSPEED MULT % 100.0 – 150.0 125.0 125.0
A1 ENCODER PULSES PPR 600 – 20000 5000 *________
A1 ENC RATIO MULT none 0.001 – 32.000 1.000 1.000
A1 SPD DEV LO LEVEL % of contract spd 0.1 – 20.0 10.0 10.0
A1 SPD DEV TIME sec 0.00 – 9.99 0.50 1.50
A1 SPD DEV HI LEVEL % of contract spd 0.0 – 99.9 10.0 10.0
A1 SPD COMMAND BIAS volts 0.00 – 6.00 0.00 0.00
A1 SPD COMMAND MULT none 0.90 – 5.00 1.00 1.00
A1 EXT TORQUE BIAS volts -6.00 – +6.00 0.00 0.00
A1 EXT TORQUE MULT none -10.00 – +10.00 1.00 1.00
A1 PRE TORQUE TIME sec 0.00 –10.00 0.00 ?
A1 ZERO SPEED LEVEL % of contract spd 0.00 – 99.99 1.00 1.00
A1 ZERO SPEED TIME sec 0.00 – 9.99 0.10 0.10
A1 UP/DWN THRESHOLD % of contract spd 0.00 – 9.99 1.00 1.00
A1 ANA 1 OUT OFFSET % -99.9 – +99.9 0.0 0.0
A1 ANA 2 OUT OFFSET % -99.9 – +99.9 0.0 0.0
A1 ANA 1 OUT GAIN none 0.0 – 10.0 1.0 1.0
A1 ANA 2 OUT GAIN none 0.0 – 10.0 1.0 1.0
A1 FLT RESET DELAY sec 0 – 120 5 5
A1 FLT RESETS/HOUR faults 0 – 10 3 3
A1 UP TO SPD. LEVEL % of contract spd 0.00 – 110.00 90.00 90.00
A1 RUN DELAY TIMER sec 0.00 – 0.99 0.00 0.00
A1 AB ZERO SPD LEV % 0.00 – 2.00 1.00 1.00
A1 AB OFF DELAY sec 0.00 – 9.99 0.00 0.00
A1 CONTACTOR DO DLY sec 0.00 – 5.00 0.00 0.00
A1 TRQ LIM MSG DLY sec 0.00 – 10.00 0.50 0.50
42-02-7223 B8 9-27
Reference
Table 9.6 Quattro DC Drive Parameters Quick Reference

A1 ROLLBACK GAIN none 1 – 99 1 1
A1 NOTCH FILTER FRQ Hz 5 – 60 20 20
A1 NOTCH FILT DEPTH % 0 – 100 0 0
A1 STNDBY FLD TIME sec 0 – 999 5 30
A1 DSPR TIME min 0 – 500 10 10
A1 FullFldFaultTime min 0 – 99 1 1

A2 S-Curves A2 Submenu
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 7.99
A2 ACCEL RATE 0 7.99
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 2.000
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 7.99
A2 DECEL RATE 0 7.99
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 2.000
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 0.0
A2 ACCEL JERK IN 0 0.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 0.00
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 0.0
A2 ACCEL JERK OUT 0 0.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 0.00
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 0.0
A2 DECEL JERK IN 0 0.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 0.00
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 0.0
A2 DECEL JERK OUT 0 0.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 0.00
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 7.00
A2 ACCEL RATE 1 7.00
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 0.090
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 3.00
A2 DECEL RATE 1 3.00
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 0.090
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 3.00
A2 ACCEL RATE 2 3.0
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 0.090
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 3.00
A2 DECEL RATE 2 3.0
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 0.090
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 3.00
A2 ACCEL RATE 3 3.0
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 0.090
ft/s2 0.00 – 7.99 3.00
A2 DECEL RATE 3 3.0
m/s2 0.000 – 3.999 0.090
9-28 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0

m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40
ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0
8.0
A2 DECEL JERK IN 3
m/s3 0.00 – 9.99 2.40 9
A2 DECEL JERK OUT 3 ft/s3 0.0 – 29.9 8.0 8.0

A3 Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
A3 SPEED COMMAND 1 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
42-02-7223 B8 9-29
Reference
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0

m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000
ft/min -3000.0 – +3000.0 0.0
m/sec -16.000 – +16.000 0.000

A4 Motor Side Power Convert A4 Submenu
A4 ARM INDUCTANCE mH 0.01 – 327.67 15.00 129.21
A4 ARM RESISTANCE ohm 0.0001 – 2.9999 0.5000 2.5444
A4 MTR REV VLT LIM % 0.01 – 30.00 12.00 2606
A4 MOTOR FIELD RES ohm 0.0 – 3276.7 9.0
A4 MOTOR FIELD TC sec 0.000 – 32.767 0.607
A4 AUTO TUNE MOTOR none − Start Autotune? -
− manual − use
USE SELF
A4 GAIN SELECTION none saved par − use MANUAL TUNE
self tune
A4 GAIN BANDWIDTH A rad/sec 100 – 2000 500 500
A4 GAIN BANDWIDTH F rad/sec 1 – 40 5 5
A4 SPD MODEFILT BW rad/sec 5 – 110 100 100
A4 PWM FREQUENCY kHz 2.5 – 16.0 6.0 6
A4 FAN OFF DELAY sec 0 – 999 180 180
− time − TEMPERATURE
A4 MAIN FAN CONTROL none TEMPERATURE
temperature
A4 UV ALARM LEVEL % 80 – 99 90 90
A4 UV FAULT LEVEL % 50 – 99 80 80
A4 FLD CARRIER FRQ kHz 3 – 40 3 3
A5 Line Side Power converter A5 Submenu
A5 Id REG PROP GAIN none 0.00 – 9.99 0.30 0.30
A5 Id REG INTGRL GAIN none 0 – 999 10 10
A5 Iq REG PROP GAIN none 0.00 – 9.99 0.30 0.30
A5 Iq REG INTGRL GAIN none 0 – 999 40 40
A5 DC BUS REG P GAIN none 0.00 – 9.99 3.00 3.00
A5 DC BUS REG I GAIN none 0 – 999 40 40
A5 INPUT L-L VOLTS volts 150 – 552 200 480
A5 INITIAL L FREQ Hz 50 – 60 55
A5 DC BUS V BOOST volts 15 – 75 30 30
A5 SW BUS OV LEVEL volts 100 – 850 850 850
− track line v − trk
A5 BUS VREF SOURCE none TRACK LINE V TRACK LINE V
vin param
A5 PLL FILTER FC Hz 20.0 – 150.0 40.0 40.0
A5 POLE FILTER kHz 0.0 – 3.0 2.2
A5 PRE CHGE THRESH none 1 – 60 28 28
A5 LS PWM FREQUENCY kHz 8.0 – 12.0 10.0 10.0
9-30 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8


A6 Motor A6 Submenu
A6 MOTOR ID none - -
A6 RATED MOTOR CURR amps 1.0 – 400.0 0.0 53
A6 ARMATURE VOLTAGE volts 55 – 600 0 375 9
A6 FULL FLD CURRENT amps 1.0 – 40.0 0.0 13.0
A6 WEAK FLD CURRENT amps 1.0 – 40.0 0.0 10.4
A6 STANDBY FIELD amps 0.0 – 40.0 0.0 3.0
A6 FLUX CONFIRM LEV % 25.0 – 99.0 85.0 55.0
A6 ARMATURE IR DROP % 0.0 – 25.0 0.0 6.0
A6 TACH VOLT SENSE % 0.1 – 60.0 25.0 25.0
A6 TACH SPEED SENSE % 0.1 – 40.0 5.0 5.0
A6 OVLD START LEVEL % 100 – 150 110 110
A6 OVLD TIME OUT sec 5.0 – 120.0 60.0 60.0
A6 SAVE MEAS ARM L mH 0.00 – 327.67 0.00 121.6
A6 SAVE IR DROP % 0.0 – 3276.7 0.0 35.2
A6 SAVE MEAS ARM R ohm 0.0000 – 3.2767 0.0000 2.5029
A6 SAVE FIELD RES ohm 0.0 – 3276.7 0.00 13.2
A6 SAVE FIELD TC sec 0.000 – 32.767 0.000 0.440
C1 User Switches C1 Submenu
− serial
− multi-step
C1 SPD COMMAND SRC none − ser mult step MULTI-STEP ANALOG INPUT
− analog input
− external tb
C1 RUN COMMAND SRC none − serial EXTERNAL TB EXTERNAL TB
− serial+extrn
− external tb
− serial ENABLE ON
C1 FIELD ENA SOURCE none − enable on run ENABLE ON RUN
RUN
− 2-bit serial
− internal
C1 HI/LO GAIN SRC none − external tb INTERNAL INTERNAL
− serial
− elev spd reg
− pi speed reg
C1 SPEED REG TYPE none − external reg ELEV SPD REG ELEV SPD REG
− cemf reg
− forward
C1 MOTOR ROTATION none − reverse FORWARD FORWARD
− forward
C1 ENCODER CONNECT none − reverse FORWARD FORWARD
− reg release
C1 SPD REF RELEASE none − brake picked REG RELEASE REG RELEASE
− external tb
C1 CONT CONFIRM SRC none − none NONE NONE
− off
C1 TACH FILTER none − on OFF OFF
− none
C1 PreTorque SOURCE none − analog input NONE NONE
− serial
− latched
C1 PreTorque LATCH none − not latched NOT LATCHED NOT LATCHED
− external tb
C1 PTorq LATCH CLCK none − seria EXTERNAL TB EXTERNAL TB
42-02-7223 B8 9-31
Reference

-- external tb
C1 FAULT RESET SRC none -- serial EXTERNAL TB EXTERNAL TB
-- automatic
C1 OVERSPD TEST SRC none -- external tb EXTERNAL TB EXTERNAL TB
-- external tb
C1 BRAKE PICK SRC none EXTERNAL TB EXTERNAL TB
-- serial
− none
C1 BRAKE PICK CNFM none − external tb NONE NONE
− internal time
-- internal
C1 BRAKE HOLD SRC none INTERNAL INTERNAL
-- serial
-- none
C1 RAMPED STOP SEL none NONE NONE
-- ramp on stop
-- external tb
C1 RAMP DOWN EN SRC none -- run logic EXTERNAL TB EXTERNAL TB
-- serial
-- disable
C1 BRK PICK FLT ENA none DISABLE DISABLE
-- enable
-- disable
C1 BRK HOLD FLT ENA none DISABLE DISABLE
-- enable
-- none
C1 EXT TORQ CMD SRC none -- serial NONE NONE
-- analog input
-- disable
C1 DIR CONFIRM none DISABLE DISABLE
-- enable
-- disable
C1 S-CURVE ABORT none DISABLE DISABLE
-- enable
-- disable
C1 PRIORITY MESSAGE none ENABLE DISABLE
-- enable
-- immediate
C1 STOPPING MODE none IMMEDIATE IMMEDIATE
-- ramp to stop
-- disable
C1 AUTO STOP none DISABLE DISABLE
-- enable
-- disable
C1 DSPR ENABLE none DISABLE DISABLE
-- enable
C2 Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
C2 N.C. INPUTS None Hex Number 0x01 001 Hex
-- contact cfirm -- ospd test src CONTACT CFIRM
C2 LOGIC INPUT 1 TB1(1) CONTACT CFIRM
-- ctr pwr sense -- pre-trq latch
C2 LOGIC INPUT 2 TB1(2) CTR PWR SENSE CTR PWR SENSE
-- drive enable -- run
C2 LOGIC INPUT 3 TB1(3) -- extrn fault 1 -- run down NO FUNCTION NO FUNCTION
-- extrn fault 2 -- run up
C2 LOGIC INPUT 4 TB1(4) DRIVE ENABLE DRIVE ENABLE
-- extrn fault 3 -- s-curve sel -
C2 LOGIC INPUT 5 TB1(5) -- extrn /flt 4 -- s-curve sel 1 RUN NO FUNCTION
-- fault reset -- ser2insp ena RUN
C2 LOGIC INPUT 6 TB1(6) UP/DWN
-- field enable -- step ref b0
C2 LOGIC INPUT 7 TB1(7) STEP REF B0 NO FUNCTION
-- low gain sel -- step ref b2
C2 LOGIC INPUT 8 TB1(8) -- mech brk hold -- step ref b2 STEP REF B1 NO FUNCTION
-- mech brk pick -- trq ramnp down
C2 LOGIC INPUT 9 TB1(9) FAULT RESET FAULT RESET
-- no function -- up/dwn
9-32 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

C3 Logic Outputs C3 Submenu

LOGIC OUTPUT 1 CLOSE CLOSE CONTACT
C3
TB1(25) − alarm − no function CONTACT
LOGIC OUTPUT 2 − alarm+flt − not alarm RUN
9
C3 − auto brake − over curr flt RUN COMMAND
TB1(26) COMMANDED
− brake hold − overspeed flt
LOGIC OUTPUT 3 MTR MTR OVERLOAD
C3 − brake pick − overtemp flt
TB1(27) OVERLOAD
− brk hold flt − overvolt flt
LOGIC OUTPUT 4 − brk pick flt − ovrtemp alarm ENCODER FLT
C3 ENCODER FLT
TB1(28) − car going dwn − phase fault
LOGIC OUTPUT 5 − car going up − ramp down ena
C3 FAULT FAULT
TB1(29) − charge fault − ready 2 start
LOGIC OUTPUT 6 − close contact − ready to run SPEED REG
C3 − contactor flt − regen trq lim SPEED REG RLS
TB1(30) RLS
− curr reg flt − run commanded
LOGIC OUTPUT 7 SPEED REG SPEED REG RLS
C3 − drv overload − run confirm
TB1(31) RLS
− encoder flt − speed dev
C3 SSR1 TB1(21/22) − fault − speed dev low NO FUNCTION READY TO RUN
C3 SSR2 TB1(23/24) − flux confirm − speed ref rls NO FUNCTION SPEED REG RLS
− ground fault − speed reg rls
RELAY COIL 1 TB2 (1/ READ 2 START
C3 − in low gain − undervolt flt NO FUNCTION
3/5)
− motor trq lim − up to speed
− mtr overload − uv alarm
RELAY COIL 2 TB2 (8/ FLUX CONFIRM
C3 − no faults − zero speed NO FUNCTION
10/12)
C4 Analog Outputs C4 Submenu – See Analog Outputs C4 submenu on page 70

− analog addr2 − pretorque ref
− analog addr3 − motor mode
C4 ANA OUT 1 TB1-12 − arm current − spd rg tq cmd SPEED REF SPEED REF
− arm voltage − speed command
− aux torq cmd − speed error
− bus voltage − speed feedbk
− est motor spd − speed ref
SPEED SPEED FEEDBK
C4 ANA OUT 2 TB1-13 − field current − tach rate cmd
FEEDBK
− iarm error − tach speed
− ls pwr input − torque ref
42-02-7223 B8 9-33
Reference
Menu Parameter Unit Menu Parameter Unit

D1 Elevator Data Submenu D3 Input Hz Hz
D1 Speed Command ft/min or m/sec D3 Input Vab Volts
D1 Speed Reference ft/min or m/sec D3 Input Vca Volts
D1 Speed Feedback ft/min or m/sec D3 LS Module Temp “C
D1 Motor Speed RPM
D1 Speed Error ft/min or m/sec Menu Parameter Unit
D1 Pre-Torque Ref % of rated torque U1 Password U1 Submenu
D1 Ext-Torque Cmd % of rated current U1 Enter password
D1 Spd Reg Torq Cmd % of rated torque U1 New password
D1 Tach Rate Cmd % of rated torque U1 Password Lockout
D1 Aux Torque Cmd % of rated torque U2 Hidden Items U2 Submenu
D1 Est Inertia Seconds U2 Hidden Items Enable
D1 Rx Com Status 1 = true; 0 = false U3 Units U3 Submenu
D1 Logic Outputs 1 = true; 0 = false U3 Units Selection
D1 Logic Inputs 1 = true; 0 = false U4 Overspeed Test U4 Submenut
D1 Rx Logic Input 1 = true; 0 = false U4 Overspeed Test
D2 MS Power Data Submenu U5 Restore Dflts U5 Submenu
D2 Armature Current Amps U5 Restore Motor Dflts
D2 Field Current Amps U5 Restore Drive Dflts
D2 Armature Voltage Volts U5 Restore Utility Dflts
D2 MS Bus Voltage Volts U6 Motor Side Info U6 Submenu
D2 Motor Mode None U6 MS Type
D2 Torque Ref % U6 MS Platform
D2 Est Spd Fdbk ft/min or m/sec U6 Field Module
D2 Encoder Speed ft/min or m/sec U6 MS Code Version
D2 Analog Addess2 none U6 MS S/W Date
D2 Analog Addess3 none U6 MS S/W Time
D2 DS Module Temp °C U6 MS FPGA Rev
D2 LS Module Temp °C U6 MS Cube ID
D2 Highest Temp °C U7 Line Side Info U7 Submenu
D2 Field IGBT Temp °C U7 LS Type
D2 Armature Cur Err Amps U7 LS Code Version
D2 Auto Meas Arm L mH U7 LS S/W Date
D2 Auto Meas IRDrop % U7 LS S/W Time
D2 Auto Meas Arm R Ohm U7 LS FPGA Rev
D2 Auto Field Res Ohm U7 LS Cube ID
D2 Auto Field Tc sec U8 Hex Monitor1 U8 Submenu
D3 LS Power Data Submenu U8 Addr1
D3 LS Pwr Input kW U8 Addr2&
D3 DC Bus Volts Volts U8 Addr3&
D3 DC Bus Volts Ref Volts F1 Active Faults F1 Submenu
D3 LS Overload % F1 Display Active Faults
D3 LS Input Current Amps F1 Reset Active Faults
D3 LS D Axis I % F2 Faults History F2 Submenu
D3 LS Q Axis I % F2 Display Fault History
D3 LS D Axis V % F2 Clear Fault History
D3 LS Q Axis V % F2 Display Fault Counters
9-34 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Index
Symbols
.cfg file, iView configuration file 8-21 Final approach 4-19
Leveling speed 4-33
Numerics Load thresholds 4-39
Load Weigher 4-38, 4-40
1 = LAN port 2-5
overshoot 4-18
1 bus, Common bus connections 9-13, 9-14
Overspeed Margins 4-61
110 VDC Bus Connections, iBox 9-13
Pattern parameters 4-18
120 VAC Bus Connections, iBox 9-13
Pretorque 4-20
15A, Final Limit switch connection 9-14
Releveling 4-36
15B, Pit/Final Limit switch connection 9-14
Ride quality 4-37
2 = System port 2-5
System 12 Drive 2-25
2 bus, 120 VAC connections 9-13, 9-14
Tachometer Error tripping threshold 4-49
2 PI bus, 120 VAC connections 9-13
adjusting car speed (Quattro DC) 2-58
3 = PC port 2-5
ALT SPEED PROFILE 1 message 6-14
3 bus, 110 VDC connections 9-13, 9-14
ALT SPEED PROFILE 2 message 6-14
3 HA bus, 110 VDC connections 9-13
Alternate 1 profile 4-18
Alternate 2 profile 4-18
A ALTERNATE FLOOR SMOKE message 6-14
A-, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7 Alternate Floor Smoke Sensor Recall message 6-14
A+, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7 Alternate Speed Profile 1 Activated message 6-14
ABD, Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input 6-109, 9-10 Alternate Speed Profile 1 Deactivated message 6-14
ABU, Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input 6-109, 9-10 Alternate Speed Profile 1 message 6-14
AC supply 5-2 Alternate Speed Profile 2 Activated message 6-14
Acceleration (Command) test point, description 9-3 Alternate Speed Profile 2 Deactivated message 6-14
Acceleration (Directional) test point, description 9-3 Alternate Speed Profile 2 message 6-14
Acceleration (Filtered) test point, description 9-3 Anti-nuisance controls 4-39
Acceleration (Interpolated) test point, description 9-3 Approach deceleration parameter 4-17
Acceleration (Raw) test point, description 9-3 Approach jerk parameter 4-17
Acceleration (Slew) test point, description 9-3 Armature Active Status test point, description 9-3
Acceleration parameter 4-17 Armature Command (Control) test point, description 9-3
Acceleration specification 9-2 Armature Command (Damped) test point, description 9-3
accessing online help 8-24 Armature Command (Raw) test point, description 9-3
acquiring write privilege 2-17 Armature Composite Control test point, description 9-3
Actual speed, calibrating (Quattro DC) 2-58 Armature Control Set test point, description 9-3
ADC, verifying ADC conversion 2-25 Armature Current Dampen Feedback test point, description
Adding a circuit board 6-78 9-3
Adjusting Armature Current Signal test point, description 9-3
Brake coordination 4-35 Armature Current Synthetic Feedback test point, description
Brake drop delay 4-33 9-3
Brake parameters 4-27 Armature Differential Command test point, description 9-3
Brake Resistance 2-11 Armature Differential Gain test point, description 9-3
Dead zone 4-34 Armature Error (Damped) test point, description 9-4
Emergency slowdown 4-59 Armature Error (Raw) test point, description 9-4
Final Approach 4-33 Armature Feedforward (Control) test point, description 9-4
Index-1
Armature Feedforward (Raw) test point, description 9-4 Brake Current Resistance 2-11
Armature Integral Command test point, description 9-4 Brake Current Signal test point, description 9-4
Armature Integral Gain test point, description 9-4 Brake Drive Redundancy indicator 9-12
Armature On Status test point, description 9-4 Brake drop delay, adjusting for final stop 4-33
Armature overcurrent overload protection adjustment (Sys- BRAKE DROP FAULT message 6-16
tem 12) 4-50 Brake Drop Fault message 6-16
Armature Proportional Command test point, description 9-4 Brake Enable Fault message 6-16
Armature Proportional Gain test point, description 9-4 Brake Enable Status test point, description 9-4
Armature Voltage Dampen Feedback test point, description Brake IGBT Fault, see Excessive Brake Feedback Fault mes-
9-4 sage 6-34
Armature Voltage Limit, setting for System 12 drive 4-6 Brake Module Over Temperature Fault message 6-16
Armature Voltage Signal (System 12) 4-9 Brake Output Circuit Failure message 6-16
Armature Voltage Signal test point, description 9-4 BRAKE OUTPUT FAILURE message 6-16
Armature Voltage Synthetic Feedback test point, description BRAKE OVER TEMP FAULT message 6-16
9-4 Brake pick delay
Ascending Car Overspeed Fault message 6-14 adjusting 3-14
ASCND CAR OVR SPD FLT message 6-14 BRAKE PICK FAULT message 6-17
ATD, Hoistway Access Top Down switch input 6-109, 9-10 Brake Pick Fault message 6-17
Attendant Service message 6-14 Brake Pick Fault Off message 6-17
Attendant Svc message 6-14 Brake picking, adjusting (Quattro DC) 2-56
ATU, Hoistway Access Top Up switch input 6-109, 9-10 Brake Switch 3-6
automated drive setup (Quattro DC) 2-49 Brake Switch input 3-6
Automatic Stop message 6-14 Brake Triac active indicator 9-12
BRAKE V NOT OFF FAULT message 6-17
B BRAKE V NOT ON FAULT message 6-17
B-, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7 Brake Voltage Feedback test point, description 9-4
B+, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7 Brake Voltage Not Off Fault message 6-17
B1, B2, DC power to motor brake 9-14 Brake Voltage Not On Fault message 6-17
Backup power direction reversal message 6-14 Brake Voltage Signal test point, description 9-4
BACKUP POWER RECALL message 6-15 BRD, Brake Redundancy indicator 9-12
Backup power recall OFF message 6-14 Bus 2 Fuse Open message 6-17
Backup power recall ON message 6-15 Bus 2D Fuse Open message 6-17
Backup power unit failure activated message 6-15 Bus 2MC Fuse Open message 6-17
Backup power unit failure deactivated message 6-15 Bus 2PI Fuse Open message 6-17
Backup power unit failure message 6-15 Bus 3 Fuse Open message 6-17
Balanced Mode message 6-15 Bus 3HA Fuse Open message 6-18
BATTERY VLTG LOW-IMP message 6-15 Bus Enabled 5-13
Battery Voltage Low-IMP message 6-15 Bus Status 5-13
BD, Brake Drive relay indicator 9-12 Bus Voltage 5-13
BDRD, Brake Drive Redundancy indicator 9-12 Button Bar 8-18
Blocking New Remote Connections message 6-15 Bypass Jumper, using for troubleshooting 6-3
BLOCKING REMOTE UIS message 6-15
Boot parameter recovery utility 8-49 C
Brake Cabinet Installation 2-6
adjust to control rollback (Quattro DC) 2-53 Calibrate Floor offsets 4-30
auto calibration procedure (Quattro DC) 2-54 Calibrate Motor Field (System 12) 2-29
Brake monitoring 3-6 Capture Input OFF message 6-18
iBox connections 9-12 Capture Input ON message 6-18
Resistance 2-11 Capture message 6-18
wiring 2-11 Capture Mode message 6-18
Brake adjustments to control rollback (System 12) 2-33 Capture Mode switch, iBox control 7-11
Brake calibration (Quattro DC) 2-53–2-56 Car Calls, how to register 4-4
Brake calibration (System 12) 2-33–2-36 Car Connections, iBox 6-108, 9-8
BRAKE CNT DRV PRF FLT message 6-15 CAR DEL DOORS CLOSED message 6-18
BRAKE CONT PRF FAULT message 6-15 CAR DEL DOORS CLOSING message 6-18
Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault message 6-15 CAR DEL DOORS OPEN message 6-18
Brake Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-15 CAR DEL DOORS OPENING message 6-18
Brake Contactor Status test point, description 9-4 CAR DEL DOORS STALLED message 6-18
Brake coordination, adjusting for smooth stops 4-35 CAR DEL DOORS UNKNOWN message 6-19
Brake Current Feedback test point, description 9-4 Car delayed with doors closed message 6-18
Index-2 Manual # 42-02-7223

Car delayed with doors closing message 6-18 Cartop Inspection Enabled message 6-22
Car delayed with doors open message 6-18 Cartop Inspection Inputs OK message 6-22
Car delayed with doors opening message 6-18 Cartop Inspection message 6-22
Car delayed with doors stalled message 6-18 Cartop Inspection Operation message 6-22
Car delayed with unknown door position message 6-19 Cartop Inspection Unintended Motion Fault message 6-23
Car Door Bypass message 6-19 Cartop Inspection Wiring 2-16
Car Door Bypass switch, iBox control 7-11 Cartop interconnections 1-5
Car Heavy Load - Deactivated message 6-19 Cartop Link Connections, iBox 6-108, 9-8
Car Heavy Load Activated - Hall Calls Bypassed message 6-19 Cartop Power Loss message 6-23
CAR HEAVY LOAD message 6-19 Cartop Processor Board Quick Reference 6-83
Car identifier parameter 4-63 Cartop Safety Relay 2-15
CAR OS DOORS CLOSED message 6-19 Cartop Safety Relay Bypass 2-15
CAR OS DOORS CLOSING message 6-19 Cartop Safety Switches 2-15
CAR OS DOORS OPEN message 6-20 CFSS 1 at Floor message 6-23
CAR OS DOORS OPENING message 6-20 CFSS 1 In-car message 6-23
CAR OS DOORS STALLED message 6-20 CFSS 1 Recall message 6-23
CAR OS DOORS UNKNOWN message 6-19 CFSS 2 at Floor message 6-23
Car out of service unknown door position message 6-19 CFSS 2 In-car message 6-23
Car out of service with doors closed message 6-19 CFSS 2 Recall message 6-23
Car out of service with doors closing message 6-19 CFSS Mode 1 at Floor Activated message 6-23
Car out of service with doors open message 6-20 CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated message 6-23
Car out of service with doors opening message 6-20 CFSS Mode 1 Recall Activated message 6-23
Car out of service with doors stalled message 6-20 CFSS Mode 2 at Floor Activated message 6-23
Car Over Load Activated message 6-20 CFSS Mode 2 In-car Activated message 6-23
Car Over Load Deactivated message 6-20 CFSS Mode 2 Recall Activated message 6-23
CAR OVERLOAD message 6-20 Changing parameters 2-17
Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input 6-108, 9-8 Check for shorts to ground 2-7
Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input 6-108, 9-8 Checking AC phase 5-2
Car Panel Inspection Disabled message 6-20 Checking the Hoist Motor 2-10
Car Panel Inspection Enabled message 6-20 Circuit board removing & replacing 6-78
Car Panel Inspection Inputs OK message 6-20 Circuit boards, troubleshooting 6-79–6-115
Car Panel Inspection Operation message 6-21 Clone Controller Data 7-7
Car reaction to overspeeding 4-62 CNPB Fault, see Brake Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-15
Car response, adjusting (System 12) 2-41 CNPBD Fault, see Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no su- message 6-15
pervisor (Activated) message 6-21 CNPM Fault, see Motor Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no su- 54
pervisor (Deactivated) message 6-21 CNPMD Fault, see Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
Car Speed Calibration (System 12) 2-38 message 6-54
Car Speed specification 9-2 Cnstr Car Panel Insp message 6-23
car speed, verifying (Quattro DC) 2-58 Cnstr Cartop Insp message 6-23
Car Stop Switch Open message 6-21 Cnstr CP Insp message 6-23
Car Top, iBox status LED 7-10 Cnstr CT Insp message 6-23
Car/Counterweight Buffer Test 4-55 Cnstr HA Insp message 6-23
Car/Counterweight Safety Test 4-54 Cnstr HA Inspection message 6-23
CARTOP AUTO UIM FLT message 6-21 Cnstr Inspection message 6-24
Cartop Automatic Unintended Motion Fault message 6-21 Cnstr Mach Room Insp message 6-24
CARTOP COMM FAULT message 6-21 Cnstr MR Insp message 6-24
Cartop Communication Fault message 6-21 Common Bus Connections, iBox 9-13
Cartop Emergency Stop message 6-22 Computer IP address, setting 5-5, 5-8, 8-5
Cartop Exit no Counterweight Configuration Error message Computer Reset, iBox control 7-3
6-22 Computer, iBox status LED 7-10
Cartop Exit Open message 6-22 Configuration File 6-76
Cartop Exit Open Off message 6-22 Configuration file
Cartop Firmware Update Mode message 6-22 creating 8-21
CARTOP FW UPDATE MODE message 6-22 editing 8-23
Cartop Insp message 6-22 loading 8-22
CARTOP INSP UIM FLT message 6-23 saving 8-21
Cartop Inspection Disabled message 6-22 Configuration File - Generate Default 8-20
Index-3
Connected 5-13 Dispatcher = Car ‘n’ message 6-24
Connection Status 5-13 Display contrast, iBox control 7-3
Construction Car Panel Inspection Operation message 6-23, DLAB, Door Lock Access Bottom input 6-110, 9-11
6-24 DLAT, Door Lock Access Top input 6-110, 9-11
Construction Cartop Inspection Operation message 6-23 DLM, Down Leveling Marker Sensor input 6-108, 9-8
Construction Hoistway Access Inspection Operation message DLMS, Door Lock Main String input 6-110, 9-11
6-23 DN ETS POSITION FAULT message 6-25
Construction Inspection Operation message 6-24 DN NTSn L1 SPEED FLT message 6-25
Construction Machine Room Inspection Operation message DN NTSn L2 SPEED FLT message 6-26
6-24 DN NTSn POSITION FLT message 6-26
Construction Mode 2-1–2-61, 3-1–3-10 DNT1, Down Slowdown Limit switch #1 input 6-109, 9-9
exiting 3-10 DNT2, Down Slowdown Limit switch #2 input 6-109, 9-9
Faults 2-3 DNT3, Down Slowdown Limit switch #3 input 6-109, 9-9
Overview 2-2 DNT4, Down Slowdown Limit switch #4 input 6-109, 9-9
Required connections 2-3 DNT5, Down Slowdown Limit switch #5 input 6-109, 9-9
Contract Overspeed Test 4-56 DNTD, Down Normal Limit Direction switch input 6-109, 9-9
Controller Main Computer Startup message 6-24 docking and undocking windows in iView 8-35
Controller Specifications 9-2 DOL, Door Open Limit input 6-108, 9-8
Controller Stop switch, iBox control 7-11 DOOR LK CLIPPED G200 message 6-24
Correction and Stop, verifying 4-3 DOOR LK CLIPPED L200 message 6-24
Correction profile 4-18 Door Lock Clipped Greater than 200fpm message 6-24
Counterweight balancing, preparing for final adjustments 3- Door Lock Clipped Less than 200fpm message 6-24
13 DOOR LOCK OPENED message 6-25
Counterweight derailment detector 3-7 Door operator, preparing for final adjustments 3-12
Counterweight Learn procedure 3-12 Door parameters
Coupling rotational ratio 2-21 verifying 3-9
Coupling rotational ratio, adjusting car speed (System 12) 2- Doors Locked, iBox status LED 7-10
38 DOWN DIR LIMIT OPEN message 6-25
CP INSP. DISABLED message 6-20 Down Direction Limit Open message 6-25
Creating a Configuration file 8-21 Down Emergency Switch Shutdown message 6-25
Creating a new LAN connection 8-12 Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault message 6-
Crosshead Deflection Load Weigher 4-38 25
CT INSP. DISABLED message 6-22 DOWN ETS SHUTDOWN message 6-25
CTEX NO CWI CFG ERROR message 6-22 Down Normal Terminal ’n’ Level 1 Speed Fault message 6-25
Current Limit LED 4-7, 4-9 Down Normal Terminal ’n’ Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-26
Current Loop Integral, System 12 drive 2-27 Down Normal Terminal ’n’ Position Fault message 6-26
Current Sensor, System 12 drive 2-27 Down switch, iBox control 7-11
Down, iBox status LED 7-10
D DP1-, Position Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
DAC Offset Status test point, description 9-4 DP1+, Position Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
DAC, verifying DAC conversion 2-25 DP2-, Position Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
DBD Mode Activated message 6-24 DP2+, Position Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
DBD PHE Antinuisance 6-24 DPM, Door Position Monitor input 6-108, 9-8
DCAB, Door Contact Access Bottom input 6-110, 9-11 Drive At Speed Fault message 6-26
DCAT, Door Contact Access Top input 6-110, 9-11 drive auto tune procedure (Quattro DC) 2-50
DCL, Door Close Limit input 6-108, 9-8 Drive Communication Fault message 6-26
DCMS, Door Contact Main String input 6-110, 9-11 Drive Communication Warning message 6-27
Dead zone, adjusting for final stop 4-34 Drive Connections, iBox 9-12
Deceleration parameter 4-17 Drive Control Adjustments (Quattro DC Drive) 4-27
Deceleration rate, bunching up of 4-19 DRIVE ENABLE FDBK FLT message 6-27
Default IP Addresses Drive Enable Feedback Fault message 6-27
iBox settings 7-8 Drive Enable Status test point, description 9-4
default parameter settings, saving 8-20 Drive Fault, DRIVE FAULT message 6-27
Demand Down Peak Mode message 6-24 Drive Inspection Overspeed Fault message 6-27
Demand Up Peak Mode message 6-24 DRIVE IOS FAULT message 6-27
DETS, Down Emergency Terminal Limit switch input 6-109, Drive IOS Limit test point, description 9-4
9-9 Drive IOS Param Limit test point, description 9-4
Direct connections 8-8–8-11 Drive On, iBox status LED 7-10
connecting 8-10 Drive Parameters Quick Reference, Quattro 9-27
creating 8-8 Drive Ready Fault message 6-28

Drive Ready On Fault message 6-27 Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion 4-56
drive response adjustments (Quattro DC) 2-51 Emergency Brake Tripped message 6-31
Drive Start Failure message 6-28 Emergency Brake UIM Reset Button Stuck message 6-31
Drive Startup (Quattro DC Drive) 2-47–2-61 Emergency Dispatch message 6-31
Drive Startup (System 12 SCR Drive) 2-23–2-46 Emergency Dispatch Off message 6-31
Driver VDC 5-13 Emergency Dispatch On message 6-31
Drop delay, adjusting for final stop 4-35 Emergency Medical Service Bypassed message 6-31
Dual Channel QUAD Fault message 6-28 Emergency Medical Service Deactivated message 6-31
DUAL CHANNEL QUAD FLT message 6-28 Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch ’n’)
DZ, Door Zone Sensor input 6-108, 9-8 message 6-32
Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch ’n’) mes-
E sage 6-32
Earthquake (EQ) sensor 3-7 Emergency power 5-13
Earthquake board power supply OFF message 6-28 Emergency Power Activated message 6-32
Earthquake board power supply ON message 6-28 Emergency Power and no communication with group mes-
Earthquake Board Quick Reference 6-91 sage 6-32
Earthquake Emergency Stop message 6-28 Emergency Power Deactivated message 6-32
Earthquake Operation (Counterweight) message 6-29 Emergency power profile 4-18
Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch) message 6-29 Emergency Power Recall message 6-33
Earthquake Operation Activated message 6-28 Emergency Power Recall Next Floor (In Service) message 6-
Earthquake Operation Deactivated message 6-28 33
Earthquake profile 4-18 Emergency Power Run message 6-33
Earthquake Reduce Speed message 6-29 Emergency Power Shutdown message 6-33
Earthquake reset button OK message 6-29 Emergency slowdown profile 4-18, 4-59
Earthquake reset button stuck ON message 6-29 Emergency Stop Input Activated message 6-33
Earthquake Run message 6-29 Emergency Stop Input Deactivated message 6-33
Earthquake Shutdown message 6-29 EMERGENCY STOP INPUT message 6-33
Edit a parameter on the iBox 7-4 Emergency Stop switch 2-15
Edit a parameter using iView 8-19 Emergency Terminal Limit (ETS) 4-12
Editing a configuration file 8-23 Emergency Terminal Overspeed 4-61
Editing displays 8-39 Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests 4-60
EEPROM Device Error message 6-29 Empty Car Tests, preparing for final adjustments 3-14
Electrical Governor Test 4-54 Empty load detection 4-38
Elevator Recall Operation (Switch ‘n’) message 6-29 Empty load threshold 4-39, 4-41
ELEVATOR RECALL SW’n’ message 6-29 EMS In-car (Switch ‘n’) message 6-32
EM BK UIM RESET STUCK message 6-31 EMS Recall (Switch ‘n’) message 6-32
EMERG ALARM ACTIVATED message 6-30 Enable switch, iBox control 7-11
EMERG BRAK LEG 2 SHORT message 6-31 Encoder Signal test point, description 9-4
EMERG BRAKE OK OPEN message 6-31 Encoder. See also Velocity Encoder
EMERG BRK LEG 1 SHORT message 6-31 Environmental Considerations 2-4
EMERG POWER RECALL message 6-33 Environmental Limits specification 9-2
EMERG POWER RUN message 6-33 EP RCL NXT FLR-IN SVC message 6-33
EMERG POWER SHUTDOWN message 6-33 EQ board, Earthquake sensor 3-7
EMERG PWR NO COMM message 6-32 EQ Reset 3-7
Emergency Alarm Acknowledged message 6-30 Equipment Location 2-4
Emergency Alarm Activated (Alarm button) message 6-30 ESC, Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input 6-108, 9-8
Emergency Alarm Activated (Car delayed with doors closed) ETA Mode Activated message 6-33
message 6-30 Ethernet address verification, iBox 7-9
Emergency Alarm Activated (In-car stop switch) message 6- Ethernet connections 2-5
30 Event Log
Emergency Alarm Activated (Safety opened) message 6-30 viewing on the iBox 7-7
Emergency Alarm Activated message 6-30 Event Log Cleared message 6-33
Emergency Alarm Deactivated without Acknowledgment EXCESS BRAKE FDBK FLT message 6-34
message 6-30 EXCESS MF FDBK FAULT message 6-34
Emergency Brake Board Quick Reference 6-87 EXCESS RELEVELS FAULT message 6-34
Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short Fault message 6-31 EXCESS RESTARTS FAULT message 6-35
Emergency Brake Leg 2 Short Fault message 6-31 Excessive Brake Feedback Fault message 6-34
Emergency Brake OK open message 6-31 EXCESSIVE FAULTS message 6-34
Emergency Brake OK open Off message 6-31 Excessive Faults Shutdown message 6-34
Index-5
Excessive Faults Warning message 6-34 Floor Heat Detectors Activated message 6-37
EXCESSIVE FLTS WARN message 6-34 Floor Heat Detectors Deactivated message 6-37
Excessive Motor Field Feedback Fault message 6-34 FLOOR HEAT DETECTORS message 6-37
Excessive Motor Noise 4-19 Floor Heights
Excessive Relevels Fault message 6-34 Learning the 4-2
Excessive Restarts Fault message 6-35 Floor Heights Learn procedure 4-2
Excessive Restarts Warning message 6-35 Floor Leveling Accuracy specification 9-2
Exercise Operation Activated message 6-35 Floor Location Fault message 6-37
Exercise Operation Deactivated message 6-35 Floor offsets, calibrating 4-30
EXERCISE OPERATION message 6-35 Floor Sensor Fault message 6-37
exiting Construction Mode 3-10 Floor Sub-Address or Call “Type” Jumper 5-21
Floor Synchronization Fault message 6-37
F FLT BYP SW TIMED OUT message 6-35
F DR CLS FLT REC FAIL message 6-38 Following error 2-21
F1 help, accessing online help 8-24 Following error margin, calibrating (Quattro DC) 2-59
FAULT BYPASS SW ON message 6-35 FRONT AUX DOB BYP message 6-38
Fault Bypass Switch On message 6-35 Front Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-38
Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out Fault message 6-35 FRONT DOB BYPASSED message 6-39
Fault Reset, iBox control 7-3 Front Door Close Fault message 6-38
Fault, iBox status LED 7-10 Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure message 6-38
Fault/Function Bypass switch, iBox control 7-11 FRONT DOOR CLOSE FLT message 6-38
Feed Forward Gain calibration (System 12) 4-15 Front Door Close Time-out message 6-38
Field Active Status test point, description 9-4 FRONT DOOR CNTCT FLT message 6-38
Field Command (Control) test point, description 9-4 Front Door Contact Fault message 6-38
field connections 9-7–9-13 Front Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-39
Field Control Path test point, description 9-4 Front Door Open Fault message 6-39
Field Current Feedback test point, description 9-4 Front Door Open Time-out message 6-39
Field Current Signal test point, description 9-4 FRONT DOORS STOPPED message 6-39
Field Error test point, description 9-4 Front Doors Stopped message 6-39
Field Integral Command test point, description 9-4 Front DPM Open - GS Closed message 6-39
Field Integral Gain test point, description 9-4 FRONT HALL DOB BYP message 6-39
Field Module Logic Board Quick Reference 6-88 Front Hall Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-39
Field Module Over Temperature Fault message 6-35 FRONT PHOTO EYE BYP message 6-40
FIELD MODULE OVR TEMP message 6-35 Front Photo Eye Bypassed message 6-40
Field Proportional Command test point, description 9-4 FRONT PHOTO EYE FAIL message 6-40
Field Proportional Gain test point, description 9-4 Front Photo Eye Failure message 6-40
Field running voltage 4-7 FRONT SAFE EDGE BYP message 6-40
Field standing voltage 4-7 Front Safe Edge Bypassed message 6-40
Field Voltage Feedback test point, description 9-4 FRONT SAFE EDGE FAIL message 6-40
Field Voltage Signal test point, description 9-4 Front Safe Edge Failure message 6-40
Field wiring 2-6 FTP File Viewer 8-44
Final Approach to Floor 4-19 Fuses 2-7, 5-2
Fine Tuning the Speed Regulator (Quattro DC Drive) 4-16 Fuses on the iBox 7-12
Fire Recall Alt. message 6-36
Fire Recall Alternate message 6-36 G
Fire Recall Main message 6-36 Gateway 7-8, 8-7
Fire Service In-car Activated message 6-36 Generate default configuration file 8-20
Fire Service In-Car Deactivated message 6-36 GI, Integral Error parameter
Fire Service In-car Hold Operation message 6-36 adjusting for rollback 2-42
Fire Service In-car message 6-36 Global Parameter Update, Reset Controller message 6-40
Fire Service In-car Recall Operation message 6-36 GOV SPEED SWITCH FLT message 6-40
Fire Service Recall Alternate message 6-36 GOV, Governor input 6-110, 9-11
Fire Service Recall Deactivated message 6-36 Governor open, GOVERNOR OPEN message 6-40
Fire Service Recall Main message 6-36 Governor Speed Reduction Switch Fault message 6-40
Fire Svc In-car message 6-36 Group Communication Established message 6-40
Firmware Update procedure 8-41 Group Communication Lost message 6-41
Flare jerk parameter 4-17 Group ID 5-12
Flood Operation Activated message 6-36 Group Info 5-12
Flood Operation Deactivated message 6-36 GS, Gate Switch input 6-110, 9-11
FLOOD OPERATION message 6-36

setting and verifying the IP address 7-9
H
status LEDs 7-10
HA INSP. DISABLED message 6-42
status messages 7-11
Hall call addresses 5-20
view and set parameters 7-4
HALL CALL BUS ‘n’ FAIL message 6-41
View/register calls 7-7
Hall Call Bus ‘n’ Failure message 6-41
viewing factory data 7-7
HALL CALL BYPASS INP. message 6-41
viewing MAC addresses 7-7
Hall Call Bypass Input OFF message 6-41
viewing serial numbers 7-7
Hall Call Bypass Input ON message 6-41
viewing the Event log 7-7
Hall Call Driver Testing 5-31
viewing version info 7-7
Hall call enclosures 5-20
iBox boot-up sequence 6-75
Hall call jumpers 5-20
iBox field connections 9-7–9-13
Hall Call Service Disabled message 6-41
ICE-COP Board Diagnostics 6-4
Hall Call Service Enabled message 6-41
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board
Hall call wiring 5-19
diagnostics 6-85
Heat Detectors Recall Activated message 6-41
Quick Reference 6-83
Heat Detectors Recall Complete message 6-41
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board Quick Reference 6-87
Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated message 6-41
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board Quick Reference 6-88
HEAT DETECTORS RECALL message 6-41
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board Quick Reference 6-91
Heat Sensor Fault ’n’ message 6-41
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board Quick Reference 6-94
Heavy load threshold 4-38, 4-40
ICE-IRB Relay Board Quick Reference 6-96
Heavy load, hall call bypass 4-38
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board Quick Reference 6-99
Help, accessing online help 8-24
ICE-MIAC Multiple Input AC Board Quick Reference 6-101
High Current 5-13
ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input AC/DC Board Quick Refer-
High roll jerk parameter 4-17
ence 6-101
High speed parameter 4-17
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board Quick Reference 6-
HOIST HEAT DETECTORS message 6-42
103
Hoist motor insulation testing 2-10
ICE-RG Rope Gripper Board Quick Reference 6-105
Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input 6-109, 9-10
ICE-SAF Safety Board Quick Reference 6-106
Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input 6-109, 9-10
ICE-SF Serial Fixtures Board Quick Reference 6-111
Hoistway Access Disabled message 6-42
iControl
Hoistway Access Enabled 6-42
cartop interconnections 1-5
Hoistway Access Inspection Operation message 6-42
DC specifications 9-2
Hoistway Access message 6-42
system interconnections 1-4
Hoistway Access Operation message 6-42
iControl messages 6-14–??, 6-14–6-74
Hoistway Access Top Down switch input 6-109, 9-10
ICPD, COP Inspection Station DN Button input 6-108, 9-8
Hoistway Access Top Up switch input 6-109, 9-10
ICPU, COP Inspection Station UP Button input 6-108, 9-8
HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS message 6-42
ICTD, Cartop Inspection Station DN Button input 6-108, 9-8
Hoistway Door Bypass message 6-42
ICTU, Cartop Inspection Station UP Button input 6-108, 9-8
Hoistway Door Bypass switch, iBox control 7-12
iCue GUI 5-12, 5-14
Hoistway Heat Detectors Activated message 6-42
iLand Landing System ??–3-2
Hoistway Heat Detectors Deactivated message 6-42
iView parameter setting 3-2
HOISTWAY LEARN ON message 6-42
Verifying position encoder resolution 3-11
Hoistway Limit Switches 3-5
iLink Cartop Box
Hoistway Safety Switches 2-15
diagnostics 6-85
enclosure 3-4
I troubleshooting 6-85
iBox 7-1–7-12 IMP SW FAULT
control switches 7-11 EM STOP message 6-43
description 7-1 FLT BYP message 6-43
display menu tree 7-5 INSP DN message 6-43
Event Log messages 6-4 INSP EN message 6-43
fuses 7-12 INSP message 6-43
keypad controls 7-3 LEARN message 6-43
LCD display 7-2 TEST message 6-44
LCD display, top line characters 7-3 IMP SW FLT
messages cross-reference 6-4 C DOOR BP message 6-42
replacing 6-76 H DOOR BP message 6-43
Safety bypass jumper 7-12 WRITE EN message 6-44
Index-7
IMP Switch Fault - Car Door Bypass message 6-42 INVALID CNFG TALRQ message 6-47
IMP Switch Fault - Emergency Stop message 6-43 Invalid Configuration BALRQ message 6-45
IMP Switch Fault - Fault Bypass message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input CTEX message 6-45
IMP Switch Fault - H. Door Bypass message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input DCAB message 6-45
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection DOWN message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input DCAT message 6-46
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection Enable message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input DCMS message 6-46
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input DCMS R message 6-46
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection UP message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input DLAB message 6-46
IMP Switch Fault - LEARN message 6-43, 6-44 Invalid Configuration Input DLAT message 6-46
IMP Switch Fault - None message 6-43 Invalid Configuration Input DLMS message 6-46
IMP Switch Fault - Write Enable message 6-44 Invalid Configuration Input DLMS R message 6-47
In Group, iBox status LED 7-10 Invalid Configuration Input DPM message 6-47
INA, Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input 6-108, Invalid Configuration Input DPM_R message 6-47
9-8 Invalid Configuration Input message 6-45
INCP, COP Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input 6- Invalid Configuration Input Off message 6-45
108, 9-8 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check BALRQ mes-
INCT, Cartop Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input 6- sage 6-47
108, 9-8 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check DCCOR mes-
INCT, Inspection Cartop Enable switch input 2-16 sage 6-48
Independent Service, Independent Svc message 6-44 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check NMS R message
initial drive settings (Quattro DC) 2-47 6-48
Initial jerk parameter 4-17 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RD Board mes-
initial parameter settings 2-19 sage 6-48
initial power up 2-9 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RDOPT mes-
INSFCNT BRK FDBK FLT message 6-44 sage 6-48
INSFCNT MF FDBK FLT message 6-45 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RG Board mes-
INSFCNT MF FORCNG FLT message 6-45 sage 6-49
Inspection message 6-44 Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RGOPT mes-
Inspection mode 2-9, 3-1–3-14 sage 6-49
Inspection operation Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check TALRQ mes-
checking cartop operation (System 12) 2-46 sage 6-49
Inspection Operation message 6-44 Invalid Configuration TALRQ message 6-47
Inspection operation, checking cartop operation (Quattro Invalid Destination, INVALID DESTINATION message 6-49
DC) 2-61 Invalid Front Door Position message 6-49
Inspection Overspeed Fault message 6-44 Invalid Input message 6-50
Inspection Overspeed Test 4-55 Invalid Rear Door Position message 6-50
Inspection profile 4-18 INVLD CNFG INPUT CTEX message 6-45
Inspection switch, iBox control 7-11 INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAB message 6-45
Inspection, iBox status LED 7-10 INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAT message 6-46
Install Cabinet 2-6 INVLD CNFG INPUT DCMS message 6-46
Installing the Tachometer 2-11 INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAB message 6-46
Installing the Velocity encoder 2-13 INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAT message 6-46
Insufficient Brake Current Feedback Fault message 6-44 INVLD CNFG INPUT DLMS message 6-46
Insufficient Motor Field Feedback Fault message 6-45 INVLD CNFG INPUT DPM message 6-47
Insufficient Motor Field Forcing Feedback Fault message 6- INVLD FRONT DOOR PSTN message 6-49
45 INVLD REAR DOOR PSTN message 6-50
Insulation test 2-10 IO Map Compare Fault message 6-50
INV CNFG INPUT DCMS R message 6-46 IO Map Compare Fault Off message 6-50
INV CNFG INPUT DLMS R message 6-47 IO Map Compare Long Term Fault message 6-50
INV CNFG INPUT DPM_R message 6-47 IO MAP COMPARE LT FLT message 6-50
INV INVTRY XCHK BALRQ message 6-47 IO Map Toggle Compare Fault message 6-50
INV INVTRY XCHK DCCOR message 6-48 IO Map Toggle Compare Fault Off message 6-50
INV INVTRY XCHK NMS R message 6-48 IO MAP TOGLE COMP FLT message 6-50
INV INVTRY XCHK RD BD message 6-48 IP address, pinging 5-11
INV INVTRY XCHK RDOPT message 6-48 IP address, setting and verifying on the ibox 7-9
INV INVTRY XCHK RG BD message 6-49 Isolated Platform Load Weigher 4-38
INV INVTRY XCHK RGOPT message 6-49 iView ??–8-40
INV INVTRY XCHK TALRQ message 6-49 configuration tabs 8-25, 8-31
INVALID CNFG BALRQ message 6-45 connections 2-17
INVALID CNFG INPUT message 6-45 creating a configuration file 8-21

description 8-2 Learning the
diagnostic tabs 8-25, 8-31 Counterweight 3-12
docking and undocking windows 8-35 Empty and loaded car weights 4-41
editing the virtual oscilloscope display 8-39 ETS and NTS Limit Switches 4-12
Layouts 8-30 Load weights 4-38
pinning and unpinning windows 8-33 Safety Configuration 2-22
printing screens 8-38 Learning the Building floor heights 4-2
resizing windows 8-34 Level Down Sensor 4-4
saving parameters to a configuration file 8-21 Level Up Sensor 4-4
Send command 8-20 Leveling distance parameter 4-17
sending parameters to the controller 8-20 Leveling Overspeed Test 4-56
setting parameters 8-19 Leveling speed parameter 4-17
setting the system’s date and time 8-38 Leveling speed, adjusting for final stop 4-33
setup tabs 8-25 Light load anti-nuisance 4-38
View menu contents 8-26 Light Load Anti-nuisance message 6-51
windows and tabs 8-25 Light load threshold 4-38, 4-41
working offline 8-23 LIMIT SW CHKSUM FAULT message 6-52
working online 8-16 LIMIT SW LEARN FAULT message 6-52
iView Button Bar 8-18 Limit Switches Checksum Fault message 6-52
iView Logged Off message 6-50 Limit Switches Learn Fault message 6-52
iView Logged On message 6-50 Load calibration on message 6-52
iView Lost Connection message 6-50 Load learn process activated message 6-52
iView Menu Bar 8-17 Load learn process deactivated message 6-52
iView Status Bar 8-18 Load Weigher
iView Timed Out message 6-50 Cross Head Deflection 1-3
IZO, System 12 drive 2-28 Isolated Platform 1-3
Load weigher
J Configuring 4-40
Jail Master Mode message 6-50 Crosshead deflection 4-38
Jail Secure Mode message 6-51 Empty load threshold 4-39
Jerk specification 9-2 Heavy load threshold 4-38
Job prints 5-35, 6-103, 6-114 Isolated platform 4-38
Light load threshold 4-38
K Overload threshold 4-38
Keypad controls, iBox 7-3 Rope tension 4-38
Load Weigher (Raw) test point, description 9-4
Load Weigher adjustment for dispatching 4-38
L
Load Weigher Balanced test point, description 9-5
LAN connections 8-12–8-15
Load Weigher Feedback test point, description 9-5
connecting 8-14
Load Weigher Sensor Adjustment 4-21
creating 8-12
Load Weigher Signal test point, description 9-4
deleting 8-15
Loading parameters from a Configuration file 8-22
editing 8-15
Lobby Peak Mode message 6-52
LAND SYS SENSOR FAULT message 6-51
Local / Dispatcher Activated message 6-52
Landing System Sensor Fault message 6-51
Local / Dispatcher Deactivated message 6-52
Layouts, iView screen layouts 8-30
Local Area Network 8-12
LCD display, iBox 7-2, 7-3
LOCAL DISPATCHER message 6-52
LCD Fault message 6-51
Locks/Contacts Connections, iBox 6-110, 9-11
LEARN SW TIMED OUT message 6-51
Loop over-current fault time parameter 4-51
Learn Switch Timed Out Fault message 6-51
Loop over-current fault time parameter adjustment 4-51
Learn switch, iBox control 7-11
LOSS OF POS/SPD IND message 6-52
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Positions message 6-51
Loss of Position or Speed Indicators message 6-52
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Speeds message 6-51
Low roll jerk parameter 4-17
LEARN U/DTS POSITIONS message 6-51
LEARN U/DTS SPEEDS message 6-51
LEARNING EMPTY LOAD message 6-51
M
Learning empty load values message 6-51 MAC ADDRESS ERROR message 6-53
LEARNING FULL LOAD message 6-51 Mac Address Error message 6-53
Learning full load values message 6-51 MAC addresses
viewing on iBox 7-7
Index-9
Mach Rm Insp message 6-53 Nudging Rear, NUDGING REAR message 6-54
Machine Rm Inspection message 6-53 Number of Cars in Group specification 9-2
Machine Room Heat Detectors Activated message 6-53 Number of Stops specification 9-2
Machine Room Heat Detectors Deactivated message 6-53
Machine Room Inspection Disabled message 6-53 O
Machine Room Inspection Enabled message 6-53 Online help, accessing 8-24
Machine Room Inspection Operation message 6-53 Orange cables 5-22
Machine Room Inspection switch 7-11 Oscilloscope
Machine Room Inspection, running on 3-10 editing displays 8-39
Machine Room Stop Switch Open message 6-53 OTHER CARS ALT FIRE message 6-55
MAIN FLOOR SMOKE message 6-53 Other Cars Alternate Fire Sensor Recall message 6-55
Main Floor Smoke Sensor Recall message 6-53 OTHER CARS MAIN FIRE message 6-55
Main Processor Board Quick Reference 6-94 Other Cars Main Fire Sensor Recall message 6-55
Maximum Full Load Output Current 4-7 Output DAC
MCE Loadweigher-Isolated Platform 3-6 adjusting on the System 12 drive 2-27
MCE System hub 5-4 Over Current Power Threshold test point, description 9-5
MD, Motor Drive relay indicator 9-12 Over Current test point, description 9-5
MDRD, Motor Drive Redundancy indicator 9-12 Over Current Threshold test point, description 9-5
Menu Bar 8-17 Overload threshold 4-38, 4-40
Menu tree, iBox LCD display 7-5 Overloaded car detection 4-38
MF FORCING TIMED OUT message 6-54 Overshoot correction, on contract speed runs 4-18
MF1, MF2, DC power to motor field 9-14 Overshoot, adjusting for 4-8
Minimum Floor to Floor Time specification 9-2 Overshoot, adjusting for (Quattro DC) 4-11
Mode of Operation 5-13 Overspeed 1
Motion Start Fault message 6-54 description of 4-61
Motion stopped due to IO toggle test message 6-54 Overspeed 2
MOTION STOPPED-IO TST message 6-54 description of 4-61
MOTOR CNTR PROOF FLT message 6-54
Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault message 6-54 P
Motor Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-54 PARAM CHNG-RESET CAR message 6-40
Motor Contactor Status test point, description 9-5 Parameter adjustment
Motor Control Adjustments (System 12 SCR Drive) 4-26 using iView 8-19
Motor Field Forcing Timed Out message 6-54 using the iBox 7-4
Motor Field gains, manually adjusting (system 12) 2-32 Parameter entry screens 8-19
Motor Field, adjusting for System 12 drive 4-7 Parameters, Load from Configuration file 8-22
Motor insulation 2-10 Parameters, Save to File 8-21
Motor Limit Protection Timer Elapsed message 6-54 Passenger Operation or Passenger message 6-55
MOTOR LIMIT TIMED OUT message 6-54 Pattern (Command) test point, description 9-5
Motor Limit Timed Out message 6-54 Pattern (Directional) test point, description 9-5
MOTOR LMT TIMED OUT 2 message 6-54 Pattern (Phase) test point, description 9-5
Motor Noise 4-19 Pattern (Raw) test point, description 9-5
motor rotation and control, verifying (Quattro DC) 2-57 Pattern (Region) test point, description 9-6
Motor Triac active indicator 9-12 Pattern (Slew Limited) test point, description 9-6
MOTR CNTR DRV PRF FLT message 6-54 Pattern Command, verifying (Quattro DC) 2-57
MR HEAT DETECTORS message 6-53 Pattern Filtered test point, description 9-5
MR INSP. DISABLED message 6-53 Pattern Interpolated test point, description 9-5
MR STOP SWITCH OPEN message 6-53 Pattern profile parameters 4-16
MRD, Motor Redundancy indicator 9-12 Peripheral hub 5-4
Multiple Input AC Board Quick Reference 6-101 Photo Eye Antinuisance message 6-55
Multiple Output Relay Board Quick Reference 6-103 Pick delay
adjusting for rollback 4-8
N Pick voltage, verifying (Quattro DC) 2-56
Network Info 5-13 PID
Node Control 5-13 Field integral, check 2-32
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests 4-60 Field proportional, check 2-32
Normal rate limited stop, adjusting for final stop 4-33 PID Standard Integral Error, adjusting 2-42
Normal Terminal Slowdown Limit (NTS) 4-12 PID Standard Proportional Error, adjusting 2-42
Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests 4-59 Pinging an IP address 5-11
Nudging Front, NUDGING FRONT message 6-54 pinning and unpinning windows in iView 8-33
Nudging Operation message 6-54
Index-10 Manual # 42-02-7223

Position Bit test point, description 9-6 Auto Tune Procedure 2-50
Position Cartop Offset Fault message 6-55 Automated Drive Setup 2-49
Position encoder resolution Brake calibration 2-53
verifying 3-11 Calibrating Actual Car Speed 2-58
Position iBox Connections 6-107, 9-7 Drive Control Adjustments 4-27
Position Location Error Fault message 6-55 Drive response adjustments 2-51
Position Margin 4-61 Feed Forward Gain calibration 4-15
POSITION QUAD FAULT message 6-55 Fine Tuning the Speed Regulator 4-16
Position Quadrature Fault message 6-55 iControl Parameter Settings 2-48
Position Quadrature Reversed Fault message 6-56 Initial Drive Settings 2-47
Position Speed Deviation Fault message 6-56 Ride Quality adjustments 4-37
Position Speed Threshold Fault message 6-56 setting Following Error Margin 2-59
POSITION SYNC-FLOOR message 6-56 using Pattern Scaling 4-11
Position Synchronization Fault message 6-56 verify brake picking 2-56
Position Synchronization Required at Floor message 6-56 verifying motor rotation & control 2-57
Position Synchronization Required at Terminal message 6-57 verifying pattern command 2-57
Position Synchronized at Floor message 6-57 verifying speed feedback 2-57
Position Synchronized at Terminal message 6-57 QUATTRO Drive Parameters Quick Reference 9-27
POSITION SYNC-TERMINAL message 6-57
POSITN QUAD RVRSD FLT message 6-56 R
POSITN SPEED DVTN FLT message 6-56 R DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED message 6-59
POSTN CARTP OFFST FLT message 6-55 R DR CLS FLT REC FAIL message 6-58
POSTN LCTN ERROR FLT message 6-55 Rated Armature Current, setting for System 12 drive 4-6
POSTN SPD THRSHLD FLT message 6-56 Rated loop over-current parameter 4-51
Power bus verification 5-3 Rated loop over-current parameter adjustment (System 12)
Power line fluctuation 2-4 4-51
Power Transfer Input Activated message 6-57 RB resistor, adjusting 2-11
Power Transfer Input Deactivated message 6-57 REAR AUX DOB BYP message 6-58
Power Transfer, POWER TRANSFER message 6-57 Rear Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-58
Power Up Position Synchronization Required at Terminal REAR DOB BYPASSED message 6-59
message 6-57 Rear Door Board Quick Reference 6-99
Preparing for Final Adjustments 3-12 REAR DOOR CLOSE FAULT message 6-58
counterweight balancing 3-13 Rear Door Close Fault message 6-58
door operator 3-12 Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure message 6-58
empty car tests 3-14 Rear Door Close Time-out message 6-58
run testing 3-12, 3-13 Rear Door Contact Fault message 6-58
Pre-Run Status test point, description 9-6 REAR DOOR CONTCT FLT message 6-58
Pre-start Door Lock Fault message 6-57 Rear Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-59
Pre-Start Sequence 4-43–4-48 Rear Door Open Fault message 6-59
diagrams 4-44 Rear Door Open Time-out message 6-59
parameters 4-43 REAR DOORS STOPPED message 6-59
Pretorque (Raw) test point, description 9-6 Rear Doors Stopped message 6-59
Pretorque Command test point, description 9-6 Rear DPM Open - GS Closed message 6-59
Pretorque Gain, adjusting 4-22 Rear Hall Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-59
Pretorque option 4-22 REAR PHOTO EYE BYP message 6-60
Pretorque Position Compensation 4-23 Rear Photo Eye Bypassed message 6-60
PRI FIRE SWITCH BYP message 6-57 REAR PHOTO EYE FAIL message 6-60
PRI FIRE SWITCH ON message 6-57 Rear Photo Eye Failure message 6-60
Primary Fire Switch Bypass message 6-57 REAR SAFE EDGE BYP message 6-60
Primary Fire Switch On message 6-57 Rear Safe Edge Bypassed message 6-60
Printing screens in iView 8-38 REAR SAFE EDGE FAIL message 6-60
Rear Safe Edge Failure message 6-60
Q Receive Sys Params message 6-60
QPRAM Device Error message 6-58 Register a car call 4-4
Quadrature Pulse Sequence 3-11 Relay Board Quick Reference 6-96
Quadrature Pulse Voltages 3-11 Relay output selection 5-35, 6-103, 6-114
Quattro DC Drive Relevel, iBox status LED 7-10
adjusting for overshoot 4-11 Relevel, verifying 4-5
adjusting Speed pick delay 4-10 Releveling 4-36
Index-11
Replacing Fuses in the SCR drive 6-119 Safety B, iBox status LED 7-10
Reset EQ board 3-7 Safety Board Quick Reference 6-106
Reset Rope Gripper 2-16 Safety Bypass Jumper 6-3
resizing windows in iView 8-34 Safety Bypass Jumper On message 6-63
RESTRICTED message 6-60 Safety Bypass Jumper on the iBox 7-12
Restricted message 6-60 Safety Bypass Jumper Time Out message 6-64
RET CAM PROTECTIN FLT message 6-61 Safety C String Open message 6-64
RETIRING CAM DLK FLT message 6-60 Safety C String Open Off message 6-64
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated message 6-60 Safety Configuration Checksum Fault message 6-64
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Deactivated message 6-61 Safety Configuration Inventory Cross Check Fault message 6-
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault message 6-60 64
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated message 6-61 Safety Configuration Learn Fault message 6-64
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Deactivated message 6-61 Safety Configuration Mismatch message 6-64
RFI, Radio Frequency Radiation 2-4 Safety Configuration, learning the 2-22
Ride quality, adjusting 4-37 Safety Connections, iBox 9-12
Ring and String circuit 3-7 Safety H String Open message 6-64
Rollback Safety H String Open Off message 6-65
adjustment of Speed pick delay 4-8 Safety Inventory Checksum Fault message 6-65
controlling 4-20 Safety Inventory Comparison Fault message 6-65
Rollback adjustment, Speed pick delay (Quattro DC) 4-10 Safety Inventory Creation Fault message 6-65
Rope Gripper 2-16 Safety Inventory Learn Fault message 6-65
Rope Gripper Board Quick Reference 6-105 Safety OK, iBox status LED 7-10
Rope Gripper Bypass 2-16 Safety String 2-15
Rope Gripper Reset 2-16 Safety String Bypass Jumper, troubleshooting 6-3
Rope Gripper Wiring 2-16 Safety String Closed message 6-65
Rope Stretch Releveling 4-36 Safety String Open message 6-65
Rope Tension Load Weigher 4-38 Safety Tests 4-52–4-62
Rough Acceleration or Deceleration 4-19 Car/Counterweight Buffer 4-55
Run testing, preparing for final adjustments 3-12, 3-13 Car/Counterweight Safety 4-54
Run, iBox status LED 7-10 Contract Overspeed 4-56
RX-, Cartop Link input 6-108, 9-8 Electrical Governor 4-54
RX+, Cartop Link input 6-108, 9-8 Emergency Brake - Unintended Motion 4-56
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed 4-60
S Inspection Overspeed 4-55
Sabbath Operation Activated message 6-61 Leveling Overspeed Test 4-56
Sabbath Operation Deactivated message 6-61 Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position 4-60
Sabbath Operation, SABBATH OPERATION message 6-61 Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed 4-59
SAFC, Safety Cartop input 9-12 SAFH, Safety Hoistway input 9-12
Safety A Contract Overspeed Fault message 6-61 Saving parameters to a configuration file 8-21
Safety A DETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-61 SC/ION output selection 5-35, 6-103, 6-114
Safety A IMP Configuration Mismatch message 6-61 SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board Quick
Safety A Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault message 6-61 Reference 6-112
Safety A Inspection Overspeed Fault message 6-61 SC-HCN Serial Hall Call Node Board Quick Reference 6-113
Safety A SIB Device Fault message 6-62 SC-ION boards 5-33, 6-114
Safety A SIB Device Fault Off message 6-62 SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board Quick Reference 6-114
Safety A UETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-62 SCOP BUSS ‘n’ COMM FAULT message 6-69
Safety A Unintended Motion Fault message 6-62, 6-63 SCOP BUSS ‘n’ INVENTORY FLT message 6-69
Safety A, iBox status LED 7-10 SCR AC Phase Fault message 6-65
Safety B Contract Overspeed Fault message 6-62 SCR ARM VOLTAGE ON message 6-66
Safety B DETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-62 SCR Armature Voltage On message 6-66
Safety B Fault Activated message 6-62 SCR CNTACTR FUSE FLT message 6-66
Safety B Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out message 6-62 SCR Contactor Fuse Fault message 6-66
Safety B Fault Deactivated message 6-62 SCR Current Sensor Offset Status test point, description 9-6
SAFETY B FAULT message 6-62 SCR Drive
Safety B Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault message 6-63 See System 12 SCR Drive
Safety B Inspection Overspeed Fault 6-63 SCR Drive Logic Board Quick Reference 6-116
Safety B Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out message 6-63 SCR Drive Ready Fault message 6-66
Safety B SIB Device Fault message 6-63 SCR DYN BRAKE FAULT message 6-66
Safety B SIB Device Fault Off message 6-63 SCR Dynamic Brake Fault message 6-66
Safety B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-63 SCR Excessive Armature Current message 6-66
Index-12 Manual # 42-02-7223

SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Disabled message 6- Serial Fixtures Board Quick Reference 6-111
67 Serial Hall Call Driver 5-17
SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Enabled message 6- Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board Quick Reference 6-112
67 Serial Hall Call Driver Testing 5-31
SCR EXS ARM CURRENT message 6-66 Serial Hall Call Node Board Quick Reference 6-113
SCR EXS CURRENT CMD DD message 6-67 Serial Hall Call option 5-17–5-33
SCR EXS CURRENT CMD DE message 6-67 Serial Hall Call System 3-7
SCR HIGH TEMP FAULT message 6-67 Bus Voltages 5-17
SCR High Temp Fault message 6-67 Serial number, viewing on iBox 7-7
SCR INSF ARM CURRENT message 6-67 Serial to TCP/IP 5-22
SCR INST OVER CURRENT message 6-67 Serial-to-Ethernet converters 5-22
SCR Instantaneous Over Current message 6-67 Set Time/Date 7-7
SCR Insufficient Armature Current message 6-67 Setting PC IP Addresses 5-5
SCR Intg Offset Status test point, description 9-6 Setting the date and time in iView 8-38
SCR Loop Over Current fault 4-50 SFTY CONFIG CHKSM FLT message 6-64
SCR Loop Over Current message 6-68 SFTY CONFIG LEARN FLT message 6-64
SCR Low Line Caution Activated message 6-68 SFTY CONFIG MISMATCH message 6-64
SCR Low Line Caution Deactivated message 6-68 SFTY INVTRY CHKSUM FLT message 6-65
SCR Low Line Caution, SCR LOW LINE CTN message 6-68 SFTY INVTRY COMPARE FLT message 6-65
SCR Low Line Fault message 6-68 SFTY VCTR XCHK FLT message 6-64
SCR Low Line Test Fault message 6-68 Shaping the Speed Profile 4-16–4-19
SCR PHASE LCK LP FLT message 6-68 Sheave Brake Drop Fault message 6-70
SCR Phase Lock Loop Fault message 6-68 SHEAVE BRAKE DROP FLT message 6-70
SCR Phase Lock Loop Warning message 6-69 Sheave Brake Pick Fault message 6-70
SCR Power Supply Fault message 6-69 SHEAVE BRAKE PICK FLT message 6-70
SCR POWER SUPPLY FLT message 6-69 SHLD, Tach Signal input 6-107, 9-7
SCR-CC H/L Board, replacing 6-136 Shorts to ground 2-7, 5-2
SCR-DS Board, replacing 6-135 Shuttle Service Activated message 6-70
SCR-LGA board Shuttle Service Deactivated message 6-70
Indicators 6-116 SHUTTLE SERVICE OFF message 6-70
Jumper settings 6-117 SHUTTLE SERVICE ON message 6-70
Layout drawing 6-118 Silent Mode Activated message 6-70
Quick Reference 6-116 Silent Mode Deactivated message 6-70
replacing 6-131 Single Channel QUAD Fault message 6-70
Test points 6-117 SNG CHANNEL QUAD FLT message 6-70
SCR-LGA board (System 12 Drive) 2-27 Softkeys, iBox controls 7-3
SCR-LGA, SCR Drive Logic Board, replacing 6-132 SOFTWARE RECALL ON message 6-70
SCR-LGD Logic Display Board, replacing 6-130 Software Recall Switch Activated message 6-70
SCR-PS Board Only, replacing 6-132 Software Test Points 9-3
SCR-SN Board, replacing 6-133 SP 1, Spare input 1 6-110, 9-11
SCR-SN, SCR Drive Snubber Board, replacing 6-133 SP1 D, Optional input 9-12
SEC FIRE SWITCH ON message 6-69 SP2 D, Optional Brake Pick switch input 9-12
Second Level 5-33 SP2, Optional input 9-12
Secondary Fire Switch On message 6-69 SP3, Optional input 9-12
Security Config 1 (to 8) message 6-69 SP4, Optional input 9-12
Security On message 6-69 SPA COS FAULT message 6-61
Send Sys Params to 1 (-20) message 6-69 SPA DETS L2 SPEED FLT message 6-61
Sending parameter settings to the controller 8-20 SPA IOS FAULT message 6-61
Serial bus, wiring 5-19 SPA LOS FAULT message 6-61
Serial Control I/O Board Quick Reference 6-114 SPA SIB DEVICE FAULT message 6-63
Serial COP 5-36–?? SPA Spare Event ‘n’ (n = 1 to 8) message 6-70
description of 3-7, 5-36 SPA UETS L2 SPD FLT message 6-62
diagnostics 6-80 SPA UNTD MOTION FLT 6-62
installing 5-38 Spares Connections, iBox 9-12
specifications 5-38 SPB COS FLT message 6-62
Serial COP Bus ‘n’ Comm Fault message 6-69 SPB DETS L2 SPEED FLT message 6-62
Serial COP Bus ‘n’ Inventory Fault message 6-69 SPB IOS FAULT message 6-63
Serial Driver 5-22 SPB LOS FAULT message 6-63
Serial Fixture Addresses 5-20 SPB SIB DEVICE FAULT message 6-62
Index-13
SPB UETS L2 SPD FLT message 6-63 Current Limit LED 2-37
SPB UNTD MOTION FLT 6-63 Fault Reset, reset drive faults 2-37
SPD LMT MF FORCING message 6-70 initial settings 2-25
Specifications, iControl DC specifications 9-2 manually adjusting motor field gains 2-32
Speed Bit test point, description 9-6 motor control adjustments 4-26
Speed Feedback test point, description 9-6 Motor Field calibration 2-29
Speed Feedback, verifying (Quattro DC) 2-57 oscillation while running, adjusting for 2-42
Speed Limit, MF Forcing message 6-70 replacing 12 Pulse Bridge 6-126
Speed loop gains, adjusting (System 12) 2-42 replacing components 6-116, 6-119, 6-125, 6-132, 6-134,
Speed pick delay 4-8 6-136
adjusting 3-14 replacing contactors 6-123, 6-125
speed profiles, adjusting 4-16 replacing Direction Bridge 6-128
Speed Reference, setting (Quattro DC) 2-57 replacing fuses 6-116, 6-119, 6-121
Standard profile 4-18 replacing PC boards 6-130, 6-132, 6-134, 6-136
Status Bar 8-18 Ride quality adjustments 4-37
Status display, iBox LEDs 7-10 SCRs and Diodes 6-126
Status messages on the iBox LCD display 7-11 Semiconductor Fuses 6-120
Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input message 6-71 setting the Following Error Margin 2-43
Stuck Cartop Inspection Input message 6-71 Synthetic speed calibration 4-14
STUCK CP INSP. INPUT message 6-71 Tach Failure calibration 2-45
STUCK CT INSP. INPUT message 6-71 verify brake picking 2-36
STUCK IN. INPUT FLT message 6-71 X1, X2, X3 terminals, check voltages at 2-23
Stuck Inspection Input Fault message 6-71 Y1, Y2, Y3 terminals, check voltages at 2-23
Sub-address jumper 5-21 System control switches on the iBox 7-11
Subnet Mask 7-8, 8-7 System I/O Troubleshooting 5-23
Sufficient Field Status test point, description 9-6 System Options 5-1–??
Swing Operation Activated message 6-71 Serial COP 5-36–??
Swing Operation Deactivated message 6-71 Serial Hall Calls 5-17–??
Swing Operation message 6-71 SYSTEM SYNC message 6-70, 6-71
Synthetic Signal test point, description 9-6
Synthetic Speed calibration (System 12) 4-14 T
Sys Comm, iBox status LED 7-10 Tach Adj. trimpot, adjusting car speed (System 12) 2-38
System 12 SCR Drive Tach Error Fault message 6-71
AC Fuses 6-121 Tach Error Lower Limit test point, description 9-6
adjusting Armature Current Limit 4-7 Tach Error tripping threshold adjustment 4-49
adjusting Armature Voltage Limit 4-6 Tach Error Upper Limit test point, description 9-6
Adjusting Brake picking 2-36 Tach Failure calibration (System 12) 2-45
adjusting car response 2-41 Tach Failure, TACH FAILURE message 6-71
adjusting car speed 2-38 Tachometer iBox Connections 2-12, 6-107, 9-7
adjusting Error Compensation 2-42 Tachometer installation 2-11
adjusting Speed Loop Gains 2-42 Tachometer Signal test point, description 9-6
adjusting Speed pick delay 4-8 TB, Brake Triac active indicator 9-12
adjusting the Armature Voltage 4-9 TC, Tach Signal input 6-107, 9-7
adjusting the Motor Field 4-7 TCP/IP 5-22
Armature Current Limit adjustment 2-37 TCP/IP Addresses 8-4
Armature Current Limit, verifying 2-40 setting on the iBox 7-8
Armature Overcurrent Overload Protection adjustment Temporary Cartop Wiring 2-16
4-50 Temporary CTS Relay Bypass 2-15
Armature Voltage Limit, calculate and set 2-40 TERMINAL LEARN ON message 6-71
auto offset calibration 2-25 TERMINAL SYNC FAULT message 6-72
Brake auto calibration procedure 2-34 Terminal synchronization 4-3
Calibrating Actual Car Speed 2-38 Terminal Synchronization Fault message 6-72
car runs away 2-37 Test Mode, Test message 6-72
car runs in wrong direction 2-37 Test point signal descriptions 9-3–9-6
check running voltage 2-31 Test switch, iBox control 7-11
check standing voltage 2-31 THIS CAR ALT FIRE message 6-72
Commutation Fuse 6-122 This Car Alternate Fire Sensor Recall message 6-72
Commutation SCR/Diode 6-129 THIS CAR MAIN FIRE message 6-72
Contactors 6-123 This Car Main Fire Sensor Recall message 6-72
current limit adjustments 2-39 Time, setting 8-38
Index-14 Manual # 42-02-7223

TM, Motor Triac active indicator 9-12 UP ETS SHUTDOWN message 6-73
Traveling cable 2-6 Up Normal Terminal Switch ’n’ Level 1 Speed Fault message
Troubleshooting 6-1–6-136 6-73
Circuit boards 6-79–6-115 Up Normal Terminal Switch ’n’ Level 2 Speed Fault message
ICE-COP board diagnostics 6-80 6-73
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board diagnostics 6-85 Up Normal Terminal Switch ’n’ Position Fault message 6-74
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board Quick Reference 6-83 UP NTSn L1 SPEED FLT message 6-73
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board Quick Reference 6-87 UP NTSn L2 SPEED FLT message 6-73
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board Quick Reference 6- UP NTSn POSITION FLT message 6-74
88 Up switch, iBox control 7-11
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board Quick Reference 6-91 Up, iBox status LED 7-10
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board Quick Reference 6-94 Upgrade Options 8-43
ICE-IRB Relay Board Quick Reference 6-96 User code accessing an invalid logical indicator (internal
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board Quick Reference 6-99 event) message 6-74
ICE-MIAC Multiple Input AC Board Quick Reference 6- User Defined Event ‘n’ Off message 6-74
101 User Defined Event ‘n’ On message 6-74
ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input Board Quick Reference 6-
101 V
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board Quick Reference VE-, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
6-103 VE+, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
ICE-RG Rope Gripper Board Quick Reference 6-105 Vector Checksum Fault 6-74
ICE-SAF Safety Board Quick Reference 6-106 Vector Comparison Fault 6-74
ICE-SF Serial Fixtures Board Quick Reference 6-111 Vector Creation Fault 6-74
iControl messages 6-14–6-74 Vector Learn Fault 6-74
iLink 6-85 Velocity Encoder
removing & replacing circuit boards 6-78 Connections 6-107, 9-7
replacing the iBox 6-76 connections 2-13
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board installation 2-11, 2-13
Quick Reference 6-112 isolation 2-13
SC-HCN Serial Hall Call Node Board Quick Reference 6- wiring 2-13
113 verify releveling 4-5
SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board Quick Reference 6-114 verifying brake current resistance 2-11
SCR-LGA SCR Drive Logic Board Quick Reference 6-116 Version Info, viewing on iBox 7-7
Serial Hall Call (and I/O) 5-23 View and set parameters on the iBox 7-4
System 12 SCR Drive 6-116–6-136 View factory data on iBox 7-7
Tools 6-2 View menu 8-25
using the Safety String Bypass Jumper 6-3 contents 8-26
TS, Tach Signal input 6-107, 9-7 View/register calls using iBox 7-7
TSPD, Speed Pick Delay parameter Voltage decay time, adjusting for final stop 4-33, 4-35
adjusting for rollback (System 12) 2-42
TX-, Cartop Link input 6-108, 9-8 W
TX+, Cartop Link input 6-108, 9-8 Watchdog 5-14
Watchdog Ordered Control Stop Before Reset message 6-74
U Watchdog Ordered Emergency Stop Before Reset message 6-
UETS, Up Emergency Terminal Limit switch input 6-109, 9-9 74
ULM, Up Leveling Marker Sensor input 6-108, 9-8 Weakening delay parameter 4-27
Unintended Motion Fault message 6-72 wiring
UNINTENDED MOTION FLT message 6-62 the Brake 2-11
UNT1, Up Slowdown Limit switch #1 input 6-109, 9-9 the Hoist Motor 2-10
UNT2, Up Slowdown Limit switch #2 input 6-109, 9-9 the serial hall call fixtures 5-19
UNT3, Up Slowdown Limit switch #3 input 6-109, 9-9 Velocity Encoder 2-13
UNT4, Up Slowdown Limit switch #4 input 6-109, 9-9 Working offline, editing a configuration file 8-23
UNT5, Up Slowdown Limit switch #5 input 6-109, 9-9 Write Enable switch, iBox control 7-11
UNTD, Up Normal Limit Direction switch input 6-109, 9-9 Write permission 5-13
UP DIR LIMIT OPEN message 6-72 Write Privilege 8-31
Up Direction Limit Open message 6-72 Write privilege
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault message 6-73 acquiring 2-17, 2-19
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown message 6-73 OK 2-17, 2-19
UP ETS POSITION FAULT message 6-73 Write privilege timeout 5-13
Index-15
Z
Z-, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
Z+, Velocity Encoder input 6-107, 9-7
Zero Crossing, System 12 drive 2-27
Index-16 Manual # 42-02-7223

Icontrol DC B8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Icontrol DC B8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Icontrol DC B8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MOTION CONTROL

voice 916 463 9200

Manual # 42-02-7223, Rev B8, June 2020

Warning and Disclaimer

Safety and Other Symbol Meanings

Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinets

voice 916 463 9200

Section 1. User Guide,

Section 1. Important Precautions and Useful Information

Section 1. iControl Description

Section 2. Construction Mode

Section 3. Inspection Mode

Section 4. Final Adjustment

Section 5. System Options

Section 8. Using iView

viii Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

System 12 SCR drive

Standard cabinet dimensions:

Measurements are approximate

1-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

• Load weighers (optional)

iLink cartop box

iLand Compact landing system

System Interconnect Diagrams

SYSTEM: Hall calls, Parking, Special operating modes

Cartop Cartop Cartop

1-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Figure 1.4 Car Control Interconnection

Field Outputs Outputs

Fixture Data Serial Fixtures

Emergency Brake Rope Gripper

Serial Hall Calls

Figure 1.5 Cartop Interconnection

iLAND LANDING SYSTEM

iLINK CARTOP BOX Position Encoder

Field Outputs Outputs Sensor Board Landing Zone

Figure 1.6 Central Dispatcher (iCentral) Interconnection

Hall Calls To Cars

Figure 1.7 Local/Dispatcher (Comm-connect) Interconnections

iView iMonitor or iReport

Hall Calls To Cars

1-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

1-8 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Before You Begin

Overview of Construction Mode

2-2 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Connections not required for Construction Mode operation include:

Machine Room Preparation

2-4 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Ethernet and Internet Considerations

Table 2.1 System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses

Group IP, Primary System/Serial

System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

*192.168.191.101 is typically used for the iView PC.

Controller Cabinet Installation

1. Mount cabinets securely to the machine room floor.

2-6 Manual # 42-02-7223 B8

Check for Shorts to Ground

Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller